KIA Optima Plug-In Hybrid 2017 Owner's Manual – PDF Download
HA8O-EE65A (L2) Owner's Manual Supplement This supplement has information on changed items for the Owner's Manual. Please see this page instead of page 1-19 in owner's manual. DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE Changing plug-in hybrid mode Plug-in hybrid mode indicator · CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery is used to drive the vehicle. OJFHP046420L OJFHP056292L Pressing the HEV button changes the plug-in hybrid system modes, as below. · Shortly pressed: EV mode HEV mode · CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery and gasoline engine is used to OJFHP046421L drive the vehicle. Warning and indicator lights Ready Indicator This indicator illuminates : When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible, or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving. When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the system. In this case, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. OJFHP046425L/OJFHP046426L A corresponding message is displayed to indicate the selected mode. 1 Please see this page instead of page 1-22~1-23 in owner's manual. (continued) · When the fuel filler lid is frozen and does not open after 20 seconds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler lid and then attempt to open it. Fuel door open (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is opened. Also means "Ready to refuel". Open fuel door after disconnecting charging cable (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when you press fuel filler lid open button while charging. This message explains that refueling is allowed to finish charging. Fuel lid is not opened when charging cable is connected to vehicle. EV / HEV modes (Plug-in hybrid) OJFHP046425L Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is open or an abnormality has occurred. Refuel after stopping (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid open button is pressed when a vehicle equipped with a plugin hybrid seal-type fuel tank is in motion (vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h(mi/h)). Charging Door Open (Plug-in hybrid) This message indicates that the charging door is open while in driving-ready state to encourage you to inspect and close the door. (Driving with the charging door open may result in moisture inflow or damage. This message is used to prevent such occurrences.) OJFHP046426L A corresponding message is displayed when a mode is selected by pressing the HEV button. 2 Please see this page instead of page 5-52 in owner's manual. Hybrid Battery SOC (State of Charge) Gauge Type A However, if the Service Indicator ( ) and Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the SOC gauge is near the "L (Low) or 0" level, we recommend the vehicle be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. · CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery and gasoline engine is used to OJFHP046421L drive the vehicle. Type B OJFH045375 NOTICE Never try to start the vehicle if the fuel tank is empty. In this condition, the engine cannot charge the high voltage battery of the hybrid system. If you try to start the vehicle when the fuel is empty, the high voltage battery will become discharged and be damaged. OJFHP046425L/OJFHP046426L A corresponding message is displayed to indicate the selected mode. OJFH045375L This gauge indicates the remaining hybrid battery power. If the SOC is near the "L (Low) or 0" level, the vehicle automatically operates the engine to charge the battery. Plug-in hybrid mode indicator · CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode : The high-voltage (hybrid) battery is used to drive the vehicle. OJFHP046420L 3 Kia, THE COMPANY Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle. As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality, value for money prices, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations. At all of our Kia dealerships you will be treated with warmth, hospi- tality and professionalism by people who care based on our Familylike Care promise. All information contained in this Owner's Manual was accurate at the time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can be carried out. This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip- tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not appli- cable to your specific Kia vehicle. Enjoy your vehicle and Kia's Family-like Care experience! Foreword Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle. This manual will familiarize you with operational, maintenance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is supplemented by a Warranty and Maintenance book that provides important information on all warranties re- garding your vehicle. Kia urges you to read these publications carefully and follow the recommendations to help assure an enjoyable and safe operation of your new vehicle. Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment described in this manual, along with the various illustrations, may not be applicable to your particular vehicle. The information and specifications provided in this manual were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obli- gation. If you have questions, always check with your authorized Kia dealer. Kia assures you of our continuing interest in your motoring pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle. © 2016 Kia MOTORS Corp. All rights reserved. Reproduction by any means, elec- tronic or mechanical, including photocopying, record- ing, or by any information storage and retrieval sys- tem or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Kia MOTORS Cor- poration. Printed in Korea ii Table of contents Hybrid system overview Introduction Your vehicle at a glance Safety features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Audio system Driving your vehicle What to do in an emergency Maintenance Specifications & Consumer information Appendix Alphabetical index 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 I iii iv Hybrid system overview HEV (Hybrid Electric Vehicle) system.................................... 1-02 PHEV (Plug-in Electric Vehicle) system.................................1-03 Charging the plug-in hybrid vehicle....................................... 1-04 Charging information............................................................1-04 Charging time........................................................................ 1-04 Charging types.......................................................................1-05 Charging status..................................................................... 1-06 Scheduled charging .............................................................. 1-06 Charging precautions............................................................1-06 Normal charge....................................................................... 1-08 Charging status..................................................................... 1-10 Trickle charger....................................................................... 1-12 Driving the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle..............................1-19 Changing plug-in hybrid mode............................................1-19 Warning and indicator lights............................................... 1-19 Energy flow hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle............................1-24 Vehicle stop............................................................................ 1-24 EV propulsion......................................................................... 1-24 Power assist.......................................................................... 1-24 Engine only propulsion......................................................... 1-25 Engine generation................................................................. 1-25 Regeneration......................................................................... 1-25 Engine brake.......................................................................... 1-26 Power reserve....................................................................... 1-26 Engine generation/regeneration........................................ 1-26 Engine generation/motor drive.......................................... 1-27 Engine brake/regeneration..................................................1-27 Starting the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle (Smart key)..... 1-28 Starting the hybrid system.................................................1-28 Economical and safe operation of hybrid system...........1-28 1 Components of the hybrid/plug-in hybrid vehicle...............1-30 Safety plug............................................................................. 1-33 Some special features of the hybrid vehicle.................... 1-33 Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS)................................ 1-34 High voltage battery air intake...........................................1-34 If an accident occurs.............................................................1-34 When the hybrid vehicle shuts off..................................... 1-36 Hybrid system overview HEV (HYBRID ELECTRIC VEHICLE) SYSTEM The Kia Hybrid Electric Vehicle (HEV) uses both the gasoline engine and the electric motor for power. The electric motor is run by a 270V high-voltage HEV battery. Depending on the driving conditions, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the electric motor or even both at the same time. Fuel efficiency increases when the engine is at idle, or when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor with the HEV battery. The HEV battery charge must be maintained for the times when the engine acts as a generator, such as when stopped at idle. Charging also occurs when decelerating or by regenerative braking. 1-02 Hybrid system overview PHEV (PLUG-IN ELECTRIC VEHICLE) SYSTEM 1 The Kia Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicle (PHEV) shares the characteristics of both a conventional hybrid electric vehicle and an all-electric vehicle. When used as a conventional hybrid electric vehicle, the HEV computer selectively operates between the engine and the elec- tric motor or even both at the same time. When it is operating in the electric vehicle mode, the vehicle is driven only using the electric motor over a certain distance until the hybrid battery becomes low. The driving distance in EV mode depends on customer driving style and road conditions. Ag- gressive driving maneuvers may at times temporarily enable the engine to operate for maximum power. The hybrid battery can be fully charged by connecting a plug to an external electric power source. $% $IBSHF%FQMFUJOH .PEF &MFDUSJD7FIJDMF.PEF &MFDUSJDNPUPS $4 $IBSHF4VTUBJOJOH .PEF .PUPS 4UBSUVQ-PXTQFFE &OHJOF .PUPS "DDFMFSBUJPO &OHJOF )JHITQFFE $IBSHJOH %FDFMFSBUJPO $IBSHJOH #BUUFSZDIBSHJOH &YUFSOBMDIBSHJOH 0+')1- 1-03 Hybrid system overview CHARGING THE PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE Charging information · Normal Charger: The plug-in hybrid vehicle is charged by plugging into a normal charger installed in your home or a public charging station. (For further details, refer to Normal charge on page 1-08.) · Trickle Charger: The plug-in hybrid vehicle can be charged by using household electricity. The electrical outlet in your home must comply with regulations and can safely accommodate the Volt- age / Current (Amps) / Power (Watts) ratings specified on the trickle charge. Charging time · Normal Charger: Takes about 2-3 hours at room tem- perature (Can be charged to 100%). Depending on the condition and dura- bility of the high-voltage battery, charger specifications, and ambient temperature, the time required for charging the high-voltage battery may vary. 1-04 Hybrid system overview Charging types 1 Category Charging Inlet (Ve- Charging Connec- hicle) tor Charging Outlet Charging Method Charging Time Normal Charger 0+')12- 0+')12- Normal charger in- stalled in homes or public charging sta- tions 0+')12- Approximately 2-3 hours (to fully charge the plug-in hybrid vehicle, 100%) Trickle Charger Household current 0+')12- 0+')12- 0+')12- An actual charger image and a charging method may vary in accordance with the charger manufacturers. 1-05 Hybrid system overview Charging status Scheduled charging (if equipped) · You can set reserved charging using the AVN. Refer to the AVN for detailed infor- mation about setting reserved charg- ing. · Scheduled charging can only be done when using a normal charger or the portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Ca- ble Control Box). · When scheduled charging is set, charging is not initiated immediately when the normal charger or portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected. When immediate charging is required, use the AVN to deactivate the scheduled charge set- ting. Charging precautions ¥/PSNBM$IBSHFS 0+')12- You can monitor the charging status outside of the vehicle when charging the high-voltage battery. Charging Status Charging in pro- gress Fully charged Scheduled charg- ing Malfunction Indicator Illuminates (green) Off Blinks (green) and then turns off Blinks (red) 0+')12- · When scheduled charging is set and the normal charger or the portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) is connected for charging, the indicator lamp blinks (for 3 minutes) to indicate that scheduled charging is set. 0+')12-# WARNING n Fires caused by dust or water (Continued) 1-06 Hybrid system overview (Continued) Do not connect the charging cable connector plug to the vehicle if there is water or dust on the charging in- let. Connecting while there is water or dust on the charging cable con- nector and plug may cause a fire or electric shock. There may be a risk of fire and injury when using old worn out public electrical outlets. WARNING n Interference with electronic medical devices When using medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pace- maker, make sure to ask the medical team and manufacturer whether charging your electric vehicle will im- pact the operation of the medical devices. In some instances, electro- magnetic waves that are generated from the charger can seriously im- pact medical electric devices such as an implantable cardiac pacemaker. WARNING (Continued) 1 n Touching the charging connec- tor · Immediately stop charging when you find abnormal symptoms (smell, smoke). Do not touch the charging connector, charging plug, and the charging inlet when connecting the cable to the charger and the charging inlet on the vehicle. Doing so may result in elec- trocution. · Comply with the following in order to prevent electrical shock when charg- ing: - Use a waterproof charger - Make sure to not touch the charg- ing connector and charging plug when your hand is wet - Do not charge when there is light- ning - Do not charge when the charging connector and plug is wet WARNING n Charging cable · Replace the charging cable if the cable coating is damaged to pre- vent electrical shock. · When connecting or removing the charging cable, make sure to hold the charging connector handle and charging plug. If you pull the cable itself (without using the handle), the internal wires may disconnect or get dam- aged. This may lead to electric shock or fire. WARNING n Cooling fan Do not touch the cooling fan while vehicle is charging. When the vehicle is switched OFF while charging, the cooling fan inside the motor com- partment may automatically oper- ate. (Continued) 1-07 Hybrid system overview · Always keep the charging connector and charging plug in clean and dry condition. Be sure to keep the charg- ing cable in a condition where there is no water or moisture. · Make sure to use the designated charger for charging the vehicle. Us- ing any other charger may cause fail- ure. · Before charging the battery, turn the vehicle OFF. · Be careful not to drop the charging connector. The charging connector can be damaged. Normal charge ¥/PSNBM$IBSHFS How to connect normal charger 0+')12-# 0+')12- You can charge your vehicle by plugging into a public charger at a charging sta- tion. 1. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake. 2. Turn OFF all switches, move the shift lever to P (Park), and turn OFF the vehicle. 3. After unlocking doors, open the charging door by pressing it. NOTICE The charging door does not open when the theft alarm system is armed. 1-08 Hybrid system overview 0+')12- 4. Remove any dust on the charging connector and charging inlet. 5. Hold the charging connector handle. Then, insert it into the charging in- let, until you hear a click sound. If it is not fully connected, a bad con- nection between the charging con- nector and the charging terminals may cause a fire. 0+')1- 6. Check if the charging cable connec- tion indicator of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging does not occur when the indicator is OFF. When the charging connector is not connected proper- ly, reconnect the charging cable to charge. NOTICE 1 · The charging is in progress only with the shift lever is in P (Park). Charging the battery with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position is possible. Howev- er, it may discharge the 12-V battery. Thus, if possible, charge the battery with the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF po- sition. · Moving the shift lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse)/ N(Neutral)/D (Drive) stops the charging process. To restart the charging process, move the shift lever to P (Park), press the En- gine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and disconnect the charging cable. Then, connect the charging cable. 1-09 Hybrid system overview Unlock charging door in emergency Charging status Checking charging status 0+')1- 7. After charging has started, the es- timated charging time is displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. It is also displayed, when the driver's door is opened with charging in progress. When sched- uled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as --" . 0+')1- If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge, open the hood and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open. 0+')12- You can monitor the charging status outside of the vehicle when charging the high-voltage battery. Charging Status Charging in pro- gress Fully charged Scheduled charg- ing Malfunction Indicator Illuminates (green) Off Blinks (green) and then turns off Blinks (red) 1-10 Hybrid system overview How to disconnect normal charger 1. The vehicle doors must be unlocked in order to be able to disconnect the charging connector. A lock sys- 2. Press the door unlock button on the smart key then pull out charg- ing connector. NOTICE · Do not modify or disassemble 1 tem prevents charger cable discon- nection when the vehicle's doors NOTICE the charging cable components. It may cause a fire or an electric are locked. NOTICE In order to disconnect the charging When disconnecting the charging connector, do not try to disconnect it by force while not pressing the re- lease button. This may damage the charging connector and vehicle shock with personal injury. · Keep the charging connector and the charging plug clean and dry. The charging cable should be al- so kept dry. connector, unlock the doors to un- charging inlet. · Use an air gun to blow any for- latch the charging connector lock eign substances from the charg- system. If not, the charging connec- ing connector and the charging tor and the vehicle's charging inlet plug. may be damaged. 0+')12- 0+')12- 3. Make sure to securely close the charging door. 1-11 Hybrid system overview Trickle charger How to connect portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) 0+')12- Trickle charger can be used if Normal Charger is unavailable. 1. Charging connector 2. Charging cable 3. Control box 4. Cord and plug (cord set) 0+')12- 1. Turn OFF all switches, move the shift lever to P (Park), and turn OFF the vehicle. 2. Connect the plug to a household electric outlet. 0+')12- 3. Check if all LED lamps on the con- trol box blinks for 0.5 seconds. Then, check if the power lamp (green) turns ON. 1-12 0+')12- Hybrid system overview 4. Depress the brake pedal and apply the parking brake. 5. After unlocking doors, open the charging door by pressing it. NOTICE The charging door does not open when the theft alarm system is armed. 0+')12- 6. Remove any dust on the charging connector and charging inlet. 7. Hold the charging connector handle. Then, insert it into the charging in- let, until you hear a click sound. If it is not fully connected, improper connection between the charging connector and the charging termi- nals are a potential fire hazard. 0+')12- 8. Charging starts automatically. Check if the power lamp and charg- ing lamp (orange) are ON. 1 0+')1- 9. Check if the charging cable connec- tion indicator of the high voltage battery in the instrument cluster is turned ON. Charging does not occur when the indicator is OFF. When the charging connector is not connected proper- ly, reconnect the charging cable to charge. 1-13 Hybrid system overview NOTICE · The charging is in progress only with the shift lever is in P (Park). Charging the battery with the Engine Start/Stop button in the ACC position is possible. Howev- er, it may discharge the 12-V battery. Thus, if possible, charge the battery with the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF po- sition. · Moving the shift lever from P (Park) to R (Reverse)/ N(Neutral)/D (Drive) stops the charging process. To restart the charging process, move the shift lever to P (Park), press the En- gine Start/Stop button to the OFF position, and disconnect the charging cable. Then, connect the charging cable and restart the vehicle again. Unlock charging door in emergency 0+')1- 10. After charging has started, the es- timated charging time is displayed on the instrument cluster for about 1 minute. It is also displayed, when the driver's door is opened with charging in progress. When sched- uled charging is set, the estimated charging time is displayed as "--". 0+')1- If the charging door does not open due to battery discharge, open the hood and slightly pull the emergency cable as shown above. The charging door will then open. 1-14 Checking charging status 0+')12- You can monitor the charging status outside of the vehicle when charging the high-voltage battery. Charging Status Charging in pro- gress Fully charged Scheduled charg- ing Malfunction Indicator Illuminates (green) Off Blinks (green) and then turns off Blinks (red) 1 1-15 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview Charging status indicator lamp for portable charging cable Category LED Status Lamp ON Charger Status Control Box ON/OFF Power Status Charge Lamp OFF - Blinking Fault Status / Diagnosis / Countermeasure Initial Preparation Mode Charging Preparation Mode 0+')120+')12- When applying power to the initial ICCB wall When ICCB charging connector is not connected - - to the vehicle, or connected but charging status is in Standby mode Charging Mode Failure ICCCB failure or electrical leak- age detected 0+')120+')12- - Charging - Stop charging immediately and we recommend - you contact an authorized Kia dealer for ICCB check. 1-16 Hybrid system overview How to disconnect portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) 1. Before disconnecting the charging connector, make sure the doors are unlocked. When the door is locked, the charging connector lock system will not allow disconnection. NOTICE In order to disconnect the charging connector, unlock the doors to un- latch the charging connector lock system. If not, the charging connec- tor and the vehicle's charging inlet may be damaged. 1 4. Disconnect the plug from the household electric outlet. Do not pull the cable when disconnecting the plug. 5. Close the protective cover for the charging connector so that foreign material cannot get into the termi- nal. 6. Put the charging cable inside the cable compartment to protect it. 0+')12- 2. Hold the charging connector handle and pull it out. 3. Make sure to securely close the charging door. 0+')12- Precautions for portable charging cable (ICCB: In-Cable Control Box) · Use the portable charging cable that is certified by Kia. · Do not try to repair, disassemble, or adjust the portable charging cable. · Do not use an extension cord or adapter. · Stop using immediately if failure warning light occurs. · Do not touch the plug and charging connector with wet hands. · Do not touch the terminal part of the normal charging connector and the normal charging inlet on the vehicle. · Do not connect the charging connec- tor to voltage that does not comply with regulations. 1-17 Hybrid system overview · Do not use the portable charging ca- ble if it is worn out, exposed, or there exists any type of damage on the portable charging cable. · If the ICCB case and normal charging connector is damaged, cracked, or the wires are exposed in any way, do not use the portable charging cable. · Do not let children operate or touch the portable charging cable. · Keep the control box free of water. · Keep the normal charging connector or plug terminal free of foreign sub- stances. · Do not step on the cable or cord. Do not pull the cable or cord and do not twist or bend it. · Do not charge when there is light- ning. · Do not drop the control box or place a heavy object on the control box. · Do not place an object that can gen- erate high temperatures near the charger when charging. · Charging with the worn out or dam- aged household electric outlet can re- sult in a risk of electric shock. If you are in doubt to the household electric outlet condition, have it checked by a licensed electrician. · Stop using the portable charging ca- ble immediately if the household electric outlet or any components is overheated or you notice burnt odors. 1-18 Hybrid system overview DRIVING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE Changing plug-in hybrid mode - Press and hold: It remains in the HEV-charging mode. 1 Plug-in hybrid mode indicator · CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode The high-voltage (hy- brid) battery is used to drive the vehicle. 0+')1- Pressing the HEV button changes the plug-in hybrid system modes, as below. · Shortly pressed: EV mode HEV mode · Press and hold: It changes to the HEV-charging mode. When the HEV button is pressed in the HEV-charging mode, the mode changes as below. - Shortly pressed : It changes to the CS mode. 0+')1- · CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode The high-voltage (hy- brid) battery and gas- oline engine is used to drive the vehicle. 0+')1- · HEV-charging mode Gasoline engine is used to drive the ve- hicle and charge the high-voltage (hybrid) 0+')1- battery. 0+')1-0+')1-0+')1- A corresponding message is displayed to indicate the selected mode. Warning and indicator lights Ready indicator This indicator illuminates: When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON: Normal driving is possi- ble. - OFF: Normal driving is not possible, or a problem has occurred. - Blinking: Emergency driving. When the ready indicator goes OFF or blinks, there is a problem with the sys- tem. In this case, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. 1-19 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system warning light This warning light illumi- nates: When there is a malfunction with the hybrid system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. When the warning light illuminates while driving, or does not go OFF after starting the vehicle, have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. EV mode indicator This indicator illuminates EV when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor. Charging cable connection indicator (Plug-in hybrid) This indicator illuminates in red when the charging cable is connec- ted. Example of a deceleration event is going down an extended hill, slow- ing down approaching a toll booth, and approaching reduced speed zones. · User settings Press the Engine Start/Stop button and put the shift lever in P (Park). In the User Settings Mode, select Driv- ing Assist, Coasting Guide, and then On to turn on the system. Cancel the selection of coasting guide to turn off the system. For the explanation of the system, press and hold the [OK] button. · Operation conditions To activate the system, take the fol- lowing procedures. Enter your desti- nation information on the navigation and select the driving route. Select the ECO mode in the Integrated Driv- ing Control System. Then, satisfy the following. - The driving speed should be be- tween 60 km/h (37 mph) and 160 km/h (99 mph). The operating speed may vary due to difference between instrument cluster and navigation effected by tire inflation level. NOTICE Coasting guide is only a supplemen- tal system to assist with fuel-effi- cient driving. Thus, the operating conditions may be different in ac- cordance with traffic/road condi- tions (i.e. driving in a traffic jam, driving on a slope, driving on a curve). Thus, take the actual driving conditions into consideration, such as distances from the vehicles ahead/ behind, while referring to the coasting guide system as guidance. Unplug vehicle to start (Plug-in hybrid) The message is displayed when you start the engine without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charging cable, and then start the vehicle. Shift to P to charge (Plug-in hybrid) The message is displayed when the charging connector is plugged with the shift lever in R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift lever to P (Park) and re-start the charging proc- ess. 1-20 Hybrid system overview Remaining charge time (Plug-in hybrid) Low battery temp. Maintaining current (Plug-in hybrid) Switching to hybrid mode to allow heating (Plug-in hybrid) 1 The message is displayed to notify the This message is displayed when unable · When the coolant temperature is remaining time to fully charge the bat- to convert to EV mode even when lower than -14 °C (57 °F), and you tery. pressing the HEV button during HEV turn the climate control On for heat- EV/HEV/CHG modes (Plug-in hybrid) A corresponding message is displayed when a mode is selected by pressing mode driving due to low battery tem- perature. Charging complete. Switching to hybrid (Plug-in hybrid) ing, the above message will be dis- played in the cluster. Then, the vehi- cle will automatically switch to HEV mode. the HEV button. This message is displayed automatical- · When the coolant temperature is Battery charged. Maintaining current (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to charging mode even when pressing and holding the HEV button during EV/HEV mode driving because the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is al- ready fully charged. Low battery. Maintaining hybrid (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to EV mode even when pressing the HEV button during HEV mode driving due to insufficient highvoltage (hybrid) battery level. ly converting to HEV mode due to com- pleted battery charging during charging mode driving. Charger error! (Plug-in hybrid) This messages is displayed when the charging failed by external charger er- ror. This message is for Normal charger. The purpose of this message is to let you know the error has occurred in charger itself not in vehicle. Low/high system temp. Maintaining hybrid (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to EV mode even when pressing the HEV button during HEV higher than -14 °C (57 °F), or you turn the climate control Off, the vehi- cle will automatically return to EV mode. Wait until fuel door opens (Plug-in hybrid) The message is displayed when you at- tempt to open the fuel filler lid with the fuel tank pressurized. Wait until the fuel tank is depressurized. NOTICE · It may take up to 20 seconds to open fuel filler lid. mode driving due to low/high system temperature. (Continued) 1-21 Hybrid system overview (Continued) · When the fuel filler lid is frozen and does not open after 20 sec- onds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler lid and then attempt to open it. Fuel door open (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is opened. Also means "Ready to refuel". Check fuel door (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is open or an abnormality has occurred. Refuel after stopping (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid open button is pressed when a vehicle equipped with a plug-in hybrid seal-type fuel tank is in motion (vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (mi/h)). Open fuel door after disconnecting charging cable (Plug-in hybrid) This message is displayed when you press fuel filler lid open button while charging. This message explains that refueling is not allowed to finish charging. Fuel lid is not opened when charging cable is connected to vehicle. Charging door open (Plug-in hybrid) This message indicates that the charg- ing door is open while in driving- ready state to encourage you to inspect and close the door. (Driving with the charging door open may result in moisture inflow or dam- age. This message is used to prevent such occurrences.) EV/HEV/CHG modes (Plug-in hybrid) 0+')10+')1- 1-22 0+')1- A corresponding message is displayed when a mode is selected by pressing the HEV button. 1 1-23 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview ENERGY FLOW HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE Kia hybrid system notifies the drivers of energy flow in various operating modes. Eleven Modes show drivers the current operating condition. Vehicle stop EV propulsion Power assist Electric power is used to move the ve- hicle. (Battery Wheel) Electric and Engine power are used to move the vehicle. (Battery & Engine Wheel) The mode means the vehicle at stop. (There is no energy flow.) 1-24 Engine only propulsion Engine generation Regeneration 1 Hybrid system overview Engine power is used to move the vehi- cle. (Engine Wheel) Vehicle is stopped with the Engine charging the hybrid battery. (Engine Battery) Hybrid battery is being charged by re- generative braking. (Wheel Battery) 1-25 Hybrid system overview Engine brake Power reserve Engine generation/regeneration The vehicle is being slowed by engine compression. (Wheel Engine) Engine is both driving the vehicle and charging the hybrid battery. (Engine Wheel & Battery) The engine and regenerative braking system charge the hybrid battery driv- ing deceleration. (Engine & Wheel Battery) 1-26 Engine generation/motor drive Engine brake/regeneration The vehicle is being slowed by engine compression and regenerative braking. The hybrid battery is being charged by regenerative braking. (Engine Battery Wheel) The engine compression can be used to slow the vehicle. The regenerative braking system can be used to charge the hybrid system. (Wheel Engine & Battery) 1 1-27 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview STARTING THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE (SMART KEY) Starting the hybrid system 1. Carry the smart key into the vehi- cle. 2. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied. 3. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position. In N (neutral) position, you cannot start the vehicle. 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Press the engine start/stop button. 6. The engine should be started with- out pressing the accelerator. In ex- tremely cold weather or after the vehicle has not been operated for several days, let the engine warm up without depressing the acceler- ator. · Even if the smart key is in the ve- hicle, if it is far away from you, the engine may not start. · When the engine start/stop but- ton is in the ACC or ON position, if any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. If the smart key is not in the vehicle, the warning, "Key is not in vehi- cle" will come on, and if all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. The indicator will turn off while the vehicle is moving. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when using the ACC position or if the vehicle en- gine is on. If the starting procedure is followed, the "READY" symbol on the instrument cluster will turn on. For more details, please refer to Ready indicator on page 5-86. Economical and safe operation of hybrid system · Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a mod- erate rate and maintain a steady cruising speed. Don't make "jack-rab- bit" starts. Don't race between stop- lights. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possi- ble. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid unnecessary braking. This also re- duces brake wear. · The regenerative brake generates energy when the vehicle decelerates. · When the hybrid battery power is low, the hybrid system automatically recharges the hybrid battery. · When the engine runs in "N" position, the hybrid system cannot generate electricity. The hybrid battery cannot recharge in "N" position. Please refer to Chapter 7, Driving your vehicle. 1-28 NOTICE When the hybrid system is in READY mode, the engine will automatically start and stop as needed. The "READY" symbol will illuminate in the cluster when the system is opera- tional. 1 1-29 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview COMPONENTS OF THE HYBRID/PLUG-IN HYBRID VEHICLE 0+')12- 1. Engine: 2.0L 2. Motor: 35 kW 3. Transmission: 6AT 4. Hybrid starter generator (HSG) 5. HPCU (Hybrid Power Control Unit) 6. High-voltage battery system 7. Regenerative brake system 8. Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS) The actual shape may differ from the illustration. The Hybrid battery uses high voltage to operate the electric motor and other components. High voltage is dangerous if touched. Your vehicle is equipped with orange colored insulation and covers over the high voltage components to protect people from electric shock. High voltage warning labels are attached to some system components as additional warnings. Your vehicle is recommended to be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. 1-30 )1$6 )&7#BUUFSZ WARNING Never touch orange or high voltage labeled components including wires, cables, and connections. If the insu- lators or covers are damaged or re- moved, severe injury or death from electrocution may occur. WARNING When replacing the fuses in the en- gine compartment, never touch the HPCU. The HPCU carries high volt- age. Touching the HPCU could result in electrocution, serious injury, or death. CAUTION · Do not pile up any items in an area behind the high voltage battery. In a crash, the battery may become unstable, or its performance may degrade. (Continued) (Continued) 1 · Do not apply strong force nor pile up any items above the trunk. Such an attempt may distort the high voltage battery case, causing a safety problem or degrading the performance. · Be careful when loading inflamma- ble liquid in trunk. It could cause operational and safety degrada- tion if the liquid leaks and flows in high voltage battery. .PUPS 1-31 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview WARNING As with all batteries, avoid fluid con- tact with the Hybrid battery. If the battery is damaged and if electro- lyte comes in contact with your body, clothes or eyes, immediately flush with a large quantity of fresh water. WARNING Do not use an after-market battery charger to charge the Hybrid bat- tery. Doing so may result in death or serious injury. WARNING n High Waters · Avoid high waters as this may re- sult in your vehicle becoming satu- rated with water and could com- promise the high voltage compo- nents. (Continued) 1-32 (Continued) · Do not touch any of the high volt- age components within your vehi- cle if your vehicle has been sub- merged in water equal to half of the vehicle height. Touching high voltage components once sub- merged in water could result in se- vere burns or electric shock that could result in death or serious in- jury. WARNING n Carrying Liquids in Trunk Do not load large amounts of water in open containers into the vehicle. If the water spills onto the HEV bat- tery, it may cause a short and dam- age the battery. CAUTION n Cleaning Engine When you clean the engine compart- ment, do not wash using water. Wa- ter may cause electric arcing to oc- (Continued) (Continued) cur and damage electronic parts and components. WARNING n Exposure to High Voltage · High voltage in the hybrid battery system is very dangerous and can cause severe burns and electric shock. This may result in serious injury or death. · For your safety, never touch, re- place, dismantle or remove any portion of the hybrid battery sys- tem including components, cables and connectors. WARNING n Use of Water or Liquids If water or liquids come into contact with the hybrid system components, and you are also in contact with the water, severe injury or death due to electrocution may occur. Hybrid system overview WARNING n Hot Components When the hybrid battery system op- erates, the HEV battery system can be hot. Heat burns may result from touching even insulated components of the HEV system. Safety plug DANGER 1 When the hybrid system is turned on, the engine may run. This does not indi- cate a malfunction. If the "READY" Never touch the safety plug. Safety symbol is on, the hybrid system is op- plug is attached to high voltage hy- brid battery system. Touching safe- ty plug will result in death or serious injury. Service personnel should fol- low procedure in service manual. erating. Even if the gasoline engine is off, you can operate the vehicle. The HEV system may emit electromag- netic waves which can affect the per- formance of electronic devices applian- ces, such as laptop computers, which Some special features of the hybrid vehicle are not part of the vehicle design. If you park the vehicle for a long time, the hybrid system will discharge. You Hybrid vehicles sound different than need to drive the vehicle several times gasoline engine vehicles. When the hy- per month to maintain a charge. brid system operates, you may hear a When you start the hybrid system in sound from the hybrid battery system the "P" transmission position, the behind the rear seat. If you apply the "READY" symbol is illuminated in the accelerator pedal rapidly, you may hear cluster. The driver can drive the vehicle a sound. When you apply the brake even if the engine is stopped. pedal, you may hear a sound from the regenerative brake system. When the hybrid system is turned off or on, you WARNING may hear a sound in the engine com- partment. If you depress the brake When you leave the vehicle, you pedal repeatedly when the hybrid sys- should turn off the hybrid system. If tem is turned on, you may hear a you depress the accelerator pedal by sound in the engine compartment. None of these sounds indicate a prob- lem. They are characteristics of hybrid vehi- mistake and the vehicle is not in the "P" position, the vehicle will acceler- ate. This may result in serious injury or death. cles. 1-33 Hybrid system overview Virtual Engine Sound System (VESS) The Virtual Engine Sound System gen- erates an engine sound for pedestrians to hear vehicle while at low speeds in EV mode. High voltage battery air intake Hybrid battery air intake The hybrid battery air intake is located on the bottom of the rear seats. The air intake cools down the hybrid bat- tery. When the hybrid battery air in- take is blocked, the hybrid battery may be overheated. Do not obstruct the air intake with any other objects. Plug-in Hybrid Vehicle 0+')1- The high-voltage battery air intake is located on the left side of the rear seats. The air intake cools down the high-voltage battery. When the high-voltage battery air in- take is blocked, the high-voltage bat- tery may be overheated and the vehicle performance may become limited and set a hybrid warning lamp. Do not ob- struct the air intake with any other ob- jects. WARNING n Air Intake · Blocking the air intake behind the rear seats may damage the HEV battery. · Do not allow any water into the air intake even when cleaning. If any water enters the air intake, the Hybrid battery may cause an elec- tric shock which can cause serious injury or death due to electrocu- tion. If an accident occurs · Avoid the engine compartment. · Avoid any orange or high voltage wires, cables, or components. · Assume that a high voltage compo- nent is exposed and move away from the vehicle as promptly as possible. · Refer to Towing on page 8-21 for towing information. 1-34 WARNING · After parking the vehicle, shift the transmission into "P" position. Turn off the hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop button. · For your safety, do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package modules. High Voltage components are orange in color. · Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the ve- hicle. Never touch the wires or ca- bles, because an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. · If a fire occurs, to extinguish a small high-voltage battery fire, the following techniques can be used: - Dry chemical - CO2 - Large amounts of water - Regular foam For a large high-voltage battery fire, use these types of extin- guishing methods: - Large amounts of water - Fog (Continued) (Continued) - Regular foam · If you need towing, refer to Tow- ing on page 8-21. WARNING If a vehicle accident occurs: 1. Stop the vehicle and shift the transmission into "P" position and then depress the parking brake. 2. Turn off the Hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop Button. 3. Evacuate to the safety place. (Continued) (Continued) 1 4. Call emergency services for help and let them know the vehicle is a Hybrid vehicle. Do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package mod- ules. High voltage components are orange in color. Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, because an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. WARNING If a fire occurs: 1. Stop the vehicle and shift the transmission in to "P" position, and then depress the parking brake. To ventilate smoke from a fire, open the windows if possi- ble. 2. Turn off the Hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop Button. (Continued) 1-35 Hybrid system overview Hybrid system overview (Continued) 3. Leave the vehicle and evacuate to the safety place. 4. Call emergency services for help and let them know the vehicle is a Hybrid vehicle. If you have an extinguisher, extin- guish a fire carefully. Do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package modules. High voltage components are orange in color. Exposed cables or wires may be visi- ble inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, be- cause an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. WARNING If a submersion in water occurs: If your vehicle was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you should not try to start the Hybrid system. Never touch the high voltage cables, connectors and package modules, because an elec- (Continued) (Continued) trical shock may occur causing injury or death. High Voltage cables are or- ange in color. We recommend that the car towed to an authorized Kia dealer. When the hybrid vehicle shuts off When the high voltage battery or 12volt battery discharges, or fuel tank is empty, the hybrid system may not op- erate. If the Hybrid system stops operating while the vehicle is moving, reduce the vehicle speed gradually. Pull your vehi- cle off the road in a safe area, and shift the transmission in to Park (P) position and: 1. Turn on the hazard warning flash- ers. 2. Set the start button at OFF, and try to start the Hybrid system by ap- plying the brake pedal and pushing the start button. 3. If the Hybrid system will not oper- ate, refer to Emergency starting on page 8-05. Before you try to jump start the vehi- cle, confirm the fuel level. If the fuel level is low add more fuel before at- tempting as emergency start. WARNING n Accident Vehicle Never touch electric wires or cable. If exposed electric wires or cables are visible inside or outside of your vehi- cle, an electric shock may occur. WARNING n Putting out fire Never use a small quantity of water to put out a fire in your vehicle. If a fire occurs, evacuate the car imme- diately and contact the fire depart- ment. 1-36 Introduction How to use this manual........................................................... 2-02 Fuel requirements.....................................................................2-03 Gasoline engine..................................................................... 2-03 Vehicle break-in process..........................................................2-06 2 HEV powertrain......................................................................... 2-07 Introduction HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL We want to help you get the greatest possible driving pleasure from your ve- hicle. Your Owner's Manual can assist you in many ways. We strongly recom- mend that you read the entire manual. In order to minimize the chance of death or injury, you must read the WARNING and CAUTION sections in the manual. Illustrations complement the words in this manual to best explain how to en- joy your vehicle. By reading your man- ual, you learn about features, impor- tant safety information, and driving tips under various road conditions. The general layout of the manual is provided in the Table of Contents. Use the index when looking for a specific area or subject; it has an alphabetical listing of all information in your manual. Sections: This manual has ten chapters plus an index. Each section begins with a brief list of contents so you can tell at a glance if that section has the infor- mation you want. You will find various WARNINGs, CAU- TIONs, and NOTICEs in this manual. These WARNINGs were prepared to en- hance your personal safety. You should carefully read and follow ALL proce- dures and recommendations provided in these WARNINGs, CAUTIONs and NO- TICEs. WARNING A WARNING indicates a situation in which harm, serious bodily injury or death could result if the warning is ignored. CAUTION A CAUTION indicates a situation in which damage to your vehicle could result if the caution is ignored. NOTICE A NOTICE indicates interesting or helpful information is being provi- ded. 2-02 Introduction FUEL REQUIREMENTS Gasoline engine Unleaded For Europe For the optimal vehicle performance, we recommend you to use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 91 or higher. You may use unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of RON 91~94 / AKI 87~90 but it may result in slight performance reduction of the vehicle. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.) Except Europe Your new Kia vehicle is designed to use only unleaded fuel having an Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Num- ber) 91 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 87 or higher. (Do not use methanol blended fuels.) Your new vehicle is designed to obtain maximum performance with UNLEA- DED FUEL, as well as minimize exhaust emissions and spark plug fouling. CAUTION NEVER USE LEADED FUEL. The use of leaded fuel is detrimental to the catalytic converter and will damage the engine control system's oxygen sensor and affect emission control. Never add any fuel system cleaning agents to the fuel tank other than what has been specified. (We recom- mend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer for details.) WARNING · Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when re- fueling. · Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent. Leaded (if equipped) For some countries, your vehicle is de- 2 signed to use leaded gasoline. When you are going to use leaded gasoline, we recommend that you ask an au- thorized Kia dealer whether leaded gasoline in your vehicle is available or not. Octane Rating of leaded gasoline is same with unleaded one. Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and ethanol (also known as grain alcohol), and gasoline or gasohol containing methanol (also known as wood alcohol) are being marketed along with or in- stead of leaded or unleaded gasoline. Do not use gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol, and do not use gas- oline or gasohol containing any metha- nol. Either of these fuels may cause drivability problems and damage to the fuel system, engine control system and emission control system. Discontinue using gasohol of any kind if drivability problems occur. Vehicle damage or drivability problems may not be covered by the manufac- turer's warranty if they result from the use of: 2-03 Introduction 1. Gasohol containing more than 10% ethanol. 2. Gasoline or gasohol containing methanol. 3. Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol. CAUTION Never use gasohol which contains methanol. Discontinue use of any gasohol product which impairs driva- bility. Other fuels Using fuels such as - Silicone (Si) contained fuel, - MMT (Manganese, Mn) contained fuel, - Ferrocene (Fe) contained fuel, and - Other metalic additives contained fuels, may cause vehicle and engine damage or cause plugging, misfiring, poor acceleration, engine stalling, catalyst melting, abnormal corrosion, life cycle reduction, etc. Also, the Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) may illuminate. NOTICE Damage to the fuel system or per- formance problem caused by the use of these fuels may not be cov- ered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Use of MTBE Kia recommends avoiding fuels contain- ing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) in your vehicle. Fuel containing MTBE over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight) may re- duce vehicle performance and produce vapor lock or hard starting. CAUTION Your New Vehicle Limited Warranty may not cover damage to the fuel system and any performance prob- lems that are caused by the use of fuels containing methanol or fuels containing MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl Ether) over 15.0% vol. (Oxygen Content 2.7% weight.) Do not use methanol Fuels containing methanol (wood alco- hol) should not be used in your vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce vehicle performance and damage components of the fuel system, engine control sys- tem and emission control system. Fuel Additives Kia recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Rea- search Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Anti- knock Index) 87 or higher (except Eu- rope). For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000 km (For Eu- rope)/10,000 km (Except Europe). Addi- tives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with information on how to use them. Do not mix other ad- ditives. Operation in foreign countries If you are going to drive your vehicle in another country, be sure to: 2-04 · Observe all regulations regarding reg- istration and insurance. · Determine that acceptable fuel is available. 2 2-05 Introduction Introduction VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS No special break-in period is needed. By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle. · Do not race the engine. · While driving, keep your engine speed (rpm, or revolutions per minute) within 3,000 rpm. · Do not maintain a single speed for long periods of time, either fast or slow. Varying engine speed is needed to properly break-in the engine. · Avoid hard stops, except in emergen- cies, to allow the brakes to seat properly. 2-06 HEV POWERTRAIN By following a few simple precautions for the first 1,000 km (600 miles) you may add to the performance, economy and life of your vehicle. · Do not race the engine. · Avoid hard stops, except in emergen- cies, to allow the brakes to seat properly. 2 2-07 Introduction Your vehicle at a glance Exterior overview...................................................................... 3-02 Interior overview....................................................................... 3-04 Instrument panel overview......................................................3-05 Engine compartment................................................................3-07 3 Your vehicle at a glance EXTERIOR OVERVIEW 'SPOUWJFX 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 3-02 1. Hood...................................... ...................................... p. 5-27 2. Headlamp (Features of your vehicle)......... ......... p. 5-115 Headlamp (Maintenance).................... .................... p. 9-74 3. Wheel and tire (Maintenance)................ ................ p. 9-43 Wheel and tire (Specifications).............. .............. p. 10-09 4. Outside rearview mirror..................... ..................... p. 5-45 5. Panorama sunroof.......................... .......................... p. 5-35 6. Front windshield wiper blades (Features of your ve- hicle)..................................... ..................................... p. 5-122 Front windshield wiper blades (Maintenance)...... p. 9-36 7. Windows...................................................................... p. 5-23 8. Parking assist system....................... ....................... p. 5-89 3FBSWJFX 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 3 1. Door locks.................................................................... p. 5-12 2. Fuel filler lid (Hybrid)........................ ........................ p. 5-29 Fuel filler lid (Plug-in hybrid)................. ................. p. 5-31 3. Rear combination lamp (Maintenance).................. p. 9-73 4. High mounted stop lamp (Maintenance)....... ....... p. 9-81 5. Trunk............................................................................ p. 5-16 6. Antenna................................... ................................... p. 6-02 7. Rearview camera.......................... .......................... p. 5-112 Surround view monitoring system........... ........... p. 5-113 8. Parking assist system (Rear)................. ................. p. 5-89 3-03 Your vehicle at a glance Your vehicle at a glance INTERIOR OVERVIEW 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 3-04 1. Inside door handle.......................... .......................... p. 5-13 2. Driver position memory button............... ............... p. 4-08 3. Power window switch....................... ....................... p. 5-23 4. Central door lock switch..................... ..................... p. 5-14 5. Power window lock button................... ................... p. 5-25 6. Outside rearview mirror control.............. .............. p. 5-45 7. Outside rearview mirror folding.............................. p. 5-45 8. Fuel filler lid open button.................... .................... p. 5-29 9. Trunk open button.......................... .......................... p. 5-16 10. ESC off button............................................................ p. 7-30 11. Headlight leveling device........................................ p. 5-120 12. Instrument panel illumination control.................... p. 5-49 13. BSD On/Off button.................................................... p. 7-91 14. Steering wheel............................. ............................. p. 5-40 15. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever....... ....... p. 5-41 16. Inner fuse panel............................ ............................ p. 9-53 17. Brake pedal................................ ................................ p. 7-17 18. Parking brake pedal......................... ......................... p. 7-18 19. Hood release lever.......................... .......................... p. 5-27 20. LKAS On/Off button.................................................. p. 7-84 21. Seat.............................................................................. p. 4-02 INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 1. Steering wheel audio controls................ ................ p. 6-03 2. Driver's front air bag........................ ........................ p. 4-51 3 3. Horn...................................... ...................................... p. 5-42 4. Instrument cluster.......................... .......................... p. 5-48 5. Wiper and washer control lever............................ p. 5-122 6. Engine start/stop button.................... .................... p. 7-06 7. Cruise control.............................. .............................. p. 7-47 Speed limit control.......................... .......................... p. 7-55 Advanced smart cruise control system........ ........ p. 7-59 8. Audio............................................................................ p. 6-02 9. Hazard warning flasher............................................ p. 8-02 10. Automatic climate control system........... ........... p. 5-137 11. Shift lever A/T............................................................ p. 7-11 12. Heated steering wheel button................................ p. 5-42 13. Drive mode button.......................... .......................... p. 7-75 Active Eco button........................... ........................... p. 7-75 14. Seat warmer............................................................ p. 5-155 Air ventilation seat.................................................. p. 5-156 15. Electronic parking brake (EPB) switch......... ......... p. 7-19 16. Auto Hold On/Off button.......................................... p. 7-24 3-05 Your vehicle at a glance Your vehicle at a glance 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 3-06 17. Surround view monitoring system On/Off button...... .................................................................................... p. 5-113 Smart parking assist system................. ................. p. 7-59 18. Parking assist system On/Off button.................... p. 5-89 19. Center console storage box................. ................. p. 5-150 20. Power outlet.............................. .............................. p. 5-157 21. USB charger.............................................................. p. 5-158 22. Smart phone wireless charger.............................. p. 5-158 23. Glove box................................. ................................. p. 5-150 24. Passenger's front air bag.................... .................... p. 4-51 ENGINE COMPARTMENT (BTPMJOF&OHJOF /V-(%* 5IFBDUVBMFOHJOFSPPNJOUIFWFIJDMFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 3 1. Engine coolant reservoir..................... ..................... p. 9-28 2. Engine oil filler cap.......................... .......................... p. 9-24 3. Engine oil dipstick...................................................... p. 9-24 4. Brake fluid reservoir.................................................. p. 9-30 5. Air cleaner................................. ................................. p. 9-33 6. Fuse box...................................................................... p. 9-52 7. Inverter coolant reservoir.................... .................... p. 9-27 8. Radiator cap............................... ............................... p. 9-28 9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir............. ............. p. 9-31 3-07 Your vehicle at a glance Safety features of your vehicle Seats............................................................................................4-02 Front seat adjustment - manual....................................... 4-05 Front seat adjustment - power ........................................ 4-06 Driver position memory system ....................................... 4-08 Headrest (for front seat).....................................................4-09 Seatback pocket.................................................................... 4-12 Rear seat adjustment.......................................................... 4-12 Seat belts....................................................................................4-18 Seat belt restraint system.................................................. 4-18 4 Pre-tensioner seat belt....................................................... 4-23 Seat belt precautions........................................................... 4-26 Care of seat belts..................................................................4-28 Child Restraint System (CRS)..................................................4-30 Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS)......................... 4-30 Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS)......................... 4-32 ISOFIX anchorage and top-tether anchorage (ISOFIX anchorage system) for children............................4-33 Air bag - Supplemental Restraint System .......................... 4-43 How does the air bag system operate..............................4-44 Air bag warning light............................................................ 4-47 SRS components and functions..........................................4-48 Driver's and passenger's front air bag.............................. 4-51 Side air bag.............................................................................4-56 Curtain air bag....................................................................... 4-58 SRS Care................................................................................. 4-65 Additional safety precautions.............................................4-65 Adding equipment to or modifying your air bag- equipped vehicle.................................................................... 4-66 Air bag warning label............................................................ 4-67 Safety features of your vehicle SEATS 5IFBDUVBMTIBQFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 4-02 Driver's seat 1. Forward and backward 2. Seatback angle 3. Seat cushion height 4. Lumbar support* 5. Driver position memory system* 6. Headrest Front passenger's seat 7. Forward and backward 8. Seatback angle 9. Seat cushion height 10. Lumbar support* 11. Headrest Rear seat 12. Armrest 13. Ski pass-through* 14. Headrest 15. Seatback folding lever* 0+')-# *: if equipped Safety features of your vehicle WARNING n Loose objects Loose objects in the driver's foot area could interfere with the opera- tion of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Do not place anything under the front seats. WARNING n Uprighting seat When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly and be sure there are no other occupants around the seat. If the seatback is returned without being held and controlled, the back of the seat could spring forward resulting in accidental injury to a person struck by the seatback. WARNING n Driver responsibility for pas- sengers (Continued) (Continued) Riding in a vehicle with the seatback reclined could lead to serious or fatal injury in an accident. If a seat is re- clined during an accident, the occu- pant's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt applying great force to the unprotected abdo- men. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result. The driver must advise the passenger to keep the seatback in an upright position whenever the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Do not use a sitting cushion that re- duces friction between the seat and passenger. The passenger's hips may slide under the lap portion of the seat belt during an accident or a sudden stop. Serious or fatal internal injuries could result because the seat belt cannot operate normally. WARNING n Driver's seat · Never attempt to adjust the seat while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, serious injury, or property damage. 4 · Do not allow anything to interfere with the normal position of the seatback. Storing items against a seatback or in any other way in- terfering with proper locking of a seatback could result in serious or fatal injury in a sudden stop or col- lision. · Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap por- tion of the seat belt snug and low across the hips. This is the best position to protect you in case of an accident. (Continued) 4-03 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · In order to avoid unnecessary and perhaps severe air bag injuries, al- ways sit as far back as possible from the steering wheel while maintaining comfortable control of the vehicle. We recommend that your chest be at least 25 cm (10 inches) away from the steer- ing wheel. WARNING n Rear seatbacks · The rear seatback must be secure- ly latched. If not, passengers and objects could be thrown forward resulting in serious injury or death in the event of a sudden stop or collision. (Continued) (Continued) · Luggage and other cargo should be laid flat in the cargo area. If ob- jects are large, heavy, or must be piled, they must be secured. Under no circumstances should cargo be piled higher than the seatbacks. Failure to follow these warnings could result in serious in- jury or death in the event of a sud- den stop, collision or rollover. · No passenger should ride in the cargo area or sit or lie on folded seatbacks while the vehicle is moving. All passengers must be properly seated in seats and re- strained properly while riding. · When resetting the seatback to the upright position, make sure it is securely latched by pushing it forward and backwards. · To avoid the possibility of burns, do not remove the carpet in the cargo area. Emission control devices beneath this floor generate high tempera- tures. WARNING After adjusting the seat, always check that it is securely locked into place by attempting to move the seat forward or backward without using the lock release lever. Sudden or unexpected movement of the driver's seat could cause you to lose control of the vehicle resulting in an accident. WARNING · Do not adjust the seat while wear- ing seat belts. Moving the seat cushion forward may cause strong pressure on the abdomen. · Use extreme caution so that hands or other objects are not caught in the seat mechanisms while the seat is moving. · Do not put a cigarette lighter on the floor or seat. When you oper- ate the seat, gas may gush out of the lighter and cause fire. (Continued) 4-04 (Continued) · If there are occupants in the rear seats, be careful while adjusting the front seat position. · Use extreme caution when picking small objects trapped under the seats or between the seat and the center console. Your hands might be cut or injured by the sharp edges of the seat mechanism. Front seat adjustment - manual Forward and backward 1. Pull the seat slide adjustment lever up and hold it. 2. Slide the seat to the position you desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure the seat is locked in place. 2. Carefully lean back on the seat and adjust the seatback of the seat to the position you desire. 3. Release the lever and make sure the seatback is locked in place. (The lever MUST return to its original position for the seatback to lock.) Adjust the seat before driving, and make sure the seat is locked securely Seat height 4 by trying to move forward and back- ward without using the lever. If the seat moves, it is not locked properly. Seatback angle Safety features of your vehicle OJF035003R To move the seat forward or backward: To recline the seatback: 1. Lean forward slightly and lift up the seatback recline lever. To change the height of the seat, push the lever upwards or downwards. · To lower the seat cushion, push the lever down several times. · To raise the seat cushion, pull the lev- er up several times. 4-05 Safety features of your vehicle Lumbar support (if equipped) Front seat adjustment - power (if equipped) The front seat can be adjusted by using the control switches located on the outside of the seat cushion. Before driving, adjust the seat to the proper position so you can easily control the steering wheel, pedals and switches on the instrument panel. The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch on the side of the Driver's seat. 1. Press the front portion of the switch to increase support, or the rear portion of the switch, to de- crease support. 2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position. WARNING The power seat is operable with the engine start/stop button in OFF. Therefore, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. CAUTION · The power seat is driven by an electric motor. Stop operating once the adjustment is completed. Ex- cessive operation may damage the electrical equipment. (Continued) (Continued) · When in operation, the power seat consumes a large amount of elec- trical power. To prevent unneces- sary charging system drain, don't adjust the power seat longer than necessary while the engine is not running. · Do not operate two or more power seat control switches at the same time. Doing so may result in power seat motor or electrical compo- nent malfunction. 4-06 Safety features of your vehicle Forward and backward Seatback angle Seat height 4 0+' 0+'- Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seat to the de- sired position. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position. Push the control switch forward or backward to move the seatback to the desired angle. Release the switch once the seat reaches the desired position. Pull the front portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the front part of the seat cush- ion. Pull the rear portion of the control switch up to raise or press down to lower the seat cushion. Release the switch once the seat reaches the de- sired position. 4-07 Safety features of your vehicle Lumbar support (if equipped) 4. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position. Driver position memory system (if equipped, for power seat) WARNING Never attempt to operate the driver position memory system while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, seri- ous injury, or property damage. 0+'- The lumbar support can be adjusted by pressing the lumbar support switch on the side of the seat. 1. Press the front portion (1) of the switch to increase support, or the rear portion (2) of the switch, to decrease support. 2. Release the switch once it reaches the desired position. 3. Press the upper portion (3) of the switch to move the support posi- tion up, or press the lower portion (4) of the switch, to move the sup- port position down. 0+'- A driver position memory system is provided to store and recall the driver seat and outside rearview mirror posi- tion with a simple button operation. By saving the desired position into the system memory, different drivers can reposition the driver seat based upon their driving preference. If the battery is disconnected, the position memory will be erased and the driving position should be restored in the system. Storing positions into memory using the buttons on the door Storing driver's seat positions 1. Shift the shift lever into P (for Au- tomatic transaxle) while the engine start/stop button is ON. 2. Adjust the driver's seat and outside rearview mirror comfortable for the driver. 3. Press SET button on the control panel. The system will beep once. 4. Press one of the memory buttons (1 or 2) within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button. The sys- tem will beep twice when memory has been successfully stored. 4-08 Safety features of your vehicle Recalling positions from memory 1. Shift the shift lever into P (for Au- tomatic transaxle) while the engine start/stop button is ON. · With smart key system - It will move the driver's seat rear- ward when the engine start/stop button is changed to the OFF posi- tion and front driver's door is Headrest (for front seat) 2. To recall the position in the memo- opened. ry, press the desired memory but- ton (1 or 2). The system will beep once, then the driver's seat will au- tomatically adjust to the stored po- sition. - It will move the driver's seat for- ward when the engine start/stop button is changed to the ACC or START position. 4 - It will move the driver's seat for- Adjusting the control switch for the driver's seat while the system is recall- ing the stored position will cause the movement to stop and move in the di- ward when you get in your vehicle with the smart key after closing the driver's door. 0.( rection that the control switch is moved. You can activate or deactivate this fea- ture. Refer to User settings on page 5-58. The driver's and front passenger's seats are equipped with a headrest for the occupant's safety and comfort. WARNING The headrest not only provides comfort for the driver and front passenger, but Use caution when recalling the ad- justment memory while sitting in also helps protect the head and neck in the event of a collision. the vehicle. Push the seat position control switch to the desired position immediately if the seat moves too far in any direction. Easy access function (if equipped) The system will move the driver's seat automatically as follows: 4-09 Safety features of your vehicle WARNING · For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also, adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended. · Do not operate the vehicle with the headrests removed. Severe in- jury to the occupants may occur in the event of an accident. Headr- ests may provide protection against neck injuries when proper- ly adjusted. · Do not adjust the headrest posi- tion of the driver's seat while the vehicle is in motion. Adjusting the height up and down Forward and backward adjustment 0+' 0+'- To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the head- rest, push and hold the release button (2) and lower the headrest to the de- sired position (3). The headrest may be adjusted forward to 4 different positions by pulling the headrest forward to the desired de- tent. To adjust the headrest to its furthest backwards position, Pull the headrest fully forward to the farthest position and release it. Adjust the headrest so that it properly supports the head and neck. 4-10 Removal/Reinstall 5ZQF" 0:') CAUTION If you recline the seatback towards the front with the headrest and seat cushion raised, the headrest may come in contact with the sunvisor or other parts of the vehicle. 5ZQF# 2. Raise headrest as far as it can go. 3. Press the headrest release button (3) while pulling the headrest up (4). WARNING NEVER allow anyone to ride in a seat with the headrest removed. 4 Safety features of your vehicle 0+'- To remove the headrest: 1. Recline the seatback (2) with the recline lever or switch (1). 4-11 Safety features of your vehicle 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 2. Recline the seatback(4) with the recline lever or switch (3). 3. Adjust the headrest to the appro- priate height. WARNING Always make sure the headrest locks into position after reinstalling and adjusting it properly. Seatback pocket WARNING n Seatback pockets Do not put heavy or sharp objects in the seatback pockets. In an accident they could come loose from the pocket and injure vehicle occupants. Rear seat adjustment Headrest (if equipped) 0+'- To reinstall the headrest: 1. Put the headrest poles (2) into the holes while pressing the release button or switch (1). 0+' The seatback pocket is provided on the back of the front passenger's and driv- er's seatbacks. 0.( The rear seat is equipped with headr- ests for the occupant's safety and comfort. 4-12 Safety features of your vehicle The headrest not only provides comfort for passengers, but also helps to pro- tect the head and neck in the event of (Continued) · Do not operate the vehicle with Adjusting the height up and down (if equipped) a collision. the headrests removed. Severe in- jury to an occupant may occur in WARNING the event of an accident. Headr- ests may provide protection against severe neck injuries when properly adjusted. 4 · For maximum effectiveness in case of an accident, the headrest should be adjusted so the middle of the headrest is at the same height of the center of gravity of an occupant's head. Generally, the center of gravity of most people's head is similar with the height of the top of their eyes. Also adjust the headrest as close to your head as possible. For this reason, the use of a cushion that holds the body away from the seatback is not recommended. (Continued) 0+' To raise the headrest, pull it up to the desired position (1). To lower the head- rest, push and hold the release button (2) on the headrest support and lower the headrest to the desired position (3). CAUTION When there is no occupant in the rear seats, adjust the height of the headrest to the lowest position. The (Continued) 4-13 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) rear seat headrest can reduce the visibility of the rear area. Removal and installation (if equipped) WARNING Make sure the headrest locks in po- sition after adjusting it to properly protect the occupants. Armrest 0+'- To remove the headrest, raise it as far as it can go then press the release but- ton (1) while pulling upward (2). To reinstall the headrest, put the head- rest poles (3) into the holes while pressing the release button (1). Then adjust it to the appropriate height. 0+' To use the armrest, pull it forward from the seatback. Folding the rear seat (if equipped) The rear seatbacks may be folded to facilitate carrying long items or to in- crease the luggage capacity of the ve- hicle. WARNING The purpose of the fold-down rear seatbacks is to allow you to carry longer objects than could not other- wise be accommodated. Never allow passengers to sit on top of the folded down seatback while the car is moving as this is not a proper seating position and no seat belts are available for use. This could result in serious injury or death in case of an accident or sudden stop. Objects carried on the folded down seatback should not extend higher than the top of the front seats. This could allow cargo to slide forward and cause injury or damage during sudden stops. (Continued) 4-14 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) ¥)ZCSJE (Continued) ¥1MVHJOIZCSJE To fold down the rear seatback (for Hy- brid, if equipped): 4 0+')2# · Do not put objects in the center lower part of rear seats. This could block the battery cooling duct causing battery degradation. (Continued) 0+')1-# · Do not put objects on the left side of rear seat. This could block the battery cooling duct causing bat- tery degradation. 0+'- 1. Make sure the rear seat belt web- bing is in the guide to prevent the seat belt from being damaged. 2. Set the front seatback to the up- right position and if necessary, slide the front seat forward. 3. Lower the rear headrests to the lowest position. 4-15 Safety features of your vehicle 5. To use the rear seat, lift and pull the seatback backward. Pull the seatback firmly until it clicks into place. Make sure the seatback is locked in place. 6. Return the rear seat belt to the proper position. WARNING After folding the rear seat, unless the driver's position is properly set according to the driver's physical fig- ure, do not fold the rear seat. It may increase body injuries in a sudden stop or collision. WARNING When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after being folded down: Be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Do not allow the seat belt webbing or buckle to get caught or pinched in the rear seat. Ensure that the seatback is completely locked into its upright position by pushing on the top of the seatback. Otherwise, in an accident or sudden stop, the seat could fold down and allow cargo enter the pas- senger compartment, which could result in serious injury or death. 0+' 4. Pull out the seatback locking knob (1) in the trunk, then fold the seat toward the front of the vehicle. WARNING n Uprighting seat When you return the seatback to its upright position, hold the seatback and return it slowly. If the seatback is returned without holding it, the back of the seat could spring for- ward resulting in injury caused by being struck by the seatback. CAUTION n Damaging rear seat belt buck- les When you fold the rear seatback, in- sert the buckle between the rear seatback and cushion. Doing so can prevent the buckle from being dam- aged by the rear seatback. 4-16 CAUTION n Rear seat belts When returning the rear seatbacks to the upright position, remember to return the rear shoulder belts to their proper position. WARNING n Cargo Cargo should always be secured to prevent it from being thrown about the vehicle in a collision and causing injury to the vehicle occupants. Do not place objects in the rear seats, since they cannot be properly se- cured and may hit the front seat oc- cupants in a collision. WARNING n Cargo loading Make sure the engine is off, the au- tomatic transaxle is in P (Park) and (Continued) (Continued) the parking brake is securely applied whenever loading or unloading cargo. Failure to take these steps may al- low the vehicle to move if the shift lever is inadvertently moved to an- other position. 4 4-17 Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle SEAT BELTS Seat belt restraint system WARNING · For maximum restraint system protection, the seat belts must al- ways be used whenever the vehi- cle is moving. · Seat belts are most effective when seatbacks are in the upright posi- tion. · Children age 12 and under must al- ways be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he/she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as possible. · Never wear the shoulder belt un- der your arm or behind your back. An improperly positioned shoulder belt can cause serious injuries in a crash. The shoulder belt should be posi- tioned midway over your shoulder across your collarbone. (Continued) 4-18 (Continued) · Never wear a seat belt over fragile objects. If there is a sudden stop or impact, the seat belt can dam- age it. · Avoid wearing twisted seat belts. A twisted belt can't do its job well. In a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt webbing is straight and not twisted. · Be careful not to damage the belt webbing or hardware. If the belt webbing or hardware is damaged, replace it. WARNING Seat belts are designed to bear upon the bony structure of the body, and should be worn low across the front of the pelvis or the pelvis, chest and shoulders, as applicable; wearing the lap section of the belt across the ab- dominal area must be avoided. Seat belts should be adjusted as firmly as possible, consistent with comfort, to provide the protection for which they have been designed. (Continued) (Continued) A slack belt will greatly reduce the protection afforded to the wearer. Care should be taken to avoid con- tamination of the webbing with pol- ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic- ularly battery acid. Cleaning may safely be carried out using mild soap and water. The belt should be re- placed if webbing becomes frayed, contaminated or damaged. It is es- sential to replace the entire assem- bly after it has been worn in a se- vere impact even if damage to the assembly is not obvious. Belts should not be worn with straps twisted. Each belt assembly must only be used by one occupant; it is danger- ous to put a belt around a child being carried on the occupant's lap. Safety features of your vehicle WARNING · No modifications or additions should be made by the user which will either prevent the seat belt adjusting devices from operating to remove slack, or prevent the seat belt assembly from being ad- justed to remove slack. · When you fasten the seat belt, be careful not to latch the seat belt in buckles of other seat. It's very dangerous and you may not be protected by the seat belt proper- ly. · Do not unfasten the seat belt and do not fasten and unfasten the seat belt repeatedly while driving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident causing death, se- rious injury, or property damage. · When fastening the seat belt, make sure that the seat belt does not pass over objects that are hard or can break easily. · Make sure there is nothing in the buckle. The seat belt may not be fastened securely. Seat belt warning Driver's seat belt warning 0+'- If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 20 km/h the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink. (if equipped) If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- 4 ing under 20 km/h, the seat belt warn- ing light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- ing over 20 km/h, the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink. As a reminder to the driver, the seat belt warning light will illuminate and warning chime will sound for approxi- mately 6 seconds each time you turn the Engine Start/Stop button ON if the seat belt is unfastened. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 9 km/h, the warning light will stay illuminated until you drive under 6 km/h. (if equipped) 4-19 Safety features of your vehicle Front passenger's seat belt warning (if equipped) 0+'- As a reminder to the front passenger, the front passenger's seat belt warning lights will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds each time you turn the En- gine Start/Stop button ON regardless of belt fastening. If you continue not to fasten the seat belt and you drive over 9 km/h, the warning light the warning light will stay illuminated. If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- ing in case of under 20 km/h the seat belt warning light will illuminate until the seat belt is fastened. If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- ing over 20 km/h, the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 100 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink. Rear passenger's seat belt warning (if equipped) 0+'- When the IGN is in ON, or the engine is running, the seat belt warning light will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds. The light will illuminate regardless of whether the seat belt is worn or not. And then, the rear corresponding seat belt warning light will illuminate for ap- proximately 35 seconds, if you drive over 9 km/h when the rear belt is not fastened. This warning operates only once from start to off the vehicle. However, the seat belt warning light will illuminate again for approximately 35 seconds, if you drive under 9 km/h for about 29 minutes more. If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- ing under 20 km/h the seat belt warn- ing light will illuminate for approxi- mately 35 seconds. If you unfasten the seat belt while driv- ing over 20 km/h, the seat belt warning chime will sound for approximately 35 seconds and the corresponding warning light will blink. 4-20 Safety features of your vehicle Lap/shoulder belt Height adjustment ¥'SPOUTFBU To raise the height adjuster, pull it up (1). To lower it, push it down (3) while pressing the height adjuster button (2). Release the button to lock the anchor into position. Try sliding the height ad- juster to make sure that it has locked into position. To fasten your seat belt: WARNING 4 0+' You can adjust the height of the shoul- der belt anchor to one of 4 positions for maximum comfort and safety. The height of the adjusting seat belt should not be too close to your neck. You will not be getting the most effec- tive protection. The shoulder portion should be adjusted so that it lies across your chest and midway over your shoulder near the door and not your neck. To adjust the height of the seat belt anchor, lower or raise the height ad- juster into an appropriate position. · Verify the shoulder belt anchor is locked into position at the appro- priate height. Never position the shoulder belt across your neck or face. Improperly positioned seat belts can cause serious injuries in an accident. · Failure to replace seat belts after an accident could leave you with damaged seat belts that will not provide protection in the event of another collision leading to person- al injury or death. Replace your seat belts after being in an acci- dent as soon as possible. #"/' To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the retractor and insert the metal tab (1) into the buckle (2). There will be an audible "click" when the tab locks into the buckle. The seat belt automatically adjusts to the proper length only after the lap belt portion is adjusted manually so that it fits snugly around your hips. If you lean forward in a slow, easy mo- tion, the belt will extend and let you move around. If there is a sudden stop or impact, however, the belt will lock in- to position. It will also lock if you try to lean forward too quickly. 4-21 Safety features of your vehicle NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the seat belt from the retractor, firmly pull the belt out and release it. Then you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly. (Continued) waist, it may increase the chance of injury in the event of a collision. Both arms should not be under or over the belt. Rather, one should be over and the other under, as shown in the illustration. Never wear the seat belt under the arm near the door. 0+'- #"/' WARNING You should place the lap belt portion as low as possible and snugly across your hips, not on your waist. If the lap belt is located too high on your (Continued) 4-22 0+'- Pull the metal tab (3) and insert it (3) into the buckle (4). There will be an au- dible click when the tab locks into the buckle. Make sure the belt is not twis- ted. Safety features of your vehicle When using the rear center seat belt the buckle with the CENTER mark must be used. To release the seat belt: Pre-tensioner seat belt WARNING Always have the metal tab (1) inser- ted into the buckle (2). NOTICE If you are not able to pull out the safety belt from the retractor, firm- ly pull the belt out and release it. Af- ter release, you will be able to pull the belt out smoothly. 4 06.- The seat belt is released by pressing the release button (A) in the locking buckle. When it is released, the belt should automatically draw back into the retractor. If this does not happen, check the belt to be sure it is not twisted, then try again. 0%.&4" Your vehicle is equipped with driver's and front passenger's pre-tensioner seat belts (retractor pretensioner). The pre-tensioner seat belts can be ac- tivated, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags. When the vehicle stops suddenly, or if the occupant tries to lean forward too quickly, the seat belt retractor will lock into position. In certain frontal colli- sions, the pre-tensioner will activate and pull the seat belt into tighter con- tact against the occupant's body. 4-23 Safety features of your vehicle - Retractor Pretensioner The purpose of the retractor preten- sioner is to make sure that the shoul- der belts fit in tightly against the oc- cupant's upper body in certain frontal collisions. If the system senses excessive tension on the driver seat belt when the pretensioner system activates, the load limiter inside the retractor pretensioner will release some of the pressure on the affected seat belt. (if equipped) NOTICE The pre-tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision, if the vehicle is equip- ped with a side or curtain air bag. WARNING For your safety, be sure that the belt webbing is not loose or twisted and always sit properly on your seat. NOTICE n if equipped with rollover sen- sor The pre-tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision or rollover, if the vehicle is equipped with a side or curtain air bag. NOTICE n without rollover sensor The pre-tensioner will activate not only in a frontal collision but also in a side collision, if the vehicle is equip- ped with a side or curtain air bag. The seat belt pre-tensioner system consists mainly of the following compo- nents. Their locations are shown in the illustration: 1. SRS air bag warning light 2. Front retractor pre-tensioner as- sembly 3. SRS control module WARNING To obtain maximum benefit from a pre-tensioner seat belt: (Continued) 4-24 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) 1. The seatbelt must be worn cor- rectly and adjusted to the proper position. Please read and follow all of the important information and precautions about your vehi- cle's occupant safety features including seat belts and air bags that are provided in this man- ual. 2. Be sure you and your passen- gers always wear seat belts properly. NOTICE · Pre-tensioner seat belts will be activated in certain frontal colli- sions. The pre-tensioner seat belts can be activated, where the frontal collision is severe enough, together with the air bags. (Continued) (Continued) · When the pre-tensioner seat belts are activated, a loud noise may be heard and fine dust, which may appear to be smoke, may be visi- ble in the passenger compart- ment. These are normal operating conditions and are not hazardous. · Although it is harmless, the fine dust may cause skin irritation and should not be breathed for pro- longed periods. Wash all exposed skin areas thoroughly after an ac- cident in which the pre-tensioner seat belts were activated. · Because the sensor that activates the SRS air bag is connected with the pre-tensioner seat belt, the SRS air bag warning light on the instrument panel will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button has been turned to the "ON" position, and then it should turn off. CAUTION If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not working properly, the SRS air bag warning light will illuminate even if there is no malfunction of the SRS air bag. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate when the Engine Start/Stop button is turned to ON, or if it remains illuminated af- 4 ter illuminating for approximately 6 seconds, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, we recom- mend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING · Pre-tensioners are designed to op- erate only one time. After activa- tion, pre-tensioner seat belts must be replaced. All seat belts, of any type, should always be re- placed after they have been worn during a collision. (Continued) 4-25 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · The pre-tensioner seat belt as- sembly mechanisms become hot during activation. Do not touch the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies for several minutes after they have been activated. · Do not attempt to inspect or re- place the pre-tensioner seat belts yourself. We recommend that the system be inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. · Do not strike the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies. · Do not attempt to service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt sys- tem in any manner. · Improper handling of the preten- sioner seat belt assemblies, and failure to heed the warnings not to strike, modify, inspect, replace, service or repair the pre-tensioner seat belt assemblies may lead to improper operation or inadvertent activation and serious injury. · Always wear the seat belts when driving or riding in a motor vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) · If the vehicle or pre-tensioner seat belt must be discarded, we recom- mend that you contact an author- ized Kia dealer. CAUTION Body work on the front area of the vehicle may damage the pretension- er seat belt system. Therefore, we recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. Seat belt precautions WARNING All occupants of the vehicle must wear their seat belts at all times. Seat belts and child restraints re- duce the risk of serious or fatal inju- ries for all occupants in the event of a collision or sudden stop. Without a seat belt, occupants could be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be (Continued) (Continued) thrown from the vehicle. Properly worn seat belts greatly reduce these hazards. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occupant seating contained in this manual. Infant or small child You should be aware of the specific re- quirements in your country. Child and/or infant seats must be properly placed and installed in the rear seat. For more information about the use of these restraints, refer to Child restraint system on page 4-30. WARNING Every person in your vehicle needs to be properly restrained at all times, including infants and children. Never hold a child in your arms or lap when riding in a vehicle. The violent forces created during a crash will tear the child from your arms and throw the child against the interior. Always use a child restraint appro- (Continued) 4-26 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) priate for your child's height and weight. NOTICE Small children are best protected from injury in an accident when properly restrained in the rear seat by a child restraint system that meets the requirements of the Safety Standards of your country. Before buying any child restraint system, make sure that it has a la- bel certifying that it meets Safety Standards of your country. The re- straint must be appropriate for your child's height and weight. Check the label on the child restraint for this information. Refer to Child restraint system on page 4-30. Larger children Children who are too large for child re- WARNING straint systems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/ shoulder belts. The lap portion should n Shoulder belts on small chil- dren be fastened and snugged on the hips · Never allow a shoulder belt to be in and as low as possible. Check if the belt contact with a child's neck or face fits periodically. A child's squirming while the vehicle is in motion. could put the belt out of position. Chil- dren are given the most safety in the event of an accident when they are re- strained by a proper restraint system · If seat belts are not properly worn and adjusted on children, there is a risk of death or serious injury. 4 in the rear seat. If a larger child (over age 12) must be seated in the front Pregnant women seat, the child should be securely re- The use of a seat belt is recommended strained by the available lap/shoulder for pregnant women to lessen the belt and the seat should be placed in chance of injury in an accident. When a the rearmost position. seat belt is used, the lap belt portion Children age 12 and under should be re- should be placed as low and securely as strained securely in the rear seat. NEV- possible on the hips, not across the ab- ER place a child age 12 and under in the domen. For specific recommendations, front seat. NEVER place a rear facing consult a physician. child seat in the front seat of a vehicle. If the shoulder belt portion slightly touches the child's neck or face, try WARNING placing the child closer to the center of the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still n Pregnant women touches their face or neck they need to be returned to a child restraint system. Pregnant women must never place the lap portion of the safety belt over the area of the abdomen where the fetus is located or above the ab- (Continued) 4-27 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) domen where the belt could crush the fetus during an impact. Injured person A seat belt should be used when an in- jured person is being transported. When this is necessary, you should con- sult a physician for recommendations. One person per belt Two people (including children) should never attempt to use a single seat belt. This could increase the severity of inju- ries in case of an accident. Do not lie down To reduce the chance of injuries in the event of an accident and to achieve maximum effectiveness of the re- straint system, all passengers should be sitting up and the front and rear seats should be in an upright position when the vehicle is moving. A seat belt cannot provide proper protection if the person is lying down in the rear seat or if the front and rear seats are in a re- clined position. WARNING Riding with a reclined seatback in- creases your chance of serious or fa- tal injuries in the event of a collision or sudden stop. The protection of your restraint system (seat belts and air bags) is greatly reduced by reclining your seat. Seat belts must be secured against your hips and chest to work properly. The more the seatback is reclined, the greater the chance an occupant's hips will slide under the lap belt causing seri- ous internal injuries. Also, the shoul- der belt may strike the occupant's neck. Drivers and passengers should always sit well back in their seats, properly belted, and with the seat- backs upright. Care of seat belts Seat belt systems should never be dis- assembled or modified. In addition, care should be taken to assure that seat belts and belt hardware are not dam- aged by seat hinges, doors or other abuse. WARNING When you return the rear seatback to its upright position after the rear seatback has been folded down, be careful not to damage the seat belt webbing or buckle. Be sure that the webbing or buckle does not get caught or pinched in the rear seat. A seat belt with damaged webbing or buckle could possibly fail during a collision or sudden stop, resulting in serious injury. If the webbing or buckles are damaged, get them re- placed immediately. Periodic inspection All seat belts should be inspected peri- odically for wear or damage of any kind. Any damaged parts should be re- placed as soon as possible. Keep belts clean and dry Seat belts should be kept clean and dry. If belts become dirty, they can be cleaned by using a mild soap solution and warm water. Bleach, dye, strong detergents or abrasives should not be used because they may damage and weaken the fabric. 4-28 When to replace seat belts Entire in-use seat belt assembly or as- semblies should be replaced if the vehi- cle has been involved in an accident. This should be done even if no damage is visible. We recommend that you con- sult an authorized Kia dealer. 4 4-29 Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM (CRS) Our recommendation: Children always in the rear WARNING Always properly restrain children in the vehicle. Children of all ages are safer when riding in the rear seats. Never place a rearward-facing Child Restraint System on the front pas- senger seat, unless the air bag is de- activated. Children under age 13 should always ride in the rear seats and must always be properly restrained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. According to accident statistics, chil- dren are safer when properly restrain- ed in the rear seats than in the front seat. Children too large for a Child Re- straint System must use the seat belts provided. Most countries have regulations which require children to travel in approved Child Restraint Systems. The laws governing the age or height/ weight restrictions at which seat belts can be used instead of Child Restraint System differ among countries, so you should be aware of the specific require- ments in your country, and where you are travelling. Child Restraint Systems must be prop- erly installed in the vehicle seat. Always use a commercially available Child Re- straint System that meets the require- ments of your country. Child Restraint System (CRS) Infants and younger children must be restrained in an appropriate rearward facing or forward-facing CRS that has first been properly secured to the seat of the vehicle. Read and comply with the instructions for installation and use provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System. WARNING · Always follow the Child Restraint System manufacturer's instruc- tions for installation and use. (Continued) (Continued) · Always properly restrain your child in the Child Restraint System. · Do not use an infant carrier or a child safety seat that hooks over a seatback, it may not provide ad- equate protection in an accident. · After an accident, we recommend a Kia dealer to check the Child Re- straint System, seat belts, ISOFIX anchorages and top-tether ancho- rages. Selecting a Child Restraint System (CRS) When selecting a Child Restraint Sys- tem for your child, always: · Make sure the Child Restraint System has a label certifying that it meets applicable Safety Standards of your country. A Child Restraint System may only be installed if it was approved in accord- ance with the requirements of ECER44 or ECE-R129. · Select a Child Restraint System based on your child's height and weight. The required label or the instructions for use typically provide this information. 4-30 Safety features of your vehicle · Select a Child Restraint System that All children under the age of one year fits the vehicle seating position where must always ride in a rearward facing it will be used. Child Restraint System. There are dif- For the suitability of Child Restraint ferent types of rearward-facing Child Systems on the vehicle's seating po- Restraint Systems: infant-only Child sitions, please refer to the installa- Restraint Systems can only be used tion tables on pages 4-36 and rearward-facing. Convertible and 3- 4-39 to 4-41. in-1 Child Restraint Systems typically · Read and comply with the warnings and instructions for installation and use provided with the Child Restraint System. $34# 4 have higher height and weight limits for the rearward-facing position, allowing you to keep your child rearward-facing for a longer period of time. Keep using Child Restraint Systems in Child Restraint System types There are three main types of Child Re- straint Systems: rearward-facing, for- ward-facing and booster Child Re- straint Systems. They are classified according to the child's age, height and weight. Rearward-facing Child Restraint Sys- tem A rearward-facing Child Restraint Sys- tem provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the child. The harness system holds the child in place, and in an accident, acts to keep the rearward-facing position as long as children fit within the height and weight limits allowed by the Child Re- straint System's manufacturer. the child positioned in the Child Re- straint Systems and reduce the stress to the fragile neck and spinal cord. 0+'# 4-31 Safety features of your vehicle Forward-facing Child Restraint System A forward-facing Child Restraint Sys- tem provides restraint for the child's body with a harness. Keep children in a forward-facing Child Restraint System with a harness until they reach the top height or weight limit allowed by your Child Restraint System's manufacturer. Once your child outgrows the forwardfacing Child Restraint System, your child is ready for a booster seat. Booster seats A booster seat is a Child Restraint Sys- tem designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's seat belt system. A booster seat positions the seat belt so that it fits properly over the stronger parts of your child's body. Keep your children in booster seats until they are big enough to fit in a seat belt properly. For a seat belt to fit properly, the lap belt must lie comfortable across the upper thighs, not the stomach. The shoulder belt should lie comfortable across the shoulder and chest and not across the neck or face. Children under age 13 must always be properly re- strained to minimize the risk of injury in an accident, sudden stop or sudden maneuver. Installing a Child Restraint System (CRS) WARNING Before installing your Child Restraint System always: Read and follow the instructions provided by the manufacturer of the Child Restraint System. Failure to follow all warnings and in- structions could increase the risk of the SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH if an accident occurs. WARNING If the vehicle headrest prevents proper installation of a Child Re- straint System, the headrest of the respective seating position shall be readjusted or entirely removed. After selecting a proper Child Restraint System for your child and checking that the Child Restraint System fits properly on the seating position, there are three general steps for a proper installation: · Properly secure the Child Restraint System to the vehicle. All Child Re- straint Systems must be secured to the vehicle with the lap belt or lap part of a lap/shoulder belt or with the ISOFIX toptether and/or ISOFIX an- chorage and/or with the support leg. · Make sure the Child Restraint System is firmly secured. After installing a Child Restraint System to the vehicle, push and pull the seat forward and from side-to-side to verify that it is securely attached to the seat. A Child Restraint System secured with a seat belt should be installed as firmly as possible. However, some side-to-side movement can be expected. When in- stalling a Child Restraint System, ad- just the vehicle seat and seatback (up and down, forward and rearward) so that your child fits in the Child Re- straint System in a confortable man- ner. · Secure the child in the Child Restraint System. Make sure the child is prop- erly strapped in the Child Restraint System according to the Child Re- straint System manufacturer's in- structions. 4-32 Safety features of your vehicle CAUTION To use the ISOFIX system in your vehi- cle, you must have a Child Restraint WARNING A Child Restraint System in a closed vehicle can become very hot. To pre- vent burns, check the seating sur- face and buckles before placing your child in the Child Restraint System. ISOFIX anchorage and top- System with ISOFIX attachments. The Child Restraint System manufac- turer will provide you with instructions on how to use the Child Restraint Sys- tem with its attachments for the ISO- FIX anchorages. Do not attempt to install a Child Re- straint System using ISOFIX ancho- rages in the rear center seating po- sition. There are no ISOFIX anchorag- es provided for this seat. Using the outboard seat anchorages, for the CRS installation on the rear center seating position, can damage the an- 4 tether anchorage (ISOFIX chorages. anchorage system) for children The ISOFIX system holds a Child Re- straint System during driving and in an accident. This system is designed to make installation of the Child Restraint System easier and reduce the possibili- ty of improperly installing your Child Restraint System. The ISOFIX system uses anchors in the vehicle and attach- ments on the Child Restraint System. #%/' The ISOFIX system eliminates the need to use seat belts to secure the Child Restraint System to the rear seats. ISOFIX anchorages are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each ISOFIX seating posi- tion that will accommodate a Child Re- straint System with lower attach- ments. ISOFIX anchorages have been provided in the left and right outboard rear seat- ing positions. Their locations are shown in the illustration. 0+'- ISOFIX anchorages are located between the seatback and the seat cushion of the rear seat left and right outboard seating positions, indicated by the symbols. 4-33 Safety features of your vehicle To use the ISOFIX anchorages, push the upper portion of the ISOFIX anchorage cover. 1. ISOFIX Anchor Position Indicator () 2. ISOFIX Anchor Securing a Child Restraint System with the ISOFIX Anchorage System To install an ISOFIX-compatible Child Restraint System in either of the rear outboard seating positions: 1. Move the seat belt buckle away from the ISOFIX anchorages. 2. Move any other objects away from the anchorages that could prevent a secure connection between the Child Restraint System and the ISO- FIX anchorages. 3. Place the Child Restraint System on the vehicle seat, then attach the seat to the ISOFIX anchorages ac- cording to the instructions provided by the Child Restraint System man- ufacturer. 4. Follow the instructions of the Child Restraint System's manufacturer for proper installation and connec- tion of the ISOFIX attachments on the Child Restraint System to the ISOFIX anchorages. WARNING Take the following precautions when using the ISOFIX system: · Read and follow all installation in- structions provided with your Child Restraint System. · To prevent the child from reaching and taking hold of unretracted seat belts, buckle all unused rear seat belts and retract the seat belt webbing behind the child. Children can be strangled if a shoulder belt becomes wrapped around their neck and the seat belt tightens. · NEVER attach more than one Child Restraint System to a single an- chorage. This could cause the an- chor or attachment to come loose or break. (Continued) (Continued) · Always have the ISOFIX system in- spected by your dealer after an accident. An accident can damage the ISOFIX system and may not properly secure the Child Restraint System. 4-34 Safety features of your vehicle Securing a Child Restraint System seat with Top-tether Anchorage system (if equipped) ¥&YDFQU&VSPQF Top-tether anchorages for Child Re- straint Systems are located on the shelf behind the rear seats. WARNING Take the following precautions when installing the top-tether: · Read and follow all installation in- structions provided with your Child Restraint System. · NEVER attach more than one Child Restraint System to a single ISO- 4 FIX top-tether anchorage. This could cause the anchorage or at- tachment to come loose or break. 0+')-# 0+' · Do not attach the top-tether to anything other than the correct top-tether anchorage. It may not work properly if attached to something else. ¥'PS&VSPQF 0+'-# 1. Route the Child Restraint System top-tether strap over the seatback. Placing the top tether strap, please follow the instructions of the Child Restraint System manufacturer. 2. Connect the top-tether strap to the top-tether anchorage, then tighten the top-tether strap ac- cording to the instructions of your Child Restraint System's manufac- turer to firmly attach the Child Re- straint System to the seat. · Child Restraint System anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted Child Restraint System. Under no circumstances are they to be used for adult seat belts or harnesses or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. 4-35 Safety features of your vehicle Suitability of each seating position for ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations Mass Group Size Class Fixture Front Passenger vehicle ISOFIX positions Rear Outboard Rear Outboard (Driver Side) (Passenger Side) Rear Center Carrycot F G ISO/L1 ISO/L2 - X X X X - 0: Up to 10 kg E ISO/R1 - IL IL - E ISO/R1 - IL IL - 0+: Up to 13 kg D ISO/R2 - IL IL - C ISO/R3 - IL IL - D ISO/R2 - IL IL - C ISO/R3 - IL IL - I: 9 to 18 kg B ISO/F2 - IUF, IL IUF, IL - B1 ISO/F2X - IUF, IL IUF, IL - A ISO/F3 - IUF, IL IUF, IL - IUF = IL = X = Suitable for ISOFIX forward-facing Child Restraint Systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. Suitable for particular ISOFIX Child Restraint Systems given in the attached list. These ISOFIX CRS are those of the "specific vehicle", "restricted" or "semi-universal" categories. ISOFIX position not suitable for ISOFIX Child Restraint System in this mass group and/or this size class. 4-36 Safety features of your vehicle Securing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt When not using the ISOFIX system, all Child Restraint Systems must be se- cured to a rear seat with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. 1. Place the Child Restraint System on a rear seat and route the lap/shoul- der belt around or through the Child Restraint System, following the Child Restraint System manu- facturer's instructions. Make sure the seat belt webbing is not twisted. 4 &.4 Installing a Child Restraint System with a lap/shoulder belt To install a Child Restraint System on the rear seats, do the following: 0&/ 2. Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch into the buckle. Listen for the dis- tinct click sound. Position the re- lease button so that it is easy to access in case of an emergency. 0&/ 3. Remove as much slack from the belt as possible by pushing down on the Child Restraint System while feeding the shoulder belt back into the retractor. 4. Push and pull on the Child Restraint System to confirm that the seat belt is holding it firmly in place. If your Child Restraint System manu- facturer recommends the use of a toptether with the lap/shoulder belt, see Securing a Child Restraint System with the ISOFIX Anchorage System on page 4-34. 4-37 Safety features of your vehicle To remove the Child Restraint System, press the release button on the buckle and then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of the Child Restraint System and allow the seat belt to retract fully. 4-38 Safety features of your vehicle Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations (For Europe) Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table. Mass Group Front passenger Seating Position Rear outboard Rear centre 0: Up to 10 kg (0-9 months) U U U 4 0+: Up to 13 kg (0 - 2 years) U U U I: 9 kg to 18 kg (9 months - 4 years) U U U II & III: 15 kg to 36 kg (4 - 12 years) U U U U = Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group (When you install the child seat on Front Passenger seat, you should move the seat position to upward properly, to restrain child seat) UF = Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group X = Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group 4-39 Safety features of your vehicle Suitability of each seating position for "universal" category belted Child Restraint Systems according to ECE regulations (Except Europe) Use child safety seats that have been officially approved and are appropriate for your children. When using the child safety seats, refer to the following table. Mass Group Front passenger Seating Position Rear outboard Rear centre 0: Up to 10 kg (0-9 months) UF U U 0+: Up to 13 kg (0 - 2 years) UF U U I: 9 kg to 18 kg (9 months - 4 years) UF U U II & III: 15 kg to 36 kg (4 - 12 years) UF U U U = UF = X = Suitable for "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group Suitable for forward-facing "universal" category restraints approved for use in this mass group (When you install the child seat on Front Passenger seat, you should move the seat position to upward properly, to restrain child seat) Seat position not suitable for children in this mass group 4-40 Recommended child restraint systems For Europe Mass Group Group 0-1 (0 ~ 13 kg) Group 1 (9 ~ 18 kg) Size Class E B1 Fixture Name Manufacturer Type of Fixation ECE-R44 Ap- proval No. ISO/R1 Baby Safe Plus Britax Römer Reward facing with ISOFIX base E1 04301146 ISO/F2X Duo Plus Forward facing with vehicle Britax Römer ISOFIX lower anchorage + E1 04301133 Top tether 4 Safety features of your vehicle 4-41 Safety features of your vehicle CRS Manufacturer information Britax Römer http://www.britax.com 4-42 Safety features of your vehicle AIR BAG - SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 5IFBDUVBMBJSCBHTJOUIFWFIJDMFNBZEJGGFS GSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 0+'- 1. Driver's front air bag 2. Passenger's front air bag 3. Side air bag 4. Curtain air bag 5. Driver's knee air bag* 4 6. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch* WARNING · Even in vehicles with air bags, you and your passengers must always wear the safety belts provided in order to minimize the risk and se- verity of injury in the event of a collision or rollover. · SRS and pretensioners contain ex- plosive chemicals. If scraping a vehicle without re- moving SRS and pretensioners from a vehicle, it may cause fire. Before scraping a vehicle, we rec- ommend that you contact an au- thorized Kia dealer. (Continued) *: if equipped 4-43 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · Keep the SRS parts and wirings away from water or any liquid. If the SRS components are inopera- tive due to exposure to water or liquids, it may cause fire or severe injury. How does the air bag system operate · Air bags are activated (able to inflate if necessary) only when the engine start/stop button is turned to the ON or START position. · Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a serious frontal collision or side collision (if equipped with a side air bag or curtain air bag) in order to help protect the occupants from seri- ous physical injury. · There is no single speed at which the air bags will inflate. Generally, air bags are designed to in- flate based upon the severity of a collision and its direction. These two factors determine whether the sen- sors produce an electronic deploy- ment/inflation signal. · Air bag deployment depends on a number of factors including vehicle speed, angles of impact and the den- sity and stiffness of the vehicles or objects which your vehicle hits in the collision. The determining factors are not limited to those mentioned above. · The front air bags will completely in- flate and deflate in an instant. It is virtually impossible for you to see the air bags inflate during an ac- cident. It is much more likely that you will simply see the deflated air bags hanging out of their storage com- partments after the collision. NOTICE n If equipped with rollover sen- sor Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a rollover (if equipped with a side air bag or curtain air bag) in order to help protect the occupants from serious physical injury. · In order to help provide protection in a severe collision, the air bags must inflate rapidly. The speed of the air bag inflation is a consequence of ex- tremely short time in which a collision occurs and the need to inflate the air bag between the occupant and the vehicle structures before the occu- pant impacts those structures. This speed of inflation reduces the risk of serious or life-threatening in- juries in a severe collision and is thus a necessary part of the air bag de- sign. However, air bag inflation can also cause injuries which can include facial abrasions, bruises and broken bones because the inflation speed also cau- ses the air bags to expand with a great deal of force. · There are even circumstances under which contact with the steering wheel air bag can cause fatal injuries, especially if the occupant is posi- tioned excessively close to the steer- ing wheel. 4-44 Safety features of your vehicle WARNING Noise and smoke When the air bags inflate, they make a (Continued) · To avoid severe personal injury or death caused by deploying air bags in a collision, the driver should sit as far back from the steering wheel air bag as possible (at least 250 mm (10 inches) away). The front passengers should always move their seats as far back as possible and sit back in their seat. · Air bags inflate instantly in the event of a collision, and passen- gers may be injured by the air bag expansion force if they are not in a proper position. loud noise and they leave smoke and powder in the air inside of the vehicle. This is normal and is a result of the ig- nition of the air bag inflator. After the air bag inflates, you may feel substan- tial discomfort in breathing due to the contact of your chest with both the seat belt and the air bag, as well as from breathing the smoke and powder. Open your doors and/or windows as soon as possible after the impact in or- der to reduce discomfort and prevent prolonged exposure to smoke and pow- der. Though the smoke and powder are above the front and rear doors are very hot. To prevent injury, do not touch the air bag storage area's in- ternal components immediately af- ter an air bag has inflated. 4 · Air bag inflation may cause injuries non-toxic, they may cause irritation to including facial or bodily abrasions, the skin (eyes, nose and throat, etc). If injuries from broken glasses or this is the case, wash and rinse with burns. cold water immediately and consult a doctor if the symptom persists. WARNING When the air bags deploy, the air bag related parts in the steering wheel, instrument panel, front seats and/or in both sides of the roof rails (Continued) 4-45 Safety features of your vehicle Front passenger's air bag warning label for child restraint system 5ZQF" ¥5ZQF# 0:%&4" WARNING Never place a rear facing child re- straint in the front passenger seat, unless the passenger-side air bag is deactivated. An inflating passengerside air bag could impact the rearfacing child restraint and kill the child. In addition, we recommend that you do not place front-facing child restraints in the front passenger's seat either. If the front passenger's air bag inflates, it could cause serious or fatal injuries to the child. If your vehicle is equipped with the pas- senger's front air bag ON/OFF switch, you can activate or deactivate the front passenger's air bag when neces- sary. For more details, please refer to Pas- senger's front air bag ON/OFF switch on page 4-54 (if equipped). WARNING · NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIR BAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur. · When children are seated in the rear outboard seats of a vehicle equipped with side and/or curtain air bags, be sure to install the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and se- curely lock the child restraint sys- tem in position. Inflation of side and/or curtain air bags could cause serious injury or death to an infant or child. 0).- 4-46 Air bag warning light · The light comes on while the vehicle The passenger's front air bag ON indi- is in motion. cator also comes on when the passeng- · The light blinks when the engine start/stop button is in the ON posi- tion. er's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position and goes off after approximately 60 seconds. Passenger's front air bag ON indicator (if equipped) Passenger's front air bag OFF indicator (if equipped) 4 Safety features of your vehicle 8 The purpose of the air bag warning light in your instrument panel is to alert you of a potential problem with your air bag - Supplemental Restraint Sys- tem (SRS). When the Engine Start/Stop button is turned ON, the warning light should illu- minate for approximately 6 seconds, then go off. Have the system checked if: · The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the Engine Start/Stop button to the ON position. · The light stays on after illuminating for approximately 6 seconds. 0+')1- The passenger's front air bag ON indicator illuminates for approximately 4 seconds after the engine start/stop button is turned to the ON position. 0+')1- The passenger's front air bag OFF indicator illuminates for about 4 seconds after the en- gine start/stop button is turned to the ON position. 4-47 Safety features of your vehicle The passenger's front air bag OFF indi- cator also comes on when the passeng- er's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position and goes off when the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position. CAUTION If the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch malfunctions, the passenger's front air bag OFF indica- tor will not illuminate (the passeng- er's front air bag ON indicator comes on and goes off after approximately 60 seconds) and the passenger's front air bag will inflate in a frontal impact even if the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position. If this occurs, we recommend that the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and the SRS air bag system be inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. SRS components and functions The SRS consists of the following com- ponents: 1. Driver's front air bag module 2. Passenger's front air bag module 3. Side air bag modules 4. Curtain air bag modules 5. Retractor pre-tensioner assem- blies* 6. Air bag warning light 7. SRS control module (SRSCM)/Roll- over sensor* 8. Front impact sensors *: if equipped 9. Side impact sensors* 10. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF indicator (front passenger's seat only)* 11. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch* 12. Side pressure sensors The SRSCM continually monitors all SRS components while the Engine Start/ Stop button is ON to determine if a crash impact is severe enough to re- quire air bag deployment or pretension- er seat belt deployment. The SRS air bag warning light on the in- strument panel will illuminate for about 6 seconds after the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the ON position, after which the SRS air bag warning light should go out. WARNING If any of the following conditions oc- curs, this indicates a malfunction of the SRS. We recommend that the (Continued) *: if equipped 4-48 (Continued) system be inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. · The light does not turn on briefly when you turn the engine start/ stop button is ON. · The light stays on after illuminat- ing for approximately 6 seconds. · The light comes on while the vehi- cle is in motion. · The light blinks when the engine start/stop button to the ON posi- tion. %SJWFSTGSPOUBJSCBH %SJWFSTGSPOUBJSCBH 4 ##- ##- The front air bag modules are located in the center of the steering wheel, in the front passenger's panel above the glove box and/or in the driver's side knee bolster. When the SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe impact to the front of the vehicle, it will automatically deploy the front air bags. Upon deployment, tear seams molded directly into the pad covers will sepa- rate under pressure from the expan- sion of the air bags. Further opening of the covers then allows full inflation of the air bags. Safety features of your vehicle 4-49 Safety features of your vehicle %SJWFSTGSPOUBJSCBH 1BTTFOHFSTGSPOUBJSCBH ##- A fully inflated air bag, in combination with a properly worn seat belt, slows the driver's or the passenger's forward motion, reducing the risk of head and chest injury. After complete inflation, the air bag im- mediately starts deflating, enabling the driver to maintain forward visibility and the ability to steer or operate other controls. ##-# WARNING · Do not install or place any acces- sories (drink holder, cassette hold- er, sticker, etc.) on the front pas- senger's panel above the glove box in a vehicle with a passenger's air bag. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the passenger's air bag in- flates. (Continued) (Continued) · When installing a container of liq- uid air freshener inside the vehicle, do not place it near the instrument cluster nor on the instrument pan- el surface. It may become a dangerous pro- jectile and cause injury if the pas- senger's air bag inflates. WARNING · If an air bag deploys, there may be a loud noise followed by a fine dust released in the vehicle. These conditions are normal and are not hazardous - the air bags are packed in this fine powder. The dust generated during air bag de- ployment may cause skin or eye irritation as well as aggravate asthma for some persons. Always wash all exposed skin areas thor- oughly with cold water and mild soap after an accident in which the air bags were deployed. (Continued) 4-50 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · The SRS can function only when the Engine Start/Stop is set to the ON position. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on after illuminating for about 6 seconds when the Engine Start/Stop but- ton is turned to the ON position, or after the engine is started, comes on while driving, the SRS is not working properly. If this occurs, we recommend that the system be in- spected by an authorized Kia deal- er. · Before you replace a fuse or dis- connect a battery terminal, turn the Engine Start/Stop button to the OFF position. Never remove or replace the air bag related fuse(s) when the Engine Start/Stop but- ton is in the ON position. Failure to heed this warning will cause the SRS air bag warning light to illumi- nate. Driver's and passenger's front air bag %SJWFSTGSPOUBJSCBH Your vehicle is equipped with a Supple- mental Restraint (Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder belts at both the driver and passenger seating positions. The indications of the system's pres- ence are the letters "AIR BAG" em- bossed on the air bag pad cover in the steering wheel and/or on the cover of 4 the driver's side knee bolster located below the steering wheel and the pas- senger's side front panel pad above the glove box. 0+' %SJWFSTLOFFBJSCBH JGFRVJQQFE 0+' 4-51 Safety features of your vehicle 1BTTFOHFSTGSPOUBJSCBH The seat belt buckle sensors (if equip- ped) determine if the driver and front passenger's seat belts are fastened. These sensors provide the ability to control the SRS deployment based on whether or not the seat belts are fas- tened, and how severe the impact is. 0+' The SRS consists of air bags installed under the pad covers in the center of the steering wheel, in the knee bolster below the steering wheel column and the passenger's side front panel above the glove box. The purpose of the SRS is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection to that offered by the seat belt system alone in case of a frontal impact of suf- ficient severity. The SRS uses sensors to gather information about the driv- er's seat position, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt usage and the impact severity. WARNING Always use seat belts and child re- straints every trip, every time, ev- eryone! Air bags inflate with consid- erable force and in the blink of an eye. Seat belts help keep occupants in proper position to obtain maxi- mum benefit from the air bag. Even with air bags, improperly positioned and unbelted occupants can be se- verely injured when the air bag in- flates. Always follow the precautions about seat belts, air bags and occu- pant safety contained in this man- ual. To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries and receive the maxi- mum safety benefit from your re- straint system: · Never place a child in any child or booster seat in the front seat. (Continued) (Continued) · ABC Always Buckle Children in the 2nd row seat. It is the safest place for children of any age to ride. · Front and side air bags can injure occupants improperly positioned in the front seats. · Move your seat as far back as practical from the front air bags, while still maintaining control of the vehicle. · You and your passengers should never sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bags. Improperly positioned drivers and passengers can be severely injured by inflating air bags. · Never lean against the door or center console always sit in an upright position. · Do not allow a passenger to ride in the front seat when the passeng- er's front air bag OFF indicator is illuminated, because the air bag will not deploy in the event of a moderate or severe frontal crash. (Continued) 4-52 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel or the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to deploy. · Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could re- sult in injury, due to accidental de- ployment of the air bags or by rendering the SRS inoperative. · If the SRS air bag warning light re- mains illuminated while the vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. · Air bags can only be used once we recommend that the system be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. (Continued) (Continued) · The SRS is designed to deploy the front air bags only when an impact is sufficiently severe and when the impact angle is less than 30° from the forward longitudinal axis of the vehicle. Additionally, the air bags will only deploy once. Seat belts must be worn at all times. · Front air bags are not intended to deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or rollover crashes. In addition, front air bags will not deploy in frontal crashes below the deploy- ment threshold. · A child restraint system must nev- er be placed in the front seat. The infant or child could be severely in- jured or killed by an air bag deploy- ment in case of an accident. (Continued) (Continued) · Children age 12 and under must al- ways be properly restrained in the rear seat. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. If a child over 12 must be seated in the front seat, he or she must be properly belted and the seat should be moved as far back as 4 possible. · For maximum safety protection in all types of crashes, all occupants including the driver should always wear their seat belts whether or not an air bag is also provided at their seating position to minimize the risk of severe injury or death in the event of a crash. Do not sit or lean unnecessarily close to the air bag while the vehi- cle is in motion. (Continued) 4-53 Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · Sitting improperly or out of posi- tion can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash. All occupants should sit upright with the seat back in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with their seat belt on, legs comforta- bly extended and their feet on the floor until the vehicle is parked and the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position. · The SRS air bag system must de- ploy very rapidly to provide pro- tection in a crash. If an occupant is out of position because of not wearing a seat belt, the air bag may forcefully contact the occu- pant causing serious or fatal inju- ries. Passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch (if equipped) To deactivate or reactivate the pas- senger's front air bag: 0+'- The passenger's front air bag can be deactivated by the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch if a child re- straint is installed on the front pas- senger's seat or if the front passeng- er's seat is unoccupied by a person. To ensure the safety of your child, the passenger's front air bag must be de- activated when it should be necessary to install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat in excep- tional circumstances. 0+')10+')1- 4-54 Safety features of your vehicle To deactivate the passenger's front air bag, insert the master key into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the OFF position. The passenger's front air bag OFF indi- cator will illuminate and stay on until the passenger's front air bag is reacti- vated. To reactivate the passenger's front air bag, insert the master key into the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch and turn it to the ON position. The passenger's front air bag OFF indi- cator will go out. WARNING The front air bag ON/OFF switch could turn by using a similar small rigid device. Always check the status of the front air bag ON/OFF switch and passenger's front air bag OFF in- dicator. NOTICE · When the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the ON position, the passenger's front air bag is activated and a child or infant seat should not be installed on the front passenger seat. · When the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position, the passenger's front air bag is deactivated. CAUTION · If the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is not working properly, the air bag warning light ( ) on the instrument panel will illuminate and the passenger's front air bag OFF indicator ( ) will not illuminate. (The passenger's front air bag ON indicator comes 4 on and goes off after approxi- mately 60 seconds.) The SRS Con- trol Module reactivates the pas- senger's front air bag and the pas- senger's front air bag will inflate in frontal impact crashes even if the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch is set to the OFF position. If this occurs, we recommend that the system be inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. · If the SRS air bag warning light blinks or does not illuminate when the engine start/stop button is in the ON position, or if it illuminates while the vehicle is being driven, we recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. 4-55 Safety features of your vehicle WARNING · The driver is responsible for the proper position of the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch. · Deactivate the passenger's front air bag only when the Engine Start/Stop button is in the OFF po- sition, or the malfunction may oc- cur in the SRS Control Module. And there may be a danger that the driver's and/or front passenger's and/or side and curtain air bag may fail to trigger, or not trigger correctly during a collision. · Never install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger's seat unless the passenger's front air bag has been deactivated. The infant or child could be severely in- jured or killed by an air bag deploy- ment in case of an accident. (Continued) (Continued) · Even though your vehicle is equip- ped with the passenger's front air bag ON/OFF switch, do not install a child restraint system in the front passenger's seat. A child restraint system must never be placed in the front seat. Children who are too large for child restraint sys- tems should always occupy the rear seat and use the available lap/ shoulder belts. Children are affor- ded the most safety in the event of an accident when they are re- strained by a proper restraint sys- tem in the rear seat. · As soon as the child seat is no lon- ger needed on the front passeng- er's seat, reactivate the front pas- senger's air bag. Side air bag 0+' 4-56 0+' The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Your vehicle is equipped with a side air bag in each front seat. The purpose of the air bag is to provide the vehicle's driver and/or the front passenger with additional protection to that offered by the seat belt alone. The side air bags are designed to de- ploy only during certain side impact col- lisions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. How- ever, when the side deployment threshold is satisfied at front-impact, the side air bags may deploy. The side air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impact or rollover situations. The side air bags may deploy on the side of the impact or on both sides. WARNING Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies onto doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window, or place objects between the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and/or cur- tain air bags. NOTICE n if equipped with rollover sen- sor · Both sides of the side air bags de- ploy in certain rollover situations. · The side air bag may deploy when the rollover sensor detects the sit- uation as a rollover. WARNING · The side air bag is supplemental to the driver's and the passenger's seat belt systems and is not a substitute for them. Therefore, your seat belts must be worn at all times while the vehicle is in mo- tion. The air bags deploy only in certain side impact or rollover* conditions severe enough to cause significant injury to the vehicle oc- cupants. (Continued) *: Only vehicles equipped with rollover sensor. (Continued) · For best protection from the side air bag system and to avoid being injured by the deploying side air bag, both front seat occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belt properly fas- tened. The driver's hands should be placed on the steering wheel at 4 the 9:00 and 3:00 positions. The passenger's arms and hands should be placed on their laps. · Do not use any accessory seat covers. · Use of seat covers could reduce or prevent the effectiveness of the system. · Do not install any accessories on the side or near the side air bag. · Do not place any objects over the air bag or between the air bag and yourself. · Do not place any objects (an um- brella, bag, etc.) between the front door and the front seat. Such ob- jects may become dangerous pro- jectiles and cause injury if the sup- plemental side air bag inflates. (Continued) 4-57 Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle (Continued) · To prevent unexpected deploy- ment of the side air bag that may result in personal injury, avoid im- pact to the side impact sensor when the engine start/stop button is in the ON position. · If the seat or seat cover is dam- aged, we recommend that the system be serviced by an author- ized Kia dealer. Curtain air bag 0+' Curtain air bags are located along both sides of the roof rails above the front and rear doors. They are designed to help protect the heads of the front seat occupants and the rear outboard seat occupants in certain side impact collisions. The curtain air bags are designed to deploy during certain side impact colli- sions, depending on the crash severity, angle, speed and point of impact. How- ever, when the side deployment threshold is satisfied at front impact, the side air bags may deploy. The curtain air bags may deploy on the side of the impact side. The curtain air bags are not designed to deploy in all side impacts or rollover situations. 0+' The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. NOTICE n if equipped with rollover sen- sor · Both sides of the curtain air bags deploy in certain rollover situa- tions. (Continued) 4-58 (Continued) · The curtain air bag may deploy when the rollover sensor detects the situation as a rollover. WARNING · In order for side and curtain air bags to provide the best protec- tion, front seat occupants and outboard rear occupants should sit in an upright position with the seat belts properly fastened. Impor- tantly, children should sit in a proper child restraint system in the rear seat. · When children are seated in the rear outboard seats, they must be seated in the proper child restraint system. Make sure to position the child restraint system as far away from the door side as possible, and secure the child restraint system in a locked position. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not allow the passengers to lean their heads or bodies against doors, put their arms on the doors, stretch their arms out of the window or place objects be- tween the doors and passengers when they are seated on seats equipped with side and curtain air bags. · Never try to open or repair any components of the side curtain air bag system. We recommend that the system be serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Failure to follow the above instruc- tions can result in injury or death to the vehicle occupants in an accident. 4 4-59 Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle Why didn't my air bag go off in a collision? The actual shape may differ from the illustration. Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag There are many types of accidents in which the air bag would not be expec- ted to provide additional protection. These include rear impacts, second or third collisions in multiple impact acci- dents, as well as low speed impacts. Air bag collision sensors 1. SRS control module / Rollover sen- sor (if equipped) 2. Front impact sensor 3. Side impact sensor (if equipped) 4. Side impact sensor (if equipped) 5. Side impact sensor (if equipped) 0+'0+')-0+'0+'0+' 4-60 Safety features of your vehicle WARNING · Do not hit or allow any objects to impact the locations where air bags or sensors are installed. This may cause unexpected air bag deployment, which could re- sult in serious personal injury or death. · If the installation location or angle of the sensors is altered in any way, the air bags may deploy when they should not or they may not deploy when they should, causing severe injury or death. Therefore, do not try to perform maintenance on or around the air bag sensors. We recommend that the system be serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. · Problems may arise if the sensor installation angles are changed due to the deformation of the front bumper, body or front door and C pillars where side collision sensors are installed. We recommend that the system be serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. (Continued) (Continued) Air bag inflation conditions · Your vehicle has been designed to Front air bags absorb impact and deploy the air bag(s) in certain collisions. Instal- ling bumper guards or replacing a bumper with non-genuine parts may adversely affect your vehi- cle's collision and air bag deploy- ment performance. 4 WARNING n if equipped with rollover sen- sor If your vehicle is equipped with side and curtain air bags, set the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF posi- tion when the vehicle is being towed. The side and curtain air bags may deploy when the engine start/stop button is in the ON position, and the rollover sensor detects the situation as a rollover. 0+' Front air bags are designed to inflate in a frontal collision depending on the in- tensity, speed or angles of impact of the front collision. 4-61 Safety features of your vehicle Side and curtain air bags 0+' The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. Side and curtain air bags are designed to inflate when an impact is detected by the side collision sensors depending on the strength, speed or angles of im- pact resulting from a side impact colli- sion. Although the front air bags (driver's and front passenger's air bags) are de- signed to inflate only in frontal colli- sions, they also may inflate in other types of collisions if the front impact sensors detect a sufficient impact. Side air bags (side and/or curtain air bags) are designed to inflate only in side im- pact collisions, but they may inflate in other collisions if the side impact sen- sors detect a sufficient impact. If the vehicle chassis is impacted by bumps or objects on unimproved roads or sidewalks, the air bags may deploy. Drive carefully on unimproved roads or on surfaces not designed for vehicle traffic to prevent unintended air bag deployment. NOTICE n if equipped with a rollover sensor (Continued) (Continued) The side and curtain air bags are de- signed to inflate when a rollover is detected by a rollover sensor. Air bag non-inflation conditions 0+' · In certain low-speed collisions the air bags may not deploy. The air bags are designed not to deploy in such cases because they may not provide benefits beyond the protection of the seat belts in such collisions. 4-62 Safety features of your vehicle 4 0+' · Air bags are not designed to inflate in rear collisions, because occupants are moved backward by the force of the impact. In this case, inflated air bags would not be able to provide any ad- ditional benefit. · Front air bags may not inflate in side impact collisions, because occupants move to the direction of the collision, and thus in side impacts, front air bag deployment would not provide additional occupant protection. However, if equipped with side and curtain air bags, the air bags may in- flate depending on the intensity, ve- hicle speed and angles of impact. 0+' · In an angled collision, the force of im- pact may direct the occupants in a di- rection where the air bags would not be able to provide any additional ben- efit, and thus the sensors may not deploy any air bags. 4-63 Safety features of your vehicle 0+' · Just before impact, drivers often brake heavily. Such heavy braking lowers the front portion of the vehi- cle causing it to ride under a vehicle with a higher ground clearance. Air bags may not inflate in this "underride" situation because deceleration forces that are detected by sensors may be significantly reduced by such under-ride collisions. · Front air bags may not inflate in roll- over accidents because front air bag deployment would not provide addi- tional occupant protection. NOTICE Side and/or curtain air bags may in- flate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehi- cle is equipped with side air bags and curtain air bags. · Air bags may not inflate if the vehicle collides with objects such as utility poles or trees, where the point of im- pact is concentrated to one area and the full force of the impact is not de- livered to the sensors. NOTICE n if equipped with rollover sen- sor However, if equipped with side and curtain air bags, the air bags may in- flate in a rollover, when it is detec- ted by the rollover sensor. 4-64 NOTICE n without rollover sensor However, side and/or curtain air bags may inflate when the vehicle is rolled over by a side impact collision, if the vehicle is equipped with side air bags and curtain air bags. SRS Care The SRS is virtually maintenance-free and so there are no parts you can safe- ly service by yourself. If the SRS air bag warning light does not illuminate, or continuously remains on, we recom- mend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING · Modification to SRS components or wiring, including the addition of any kind of badges to the pad cov- ers or modifications to the body structure, can adversely affect SRS performance and lead to pos- sible injury. · For cleaning the air bag pad cov- ers, use only a soft, dry cloth or one which has been moistened with plain water. Solvents or clean- ers could adversely affect the air bag covers and proper deployment of the system. · No objects should be placed over or near the air bag modules on the steering wheel, instrument panel, and the front passenger's panel above the glove box, because any such object could cause harm if the vehicle is in a crash severe enough to cause the air bags to in- flate. · If the air bags inflate, we recom- mend that the system be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not tamper with or disconnect SRS wiring, or other components of the SRS system. Doing so could result in injury, due to accidental inflation of the air bags or by ren- dering the SRS inoperative. · If components of the air bag sys- tem must be discarded, or if the 4 vehicle must be scrapped, certain safety precautions must be ob- served. An authorized Kia dealer knows these precautions and can give you the necessary informa- tion. Failure to follow these pre- cautions and procedures could in- crease the risk of personal injury. · If your car was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you shouldn't try to start the engine; we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. Additional safety precautions · Never let passengers ride in the cargo area or on top of a folded down back seat. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. 4-65 Safety features of your vehicle Safety features of your vehicle · Passengers should not move out of or change seats while the vehicle is moving. A passenger who is not wearing a seat belt during a crash or emergency stop can be thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against other occupants, or out of the vehicle. · Each seat belt is designed to restrain one occupant. If more than one per- son uses the same seat belt, they could be seriously injured or killed in a collision. · Do not use any accessories on seat belts. Devices claiming to improve oc- cupant comfort or reposition the seat belt can reduce the protection provi- ded by the seat belt and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. · Passengers should not place hard or sharp objects between themselves and the air bags. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap or in your mouth can result in injuries if an air bag inflates. · Keep occupants away from the air bag covers. All occupants should sit upright, fully back in their seats with their seat belts on and their feet on the floor. If occupants are too close to the air bag covers, they could be injured if the air bags inflate. · Do not attach or place objects on or near the air bag covers. Any object attached to or placed on the front or side air bag covers could interfere with the proper operation of the air bags. · Do not modify the front seats. Modi- fication of the front seats could in- terfere with the operation of the supplemental restraint system sens- ing components or side air bags. · Do not place items under the front seats. Placing items under the front seats could interfere with the opera- tion of the supplemental restraint system sensing components and wir- ing harnesses. · Never hold an infant or child on your lap. The infant or child could be seri- ously injured or killed in the event of a crash. All infants and children should be properly restrained in ap- propriate child safety seats or seat belts in the rear seat. WARNING · Sitting improperly or out of posi- tion can cause occupants to be shifted too close to a deploying air bag, strike the interior structure or be thrown from the vehicle re- sulting in serious injury or death. · Always sit upright with the seat- back in an upright position, cen- tered on the seat cushion with your seat belt on, legs comfortably extended and your feet on the floor. Adding equipment to or modifying your air bagequipped vehicle If you modify your vehicle by changing your vehicle's frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet metal or ride height, the operation of your vehicle's air bag system may be affected. 4-66 Air bag warning label 0+'$ Air bag warning labels are attached to alert the passengers of the potential risk of the air bag system. Note that these government warnings focus on the risk of children. We also want you to be aware of the risks which adults are exposed to and that have been described in Additional safe- ty precautions on page 4-65. 4 4-67 Safety features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Smart key................................................................................... 5-04 Record your key number..................................................... 5-04 Key operations...................................................................... 5-04 Immobilizer system.............................................................. 5-04 Smart key function...............................................................5-06 Smart key system operation.............................................. 5-06 Transmitter precautions......................................................5-08 Battery replacement............................................................ 5-09 Theft-alarm system ............................................................... 5-10 Armed stage.......................................................................... 5-10 Theft-alarm stage................................................................5-10 Disarmed stage..................................................................... 5-11 Door locks................................................................................... 5-12 Operating door locks from outside the vehicle................ 5-12 Operating door locks from inside the vehicle...................5-13 Door lock/unlock features................................................... 5-15 Child-protector rear door lock............................................ 5-15 Trunk........................................................................................... 5-16 Opening the trunk................................................................. 5-16 Closing the trunk................................................................... 5-16 Emergency trunk safety release .......................................5-17 Smart Trunk .............................................................................. 5-19 How to use the Smart Trunk.............................................. 5-19 How to deactivate the Smart Trunk function using the smart key............................................................. 5-21 Detecting area....................................................................... 5-21 Windows..................................................................................... 5-23 Power windows..................................................................... 5-23 Hood............................................................................................ 5-27 Opening the hood.................................................................. 5-27 Closing the hood.................................................................... 5-27 Fuel filler lid (Hybrid)................................................................ 5-29 Opening the fuel filler lid......................................................5-29 Closing the fuel filler lid........................................................5-29 Emergency fuel filler lid release......................................... 5-30 Fuel filler lid (Plug-In Hybrid).................................................. 5-31 Opening the fuel filler lid......................................................5-31 Closing the fuel filler lid........................................................5-32 Emergency fuel filler lid release......................................... 5-33 Panorama sunroof ................................................................... 5-35 Sunroof open warning..........................................................5-35 Sunshade................................................................................ 5-36 5 Sliding the sunroof................................................................5-37 Tilting the sunroof................................................................ 5-37 Closing the sunroof...............................................................5-37 Resetting the sunroof.......................................................... 5-38 Steering wheel...........................................................................5-40 Electric power steering........................................................ 5-40 Tilt & telescopic steering..................................................... 5-41 Heated steering wheel ........................................................ 5-42 Horn......................................................................................... 5-42 Mirrors........................................................................................ 5-44 Inside rearview mirror..........................................................5-44 Outside rearview mirror.......................................................5-45 Reverse parking aid function ............................................. 5-47 Instrument cluster.................................................................... 5-48 Instrument cluster control.................................................. 5-49 LCD display control............................................................... 5-50 Gauges.................................................................................... 5-51 Transaxle shift indicator...................................................... 5-54 LCD display ................................................................................ 5-56 LCD modes..............................................................................5-56 Service mode......................................................................... 5-57 User settings mode.............................................................. 5-58 Trip modes (Trip computer)................................................ 5-63 Turn by turn mode ...............................................................5-71 LDWS/LKAS ........................................................................... 5-71 A/V mode ...............................................................................5-71 Warning messages ...............................................................5-71 Warning and indicator lights................................................... 5-79 5 Warning lights........................................................................5-79 Indicator lights....................................................................... 5-84 Parking assist system ............................................................. 5-89 Operation of the parking assist system........................... 5-89 Non-operational conditions of parking assist system.... 5-92 Self-diagnosis........................................................................ 5-93 Smart Parking Assist System (SPAS) ................................... 5-95 Operating condition.............................................................. 5-96 Non-operating condition......................................................5-96 How the system works (Parking Mode)......................... 5-100 Additional instructions (messages) ................................ 5-105 System malfunction........................................................... 5-106 How the system works (Exit mode)................................5-106 Additional instructions (messages)................................. 5-110 System malfunction........................................................... 5-111 Rearview camera ................................................................... 5-112 Surround view monitoring system ..................................... 5-113 Lighting..................................................................................... 5-114 Battery saver function...................................................... 5-114 Headlight escort function .................................................5-114 Daytime running light ....................................................... 5-114 Lighting control................................................................... 5-114 High beam operation..........................................................5-116 High Beam Assist ...............................................................5-117 Turn signals and lane change signals.............................. 5-119 Rear fog light ......................................................................5-119 Headlight leveling device .................................................. 5-120 AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ........................ 5-121 Wipers and washers............................................................... 5-122 Windshield wipers............................................................... 5-122 Windshield washers............................................................5-124 Interior light............................................................................. 5-126 Automatic turn off function ............................................ 5-126 Map lamp..............................................................................5-126 Room lamp........................................................................... 5-127 Trunk room lamp ............................................................... 5-127 Glove box lamp ................................................................... 5-128 Vanity mirror lamp ............................................................ 5-128 Door courtesy lamp ...........................................................5-129 Welcome system ................................................................... 5-130 Welcome light ..................................................................... 5-130 Escort welcome ..................................................................5-130 Interior light......................................................................... 5-130 Defroster.................................................................................. 5-131 Rear window defroster......................................................5-131 Climate control system..........................................................5-132 System operation............................................................... 5-132 Air conditioning................................................................... 5-132 Climate control air filter.................................................... 5-134 Air conditioning refrigerant label..................................... 5-135 Checking the amount of air conditioner refriger- ant and compressor lubricant...........................................5-135 Automatic climate control system ................................. 5-137 Automatic heating and air conditioning..........................5-138 Windshield defrosting and defogging..................................5-146 Automatic climate control system.................................. 5-146 Operation tips......................................................................5-146 Defogging logic ...................................................................5-147 Auto defogging system (Only for automatic cli- mate control system)........................................................ 5-147 Clean air ...................................................................................5-149 Storage compartment........................................................... 5-150 5 Center console storage......................................................5-150 Glove box.............................................................................. 5-150 Sunglass holder................................................................... 5-151 Interior features......................................................................5-152 Cigarette lighter .................................................................5-152 Ashtray ................................................................................5-152 Cup holder............................................................................ 5-153 Sunvisor................................................................................ 5-154 Seat warmer .......................................................................5-155 Air ventilation seat ............................................................ 5-156 Power outlet........................................................................5-157 USB charger ........................................................................ 5-158 Wireless smart phone charging system ........................ 5-158 Clothes hanger ................................................................... 5-160 Floor mat anchor(s) ...........................................................5-161 Side curtain ......................................................................... 5-162 Features of your vehicle SMART KEY Record your key number The key code number is stamped on the key code tag attach- ed to the key set. Should you lose your keys, we recom- mend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. Remove the key code tag and store it in a safe place. Also, record the key code number and keep it in a safe place (not in the vehicle). Key operations 4NBSU,FZ 09.09. · Used to start the engine. · Used to lock and unlock the doors. · Used to lock and unlock the glove box. · Used to lock and unlock the trunk. To remove the mechanical key, press and hold the release button (1) and re- move the mechanical key (2). To reinstall the mechanical key, put the key into the hole and push it until a click sound is heard. WARNING n Ignition key (smart key) Leaving children unattended in a ve- hicle with the ignition key (smart key) is dangerous even if the key is not in the ignition or the start but- ton is in the ACC or ON position. Chil- dren copy adults and they could place the key in the ignition or press the start button. The smart key would enable children to operate power windows or other controls, or even make the vehicle move, which could result in serious bodily injury or even death. Never leave the keys in your vehicle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running. WARNING We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized Kia dealer. If an aftermarket key is used, the ignition switch may not re- turn to ON after START. If this hap- pens, the starter will continue to op- erate causing damage to the starter motor and possible fire due to ex- cessive current in the wiring. Immobilizer system Your vehicle may be equipped with an electronic engine immobilizer system to reduce the risk of unauthorized vehicle use. Your immobilizer system is comprised of a small transponder in the ignition key and electronic devices inside the vehicle. With the immobilizer system, whenever the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position, it checks and determines and verifies if the igni- tion key is valid or not. If the key is determined to be valid, the engine will start. If the key is determined to be invalid, the engine will not start. 5-04 Features of your vehicle To activate the immobilizer system: Change the engine start/stop button to the OFF position. The immobilizer sys- tem activates automatically. Without a valid ignition key for your vehicle, the engine will not start. To deactivate the immobilizer system: Change the engine start/stop button to the ON position. WARNING In order to prevent theft of your ve- hicle, do not leave spare keys any- where in your vehicle. Your immobil- izer password is a customer unique password and should be kept confi- dential. Do not leave this number anywhere in your vehicle. (Continued) ter it starts. Keep each key sepa- rately in order to avoid a starting malfunction. CAUTION Do not put metal accessories near the ignition switch. Metal accesso- ries may interrupt the transponder signal and may prevent the engine from being started. NOTICE If you need additional keys or lose your keys, we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer. NOTICE When starting the engine, do not use the key with other immobilizer keys around. Otherwise the engine may not start or may stop soon af- (Continued) CAUTION The transponder in your ignition key is an important part of the immobil- izer system. It is designed to give years of trouble-free service. How- (Continued) (Continued) ever, you should avoid exposure to moisture, static electricity and rough handling. Immobilizer system mal- function could occur. CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjust the immobilizer system because it could 5 cause the immobilizer system to malfunction. We recommend that the system be serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Malfunctions caused by improper alterations, ad- justments or modifications to the immobilizer system are not covered by your vehicle manufacturer war- ranty. 5-05 Features of your vehicle Smart key function 06.-$ Lock (1) All doors (and trunk) are locked if the lock button is pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once to indicate that all doors (and trunk) are locked. Unlock (2) All doors (and trunk) are unlocked if the unlock button is pressed. The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that all doors (and trunk) are unlocked. However, after pressing this button, the doors (and trunk) will lock automat- ically unless you open any door within 30 seconds. Trunk unlock (3) The trunk is unlocked if the button is pressed for more than 1 second. The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the trunk is un- locked. However, after pressing this button, the trunk will lock automatically unless you open the trunk within 30 seconds. Also, once the trunk is opened and then closed, the trunk will lock automatically. Smart key system operation 09. With a smart key, you can lock or un- lock a door (and trunk) and even start the engine without inserting the key. Carrying the smart key, you may lock and unlock the vehicle doors (and trunk). Also, you may start the engine. Refer to the following for more details. 5-06 Features of your vehicle Locking · The smart key is in the vehicle. Also, once the trunk is opened and then · The ENGINE START/STOP button is in closed, the trunk will lock automatically. the ACC or ON position. Start-up · Any door except the trunk is opened. You can start the engine without in- serting the key. For detailed informa- Unlocking tion refer to Starting the engine with a Pressing the button of the front out- smart key on page 7-08. side door handles with all doors (and trunk) closed and locked, unlocks all the Restrictions in handling keys doors (and trunk). The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that all 5 doors (and trunk) are unlocked. The button will only operate when the 0+' smart key is within 0.7 ~ 1 m (28 ~ 40 in) from the outside door han- Pressing the button of the front out- side door handles with all doors (and trunk) closed and any door unlocked, locks all the doors (and trunk). The haz- ard warning lights will blink once to in- dicate that all doors (and trunk) are dle. When the smart key is recognized in the area of 0.7 ~ 1 m (28 ~ 40 in) from the front outside door handle, other people can also open a door without possession of the smart key. locked. The button will only operate Trunk unlocking when the smart key is within 0.7 ~ 1 m If you are within 0.7 ~ 1 m (28 ~ 40 in) 0+'- (28 ~ 40 in) from the outside door han- dle. If you want to make sure that a door has locked or not, you should check the door lock button inside the vehicle or pull the outside door handle. Even though you press the button, the doors will not lock and the chime sounds if any of the following occurs: from the outside trunk handle, with your smart key in possession, the trunk will unlock and open when you press the trunk handle switch. The hazard warning lights will blink twice to indicate that the trunk is un- locked. When leaving keys with parking lot and valet attendants, the following proce- dures will ensure that your vehicle s glove box compartment can not be opened in your absence. 1. Press and hold the release button (1) and remove the mechanical key (2). 5-07 Features of your vehicle 2. Close and then lock the glove box using the mechanical key. 3. Leave the smart key with the at- tendant. The glove box can not be opened without the mechanical key. Transmitter precautions The smart key will not work if any of the following occurs: · Another vehicle s smart key is being operated close to your vehicle. · You exceed the operating distance limit (about 10 m [30 feet]). · The battery in the transmitter is weak. · Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. · The weather is extremely cold. · The smart key is close to a radio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter. · If the smart key is in close proximity to your cell phone or smart phone, the signal from the smart key could be blocked by normal operation of your cell phone or smart phone. This is especially important when the phone is active such as when making calls, receiving calls, text messaging, and/or sending/receiving emails. Avoid placing the smart key and your cell phone or smart phone in the same pants or jacket pocket and maintain adequate distance between the two devices. When the smart key does not work correctly, open and close the door with the mechanical key. If you have a prob- lem with the smart key, we recom- mend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION Keep the smart key away from wa- ter or any liquid. If the smart key is inoperative due to exposure to water or other liquids, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle war- ranty. CAUTION Changes or modifications not ex- pressly approved by the party re- sponsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. If the keyless entry sys- tem is inoperative due to changes or modifications not expressly ap- proved by the party responsible for compliance, it will not be covered by your manufacturer's vehicle warran- ty. 5-08 Battery replacement For smart key replacement, we recom- mend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. 09.$ A smart key uses a 3 volt lithium bat- tery which will normally last for several years. When replacement is necessary, use the following procedure. 1. Pry open the rear cover of the smart key. 2. Replace the battery with a new battery (CR2032). When replacing the battery, pay attention to the battery position. 3. Install the battery in the reverse order of removal. CAUTION · If you are unsure how to use or re- place the battery, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. · Using the wrong battery can cause the smart key to malfunction. Be sure to use the correct battery. · To avoid damaging the transmit- ter, don't drop it, get it wet, or ex- pose it to heat or sunlight. NOTICE An inappropriately disposed battery can be harmful to the environment and human health. Dispose the battery according to your local law(s) or regulation. 5 5-09 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) "SNFE TUBHF %JTBSNFE TUBHF 5IFGUBMBSN TUBHF This system is designed to provide pro- tection from unauthorized entry into the vehicle. This system is operated in three stages: the first is the "Armed" stage, the second is the "Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the system provides an audible alarm with blinking of the hazard warning lights. Armed stage Park the vehicle and stop the engine. Arm the system as described below. 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Make sure that all doors, the en- gine hood and trunk are closed and latched. 3. · Lock the doors by pressing the button of the front outside door handle with the smart key in your possession. After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will operate once to indicate that the system is armed. If the trunk or engine hood re- mains opened, the hazard warn- ing lights will not operate and theft-alarm will not arm. After this, if the trunk and engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once and the theft-alarm will arm. · Lock the doors by pressing the lock button on the smart key. After completion of the steps above, the hazard warning lights will operate once to indicate that the system is armed. If the trunk or engine hood re- mains opened, the hazard warn- ing lights will not operate and theft-alarm will not arm. After this, if the trunk and engine hood are closed, the hazard warning lights will blink once and the theft-alarm will arm. Do not arm the system until all passen- gers have left the vehicle. If the system is armed while a passenger(s) remains in the vehicle, the alarm may be activa- ted when the remaining passenger(s) leaves the vehicle. If any door (or trunk) or engine hood is opened within 30 sec- onds after the system enters the armed stage, the system will be dis- armed to prevent unnecessary alarm. Theft-alarm stage The alarm will be activated if any of the following occurs while the system is armed. · A front or rear door is opened with- out using the smart key. · The trunk is opened without using the smart key. · The engine hood is opened. The horn will sound and the hazard warning lights will blink continuously for approximately 27 seconds. Then, an alarm will sound two times with 10 seconds interval. If the alarm situation does not change after the alarm has sounded, it will go off again. To turn off the system, unlock the doors with the smart key. 5-10 Disarmed stage The system will be disarmed when: - The door unlock button is pressed. - The button of the front outside door is pressed while carrying the smart key. - The engine is started (within 3 sec- onds). After the doors are unlocked, the haz- ard warning lights will blink twice to in- dicate that the system is disarmed. After pressing the unlock button, if any door (or trunk) is not opened within 30 seconds, the system will be rearmed. NOTICE · If the system is not disarmed with the smart key, open the door with the mechanical key and start the engine. Then the system will be disarmed. · If you lose your keys, we recom- mend that you consult an author- ized Kia dealer. CAUTION Do not change, alter or adjust the theft-alarm system because it could cause the theft-alarm system to malfunction and we recommend that the system be serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Malfunctions caused by improper al- terations, adjustments or modifica- tions to the theft-alarm system are not covered by your vehicle manu- facturer warranty. 5 5-11 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle DOOR LOCKS Operating door locks from outside the vehicle CAUTION Be careful not to damage the cover while removing it or to misplace it after removing it. To remove the cover 1. Pull out the door handle. 2. Press the lever (3) located inside the bottom part of the cover with a key or flat-head screwdriver. 3. Push out the cover (4) while press- ing the lever. · Turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle to unlock and toward the front of the vehicle to lock. · If you Lock (1)/Unlock (2) the driver s door with a key, all vehicle doors will lock/unlock automatically. · Doors can also be locked and un- locked with the smart key. · Once the doors are unlocked, they may be opened by pulling the door handle. · When closing the door, push the door by hand. Make sure the doors are closed securely. NOTICE · In cold and wet climates, door lock and door mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing con- ditions. · If the door is locked/unlocked mul- tiple times in rapid succession with either the vehicle key or door lock switch, the system may stop op- erating temporarily in order to protect the circuit and prevent damage to system components. WARNING · If you don't close the door secure- ly, the door may open again. · Be careful that someone's body and hands are not trapped when closing the door. 5-12 In case of an emergency Operating door locks from inside the vehicle With the door inner door handle (for Type A) With the door lock button (for Type B) Features of your vehicle 5 0+')1- If the power door lock switch does not operate electrically, the only way to lock the door(s) is with the mechanical key from the outside key hole. You can lock the doors without the out- side key hole as follows: 1. Open the door. 2. Insert the key into the emergency door lock hole and turn the key horizontally to lock (1). 3. Close the door securely. 0+'- Driver s door and front passenger s door If the inner door handle is pulled when the door is locked, the door will unlock and open. Rear door If the inner door handle is pulled once when the door is locked, the door will unlock. If the inner door handle is pulled once more, the door will open. · To unlock a door, pull the door lock button (1) to the Unlock position. The red mark on the button will be visible. · To lock a door, push the door lock button (1) to the Lock position. If the door is locked properly, the red mark on the door lock button will not be visible. · To open a door, pull the door handle (2) outward. 5-13 Features of your vehicle · If the inner door handle of the front door/all doors (if equipped) is pulled when the door lock button is in the lock position, the button is unlocked and the door will open. (if equipped) · Doors cannot be locked if the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened. With central door lock switch WARNING n Door lock malfunction If a power door lock ever fails to function while you are in the vehicle, try one or more of the following techniques to exit: · Operate the door unlock feature repeatedly (both electronic and manual) while simultaneously pull- ing on the door handle. · Operate the other door locks and handles, front and rear. · Lower a front window and use the key to unlock the door from out- side. · Move to the cargo area and open the trunk. 0+' Operate by pressing the central door lock switch. · When pressing the right portion (1) of the switch, all vehicle doors will lock. · When pressing the left portion (2) of the switch, all vehicle doors will un- lock. · If the smart key is in the vehicle and any door is opened, the doors will not lock even though the right portion (1) of the central door lock switch is pressed. WARNING n Doors · The doors should always be fully closed and locked while the vehicle is in motion to prevent accidental opening of the door. Locked doors will also discourage potential in- truders when the vehicle stops or slows down. · Be careful when opening doors and watch for vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles or pedestrians approach- ing the vehicle in the path of the door. Opening a door when some- thing is approaching can cause damage or injury. WARNING n Unlocked vehicles Leaving your vehicle unlocked can in- vite theft or possible harm to you or others from someone hiding in your vehicle while you are gone. Always press the engine start/stop button to the OFF position, engage the (Continued) 5-14 Features of your vehicle (Continued) parking brake, close all windows and lock all doors when leaving your ve- hicle unattended. WARNING n Unattended children Speed sensing door lock system (if equipped) All doors will automatically lock after the vehicle speed exceeds 15 km/h. You can activate or deactivate the auto door lock/unlock features in the vehicle. Refer to User setting on page 5-58. Child-protector rear door lock The child safety lock is located on the edge of each rear door. When the child safety lock is in the lock position (1), the rear door will not open if the inner door handle (2) is pulled. To lock the child safety lock, insert a key (or screwdriver) into the hole and turn it to the lock position. To allow a rear door to be opened from inside the vehicle, unlock the child safe- ty lock. An enclosed vehicle can become ex- tremely hot, causing death or severe injury to unattended children or ani- 5 WARNING mals who cannot escape the vehicle. Furthermore, children might operate features of the vehicle that could in- jure them, or they could encounter other harm, possibly from someone gaining entry to the vehicle. Never leave children or animals unattended in your vehicle. n Rear door locks If children accidentally open the rear doors while the vehicle is in motion, they could fall out and be severely injured or killed. To prevent children from opening the rear doors from the inside, the rear door safety locks Door lock/unlock features 0+' should be used whenever children are in the vehicle. Impact sensing door unlock system The child safety lock is provided to help (if equipped) All doors will automatically unlock when an impact causes the air bags to de- ploy. prevent children from accidentally opening the rear doors from inside the vehicle. The rear door safety locks should be used whenever children are in the vehicle. 5-15 Features of your vehicle TRUNK Opening the trunk WARNING The trunk swings upward. Make sure no objects or people are near the rear of the vehicle when opening the trunk. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in P and set the parking brake. 2. Then do one of the following: - Press the Remote key or Smart Key Trunk Unlock button for more than one second. - Press the button on the trunk it- self with the Smart Key in your possession. - Use the mechanical key. CAUTION 0+' · To open the trunk from inside the ve- hicle, push the trunk lid release but- ton. Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehicle. Possible damage may occur to the attached hardware if the trunk is not closed prior to driving. NOTICE In cold and wet climates, trunk lock and trunk mechanisms may not work properly due to freezing condi- tions. Closing the trunk To close, lower the trunk lid, then press down on it until it locks. To be sure the trunk lid is securely fastened, always check by trying to pull it up again. WARNING The trunk lid should always be kept completely closed while the vehicle is in motion. If it is left open or ajar, poisonous exhaust gases may enter (Continued) 5-16 (Continued) the car and serious illness or death may result. NOTICE If the trunk is closed with the smart key in it, the chime will sound for ap- proximately 3 seconds and the trunk will reopen. WARNING n Exhaust fumes If you drive with the trunk open, you will draw dangerous exhaust fumes into your vehicle which can cause se- rious injury or death to vehicle occu- pants. If you must drive with the trunk open, keep the air vents and all win- dows open so that additional outside air comes into the vehicle. WARNING n Rear cargo area Occupants should never ride in the rear cargo area where no restraints are available. To avoid injury in the event of an accident or sudden stops, occupants should always be properly restrained. Emergency trunk safety release (if equipped) 5 Your vehicle is equipped with an emer- gency trunk release lever located inside the trunk. If someone is inadvertently locked in the trunk, moving the handle in the direction of the arrow will release the trunk latch mechanism and open the trunk. Features of your vehicle 5-17 Features of your vehicle WARNING · For emergencies, be fully aware of the location of the emergency trunk safety release lever in this vehicle and how to open the trunk if you are accidentally locked in the trunk. · No one should be allowed to occu- py the trunk at any time. The trunk is a very dangerous location in the event of a crash. · Use the release lever for emergen- cies only. Use extreme caution, es- pecially while the vehicle is in mo- tion. 5-18 Features of your vehicle SMART TRUNK (IF EQUIPPED) On a vehicle equipped with a smart key, the trunk can be opened with no-touch activation using the Smart Trunk sys- tem. How to use the Smart Trunk The trunk can be opened with no-touch activation satisfying all the conditions below. · After 15 seconds when all doors are closed and locked. · Positioned in the detecting area for more than 3 seconds. NOTICE · The Smart Trunk does not operate when: - The smart key is detected with- in 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and is continuously detected. - The smart key is detected with- in 15 seconds after the doors are closed and locked, and 1.5 m from the front door han- dles (for vehicles equipped with Welcome Light). - A door is not locked or closed. - The smart key is in the vehicle. 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 5 0+'- 0+'- 1. Setting To activate the Smart Trunk, go to User Settings Mode and select Smart Trunk on the LCD display. 5-19 Features of your vehicle For more details, refer to LCD Dis- play on page 5-56. 0+') 2. Detect and Alert If you are positioned in the detect- ing area (50 ~ 100 cm behind the vehicle) carrying a smart key, the hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound for about 3 seconds to alert you the smart key has been detected and the trunk will open. NOTICE Do not approach the detecting area if you do not want the trunk to (Continued) (Continued) open. If you have unintentionally en- tered the detecting area and the hazard warning lights and chime start to operate, leave the detecting area with the smart key. The trunk will stay closed. 3. Automatic opening The hazard warning lights will blink and the chime will sound 2 times and then the trunk will slowly open. WARNING · Make certain that you close the trunk before driving your vehicle. · Make sure there are no people or objects around the trunk before opening or closing the trunk. · Make sure objects in the rear cargo area do not come out when open- ing the trunk on a slope way. It may cause serious injury. · Make sure to deactivate the Smart Trunk function when washing your vehicle. Otherwise, the trunk may open in- advertently. · The key should be kept out of reach of children. Children may in- advertently open the Smart Trunk while playing around the rear area of the vehicle. 5-20 Features of your vehicle How to deactivate the Smart Trunk function using the smart key 1. Door lock 2. Door unlock 3. Trunk open If you press any button of the smart key during the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Trunk function will be deacti- vated. Make sure to be aware of how to deac- tivate the Smart Trunk function for emergency situations. NOTICE · If you press the door unlock but- ton (2), the Smart Trunk function will be deactivated temporarily. But, if you do not open any door for 30 seconds, the Smart Trunk function will be activated again. · If you press the trunk open button (3) for more than 1 second, the trunk opens. · If you press the door lock button (1) or trunk open button (3) when the Smart Trunk function is not in the Detect and Alert stage, the Smart Trunk function will not be deactivated. · In case you have deactivated the Smart Trunk function by pressing the smart key button and opened a door, the Smart Trunk function can be activated again by closing and locking all doors. Detecting area 5 · The Smart Trunk operates with a welcome alert if the smart key is de- tected within 50~100 cm from the trunk. · The alert stops at once if the smart key is positioned outside the detect- ing area during the Detect and Alert stage. 5-21 Features of your vehicle NOTICE · The Smart Trunk function will not work if any of the following oc- curs: - The smart key is close to a ra- dio transmitter such as a radio station or an airport which can interfere with normal operation of the transmitter. - The smart key is near a mobile two way radio system or a cel- lular phone. - An other vehicle's smart key is being operated close to your vehicle. · The detecting range may decrease or increase when: - One side of the vehicle is raised to replace a tire or to inspect the vehicle. - The vehicle is slantingly parked on a slope or unpaved road, etc. 5-22 WINDOWS 'SPOU 3FBS 1. Driver s door power window switch 2. Front passenger's door power win- dow switch 3. Rear door (left) power window switch 4. Rear door (right) power window switch 5. Window opening and closing* 5 6. Automatic power window up*/ down* 7. Power window lock button NOTICE In cold and wet climates, power win- dows may not work properly due to freezing conditions. Power windows The engine start/stop button must be in the ON position for power windows to operate. *: if equipped 5-23 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Each door has a power window switch that controls the door's window. The driver has a power window lock button which can block the operation of pas- senger windows. The power windows can be operated for approximately 30 seconds after engine is turned off. However, if the front doors are opened, the power windows cannot be operated even within the 30 second period. The driver s door has a master power window switch that controls all the windows in the vehicle. NOTICE While driving with the rear windows down or with the sunroof (if equip- ped) in an open (or partially open po- sition), your vehicle may demon- strate a wind buffeting or pulsation noise. This noise is a normal occur- rence and can be reduced or elimina- ted by taking the following actions. If the noise occurs with one or both of the rear windows down, partially lower both front windows approxi- mately one centimeter (one inch). If (Continued) (Continued) you experience the noise with the sunroof open, slightly reduce the size of the sunroof opening. Window opening and closing 0+' Type A To open or close a window, press down or pull up the front portion of the cor- responding switch to the first detent position (5). 0+'- Type B - Auto up/down window (if equipped) Pressing or pulling up the power win- dow switch momentarily to the second detent position (6) completely lowers or raises the window even when the switch is released. To stop the window at the desired position while the win- dow is in operation, pull up or press down and release the switch. If the power window does not operate normally, the automatic power window system must be reset as follows: 1. Place the engine start/stop button to the ON position. 5-24 Features of your vehicle 2. Close the window and continue pulling up the power window switch for at least 1 second after the win- dow is completely closed. And if the power window switch is pulled up continuously again within 5 seconds after the window is lowered by the automatic window reversal feature, the automatic window reversal will not operate. NOTICE (Continued) detect the resistance and will not stop and reverse direction. Power window lock button 06/ Automatic reversal (For Type B) If the upward movement of the window is blocked by an object or part of the body, the window will detect the resist- ance and will stop the upward move- ment. The window will then lower ap- proximately 30 cm (11.8 in.) to allow the object to be cleared. If the window detects the resistance while the power window switch is pulled up continuously, the window will stop the upward movement then lower approximately 2.5 cm (1 in.). The automatic reverse feature for the window is only active when the auto up feature is used by fully pulling up the switch. The automatic reverse feature will not operate if the window is raised using the half- way position on the power window switch. WARNING Always check for obstructions be- fore raising any window to avoid in- juries or vehicle damage. If an object less than 4 mm (0.16 in.) in diameter is caught between the window glass and the upper window channel, the automatic reverse window may not (Continued) 5 0+' The driver can disable the power win- dow switches on the rear passengers doors by pressing the power window lock button to the lock position (press- ed). When the power window lock button is pressed: 5-25 Features of your vehicle · The driver s master control can oper- ate the front passenger s power win- dow but cannot operate the rear pas- sengers' power windows. · The front passenger s control can op- erate the front passengers' power window. · The rear passengers control cannot operate the rear passengers' power window. CAUTION · To prevent possible damage to the power window system, do not open or close two windows or more at the same time. This will also ensure the longevity of the fuse. · Never try to operate the main switch on the driver's door and the individual door window switch in opposite directions at the same time. If this is done, the window will stop and cannot be opened or closed. WARNING n Windows · NEVER leave the keys in your vehi- cle with unsupervised children, when the engine is running. · NEVER leave any child unattended in the vehicle. Even very young children may inadvertently cause the vehicle to move, entangle themselves in the windows, or otherwise injure themselves or others. · Always double check to make sure all arms, hands, head and other obstructions are safely out of the way before closing a window. · Do not allow children to play with the power windows. Keep the driv- er's door power window lock but- ton in the LOCK position (pressed). Serious injury can result from un- intentional window operation by the child. · Do not extend heads or any limbs outside the window while the vehi- cle is in motion. 5-26 Features of your vehicle HOOD Opening the hood (Continued) transaxle, and setting the parking brake. 0+' 1. Pull the release lever to unlatch the hood. The hood should pop open slightly. WARNING Open the hood after turning off the engine on a flat surface, shifting the shift lever to the P (Park) position for automatic transaxle/dual clutch transmission and to the 1st (First) gear or R (Reverse) for manual (Continued) 0+')1- 2. Go to the front of the vehicle, raise the hood slightly, push the secon- dary latch (1) left side and lift the hood (2). 3. Raise the hood. It will completely rise by itself after it has been raised about halfway. Closing the hood 1. Before closing the hood, check the following: · All filler caps in the engine com- partment must be correctly in- stalled. · Gloves, rags or any other com- bustible material must be re- moved from the engine compart- ment. 2. Lower the hood halfway and push down to securely lock in place. WARNING 5 · Before closing the hood, ensure that all obstructions are removed from the hood opening. Closing the hood with an obstruction present in the hood opening may result in property damage or severe per- sonal injury. · Do not leave gloves, rags or any other combustible material in the engine compartment. Doing so may cause a heat-induced fire. 5-27 Features of your vehicle WARNING · Always double check to be sure that the hood is firmly latched be- fore driving away. If it is not latch- ed, the hood could open while the vehicle is being driven, causing to- tal loss of visibility, which might result in an accident. · Do not move the vehicle with the hood raised. The view will be blocked and the hood could fall or be damaged. 5-28 FUEL FILLER LID (HYBRID) Opening the fuel filler lid 0+' The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler lid button. NOTICE If the fuel filler lid does not open be- cause ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt. 1. Stop the engine. 2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel filler lid opener button. 3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1). 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler cap (2) counterclockwise (3). 5. Refuel as needed. Closing the fuel filler lid 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise 5 until it clicks . This indicates that the cap is securely tightened. 2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is se- curely closed. 0+'- Features of your vehicle 5-29 Features of your vehicle Emergency fuel filler lid release If the fuel filler lid does not open using the remote fuel filler lid release, you can open it manually. Remove the panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle out slightly. CAUTION Do not pull the handle excessively, otherwise the luggage compartment area trim or release handle may be damaged. 5-30 FUEL FILLER LID (PLUG-IN HYBRID) Opening the fuel filler lid NOTICE If the fuel filler lid does not open be- cause ice has formed around it, tap lightly or push on the lid to break the ice and release the lid. Do not pry on the lid. If necessary, spray around the lid with an approved de-icer fluid (do not use radiator antifreeze) or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt. 0+' The fuel filler lid must be opened from inside the vehicle by pushing the fuel filler lid button. 0+')1- 5 0+')1- 5-31 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Wait until the fuel tank is depressur- ized. The message is displayed when the fuel filler lid opens after the fuel tank is depressurized. NOTICE · It may take up to 20 seconds to open fuel filler door. · When the fuel filler door is frozen and does not open after 20 sec- onds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler door and then attempt to open it. 1. Stop the engine. 0+'- 2. To open the fuel filler lid, push the fuel filler lid opener button. 3. Pull open the fuel filler lid (1). 4. To remove the cap, turn the fuel filler cap (2) counterclockwise (3). 5. Refuel as needed. Closing the fuel filler lid 1. To install the cap, turn it clockwise until it clicks . This indicates that the cap is securely tightened. 2. Close the fuel filler lid and push it lightly and make sure that it is se- curely closed. WARNING · Add fuel into the fuel tank within 20 minutes after opening the fuel filler lid. After 20 minutes, the fuel tank may shut off, causing fuel to overflow. In this case, re-press the fuel filler lid opening button. · Do not leave the fuel filler door opened for an extended period of time. It may discharge the battery. · Close the fuel filler lid after fueling the vehicle. If you start the vehicle with the fuel filler lid opened, the message Check fuel door illumi- nates on the LCD display. · Avoid refueling the vehicle while charging the (high-voltage) hybrid battery. It may cause a fire or an explosion due to static electricity. WARNING n Refueling · If pressurized fuel sprays out, it can cover your clothes or skin and subject you to the risk of fire and burns. Always remove the fuel cap carefully and slowly. If the cap is venting fuel or if you hear a hiss- ing sound, wait until the condition stops before completely removing the cap. · Do not "top off" after the nozzle automatically shuts off when re- fueling. · Always check that the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an acci- dent. 5-32 Features of your vehicle Emergency fuel filler lid release CAUTION Do not pull the handle excessively, otherwise the luggage compartment area trim or release handle may be damaged. If the fuel filler lid does not open using the remote fuel filler lid release, you can open it manually. Remove the panel in the cargo area. Pull the handle out slightly. In this case, slowly open the fuel tank cap, because the fuel tank may be highly pressurized. If fuel leaks out, or if air hisses out, wait until it disappears, open the fuel tank cap, and slowly re- fuel the vehicle. If you quickly pour fuel into the fuel tank, the fuel may over- flow out of the fuel tank. WARNING n Refueling dangers Automotive fuels are flammable ma- terials. When refueling, please note the following guidelines carefully. Failure to follow these guidelines may result in severe personal injury, severe burns or death by fire or ex- plosion. · Read and follow all warnings pos- ted at the gas station facility. · Before refueling note the location of the Emergency Gasoline ShutOff, if available, at the gas station facility. (Continued) (Continued) · Before touching the fuel nozzle, you should eliminate potentially dangerous static electricity dis- charge by touching another metal part of the vehicle, a safe distance away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle, or other gas source. · Do not get back into a vehicle once you have begun refueling since you can generate static electricity by 5 touching, rubbing or sliding against any item or fabric (polyester, sat- in, nylon, etc.) capable of produc- ing static electricity. Static elec- tricity discharge can ignite fuel va- pors resulting in rapid burning. If you must reenter the vehicle, you should once again eliminate poten- tially dangerous static electricity discharge by touching a metal part of the vehicle, away from the fuel filler neck, nozzle or other gasoline source. (Continued) 5-33 Features of your vehicle (Continued) · When using an approved portable fuel container, be sure to place the container on the ground prior to refueling. Static electricity dis- charge from the container can ig- nite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling has begun, contact with the vehicle should be main- tained until the filling is complete. Use only approved portable plastic fuel containers designed to carry and store gasoline. · Do not use cellular phones while refueling. Electric current and/or electronic interference from cellu- lar phones can potentially ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. · When refueling, always shut the engine off. Sparks produced by electrical components related to the engine can ignite fuel vapors causing a fire. Once refueling is complete, check to make sure the filler cap and filler door are secure- ly closed, before starting the en- gine. (Continued) (Continued) · DO NOT use matches or a lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or leave a lit cigarette in your vehicle while at a gas station especially during refu- eling. Automotive fuel is highly flammable and can, when ignited, result in fire. · If a fire breaks out during refuel- ing, leave the vicinity of the vehi- cle, and immediately contact the manager of the gas station and then contact the local fire depart- ment. Follow any safety instruc- tions they provide. CAUTION · Make sure to refuel your vehicle according to Fuel requirements on page 2-03. (Continued) (Continued) · If the fuel filler cap requires re- placement, please make sure that you use parts designed for re- placement in your vehicle. An in- correct fuel filler cap can result in a serious malfunction of the fuel system or emission control sys- tem. For more detailed informa- tion, we recommend that you con- tact an authorized Kia dealer. · Do not spill fuel on the exterior surfaces of the vehicle. Any type of fuel spilled on painted surfaces may damage the paint. · After refueling, make sure the fuel cap is installed securely to prevent fuel spillage in the event of an ac- cident. 5-34 Features of your vehicle PANORAMA SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED) CAUTION n Sunroof control lever Do not continue to move the sunroof control lever after the sunroof is fully opened, closed, or tilted. Dam- age to the motor or system compo- nents could occur. 0+' If your vehicle is equipped with a sun- roof, you can slide or tilt your sunroof with the sunroof control lever located on the overhead console. The sunroof can be operated for ap- proximately 30 seconds when the en- gine start/stop button is in the ON po- sition. However, if the front doors are opened, the sunroof cannot be opened even within the 30 seconds period. · In cold and wet climates, the sunroof may not work properly due to freez- ing conditions. · After the vehicle is washed or in a rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any water that is on the sunroof before operating it. CAUTION Make sure the sunroof is fully closed when leaving your vehicle. If the sunroof is opened, rain or snow may leak through the sunroof and wet the interior as well as cause theft. WARNING n Sunroof break The sunroof, which is made of glass, may break if a sufficient impact is applied. In this case, in an accident, any improperly belted occupant may be tossed out of the vehicle through (Continued) (Continued) the sunroof, possibly resulting into injury. To minimize all the possible accident risks, all occupants must be properly belted and, in case of a child, be fastened in a proper child restraint. Sunroof open warning 5 0+'- If the driver turns off the engine when the sunroof is not fully closed, the warning chime will sound for approxi- mately 7 seconds and a message will appear on the LCD display. 5-35 Features of your vehicle Close the sunroof securely when leav- Sunshade ing your vehicle. WARNING · Never adjust the sunroof or sun- shade while driving. This could re- sult in loss of control and an acci- dent that may cause death, seri- ous injury, or property damage. · If you would like to carry items on the roof using a cross bar, do not operate the sunroof. · When carrying cargo on the roof, do not load heavy items above the sunroof or glass roof. · Do not allow children to operate the sunroof. CAUTION Do not extend any luggage outside the sunroof while driving. 0+'- To open the sunshade Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the 1st detent position. To close the sunshade when the sunroof glass is closed Push the sunroof control lever forward or pull it down to the 1st detent posi- tion. To stop the sliding at any point, press the sunshade control switch momen- tarily. NOTICE Wrinkles formed on the sunshade as material characteristic are normal. CAUTION · Do not pull or push the sunshade by hand. It could cause sunshade failure. · Close the sunroof when driving through dusty roads. Dust may cause a malfunction of the vehicle system. 5-36 Features of your vehicle Sliding the sunroof The front part of the sunroof glass can only be opened and closed. Tilting the sunroof Closing the sunroof To close the sunroof glass with the sunshade Push the sunroof control lever forward or downward to the 2nd detent posi- tion. The sunroof glass and sunshade will close automatically. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. 5 To close the sunroof glass only 0+'- When the sunshade is closed Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the 2nd detent position, the sun- shade and sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof move- ment at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. When the sunshade is opened 0+'- When the sunshade is closed Push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunshade will slide halfway open, then the sunroof glass will tilt. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. Push the sunroof control lever forward. The sunroof glass will close automati- cally. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. Pull the sunroof control lever backward to the 1st or 2nd detent position, the sunroof glass will slide all the way open. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. When the sunshade is opened Push the sunroof control lever upward, the sunroof glass will tilt. To stop the sunroof movement at any point, push the sunroof control lever momentarily. 5-37 Features of your vehicle Automatic reversal 0:' If an object or part of the body is de- tected while the sunroof glass or sun- shade is closing automatically, it will re- verse the direction, and then stop. The auto reverse function does not work if a tiny obstacle is between the sliding glass or sunshade and the sun- roof sash. You should always check that all passengers and objects are away from the sunroof before closing it. WARNING n Sunroof (Continued) (Continued) · Be careful that no head, hands and body parts are obstructed by a closing sunroof. · Do not extend the face, neck, arms or body outside the sunroof while driving. · Make sure your hands and head are safely out of the way before closing a sunroof. · A panorama sunroof is made of glass, therefore it may break in an accident. If you do not have your seat belt on, you may stick out of the broken glass and get injured or killed. For all passengers' safety, have an appropriate protection on (ex. seat belt, CRS, etc.). CAUTION · Periodically remove any dirt that may accumulate on the guide rail. · If you drive with the sunroof opened right after a car wash or rain, water may get inside the ve- hicle. CAUTION n Sunroof motor damage If you try to open the sunroof when the temperature is below freezing or when the sunroof is covered with snow or ice, the glass or the motor could be damaged. Resetting the sunroof Whenever the vehicle battery is discon- nected or discharged, you must reset your sunroof system as follows: 1. Start the engine. 2. Close the sunshade and sunroof completely if opened. 3. Release the sunroof control lever. 4. Push the sunroof control lever for- ward in the direction of close (about 10 seconds) until the sun- shade slightly moves. Then, release the lever. 5-38 5. Push the sunroof control lever for- ward in the direction of close, until the sunroof operates as follows again: Sunshade Open Glass Slide Open Glass Slide Close Sunshade Close Then, release the lever. When this is complete, the sunroof sys- tem has been reset. NOTICE If you do not reset the sunroof, it may not work properly. 5 5-39 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle STEERING WHEEL Electric power steering Power steering uses the motor to as- sist you in steering the vehicle. If the engine is off or if the power steering system becomes inoperative, the vehi- cle may still be steered, but it will re- quire increased steering effort. The motor driven power steering is controlled by the power steering con- trol unit which senses the steering wheel torque and vehicle speed to com- mand the motor. The steering effort becomes heavier as the vehicle s speed increases and be- comes lighter as the vehicle s speed de- creases for better control of the steer- ing wheel. Should you notice any change in the ef- fort required to steer during normal ve- hicle operation, we recommend that the system be checked by an author- ized Kia dealer. NOTICE The following symptoms may occur during normal vehicle operation: (Continued) (Continued) · The EPS warning light does not il- luminate. · The steering effort is high imme- diately after turning the engine start/stop button to the ON posi- tion. This happens as the EPS system performs the diagnostics. When the diagnostics is completed, the steering effort will return to its normal condition. · A click noise may be heard from the EPS relay after the engine start/stop button is in the ON po- sition. · Motor noise may be heard when the vehicle is at a stop or at a low driving speed. (Continued) (Continued) · The steering effort can suddenly increase if the operation of the EPS system is stopped to prevent serious accidents when the EPS control unit detects a malfunction of the EPS system by self-diagno- sis. · The steering effort increases if the steering wheel is rotated con- tinuously when the vehicle is not in motion. However, after a few minutes, it will return to its normal conditions. · If the Electronic Power Steering System does not operate normal- ly, the warning light will illuminate on the instrument cluster. The steering wheel may become diffi- cult to control or operate abnor- mally. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. (Continued) 5-40 Features of your vehicle (Continued) (Continued) NOTICE · When you operate the steering wheel in a low temperature, ab- normal noise could occur. If the temperature rises, the noise will disappear. This is a normal condi- tion. · After adjusting, push the steering wheel both up and down to be cer- tain it is locked in position. After adjustment, sometimes the lock-release lever may not lock the steering wheel. It is not a malfunction. This occurs when two gears engage. In this case, adjust the steering wheel again and then lock the steering wheel. Tilt & telescopic steering A tilt and telescopic steering wheel al- 5 lows you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive. You can also raise it to give your legs more room when you exit and enter the vehicle. The steering wheel should be posi- tioned so that it is comfortable for you to drive, while permitting you to see the instrument panel warning lights 0+' and gauges. To change the steering wheel angle, pull down the lock release lever (1), ad- WARNING just the steering wheel to the desired angle (2) and height (3), then pull up · Never adjust the angle of the steering wheel while driving. You may lose steering control and cause severe personal injury, the lock-release lever (4) to lock the steering wheel in place. Be sure to ad- just the steering wheel to the desired position before driving. death or accidents. (Continued) 5-41 Features of your vehicle Heated steering wheel (if equipped) NOTICE The heated steering wheel will turn off automatically approximately 30 minutes after the heated steering wheel is turned on. If you turn off the ignition within 30 minutes after pressing the steering wheel heater button, from next igni- tion ON, the heater will be off. Horn 0+' With the engine start/stop button in the ON position, pressing the heated steering wheel button warms the steering wheel. The indicator on the button will illuminate. To turn the heated steering wheel off, press the button once again. The indi- cator on the button will turn off. CAUTION Do not install any grip to operate the steering wheel. This causes damage to the heated steering wheel sys- tem. 0+' To sound the horn, press the area indi- cated by the horn symbol on your steering wheel (see illustration). The horn will operate only when this area is pressed. Check the horn regularly to be sure it operates properly. 5-42 CAUTION · Do not strike the horn severely to operate it, or hit it with your fist. Do not press on the horn with a sharp-pointed object. · When cleaning the steering wheel, do not use an organic solvent such as thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the steering wheel. 5 5-43 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle MIRRORS Inside rearview mirror Adjust the rearview mirror so that the center view through the rear window is seen. Make this adjustment before you start driving. WARNING n Rear visibility Do not place objects in the rear seat or cargo area which would interfere with your vision through the rear window. WARNING Do not adjust the rearview mirror while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control, and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or property damage. WARNING Do not modify the inside mirror and don't install a wide mirror. It could result in injury, during an accident or deployment of the air bag. Electrochromic mirror (ECM) The electric rearview mirror automati- cally controls the glare from the head- lights of the vehicles behind you in nighttime or low light driving condi- tions. The sensor mounted in the mir- ror senses the light level around the ve- hicle, and automatically controls the headlight glare from the vehicles be- hind you. When the engine is running, the glare is automatically controlled by the sensor mounted in the rearview mirror. Whenever the shift lever is shifted into reverse (R), the mirror will automatical- ly go to the brightest setting in order to improve the driver's view behind the vehicle. CAUTION When cleaning the mirror, use a pa- per towel or similar material damp- ened with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on the mirror. It may cause the liquid clean- er to enter the mirror housing. 0+'- To operate the electric rearview mirror: · The mirror defaults to the ON posi- tion whenever the engine start/stop button is in the ON position. 5-44 Features of your vehicle · Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function off. The mirror indicator light (2) will turn off. Press the ON/OFF button (1) to turn the automatic dimming function on. The mirror indicator light (2) will illu- minate. (2): Indicator, (3): Sensor Outside rearview mirror Be sure to adjust the mirror angles be- fore driving. Your vehicle is equipped with both lefthand and right-hand outside rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be adjusted remotely with the remote switch. The mirror heads can be folded back to pre- vent damage during an automatic car wash or when passing through a nar- row street. WARNING n Rearview mirrors · The outside rearview mirror is convex. Objects seen in the mirror are closer than they appear. (Continued) (Continued) · Use your interior rearview mirror or direct observation to determine the actual distance of following vehicles when changing lanes. CAUTION Do not scrape ice off the mirror face; this may damage the surface of the glass. If ice should restrict the move- ment of the mirror, do not force the mirror for adjustment. To remove ice, use a deicer spray, or a sponge or soft cloth with warm water. CAUTION If the mirror is jammed with ice, do not adjust the mirror by force. Use an approved de-icer spray (not radi- ator antifreeze) to release the fro- zen mechanism or move the vehicle to a warm place and allow the ice to melt. WARNING Do not adjust or fold the outside rearview mirrors while the vehicle is moving. This could result in loss of control and an accident which could cause death, serious injury or prop- erty damage. 5 5-45 Features of your vehicle Remote control CAUTION · The mirrors stop moving when they reach the maximum adjusting angles, but the motor continues to operate while the switch is press- ed. Do not press the switch longer than necessary, the motor may be damaged. · Do not attempt to adjust the out- side rearview mirror by hand. Do- ing so may damage the parts. Manual type To fold the outside rearview mirror, grasp the housing of the mirror and then fold it toward the rear of the vehi- cle. 0+'- The electric remote control mirror switch allows you to adjust the position of the left and right outside rearview mirrors. To adjust the position of either mirror, press the R or L button (1) to select the right side mirror or the left side mirror, then press a corresponding point ( ) on the mirror adjustment control to position the selected mirror up, down, left or right. After adjustment, press the R or L but- ton again to prevent inadvertent ad- justment. Folding the outside rearview mirror 0+' 0+'- Electric type The outside rearview mirror can be fol- ded or unfolded by pressing the switch as below. Left (1): The mirror will unfold. Right (2): The mirror will fold. Center (AUTO, 3): The mirror will fold or unfold automatically as follows: · Without smart key system - The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key. 5-46 Features of your vehicle · With smart key system - The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the smart key. - The mirror will fold or unfold when the door is locked or unlocked by the button on the outside door handle. - The mirror will unfold when you approach the vehicle (all doors closed and locked) with a smart key in possession (if equipped). Reverse parking aid function (if equipped) Neutral When neither switch is selected, the outside rearview mirrors will not move. The outside rearview mirrors will auto- matically revert to their original posi- tion under the following conditions: 1. The Engine Start/Stop button is turned to the ACC or OFF position. 2. The shift lever is moved to any po- 5 sition except R (Reverse). 3. The remote control outside rear- view mirror switch is not selected. CAUTION The electric type outside rearview mirror operates even though the En- gine Start/Stop button is in the OFF position. However, to prevent unnec- essary battery discharge, do not ad- just the mirrors longer than neces- sary while the engine is not running. CAUTION In case it is an electric type outside rearview mirror, don't fold it by hand. It could cause motor failure. 0+' When you shift the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position, the outside rearview mirror(s) will move downward to aid re- verse parking. According to the position of the outside rearview mirror switch, the outside rearview mirror(s) will operate as fol- lows: Left or Right When the remote control outside rear- view mirror switch is in the left or right position, both outside rearview mirrors will move downward. 5-47 Features of your vehicle INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ¥5ZQF"GPS)ZCSJE ¥5ZQF#GPS)ZCSJE 1. Hybrid system gauge 2. Fuel gauge 3. Speedometer 4. Warning and indicator lights 5. LCD display (including Trip comput- er) 6. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details, refer to the Gauges on page 5-51. 5-48 0+')-#0+')-# 5ZQF"GPS1MVHJO)ZCSJE 5ZQF#GPS1MVHJO)ZCSJE 1. Hybrid system gauge 2. Fuel gauge 3. Speedometer 4. Warning and indicator lights 5. LCD display (including Trip comput- er) 6. Battery SOC (State of Charge) gauge 5 The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For more details, refer to the Gauges on page 5-51. Instrument cluster control Adjusting instrument cluster illumination (if equipped) 0+' 5-49 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle WARNING Never adjust the instrument cluster while driving. This could result in loss of control and lead to an accident that may cause death, serious in- jury, or property damage. The brightness of the instrument panel illumination is changed by pressing the illumination control button ( + or - ) when the Engine Start/Stop button is ON, or the tail lights are turned on. · If the brightness reaches to the max- imum or minimum level, an alarm will sound. LCD display control ¥5ZQF" ¥5ZQF# 0+'- The LCD display modes can be changed by using the control buttons on the steering wheel. [Type A] 1. : MODE button for changing modes 2. / /OK: SELECT scroll switch for setting the selected item and RE- SET scroll switch for resetting items [Type B] 1. : MODE button for changing modes 2. / /OK: SELECT scroll switch for setting the selected item and RE- SET scroll switch for resetting items 3. : RETURN button to move to the previous mode or item (if equipped) For the LCD modes, refer to LCD display on page 5-56. 0+'- · If you hold the illumination control button ( + or - ), the brightness will be changed continuously. 5-50 0+'- Gauges Speedometer 5ZQF" LNI Hybrid system gauge NOTICE Accordance to the hybrid system gauge area the EV indicator comes on or off. - EV indicator ON: Vehicle is driven using the electric motor or the gasoline engine is stopped. - EV indicator OFF: Vehicle is driv- en using the gasoline engine. 5 Features of your vehicle 5ZQF# .1) LNI 0+' 0+'- The speedometer indicates the speed of the vehicle and is calibrated in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilometers per hour (km/h). The hybrid system gauge indicates whether the current driving condition is fuel efficient or not. · CHARGE: Shows that the energy made by the vehicle is be- ing converted to electrical energy. (Regenerated en- ergy) · ECO: Shows that the vehicle is being driven in an Eco- friendly manner. · POWER: Shows that the vehicle is exceeding the Eco-friend- ly range. 5-51 Features of your vehicle Hybrid battery SOC (state of charge) gauge 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 5-52 This gauge indicates the remaining hy- brid battery power. If the SOC is near the L (Low) or 0 level, the vehicle au- tomatically operates the engine to charge the battery. However, if the Service Indicator ( ) and Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) ( ) turn on when the SOC gauge is near the L (Low) or 0 level, we recom- mend the vehicle be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. NOTICE Never try to start the vehicle if the fuel tank is empty. In this condition, the engine cannot charge the high voltage battery of the hybrid sys- tem. If you try to start the vehicle when the fuel is empty, the high voltage battery will become dis- charged and be damaged. · CS (Charge Sustaining, Hybrid) mode The high-voltage (hy- brid) battery and gas- oline engine is used to drive the vehicle. 0+')1- · HEV-charging mode Gasoline engine is used to drive the ve- hicle and charge the high-voltage (hybrid) 0+')1- battery A corresponding message is displayed to indicate the selected mode. Plug-in hybrid mode indicator · CD (Charge Depleting, Electric) mode The high-voltage (hy- brid) battery is used to drive the vehicle. 0+')1-0+')1-0+')1- 0+')1- Features of your vehicle Fuel gauge 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'# 0+'- This gauge indicates the approximate amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. NOTICE · The fuel tank capacity is given in Recommended lubricants and ca- pacities on page 10-11. · The fuel gauge is supplemented by a low fuel warning light, which will illuminate when the fuel tank is nearly empty. · On inclines or curves, the fuel gauge pointer may fluctuate or the low fuel warning light may come on earlier than usual due to the movement of fuel in the tank. WARNING n Fuel Gauge Running out of fuel can expose vehi- cle occupants to danger. You must stop and obtain additional fuel as soon as possible after the warning light comes on or when the gauge indicator comes close to the 0 or E (Empty) level. CAUTION Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire damag- ing the catalytic converter. Engine coolant temperature gauge This gauge indicates the temperature 5 of the engine coolant when the engine is running. NOTICE When the gauge indicator gets out of the normal range, toward the H position, it indicates overheating of the engine. It may damage the en- gine. Do not continue driving with the overheated engine. For further in- formation, refer to If the engine overheats on page 8-07. 5-53 Features of your vehicle Odometer Outside temperature Transaxle shift indicator Automatic transaxle shift indicator (if equipped) The odometer indicates the total dis- tance that the vehicle has been driven and should be used to determine when periodic maintenance should be per- formed. - Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 kilome- ters or miles. This gauge indicates the current out- side air temperatures by 1°C (1°F). - Temperature range : -40°C ~ 60°C (-40°F ~ 140°F) The outside temperature on the display may not change immediately like a general thermometer to prevent the driver from being inattentive. The temperature unit can be changed by using the "User Settings" mode of the LCD display. For more details, refer to LCD dis- play on page 5-56. This indicator displays which automatic transaxle shift lever is selected. · Park : P · Reverse : R · Neutral : N · Drive :D · Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 5-54 Automatic Transaxle Shift Indicator in Sports Mode (if equipped) In the Sports Mode, this indicator in- forms which gear is desired while driv- ing to save fuel. · Shifting up : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 · Shifting down : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 For example 3: Display means the current gear is in 3 and needs to be changed to 4. 3: Display means the current gear is in 3 and needs to be changed to 2. When the system is not working prop- erly, the indicator is not displayed. 5 5-55 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle LCD DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED) LCD modes Modes Trip Computer Turn By Turn (if equipped) LDWS (if equipped) A/V (if equipped) Service Symbol Explanation This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy, and so on. For more details, refer to Trip Computer on page 5-63. This mode displays the state of the navigation. This mode displays the state of Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS). For more details, refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on page 7-79. This mode displays the state of the A/V system. This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and pressure status of each tire. This mode informs of warning messages related to Low tire pressure or malfunction of Blind Spot Detection system (BSD) and so on. When any door is not closed securely, this symbol illuminates. User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on. For controlling the LCD modes, refer to LCD display control on page 5-50. 5-56 Service mode Tire pressure (if equipped) Service interval Service in Service required Features of your vehicle 5 0+'- This mode displays the pressure status of each tire. You can change the tire pressure unit in "User settings" mode. For more details, refer to User Settings mode on page 5-58. 0+'- It displays when you need a scheduled maintenance service (mileage or days). If the remaining mileage or time rea- ches 1,500 km (1,500 mi.) or 30 days, "Service in" message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON po- sition. 0+'- If you do not have your vehicle serviced according to the already inputted serv- ice interval, "Service required" message is displayed for several seconds each time you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. To reset the service interval to the mileage and days you inputted before: - Activate the reset mode by pressing the OK button (reset) for more than 5 seconds, then press the OK button (reset) again for more than 1 second (Europe). - Press the OK button (reset) for more than 1 second (Except Europe). 5-57 Features of your vehicle Service in OFF (Continued) - The battery cable is disconnected. - The fuse switch is turned off. - The battery is discharged. If the warning situation is solved, the master warning light will be turned off and the LCD Modes Icon will be changed back to its previous icon ( ). User settings mode Description 0+'- If the service interval is not set, "Serv- ice in OFF" message is displayed on the LCD display. NOTICE If any of the following conditions oc- curs, the mileage and days may be incorrect. (Continued) Master warning mode (if equipped) · This warning light informs the driver of the following situations: - Blind Spot Detection (BSD) mal- function (if equipped) - Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) malfunction (if equipped) - High Beam Assist (HBA) malfunc- tion (if equipped) - Lamp malfunction - Service reminder and so on. The Master Warning Light illuminates if one or more of the above warning sit- uations occur. At this time, the LCD Modes Icon will change from ( ) to ( ). 0+'- On this mode, you can change setting of the doors, lamps, and so on. 5-58 Driving assist (if equipped) Items Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if equipped) LKAS (Lane Keeping Assist System) (if equipped) Explanation If this item is checked, the rear cross traffic alert function will be activated. For more details, refer to Blind Spot Detection System on page 7-91. · Lane Departure Warning: To activate the lane departure warning function. · Standard LKA: To activate the standard LKA mode of LKAS function. · Active LKA: To activate the active LKA mode of LKAS function For more details, refer to LKAS (Lane Keeping Assist System) on page 7-83. 5 Smart Cruise Control Response Choose the sensitivity of the smart cruise control. (if equipped) For more details, refer to Smart Cruise Control System on page 7-59. AEB (Autonomous Emergency Braking) To activate or deactivate the AEB system. (if equipped) For more details, refer to Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) on page 7-37. FCW (Forward Collosion Warning) (if equipped) Choose the sensitivity of the forward collosion warning. - Late/Normal/Early For more details, refer to Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB) on page 7-39. Speed Limit Information Function If this item is checked, the speed limit information function will be activated. (if equipped) For more details, refer to Speed Limit Information Function on page 7-55. Coasting Guide (if equipped) To activate or deactivate the Coasting Guide system and sound. For more information, refer to Coasting Guide on page 5-76. Features of your vehicle 5-59 Features of your vehicle Door/trunk Items Automatically Lock Automatically Unlock Door Lock Sound (if equipped) Smart Trunk (if equipped) Explanation · Disable: The auto door lock operation will be deactivated. · Enable on Speed: All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed ex- ceeds 15 km/h (9.3 mph). · Enable on Shift: All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transaxle/ dual clutch transmission shift lever is shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position. · Disable: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled. · Vehicle Off/On key out: All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Start/Stop button is set to the OFF position. · Driver Door Unlock: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked. On Shift to P: All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transaxle/ dual clutch transmission shift lever is shifted to the P (Park) position. If this item checked, the door lock sound function will be activated when locking doors. To activate or deactivate the Smart Trunk system. For more details, refer to Smart Trunk on page 5-19. 5-60 Features of your vehicle Light Items One Touch Turn Signal Head Lamp Delay Welcome Light (If equipped) Explanation · Off: The one touch turn signal function will be deactivated. · 3, 5, 7 Flashes: The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is moved slightly. For more details, refer to Light on page 5-114. · If this item is checked, the head lamp delay function will be activated. · If this item is checked, the welcome light function will be activated. 5 Sound Items Park Assist System Vol. (if equipped) BSD (Blind Spot Detection) Sound (if equipped) Welcome Sound (if equipped) Explanation · Adjust the Park Assist System volume. (Level 1~3) For more details, refer to Parking Assist System on page 5-89. · If this item is checked, the blind spot detection sound will be activated For more details, refer to Blind Spot Detection System on page 7-91. · If this item is checked, the welcome sound function will be activated. 5-61 Features of your vehicle Convenience (if equipped) Items Seat Easy Access (if equipped) Steering Position (if equipped) Wireless charging system (if equipped) Service interval (if equipped) Items Service Interval Explanation · Off: The seat easy access function will be deactivated. · Normal/Enhanced: When you turn off the engine, the driver s seat will automati- cally move rearwards 6 cm (Enhanced) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more comfortably. If you change the Engine Start/Stop Button from OFF position to the AC function, the driver s seat will return to the original position. For more details, refer to Driver position memory system on page 4-08. · If this item is checked, the warning function regarding the steering wheel align- ment will be activated. · If this item checked, the Wireless smart phone charging system will be activated. Explanation On this mode, you can activate the service interval function with mileage (km or mi.) and period (months). · Off: The service interval function will be deactivated. · On: You can set the service interval (mileage and months). For more details, refer to Service mode on page 5-57. 5-62 Features of your vehicle Other features Items Fuel Economy Auto Reset Fuel Economy Unit Temperature Unit Tire Pressure Unit (if equipped) Language (if equipped) Explanation If this item is checked, the average fuel economy will reset automatically when refu- eling. Choose the fuel economy unit. (Km/L, L/100) - Speedometer is km/h type: Km/L or L/100km - Speedometer is MPH type: US gallon or UK gallon Choose the temperature unit. (°C, °F) 5 Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, Bar) Choose the language. Trip modes (Trip computer) The trip computer is a microcomputercontrolled driver information system that displays information related to driving. NOTICE Some driving information stored in the trip computer (for example Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the battery is disconnected. 5-63 Features of your vehicle Trip modes '6&-&$0/0.: %JTUBODF5P&NQUZ "WFSBHF'VFM&DPOPNZ *OTUBOU'VFM&DPOPNZ 53*1"# 5SJQNFUFS<"#> "WFSBHF7FIJDMF4QFFE<"#> &MBQTFE5JNF<"#> %JHJUBM4QFFEPNFUFS %SJWJOHTUZMF &OFSHZGMPX 5-64 To change the trip mode, scroll the MOVE scroll switch ( / ) in the trip computer mode. Fuel economy Distance to empty (1, hybrid) Distance to empty (Plug-in hybrid) 1MVHJOIZCSJE ¥)ZCSJE 0+'-# · The distance to empty is the estima- ted distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel. - Distance range: 1 ~ 9,999 km or 1 ~ 9,999 mi. · If the estimated distance is below 1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will dis- play --- as distance to empty. · Total range (a) Electric distance to empty (b) + Gaso- line distance to empty (c) · Electric range (b) The distance to empty is the estima- ted distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining high voltage bat- tery. · Gasoline range (c) The distance to empty is the estima- ted distance the vehicle can be driven with the remaining fuel. · If the estimated distance is below 1 km (1 mi.), the trip computer will dis- play --- as distance to empty. Features of your vehicle - Distance range: 1 ~ 9,999 km or 1 ~ 9,999 mi. - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9 km/L, L/100 km or MPG NOTICE NOTICE · If the vehicle is not on level ground or the battery power has been in- terrupted, the distance to empty function may not operate correct- ly. · The distance to empty may differ from the actual driving distance as it is an estimate of the available driving distance. · The trip computer may not regis- ter additional fuel if less than 6 liters (1.6 gallons) of fuel are added to the vehicle. · The fuel economy and distance to empty may vary significantly based on driving conditions, driving habits, and condition of the vehi- cle. · The average fuel economy can be re- set both manually and automatically. The average vehicle speed is not dis- played, when the vehicle drives Manual reset To clear the average fuel economy manually, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 shorter than 300 meters (0.19 miles) or less than 10 seconds after turning ON the Engine Start/ Stop button. second when the average fuel economy is displayed. Automatic reset To make the average fuel economy be reset automatically whenever refueling, select the Fuel economy auto reset mode in User Setting menu of the LCD display (Refer to LCD display on page Instant Fuel Economy (3) · This mode displays the instant fuel economy during the last few seconds when the vehicle speed is more than 10 km/h (6.2 mph). - Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 30 L/100 km or 0.0 ~ 50.0 MPG 5 5-56). · OFF - You may set to default man- ually by using the trip switch reset button. · When driving - The vehicle will auto- matically set to default once 4 hours pass after the Engine start/stop but- ton is turned to the OFF position. Average Fuel Economy (2) · The average fuel economy is calcula- ted by the total driving distance and fuel consumption since the last aver- age fuel economy reset. · When refueling - After refueling more than 6 liters and driving over 1 km/h, the vehicle will reset to de- fault automatically. 5-65 Features of your vehicle Trip A/B 0+'- Tripmeter (1) · The tripmeter is the total driving dis- tance since the last tripmeter reset. - Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 km or mi. · To reset the tripmeter, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the tripmeter is displayed. Average Vehicle Speed (2) · The average vehicle speed is calcula- ted by the total driving distance and driving time since the last average vehicle speed reset. - Speed range: 0 ~ 260 km/h or 0 ~ 160 mph · To reset the average vehicle speed, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 sec- ond when the average vehicle speed is displayed. NOTICE · The average vehicle speed is not displayed if the driving distance has been less than 50 meters (0.03 miles) or the driving time has been less than 10 seconds since the ignition switch or Engine Start/Stop button was turned to ON. · Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the average vehicle speed keeps calculating, as long as while the engine is running. Elapsed Time (3) · The elapsed time is the total driving time since the last elapsed time re- set. - Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59 · To reset the elapsed time, press the OK button (reset) on the steering wheel for more than 1 second when the elapsed time is displayed. NOTICE Even if the vehicle is not in motion, the elapsed time keeps calculating, as long as the engine is running. Digital speedometer This mode displays the current speed of the vehicle. 5-66 One time driving information mode Hybrid system energy flow Kia hybrid system notifies the drivers of energy flow in various operating modes. Eleven Modes show drivers the current operating condition. Vehicle stop EV propulsion Features of your vehicle 5 0+')1- This display shows trip distance (1), average fuel economy (2) and the vehi- cle can be driven with the remaining fuel (3). This information is displayed for a few seconds when you turn off the engine and then goes off automatically. The information provided is calculated ac- cording to each trip. If the estimated distance is below 1 km (1 mi.), the distance to empty (3) will display as --- . When low fuel warning light illuminates in the cluster, the refuel message will appear. The mode means the vehicle at stop. (There is no energy flow.) Electric power is used to move the ve- hicle. (Battery Wheel) 5-67 Features of your vehicle Engine-only propulsion Power assist Engine generation Engine power is used to move the vehi- cle. (Engine Wheel) Electric and Engine power are used to move the vehicle. (Battery & Engine Wheel) Vehicle is stopped with the Engine charging the hybrid battery. (Engine Battery) 5-68 Regeneration Power reserve Engine generation/regeneration 5 Hybrid battery is being charged by re- generative braking. (Wheel Battery) Engine is both driving the vehicle and charging the hybrid battery. (Engine Wheel & Battery) The engine and regenerative braking system charge the hybrid battery driv- ing deceleration. (Engine & Wheel Battery) Features of your vehicle 5-69 Features of your vehicle Engine brake Engine generation/motor drive Engine brake/regeneration The vehicle is being slowed by engine compression. (Wheel Engine) The vehicle is being slowed by engine compression and regenerative braking. The hybrid battery is being charged by regenerative braking. (Engine Bat- tery Wheel) The engine compression can be used to slow the vehicle. The regenerative braking system can be used to charge the hybrid system. (Wheel Engine & Battery) 5-70 Turn by turn mode (if equipped) LDWS/LKAS (if equipped) -%84 For more information, refer to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) on page 7-79 and Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) on page 7-83. A/V mode (if equipped) Features of your vehicle 5 0+'- -,"4 0+')1- This mode displays the state of the navigation. 0+'- 0+')1- This mode displays the state of the Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) and Lane Keeping Assist Sys- tem (LKAS). This mode displays the state of the A/V system. Warning messages (if equipped) Shift to P (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if you try to turn off the engine with- out the shift lever in P (Park) position. 5-71 Features of your vehicle · At this time, the Engine Start/Stop Button turns to the ACC position (If you press the Engine Start/Stop But- ton once more, it will turn to the ON position). Low key battery (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the battery of the smart key is dis- charged when the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the OFF position. Press START button while turning wheel (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not unlock normally when the Engine Start/Stop Button is pressed. · It means that you should press the Engine Start/Stop Button while turn- ing the steering wheel right and left. Steering wheel unlocked (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not lock when the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the OFF position. Check steering wheel lock system (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the steering wheel does not lock nor- mally when the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the OFF position. Press brake pedal to start engine (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the Engine Start/Stop Button changes to the ACC position twice by pressing the button repeatedly with- out depressing the brake pedal. · It means that you should depress the brake pedal to start the engine. Key not in vehicle (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not in the vehicle when you press the Engine Start/ Stop Button. · It means that you should always have the smart key with you. Key not detected (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the smart key is not detected when you press the Engine Start/Stop But- ton. Press start button again (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if you cannot operate the Engine Start/ Stop Button when there is a problem with the Engine Start/Stop Button system. · It means that you could start the en- gine by pressing the Engine Start/ Stop Button once more. · If the warning illuminates each time you press the Engine Start/Stop But- ton, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. Press start button with key (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if you press the Engine Start/Stop But- ton while the warning message Key not detected is illuminating. 5-72 Features of your vehicle · At this time, the immobilizer indicator light blinks. Check BRAKE SWITCH fuse (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if the brake switch fuse is disconnec- ted. · It means that you should replace the fuse with a new one. If that is not possible, you can start the engine by pressing the Engine Start/Stop But- ton for 10 seconds in the ACC posi- tion. (Continued) that you start the engine with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. Door, hood, trunk open Sunroof open (if equipped) 5 0+'- Shift to P or N to start engine (for smart key system) · This warning message illuminates if you try to start the engine with the shift lever not in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. NOTICE 0+'- · It means that any door, hood, or trunk is open. · This warning message illuminates if you turn off the engine when the sunroof is open. You can start the engine with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. But, for your safety, we recommend (Continued) 5-73 Features of your vehicle Icy road warning light (if equipped) 0+'- This warning light is to warn the driver the road may be icy. When the following conditions occur, the warning light (including Outside Temperature Gauge) blinks 5 times and then illuminates, and also warning chime sounds once. - The temperature on the Outside Temperature Gauge is below approxi- mately 4°C (40°F). NOTICE If the icy road warning light appears while driving, you should drive more attentively and safely refraining from over-speeding, rapid accelera- tion, sudden braking or sharp turn- ing, etc. Align steering wheel · This warning message illuminates if you start the engine when the steer- ing wheel is turned to more than 90 degrees to the left or right. · It means that you should turn the steering wheel and make the angle of the steering wheel be less than 30 degrees. Low washer fluid (if equipped) · This warning message illuminates on the service reminder mode if the washer fluid level in the reservoir is nearly empty. · It means that you should refill the washer fluid. Turn on FUSE SWITCH (if equipped) · This warning message illuminates if the fuse switch under the steering wheel is OFF. · It means that you should turn the fuse switch on. For more details, refer to Fuses on page 9-52. Check headlights (if equipped) This warning message illuminates if there is a malfunction (burned-out bulb or circuit malfunction) with the head lights (high and low beam). In this case, we recommend that you have the vehi- cle inspected by an authorized Kia deal- er. NOTICE · When replacing the bulb, use the same wattage bulb. For more information, refer to Bulb wattage on page 10-07. · If the different wattage bulb is equipped with the vehicle, this warning message is not displayed. 5-74 Features of your vehicle Check high beam assist system (if equipped) · This warning message illuminates if the high beam assist system has a malfunction. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Check active air flap system This warning message illuminates in the following situations: - There is a malfunction with the ac- tuator flap - There is a malfunction with the ac- tuator air flap controller - The air flap does not open Check hybrid system. Do not start engine. This warning message illuminates when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. A warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case, we recommend that you have your vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Low fuel When all of the above conditions are Stop vehicle and check power · This warning message illuminates if fixed, the warning will disappear. supply 5 the fuel tank is nearly empty. - When the low fuel level warning Check hybrid system This warning message illuminates when a failure occurs in the power supply light is illuminated. This warning message illuminates when system. there is a problem with the hybrid con- In this case, park the vehicle in a safe Add fuel as soon as possible. trol system. location and recommend that you tow Device in wireless charger (if Refrain from driving when the warning your vehicle to the nearest authorized message is displayed. Kia dealer and have the vehicle inspec- equipped) In this case, we recommend that you ted. If a smart phone is still left on the wire- less charging pad unattended, even have your vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Stop vehicle to charge battery when the Engine Start/Stop button is turned to the ACC or OFF position, and the instrument panel's one time driving Check hybrid system. Turn off engine. This warning message illuminates when the hybrid battery power (SOC) level is low. information mode has finished, a warn- This warning message illuminates when In this case, park the vehicle in a safe ing message will light up on the instru- there is a problem with the hybrid sys- location and wait until the hybrid bat- ment panel. tem. The " " indicator will blink and a tery is charged. For more details, refer to Smart Phone Wireless Charger on page 5-158. warning chime will sound until the problem is solved. In this case, we recommend that you Refuel to prevent hybrid battery damage have your vehicle inspected by an au- This warning message illuminates when thorized Kia dealer. the fuel tank is nearly empty. 5-75 Features of your vehicle You should refill the fuel tank to pre- vent hybrid battery damage. Refill inverter coolant This warning message illuminates when the inverter coolant is nearly empty. You should refill the inverter coolant. Check brakes This warning message illuminates when the brake performance is low or the re- generative brake does not work prop- erly due to a failure in the brake sys- tem. In this case, it may take longer for the brake pedal to operate and the braking distance may become longer. Stop vehicle and check brakes This warning message is displayed when a failure occurs in the brake sys- tem. In this case, park the vehicle in a safe location and we recommend you to tow your vehicle to the nearest authorized Kia dealer and have the vehicle inspec- ted. Coasting guide (if equipped) A chime will sound and the coasting guide indicator will blink four times to inform the driver when to take the foot off from the accelerator by anticipating a decelerating event* based on the analysis of driving routes and road con- ditions of the navigation. It encourages the driver to remove foot from the pedal and allow coasting down the road with EV motor only. This helps prevent unnecessary fuel consumption and in- creases fuel efficiency. Example of a deceleration event is going down an extended hill, slow- ing down approaching a toll booth, and approaching reduced speed zones. · User settings Press the Engine Start/Stop button and put the shift lever in P (Park). In the User Settings Mode, select Driv- ing Assist, Coasting Guide, and then On to turn on the system. Cancel the selection of coasting guide to turn off the system. For the explanation of the system, press and hold the [OK] button. · Operation conditions To activate the system, take the fol- lowing procedures. Enter your desti- nation information on the navigation and select the driving route. Select the ECO mode in the Integrated Driv- ing Control System. Then, satisfy the following. - The driving speed should be be- tween 60 km/h (37 mph) and 160 km/h (99 mph). The operating speed may vary due to difference between instrument cluster and navigation effected by tire inflation level. Unplug vehicle to start (Plug-in Hybrid) The message is displayed when you start the engine without unplugging the charging cable. Unplug the charging cable, and then start the vehicle. Remaining charge time (Plug-in Hybrid) The message is displayed to notify the remaining time to fully charge the bat- tery. Shift to P to charge (Plug-in Hybrid) The message is displayed when the charging connector is plugged with the shift lever in R (Reverse), N (Neutral) or D (Drive). Move the shift lever to P (Park) and re-start the charging proc- ess. 5-76 Features of your vehicle EV/HEV/CHG modes (Plug-in Charging complete. Switching to · When the coolant temperature is Hybrid) A corresponding message is displayed when a mode is selected by pressing hybrid (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed automatical- ly converting to HEV mode due to com- higher than -14°C (57°F), or you turn the climate control Off, the vehicle will automatically return to EV mode. the HEV button. Battery charged. Maintaining current (Plug-in Hybrid) pleted battery charging during charging mode driving. Charger error! (Plug-in Hybrid) Wait until fuel door opens (Plug-in Hybrid) The message is displayed when you at- This message is displayed when unable This message is displayed when the tempt to open the fuel filler lid with the to convert to charging mode even when charging failed by external charger er- fuel tank pressurized. Wait until the pressing and holding the HEV button ror. fuel tank is depressurized. during EV/HEV mode driving because The purpose of this message is to let 5 the high-voltage (hybrid) battery is al- you know the error has occurred in ready fully charged. charger itself not in vehicle. NOTICE Low battery. Maintaining hybrid (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to EV mode even when pressing the HEV button during HEV mode driving due to insufficient highvoltage (hybrid) battery level. Low battery temp. Maintaining current (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to EV mode even when pressing the HEV button during HEV mode driving due to low battery tem- perature. Low/high system temp. Maintaining hybrid (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when unable to convert to EV mode even when pressing the HEV button during HEV mode driving due to low/high system temperature. Switching to hybrid mode to allow heating (Plug-in Hybrid) · When the coolant temperature is lower than -14°C (57°F), and you turn the climate control On for heat- ing, the above message will be dis- played in the cluster. Then, the vehi- cle will automatically switch to HEV mode. · It may take up to 20 seconds to open fuel filler lid. · When the fuel filler lid is frozen and does not open after 20 sec- onds at freezing temperature, slightly tap the fuel filler lid and then attempt to open it. Fuel door open (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is opened. Also means "Ready to refuel". 5-77 Features of your vehicle Check fuel door (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid is open or an abnormality has occurred. Refuel after stopping (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when the fuel filler lid open button is pressed when a vehicle equipped with a plugin hybrid seal-type fuel tank is in motion (vehicle speed is greater than 0 km/h (mi/h)). Open fuel door after disconnecting charging cable (Plug-in Hybrid) This message is displayed when you press fuel filler lid open button while charging. This message explains that refueling is not allowed to finish charging. Fuel lid is not opened when charging cable is connected to vehicle. Charging door open (Plug-in Hybrid) This message indicates that the charg- ing door is open while in driving-ready state to encourage you to inspect and close the door. (Driving with the charging door open may result in moisture inflow or dam- age. This message is used to prevent such occurrences.) 5-78 Features of your vehicle WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS Warning lights NOTICE · When there is a malfunction with the SRS. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. If the brake fluid level in the reservoir is low: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle. n Warning lights Make sure that all warning lights are OFF after starting the engine. If any light is still ON, this indicates a situa- tion that needs attention. Hybrid system warning Seat belt warning light This warning light informs the driver that the seat belt is not fastened. For more details, refer to the belts on page 4-18. Parking brake & Brake fluid warning light Seat 2. With the engine stopped, check the brake fluid level immediately and add fluid as required (For more de- tails, refer to Brake fluid on page 9-30). Then check all brake com- 5 ponents for fluid leaks. If any leak on the brake system is still found, the warning light remains on, or the brakes do not operate properly, do light This warning light illumi- nates: When there is a malfunction with the hybrid system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds - It remains on if the parking brake is applied. not drive the vehicle. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle towed to an authorized Kia dealer and inspec- ted. Dual-diagonal braking system Your vehicle is equipped with dual-diag- Air bag warning light This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off. · When the parking brake is applied. · When the brake fluid level in the res- ervoir is low. - If the warning light illuminates with the parking brake released, it indicates the brake fluid level in reservoir is low. onal braking systems. This means you still have braking on two wheels even if one of the dual systems should fail. With only one of the dual systems working, more than normal pedal travel and greater pedal pressure are required to stop the vehicle. Also, the vehicle will not stop in as short a distance with only a portion of the brake system working. 5-79 Features of your vehicle If the brakes fail while you are driving, shift to a lower gear for additional en- gine braking and stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. WARNING n Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light Driving the vehicle with a warning light ON is dangerous. If the Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Light il- luminates with the parking brake re- leased, it indicates that the brake fluid level is low. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Regenerative brake warning light This warning light illumi- SFEDPMPS nates: When the regenerative brake does not operate and the brake does not perform ZFMMPXDPMPS well. This causes the Brake Warning light (red) and Regenerative Brake Warning Light (yellow) to illumi- nate simultaneously. In this case, drive safely and we recom- mend that you have your vehicle in- spected by an authorized Kia dealer. The operation of the brake pedal may be more difficult than normal and the braking distance can increase. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) warning light This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off. · When there is a malfunction with the ABS (The normal braking system will still be operational without the assis- tance of the anti-lock brake system). In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Electronic brake force distribution (EBD) system warning light These two warning lights il- luminate at the same time while driving: · When the ABS and regular brake system may not work normally. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. NOTICE n Electronic Brake force Distri- bution (EBD) System Warning Light When the ABS Warning Light is on or both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the speedometer, odometer, or tripme- ter may not work. Also, the EPS Warning Light may illuminate and the steering effort may increase or decrease. (Continued) 5-80 Features of your vehicle (Continued) In this case, we recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer as soon as possi- ble. WARNING n Electronic Brake force Distri- bution (EBD) System Warning Light When both ABS and Parking Brake & Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on, the brake system will not work nor- mally and you may experience an unexpected and dangerous situation during sudden braking. In this case, avoid high speed driving and abrupt braking. We recommend you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia deal- er as soon as possible. Electronic power steering (EPS) warning light (if equipped) This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It remains on until the engine is started. CAUTION n Malfunction Indicator Lamp (MIL) Driving with the Malfunction Indica- tor Lamp (MIL) on may cause dam- age to the emission control systems which could effect drivability and/or fuel economy. · When there is a malfunction with the EPS. In this case, we recommend that you CAUTION 5 have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. n Gasoline Engine Malfunction indicator If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp lamp (MIL) This warning light illumi- nates: (MIL) illuminates, potential catalytic converter damage is possible which could result in loss of engine power. In this case, we recommend that you · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop have the vehicle inspected by an au- Button to the ON position. thorized Kia dealer as soon as possi- - It remains on until the engine is ble. started. · When there is a malfunction with the emission control system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Charging system warning light This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. 5-81 Features of your vehicle - It remains on until the engine is started. · When there is a malfunction with ei- ther the alternator or electrical charging system. If there is a malfunction with either the alternator or electrical charging sys- tem: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and check the alternator drive belt for looseness or breakage. If the belt is adjusted properly, there may be a problem in the elec- trical charging system. In every case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible. Engine oil pressure warning light This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It remains on until the engine is started. · When the engine oil pressure is low. If the engine oil pressure is low: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and check the engine oil level (For more details, refer to Engine oil on page 9-24). If the level is low, add oil as required. If the warning light remains on af- ter adding oil or if oil is not availa- ble, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION n Engine Oil Pressure Warning Light · If the engine does not stop imme- diately after the Engine Oil Pres- sure Warning Light is illuminated, severe damage could result. · If the warning light stays on while the engine is running, it indicates that there may be serious engine damage or malfunction. In this case, (Continued) (Continued) 1. Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. 2. Turn off the engine and check the oil level. If the oil level is low, fill the engine oil to the proper level. 3. Start the engine again. If the warning light stays on after the engine is started, turn the en- gine off immediately. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. Low fuel level warning light This warning light illumi- nates: When the fuel tank is nearly empty. If the fuel tank is nearly empty: Add fuel as soon as possible. 5-82 Features of your vehicle CAUTION n Low Fuel Level Driving with the Low Fuel Level warning light on or with the fuel lev- el below 0 or E can cause the en- gine to misfire and damage the cat- alytic converter (if equipped). Low tire pressure warning light (if equipped) This warning light remains on after Engine coolant blinking for approximately 60 seconds or repeats blinking and off at the inter- vals of approximately 3 seconds: temperature warning light · When there is a malfunction with the This warning light illumi- TPMS. nates: In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer as soon as possi- ble. For more details, refer to Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) on page 8-09. · When the engine coolant tempera- ture is above 120 °C (248 °F). This means that the engine is overheated and may be damaged. 5 If your vehicle is overheated, refer to If the engine overheats on page 8-07. This warning light illumi- nates: WARNING CAUTION · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off. · When one or more of your tires are significantly underinflated (The loca- tion of the underinflated tires are displayed on the LCD display). For more details, refer to Tire Pres- sure Monitoring System (TPMS) on page 8-09. n Safe Stopping · The TPMS cannot alert you to se- vere and sudden tire damage caused by external factors. · If you notice any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator pedal, apply the brakes gradually with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road. n Engine Overheating Do not continue driving with the en- gine overheated. Otherwise engine may be damaged. Overspeed warning light (if equipped) 120 km/h This warning light blinks: · When you drive the vehi- cle more than 120 km/h. - This is to prevent you from driving your vehicle with overspeed. 5-83 Features of your vehicle - The overspeed warning chime also sound for approximately 5 sec- onds. Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) warning light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · When there is a malfunction with the AEB. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Master warning light This indicator light illumi- nates: · When there is a malfunc- tion on the pre-safe seat belt, elec- tronic control suspension, or ad- vanced smart cruise control or other systems etc. To identify the details of the warning, look at the LCD dis- play. Electronic parking brake (EPB) warning light (if equipped) &1# This warning light illumi- nates: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off. · When there is a malfunction with the EPB. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. NOTICE n Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light The Electronic Parking Brake (EPB) Warning Light may illuminates when the Electronic Stability control (ESC) Indicator Light comes on to indicates that the ESC is not working properly (This does not indicate malfunction of the EPB). Adaptive front lighting system (AFLS) warning light (if equipped) AFLS This warning light blinks: · When there is a malfunction with the AFLS. If there is a malfunction with the AFLS: 1. Drive carefully to the nearest safe location and stop your vehicle. 2. Turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light remains on, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. Indicator lights Charging cable connection indicator (Plug-in Hybrid) This indicator illuminates in red when the charging cable is connec- ted. 5-84 Features of your vehicle Electronic stability control (ESC) indicator · When you deactivate the ESC system Immobilizer indicator by pressing the ESC OFF button. light (with smart key) (if light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: For more details, refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 7-30. Immobilizer indicator equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates for up to 30 seconds: · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 light (without smart key) (if equipped) · When the vehicle detects the smart key in the vehicle properly while the Engine Start/Stop Button is ACC or seconds and then goes off. This indicator light illumi- ON. · When there is a malfunction with the ESC system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. This indicator light blinks: While the ESC is operating. For more details, refer to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) on page 7-30. Electronic stability control (ESC) OFF indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illuminates: nates: · When the vehicle detects the immo- bilizer in your key properly while the Engine start/stop button is turned to the ACC or ON position. - At this time, you can start the en- gine. - The indicator light goes off after starting the engine. This indicator light blinks: · When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. - At this time, you can start the en- gine. - The indicator light goes off after starting the engine. This indicator light blinks for a few sec- onds: · When the smart key is not in the ve- hicle. - At this time, you can not start the engine. This indicator light illuminates for 2 seconds and goes off: · When the vehicle can not detect the smart key which is in the vehicle 5 · Once you set the Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON position. - It illuminates for approximately 3 seconds and then goes off. while the Engine Start/Stop Button is ON. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. 5-85 Features of your vehicle This indicator light blinks: · When the battery of the smart key is weak. - At this time, you can not start the engine. However, you can start the engine if you press the Engine Start/Stop Button with the smart key. (For more details, refer to Starting the engine on page 7-08). · When there is a malfunction with the immobilizer system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Turn signal indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light blinks: · When you switch on the turn signal light on. If any of the following occurs, there may a malfunction with the turn signal system. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. - The indicator light does not blink but illuminates. - The indicator light blinks more rapid- ly. - The indicator light does not illuminate at all. Low beam indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the headlights are on. High beam indicator light This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the headlights are on and in the high beam position · When the turn signal lever is pulled into the Flash-to-Pass position. Light ON indicator light This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the tail lights or headlights are on. Rear fog indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the rear fog lights are on. High beam assist indicator (if equipped) This warning light illumi- nates: · When the high-Beam is on with the light switch in the AUTO light position. · If your vehicle detects oncoming or preceding vehicles, the high beam as- sist system will switch the high beam to low beam automatically. For more details, refer to High beam assist on page 5-117. EV mode indicator This indicator illuminates EV when the vehicle is driven by the electric motor. Ready indicator This indicator illuminates: When the vehicle is ready to be driven. - ON : Normal driving is possible. - OFF : Normal driving is not possible, or a problem has occurred. - Blinking : Emergency driving. 5-86 Features of your vehicle When the ready indicator goes OFF or · [Green] When you stop the vehicle For more details, refer to Lane De- blinks, there is a problem with the sys- completely by depressing the brake parture Warning System (LDWS) tem. In this case, we recommend that pedal with the auto hold system acti- on page 7-79. you have your vehicle inspected by an vated. LKAS (Lane Keeping authorized Kia dealer. Cruise indicator light (if equipped) · [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the auto hold system. In this case, we recommend that you Assistant System) indicator (if equipped) The LKAS indicator will illu- This indicator light illumi- nates: have the vehicle inspected by an au- minate when you turn the lane keeping thorized Kia dealer. assistant system on by pressing the · When the cruise control C R U I S E system is enabled. For more details, refer to Auto Hold on page 7-24. LKAS button. 5 If there is a problem with the system, the yellow LKAS indicator will illumi- For more details, refer to Cruise con- trol system on page 7-47. Cruise SET indicator light (if equipped) SET This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the cruise control speed is set. Lane departure warning system (LDWS) indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · [White] When the lane departure warning system does not detect the lane line. nate. For more details, refer to LKAS on page 7-83. ECO indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · When the Active ECO system is acti- For more details, refer to Cruise con- trol system on page 7-47. AUTO HOLD indicator light (if equipped) A UTO HOLD This indicator light illumi- nates: · [Green] When you activate the lane departure warning system by press- ing the LDWS button. · [Yellow] When there is a malfunction with the lane departure warning sys- tem. vated by pressing the DRIVE mode button. · The ECO indicator (green) will illumi- nate to show that the Active ECO is operating. For more details, refer to Drive Mode · [White] When you activate the auto hold system by pressing the AUTO HOLD button. In this case, we recommend that you have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Integrated Control System on page 7-75. 5-87 Features of your vehicle SPORT mode indicator light (if equipped) This indicator light illumi- nates: · When you select SPORT drive mode. mode as For more details, refer to Drive mode on page 7-75. 5-88 Features of your vehicle PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 3FBS 'SPOU The parking assist system assists the driver during movement of the vehicle by chiming if any object is sensed with- in the distance of 100 cm (39 in.) in Operation of the parking assist system Operating condition front and 120 cm (47 in.) behind the vehicle. This system is a supplemental system and it is not intended to nor does it re- place the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and objects detecta- ble by the sensors ( ) are limited. 5 Whenever moving pay as much atten- tion to what is in front and behind of you as you would in a vehicle without a parking assist system. WARNING The parking assist system should only be considered as a supplemen- tary function. The driver must check the front and rear view. The opera- tional function of the parking assist system can be affected by many factors and conditions of the sur- roundings, so the responsibility rests always with the driver. 0+' · This system activates when the parking assist system button is pressed with the ignition switch ON. · The indicator of the parking assist system button turns on automatical- ly and activates the parking assist system when you shift the gear to the R (Reverse) position. It will turn off automatically when you drive above 30 km/h (18.6 mph) (If SPAS equipped) 5-89 Features of your vehicle · The sensing distance while backing up is approximately 120 cm (47 in.) when you are driving less than 10 km/h (6.2 mph). · The sensing distance while moving forward is approximately 100 cm (39 in.) when you are driving less than 10 km/h (6.2 mph). · When more than two objects are sensed at the same time, the closest one will be recognized first. · The side sensors are activated when you shift the gear to the R (Reverse) position. · If the vehicle speed is above 20 km/h, the system automatically turns off. To activate again, push the button. NOTICE It may not operate if it s distance from the object is already less than approximately 25 cm when the sys- tem is ON. 5-90 Type of warning indicator and sound Distance from object 100 cm~61 cm Front Warning indicator When driving When driving forward rearward - : with warning sound Warning sound Buzzer beeps intermittently 120 cm~61 cm Rear - Buzzer beeps intermittently 5 60 cm~31 cm 30 cm Front Rear - Front Rear - Buzzer beeps frequently Buzzer beeps frequently Buzzer sounds continuously Buzzer sounds continuously NOTICE · The actual warning sound and indicator may differ from the illustration according to objects or sensor status. · Do not wash the vehicle's sensor with high pressure water. Features of your vehicle 5-91 Features of your vehicle CAUTION · This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors. It cannot detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, such as poles or ob- jects located between sensors may not be detected by the sensors. Always visually check behind the vehicle when backing up. · Be sure to inform any drivers of the vehicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations. Non-operational conditions of parking assist system Parking assist system may not operate normally when: 1. Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It will operate normally when mois- ture melts.) 2. Sensor is covered with foreign mat- ter, such as snow or water, or the sensor cover is blocked. (It will op- erate normally when the material is removed or the sensor is no lon- ger blocked.) 3. The parking assist button is off. There is a possibility of parking assist system malfunction when: 1. Driving on uneven road surfaces such as unpaved roads, gravel, bumps, or gradient. 2. Objects generating excessive noise such as vehicle horns, loud motor- cycle engines, or truck air brakes can interfere with the sensor. 3. Heavy rain or water spray. 4. Wireless transmitters or mobile phones present near the sensor. 5. Sensor is covered with snow. Detecting range may decrease when: 1. Outside air temperature is ex- tremely hot or cold. 2. Undetectable objects smaller than 1 m and narrower than 14 cm in di- ameter. The following objects may not be recognized by the sensor: 1. Sharp or slim objects such as ropes, chains or small poles. 2. Objects, which tend to absorb sen- sor frequency such as clothes, spongy material or snow. 5-92 Features of your vehicle NOTICE 1. The warning may not sound se- quentially depending on the speed and shapes of the objects detected. 2. The parking assist system may malfunction if the vehicle bump- er height or sensor installation has been modified. Any non-fac- tory installed equipment or ac- cessories may also interfere with the sensor performance. 3. Sensor may not recognize ob- jects less than 30 cm from the sensor, or it may sense an incor- rect distance. Use with caution. 4. When the sensor is frozen or stained with snow or water, the sensor may be inoperative until the stains are removed using a soft cloth. 5. Do not push, scratch or strike the sensor with any hard objects that could damage the surface of the sensor. Sensor damage could occur. NOTICE This system can only sense objects within the range and location of the sensors, it can not detect objects in other areas where sensors are not installed. Also, small or slim objects, or objects located between sensors may not be detected. Always visually check in front and behind the vehicle when driving. Be sure to inform any drivers in the ve- hicle that may be unfamiliar with the system regarding the systems capabilities and limitations. WARNING Pay close attention when the vehicle is driven close to objects on the road, particularly pedestrians, and espe- cially children. Be aware that some objects may not be detected by the sensors, due to the objects distance, size or material, all of which can lim- it the effectiveness of the sensor. Always perform a visual inspection (Continued) (Continued) to make sure the vehicle is clear of all obstructions before moving the vehicle in any direction. Self-diagnosis When you shift the gear to the R (Re- verse) position and if one or more of the below occurs you may have a mal- 5 function in the rear parking assist sys- tem. · You don't hear an audible warning sound or if the buzzer sounds inter- mittently. · is displayed (if equipped). CMJOLT If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING Your new vehicle warranty does not cover any accidents or damage to (Continued) 5-93 Features of your vehicle (Continued) the vehicle or injuries to its occu- pants related to a parking assist system. Always drive safely and cautiously. 5-94 Features of your vehicle SMART PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM (SPAS) (IF EQUIPPED) 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 1BSBMMFMFYJU The Smart Parking Assist System helps drivers park their vehicle by using sen- (Continued) 0+'- sors to measure parking spaces, control the steering wheel to semi-automati- cally park the vehicle and provide in- struction on the LCD display to help through parking. Additionally, the system provides assis- tance when leaving (parallel exit) a parking space. The volume for the Smart Parking Assist System can be adjusted. Re- fer to User setting on page 5-58. · After parking your vehicle using the system, the vehicle may not be parked at the exact spot you have wished. For example, the space between your vehicle and wall may not be the distance you have desired. · Deactivate the system and park your vehicle manually, when the situation requires parking manual- 5 ly. NOTICE · The Parking Assist System's front and rear warning sound activates · The vehicle will not stop for pe- when the Smart Parking Assist destrians or objects that may be System is activated. 0+'- in its path, so the driver must monitor the maneuver. · After searching for a parking space is completed, the Smart · Use the system only in parking Parking Assist System will be can- lots and places used for parking. celed if the Parking Assist System · The system does not work if there is no car parked in front of the is cancelled by pressing the button to the OFF position. parking space you are planning to park or if it is a diagonal parking space. 0+'- (Continued) 5-95 Features of your vehicle WARNING · The Smart Parking Assist System should only be considered as a supplementary function. The driv- er must check the front and rear view for objects. The operational function of the Smart Parking As- sist System can be affected by many factors and conditions of the surroundings, so the responsibility rests always with the driver. · The system may not operate nor- mally if the vehicle needs wheel alignment adjustment. Have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. · If you use a different tire or wheel size rather than the size recom- mended by the Kia dealer, the sys- tem may not work properly. Al- ways use the same size tire and wheel. · If you use additional frame on the license plate, SPAS may generate abnormal warning sound. Operating condition 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH 3JHIUTJEF 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 0+'- -FGUTJEF 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 0+'- -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU 0+'- The system will help park the vehicle in the middle or back of a parked vehicle. Use the system when all the below conditions are met. · When the parking space is a straight line · When parallel parking or reverse (per- pendicular) parking is required · When there is a parked vehicle · When there is enough space to move the vehicle Non-operating condition Never use the Smart Parking Assist System in the below conditions. · Curved parking space 5-96 Features of your vehicle · Inclined roads · A vehicle loaded with longer or wider cargo compared to the vehicle · Wheel changed to an unauthorized size · A problem with the wheel alignment (Continued) · Diagonal parking space · Heavy snow or rain · Near a circular pillar or narrow pillar, or a pillar surrounded by objects such as fire extinguisher, etc. · An accessory installed on the detec- tive area the of sensors (such as number plate holder) · Vehicle leaned severely to one side · Strong sunlight or very cold weather · The sensor is positioned incorrectly · Ultrasonic interference from other by an impact to the bumper vehicle's. Such as horn sounds of oth- 5 · Bumpy roads er vehicles, motorcycle's engine noise, air brake noise of heavy vehicles and 0+'- · A vehicle equipped with a snow chain or spare tire with the other vehicle's parking assist system working. 1. Parking on inclines The driver must apply the accel- · Tire pressure lower or higher than erator and brake pedal when the standard tire pressure · A trailer connected to the vehicle · Slippery or uneven road · Big vehicles such as buses or trucks parked WARNING Do not use the Smart Parking Assist System in the following conditions for unexpected results may occur and cause a serious accident. parking on inclines. If the driver is unfamiliar with applying the accelerator and brake pedal, a vehicle accident may occur. (Continued) · Sensor covered with foreign matter, such as snow or water (Continued) · Moisture frozen on the sensor · A motorcycle or bicycle parked · A obstacle such as a trash can, bicy- cle, shopping cart, etc. is near · Heavy wind 5-97 Features of your vehicle (Continued) (Continued) (Continued) 0+'- 2. Parking in snow Snow may interfere with sensor operation or the system may be cancelled if the road is slippery while parking. Also, if the driver is unfamiliar with applying the accelerator and brake pedal, a car accident may occur. (Continued) 0+'- 3. Parking in narrow space The system may not search for parking spaces if the space is too narrow. Even if the system is operating, always be careful. (Continued) 0+'- 4. Parking diagonal The system is a supplemental for parallel parking or perpendic- ular parking. Diagonal line park- ing is not available. Even if the vehicle is able to enter the space, do not operate the Smart Parking Assist System. The sys- tem will attempt parallel parking or reverse (perpendicular) park- ing. (Continued) 5-98 (Continued) (Continued) (Continued) 0+'- 5. Parking in uneven road Parking in uneven roads, the driver needs to properly apply the pedal (clutch, accelerator or brake). If not, the system may be cancelled when the vehicle slips or an accident may occur. (Continued) 0+'- 6. Parking behind a truck An accident may occur when parking behind a vehicle higher than yours. For example, bus, truck, etc. Do not solely rely on the Smart Parking Assist System. (Continued) 5 0+')1- 7. Obstacle in parking space Obstacles such as a pillar may interfere with the system when looking for a parking space. Even though, a parking space is avail- able the system may not detect a parking space. (Continued) Features of your vehicle 5-99 Features of your vehicle (Continued) 0+'- 8. Leaving a parking space near a wall When leaving a parking space that is narrow and near a wall, the system may not work prop- erly. When leaving a parking space similar to the above pic- ture, the driver must watch out for obstacles while leaving. How the system works (Parking Mode) 1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist System The shift lever should be placed in D (Drive), N (Neutral, above 5 km/h). 2. Select parking mode 3. (Optional) Search for parking space (slowly move forward.) 4. (Optional) Search complete (auto- matic search by sensor.) 5. Steering wheel control 1. Shift according to the instruction on the LCD display. 2. Drive slowly with the brake pedal applied. 6. Parking complete 7. If necessary, manually adjust posi- tion of vehicle. If the system already recognized park- ing space before activating the Smart Parking Assist System, you can proceed from step 4 (Search complete). NOTICE · Before activating the system check if the conditions are possible to use the system. · For your safety, always apply the brake pedal except for when driv- ing. 1. Activate Smart Parking Assist System 0+'- · Press the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem button (the button indicator will illuminate). · The Parking Assist System will be ac- tivated. A warning sound will be heard if an obstacle is detected. · Press the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem button again for more than 2 seconds to turn off the system. · The Smart Parking Assist System de- faults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on. 5-100 Features of your vehicle 2. Select parking mode · Select parallel mode or reverse mode by pressing the Smart Parking Assist System button with the shift lever in D (Drive), N (Neutral, above 5 km/h) and the brake pedal depressed. · If the system already recognized parking space before activating the Smart Parking Assist System, you can see Parking search or Space found . · The right side parallel mode is selec- ted automatically when the Smart Parking Assist System is activated. · The mode changes from parallel mode (right left) to reverse mode (right left) whenever the Smart Parking Assist System button is pressed. (for LHD) · The mode changes from parallel mode (left right) to reverse mode (left right) whenever the Smart Parking Assist System button is pressed. (for RHD) · If the button is pressed again, the system will turn off. 3. Search for parking space (optional) 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH 3JHIUTJEF 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 0+'-0+'- -FGUTJEF 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 0+'-0+'- · Slowly drive forward maintaining the distance of approximately 50 cm ~ 150 cm (19.6 in.~59.0 in.) with the parked vehicles. The side sensors will search for a parking space. · If the vehicle speed is over 20 km/h, a message will appear to notify you to reduce speed. · If vehicle speed is over 30 km/h, the system will be cancelled. NOTICE · Turn on the hazard warning flash- er if the road is crowded with oth- er vehicles. 5 · If the parking lot is small, slowly drive nearer to the parking space. · The search for a parking space will be completed only when there is enough space for the vehicle to move to park. 5-101 Features of your vehicle NOTICE · When searching for a parking space, the system may not be able to find a parking space if there is no vehicle parked, a park- ing space is available after driving by or a parking space is available before driving by. · The system may not operate nor- mally in the following conditions: 1. When the sensors are frozen 2. When the sensors are dirty 3. When it snows or rains heavily 4. When a pillar or object is near (Continued) system after checking the surround- ing area. Especially, check the distance of the outside rearview mirror and objects while using the system to prevent careless accidents. 0+'- NOTICE Slowly drive forward maintaining the distance of approximately 50 cm ~ 150 cm (19.6 in.~59.0 in.) with the parked vehicles. If it is not within the distance, the system may not be able to search for a parking space. CAUTION After searching for a parking space is completed, continue using the (Continued) 5-102 4. Recognizing parking space (optional) 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH 5. Search complete 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMQBSLJOH CAUTION · Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied. · If the parking space is small the system may be cancelled at the Steering wheel control stage. Do not park your vehicle if the space is too small. 0+'-0+'- 6. Steering wheel control 5 0+'-0+'- 3JHIUTJEF -FGUTJEF 3JHIUTJEF -FGUTJEF 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH 3FWFSTFQBSLJOH Features of your vehicle 0+'-0+'- When a parking space is found, a blank box will appear like the above picture. Drive forward slowly, then the Shift to R message will appear. 0+'-0+'- While driving forward to search for a parking space, the above message will appear with a beep sound if the search is complete. Stop the vehicle and shift to the R (Reverse) position. 0+'- · The above message will appear if the shift lever is in R (Reverse). The steering wheel will be controlled au- tomatically. 5-103 Features of your vehicle · The system will be cancelled if you firmly hold the steering wheel while it is controlled automatically. · The system will be cancelled if vehicle speed is over 7 km/h (4.3 mph). WARNING Do not put your hands between the steering wheel while it is being auto- matically controlled. CAUTION · Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied. · Always check for objects around your vehicle before driving. · If the vehicle does not move even though the brake pedal is not de- pressed, check the surrounding before depressing the accelerator pedal. Be sure not to speed over 7 km/h (4.3 mph). NOTICE · If you do not follow the instruc- tions provided, you may fail to park your vehicle. However, if the Parking Assist Sys- tem warning sound (distance from object is within 30 cm: continuous beep) occurs, slowly drive the ve- hicle to the reverse direction of the detected object after checking the surrounding. · Always check the surrounding be- fore driving your vehicle if the Parking Assist System warning sound (distance from object is within 30 cm: continuous beep) is heard for the object is close to your vehicle. If the vehicle gets too close to the object, the warning will not sound. To cancel the system while parking · Press the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem button and hold until the system is cancelled. · Press long the Smart parking assist system button while the system is searching for a parking space. · Press shortly the Smart parking as- sist system button while the steering wheel is controlled. Gear shift while steering wheel control .BOVBMUSBOTBYMF 0+'- "VUPNBUJDUSBOTBYMF 0+'- 0+'- 0+'- When the above message appears with a beep sound, shift the gear and drive the vehicle with the brake pedal de- pressed. 5-104 Features of your vehicle CAUTION Always check the surrounding before releasing the brake pedal. 7. Smart parking assist system completed Additional instructions (messages) WARNING Always be careful while parking for other vehicles or pedestrians. 5 0+'- Complete parking your vehicle accord- ing to the instructions on the LCD dis- play. If required, manually control the steering wheel and complete parking your vehicle. NOTICE The brake pedal must be depressed by the driver while parking your ve- hicle. 0+'0+'- 5-105 Features of your vehicle 0+'- (Continued) - When the ABS is activated - When the TCS/ESC is turned off · When vehicle speed is above 20 km/h while searching for a parking space a message "Reduce speed" will appear. · In the below condition the system will not activate - When the TCS/ESC is turned off When the Smart Parking Assist System is operating, a message may appear re- gardless of the parking order. The messages will appear according to the circumstances. Follow the instruc- tions provided while parking your vehi- cle with the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem. System malfunction NOTICE · In the below conditions the system will be cancelled. Park your vehicle manually. (Continued) 0+'- · If there is a problem with the system, when the system is turned on, the above message will appear. Also, the indicator on the button will not light up and a beep sound will be heard 3 times. · If there is a problem with only the Smart Parking Assist System, the Parking Assist System will operate after 2 seconds. If you notice any problem, we recom- mend to have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer. How the system works (Exit mode) The Exit Mode operates in the below condition: · When vehicle speed is below 5 km/h the first time after the engine has been started. · After parallel parking is completed with the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem. 1. Activate the Smart Parking Assist System The shift lever should be placed in P (Park) or N (Neutral). 2. Select Exit Mode 5-106 Features of your vehicle 3. Check surroundings 4. Steering wheel control 1. Shift according to the instruction on the LCD display. 2. Drive slowly with the brake pedal applied. 5. Exiting complete If necessary, manually adjust the position of the vehicle. 1. Activate Smart Parking Assist System 2. Select Exit Mode -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU NOTICE · Before activating the system check if the conditions are possible to use the system. · For your safety, always apply the brake pedal except for when driv- ing. 0+'- · Press the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem button (the button indicator will illuminate). · The Parking Assist System will be ac- tivated. A warning sound will be heard if an obstacle is detected. · Press the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem button again for more than 2 seconds to turn off the system. · The Smart Parking Assist System de- faults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on. 0+'-0+'- 5 · Select the mode by pressing the Smart Parking Assist System button with the shift lever in P (Park) or N (Neutral) and the brake pedal de- pressed. · For LHD vehicle, the left side parallel mode is selected automatically when the Smart Parking Assist System is activated. · For LHD vehicle, to select the right side parallel mode press the Smart Parking Assist System button once more. · If the button is pressed again, the system will turn off. 5-107 Features of your vehicle 3. Check surroundings -FGUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU 3JHIUTJEF 1BSBMMFMFYJU 0+'-0+'- The Smart Parking Assist System checks the front and rear space to exit the vehicle from the parking space. NOTICE · When checking surroundings, if the front or rear vehicle (or object) is too near, the system may not work properly. · The system may not operate nor- mally in the following conditions: 1. When the sensors are frozen 2. When the sensors are dirty 3. When it snows or rains heavily (Continued) (Continued) 4. When a pillar or object is near · When exiting the parking space if an obstacle is detected that may cause an accident, the system may be cancelled. · If the space is too small to exit the system may be cancelled. CAUTION · If searching surroundings is com- pleted, continue using the system after checking the surrounding area. · The Exit mode may be activated unintentionally, when the shift lever is in P (Park) or N (Neutral) if the Smart parking assist system button is pressed. 4. Steering wheel control 0+'0+'- 5-108 WARNING Do not put your hands between the steering wheel while it is being auto- matically controlled. 5. Exiting complete To cancel the system while exiting Press the Parking Assist System or Smart Parking Assist System button. 5 0+'- CAUTION · The above message will appear if the shift lever is in D (Drive) or R (Re- verse) according to the distance of the front and rear object from the sensor. The steering wheel will be controlled automatically. · The system will be cancelled if you firmly hold the steering wheel while it is controlled automatically. · The system will be cancelled if vehicle speed is over 7 km/h (4.3 mph). Always drive slowly with the brake pedal applied. 0+'- When assisting the driver exit the park- ing space is completed the above mes- sage will appear. Turn the steering wheel to the direction you are leaving and manually control the steering wheel while leaving the parking space. Features of your vehicle 5-109 Features of your vehicle CAUTION · When leaving the parking space turn the steering wheel as much as you can to the direction you are leaving, and then drive the vehicle slowly by depressing the vehicle. · Always check the surrounding be- fore driving your vehicle if the Parking Assist System warning sound is continuously heard. · The system will be cancelled for safety reasons if the vehicle is parked at a small space near a wall. Additional instructions (messages) 0+'- When the Smart Parking Assist System is operating, a message may appear re- gardless of the exiting order. The messages will appear according to the circumstances. Follow the instruc- tions provided while parking your vehi- cle with the Smart Parking Assist Sys- tem. NOTICE · In the below conditions the system will be cancelled. Park your vehicle manually. - When the ABS is activated - When the TCS/ESC is turned off · In the below condition the system will not activate - When the TCS/ESC is turned off 5-110 0+'- System malfunction CAUTION The system may not work properly by providing incorrect messages when the sensors are interfered by other vehicle sensors and noise, or it is on a road that interferes with re- ceiving signals. 0+'- · If there is a problem with the system, when the system is turned on, the above message will appear. Also, the indicator on the button will not light up and a beep sound will be heard 3 times. · If there is a problem with only the Smart Parking Assist System, the Parking Assist System will operate after 2 seconds. If you notice any problem, we recom- mend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 5 5-111 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle REARVIEW CAMERA (IF EQUIPPED) This system is a supplemental system that shows behind the vehicle through the rearview display mirror while back- ing up. WARNING · This system is a supplementary function only. It is the responsibili- ty of the driver to always check the inside/outside rearview mirror and the area behind the vehicle before and while backing up be- cause there is a dead zone that can't be seen by the camera. · Always keep the camera lens clean. If the lens is covered with foreign matter, the camera may not operate normally. 0+') The rearview camera will activate when the back-up light is ON with the ignition switch ON and the shift lever in the R (Reverse) position. If your vehicle is equipped with AVN (Audio, Video and Navigation) sys- tem, rearview display will show be- hind the vehicle through the AVN monitor while backing up. Refer to a separately supplied manual for detailed information. 5-112 SURROUND VIEW MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) This is the parking support system to show around circumstance when you park the vehicle in monitor. When you push the button in [ON] position, it is operated. To cancel the system, push again. Operating conditions - When ignition is ON - When the transaxle is on D, N or R - When the vehicle speed is not over 15 km/h · When the vehicle speed is over 15 km/h, the SVM* system is turned off. If the vehicle speed is not over 15 km/h after turning off the SVM* by over speed, the SVM* is not turned on. To operate again, push the but- ton. · When the vehicle moves backwards, regardless of On/Off of button and vehicle speed, the SVM* is operated. · When the trunk and driver/passenger door are opened and the outside mir- ror is folded, the warning is illumina- ted in SVM* system. · If the SVM* system is not normally operated, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. *: SVM: Surround View Monitoring 5 5-113 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle LIGHTING Battery saver function · The purpose of this feature is to pre- vent the battery from being dis- charged. The system automatically turns off the parking lights when the driver removes the ignition key and opens the driver-side door. · With this feature, the parking lights will turn off automatically if the driv- er parks on the side of the road at night. If necessary, to keep the lights on when the ignition key is removed, perform the following: 1. Open the driver-side door. 2. Turn the parking lights OFF and ON again using the light switch on the steering column. CAUTION If the driver gets out of the vehicle through other doors (except driver's door), the battery saver function does not operate. Therefore, It cau- ses the battery to be discharged. In this case, make sure to turn off the lamp before getting out of the vehi- cle. Headlight escort function (if equipped) If you turn the ignition switch to the ACC or OFF position with the headlights ON, the headlights remain on for about 5 minutes. However, if the driver's door is opened and closed, the headlights are turned off after 15 seconds. The headlights can be turned off by pressing the lock button on the trans- mitter (or smart key) twice or turning the light switch to the OFF position. Daytime running light (if equipped) The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving conditions, and it is especially helpful after dawn and before sunset. The DRL system will turn the dedicated lamp OFF when: 1. The headlight or fog lamp switch is ON. 2. The engine is OFF. Traffic Change (For Europe) The low beam light distribution is asymmetric. If you go abroad to a country with opposite traffic direc- tion, this asymmetric part will daz- zle oncoming car driver. To prevent dazzle, ECE regulation demand sev- eral technical solutions (ex. auto- matic change system, adhesive sheet, down aiming). This head- lamps are designed to adjust in user setting mode in cluster. Lighting control The light switch has a Headlight and a Parking light position. To operate the lights, turn the knob at the end of the control lever to one of the following positions: 1. OFF position 2. Auto light / AFLS position 5-114 3. Parking light position 4. Headlight position Parking light position ( ) Headlight position ( ) Auto light/AFLS position (if equipped) 5 When the light switch is in the parking light position (3rd position), the tail, li- cense and instrument panel lights will turn ON. When the light switch is in the head- light position (4th position), the head, tail, license and instrument panel lights will turn ON. NOTICE The ignition switch must be in the ON position to turn on the head- lights. When the light switch is in the AUTO light position, the tail lights and head- lights will be turned ON or OFF auto- matically depending on the amount of light outside the vehicle. If your vehicle is equipped with the adaptive front lighting system (AFLS), it will also operate when the headlamp is ON. Features of your vehicle 5-115 Features of your vehicle CAUTION · Never place anything over the sen- sor (1) located on the instrument panel. This will ensure better au- to-light system control. · Don't clean the sensor using a win- dow cleaner. The cleaner may leave a light film which could inter- fere with sensor operation. · If your vehicle has window tint or other types of metallic coating on the front windshield, the Auto light system may not work prop- erly. High beam operation WARNING Do not use high beam when there are other vehicles. Using high beam could obstruct the other driver's vi- sion. To turn on the high beam headlamp, push the lever away from you. The lev- er will return to its original position. The high beam indicator will light when the headlight high beams are switched on. To prevent the battery from being dis- charged, do not leave the lights on for a prolonged time while the engine is not running. To flash the headlights, pull the lever towards you. It will return to the nor- mal (low beam) position when released. The headlight switch does not need to be on to use this flashing feature. 5-116 Features of your vehicle High Beam Assist (if equipped) 3. The High Beam Assist will turn on - When streetlights or other lights are when vehicle speed is above detected. 45 km/h (28 mph). · If the lever is pushed away when the High Beam Assist is operat- - When vehicle speed is below 35 km/h (22 mph). ing, the High Beam Assist will - When headlamp/taillamp of bicycle/ turn off and the high beam will motorcycle is detected. be on continuously. The High Beam Assist ( ) indicator will Warning light and message turn off. When the High Beam Assist System is 5 · If the lever is pulled towards you not working properly, the warning mes- when the High Beam Assist is op- sage ( Check High Beam Assist Sys- erating, the High Beam Assist will tem ) will come on for a few second. turn off. After the message disappears, the The High Beam Assist is a system that 4. If the light switch is placed to the headlamp position, the High Beam Assist will turn off and the low master warning light will illuminate. We recommend you to contact an author- ized Kia dealer. automatically adjusts the headlamp beam will be on continuously. range (switches between high beam CAUTION and low beam) according to the bright- The high beam switches to low beam in ness of other vehicles and road condi- the below conditions. The system may not operate nor- tions. - When the High Beam Assist is off. mally in the below conditions. Operating condition 1. Place the light switch in the AUTO position. - When the light switch is not in the AUTO position. - When the headlamp is detected from · When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected be- cause of lamp damage, hidden from sight, etc. 2. Turn on the high beam by pushing the lever away from you. The High Beam Assist ( ) indicator will illuminate. the oncoming vehicle. - When the tail lamp is detected from the front vehicle. - When the surrounding is bright · When the lamp of the oncoming or front vehicle is covered with dust, snow or water. (Continued) enough high beams are not needed. 5-117 Features of your vehicle (Continued) · When the light from the oncoming or front vehicle is not detected be- cause of exhaust fume, smoke, fog, snow, etc. · When the front window is covered with foreign matters such as ice, dust, fog, or is damaged. · When there is a similar shape lamp with the front vehicle's lamps. · When it is hard to see because of fog, heavy rain or snow. · When the headlamp is not repaired or replaced at an authorized deal- er. · When headlamp aiming is not properly adjusted. · When driving on a narrow curved road or rough road. · When driving downhill or uphill. · When only part of the vehicle in front is visible on a crossroad or curved road. · When there is a traffic light, re- flecting sign, flashing sign or mir- ror. (Continued) (Continued) · When the road conditions are bad such as being wet or covered with snow. · When the front vehicle's head- lamps are off but the fog lamps on. · When a vehicle suddenly appears from a curve. · When the vehicle is tilted from a flat tire or being towed. · When the LDWS (Lane Departure Warning System) or LKAS (Lane Keeping Assist System) warning light illuminates. (if equipped) WARNING · Do not place any accessories, stickers or tint the windshield. · Have the windshield glass replaced from an authorized dealer. · Do not remove or impact related parts of the High Beam Assist sys- tem. (Continued) (Continued) · Be careful that water doesn't get into the High Beam Assist unit. · Do not place objects on the dash- board that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys- tem may malfunction if sunlight is reflected. · At times, the Smart High Beam system may not work properly, al- ways check the road conditions for your safety. When the system does not operate normally, man- ually change between the high beam and low beam. 5-118 Features of your vehicle Turn signals and lane change signals If an indicator stays on and does not flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of the turn signal bulbs may be burned out and will require replacement. Rear fog light (if equipped) One-touch lane change function (if equipped) To activate an one-touch lane change function, move the turn signal lever slightly for less than 0.7 second and then release it. The lane change signals will blink 3 times. 5 NOTICE The ignition switch must be on for the turn signals to function. To turn on the turn signals, move the lever up or down (A). The green arrow indicators on the instrument panel indicate which turn signal is operating. They will self-cancel after a turn is completed. If the indica- tor continues to flash after a turn, manually return the lever to the OFF position. To signal a lane change, move the turn signal lever slightly and hold it in posi- tion (B). The lever will return to the OFF position when released. If an indicator flash is abnormally quick or slow, a bulb may be burned out or have a poor electrical connec- tion in the circuit. To turn the rear fog lights on, turn the headlight switch to the headlight on position and turn the rear fog light switch (1) to the ON position. The rear fog lights turn on when the rear fog light switch is turned on after the headlight switch is in the parklight position. To turn the rear fog lights off, turn the rear fog light switch to the on position again or turn the headlight switch off. 5-119 Features of your vehicle NOTICE To turn on the rear fog light switch, the ignition switch must be in the ON position. Manual type Headlight leveling device (if equipped) Automatic type It automatically adjusts the headlight beam level according to the number of passengers and loading weight in the luggage area. And it offers proper headlight beam under various conditions. WARNING If it does not work properly even though your car is inclined backward according to passenger's posture, or the headlight beam is irradiated to the high or low position, we recom- mend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. Do not attempt to inspect or replace the wiring yourself. 0+'$ To adjust the headlight beam level ac- cording to the number of passengers and loading weight in the luggage area, turn the beam leveling switch. The higher the number of the switch position, the lower the headlight beam level. Always keep the headlight beam at the proper leveling position, or head- lights may dazzle other road users. Listed below are the examples of prop- er switch settings. For loading condi- tions other than those listed below, ad- just the switch position so that the beam level may be the nearest as the condition obtained according to the list. Loading condition Switch position Driver only 0 Driver + Front passenger 0 Full passengers (including driver) 1 Full passengers (including driver) + Maximum permissi- 2 ble loading Driver + Maximum permissi- ble loading 3 5-120 AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) (if equipped) If the AFLS malfunction indicator comes on, the AFLS is not working properly. Drive to the nearest safe location and restart the engine. If the indicator con- tinuously remains on, we recommend that the system be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. Adaptive front lighting system uses the steering angle and vehicle speed, to keep your field of vision wide by swivel- ing and leveling the headlamp. Change the switch to the AUTO position when the engine is running. The adap- tive front lighting system will operate when the headlamp is ON. To turn off the AFLS, change the switch to other positions. After turning the AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no longer occurs, but leveling operates continuously. 5 5-121 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield wiper/washer 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'-#0+'-# A: Wiper speed control (front) 1. LO / 1 Low wiper speed 5-122 2. HI / 2 High wiper speed 3. INT / --- Intermittent wipe AUTO* Auto control wipe 4. OFF / O Off 5. MIST/ Single wipe B: Intermittent control wipe time ad- justment C: Wash with brief wipes (front) * Windshield wipers Operates as follows when the ignition switch is turned ON. MIST/ : For a single wiping cycle, move the lever to this (MIST/ ) position and re- lease it. The wipers will operate continuously if the lever is held in this po- sition. OFF / O: Wiper is not in operation INT / ---: Wiper operates intermit- tently at the same wiping intervals. Use this mode in light rain or mist. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob. *: if equipped LO / 1: HI / 2: Normal wiper speed Fast wiper speed NOTICE If there is heavy accumulation of snow or ice on the windshield, de- frost the windshield for about 10 minutes, or until the snow and/or ice is removed before using the wind- shield wipers to ensure proper oper- ation. If you do not remove the snow and/or ice before using the wiper and washer, it may damage the wip- er and washer system. Features of your vehicle Auto control (if equipped) 5ZQF" 5ZQF# The rain sensor (A) located on the up- per end of the windshield glass senses the amount of rainfall and controls the wiping cycle for the proper interval. The more it rains, the faster the wiper operates. When the rain stops, the wip- er stops. To vary the speed setting, turn the speed control knob (1). If the wiper switch is set in AUTO mode when the ignition switch is ON, the wip- er will operate once to perform a selfcheck of the system. Set the wiper to OFF (O) position when the wiper is not in use. CAUTION When the ignition switch is ON and the windshield wiper switch is placed in the AUTO mode, use caution in the following situations to avoid any in- jury to the hands or other parts of the body: · Do not touch the upper end of the windshield glass facing the rain sensor. · Do not wipe the upper end of the windshield glass with a damp or wet cloth. · Do not put pressure on the wind- shield glass. CAUTION · When washing the vehicle, set the wiper switch in the OFF (O) posi- tion to stop the auto wiper opera- tion. The wiper may operate and be damaged if the switch is set in the AUTO mode while washing the ve- hicle. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not remove the sensor cover located on the upper end of the passenger side windshield glass. Damage to system parts could oc- cur and may not be covered by your vehicle warranty. · When starting the vehicle in win- ter, set the wiper switch in the OFF (O) position. Otherwise, wipers may operate and ice may damage 5 the windshield wiper blades. Al- ways remove all snow and ice and defrost the windshield properly prior to operating the windshield wipers. · When tinting the windshield, be careful of any fluid getting into the sensor located in the top cen- ter of the front windshield. It may damage the related parts. 5-123 Features of your vehicle Windshield washers 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'- 0+'- In the OFF (O) position, pull the lever gently toward you to spray washer flu- id on the windshield and to run the wip- ers 1-3 cycles. Use this function when the windshield is dirty. The spray and wiper operation will con- tinue until you release the lever. If the washer does not work, check the washer fluid level. If the fluid level is not sufficient, you will need to add ap- propriate non-abrasive windshield washer fluid to the washer reservoir. The reservoir filler neck is located in the front of the engine compartment on the passenger side. CAUTION To prevent possible damage to the washer pump, do not operate the washer when the fluid reservoir is empty. WARNING Do not use the washer in freezing temperatures without first warming the windshield with the defrosters; the washer solution could freeze on the windshield and obscure your vi- sion. CAUTION · To prevent possible damage to the wipers or windshield, do not oper- ate the wipers when the wind- shield is dry. (Continued) (Continued) · To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kero- sene, paint thinner, or other sol- vents on or near them. · To prevent damage to the wiper arms and other components, do not attempt to move the wipers manually. · To prevent possible damage to the wipers and washer system, use anti-freezing washer fluids in the winter season or cold weather. Headlight washer (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the headlight washer it will operate at the same time when you operate the wind- shield washer. However, if this function is operated once, the headlight washer will not operate within 15 minutes. It will operate when the headlight is ON and the ignition switch or engine start/ stop button is in the ON position. The washer fluid will be sprayed on to the headlights. 5-124 NOTICE · Check the headlight washers peri- odically to confirm that the wash- er fluid is being sprayed properly onto the headlight lenses. · The headlight washer can be oper- ated 15 minutes after being oper- ated last time. 5 5-125 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle INTERIOR LIGHT CAUTION Do not use the interior lights for ex- tended periods when the engine is not running. It may cause battery discharge. Map lamp 5ZQF" WARNING Do not use the interior lights when driving in the dark. Accidents could happen because the view may be obscured by interior lights. Automatic turn off function (if equipped) The interior lights automatically turn off approximately 20 minutes after the ignition switch is turned off. If your vehicle is equipped with the theft alarm system, the interior lights automatically turns off approximately 3 seconds after the system is armed stage. 5ZQF# · (2): 5-126 0+')0+' - The map lamp and room lamp comes on when a door is opened. The lamps go out after approxi- mately 30 seconds. - The map lamp and room lamp comes on for approximately 30 seconds when doors are unlocked with a transmitter or smart key as long as the doors are not opened. - The map lamp and room lamp will stay on for approximately 20 mi- nutes if a door is opened with the ignition switch in the ACC or LOCK/OFF position. - The map lamp and room lamp will stay on continuously if the door is opened with the ignition switch in the ON position. - The map lamp and room lamp will go out immediately if the ignition switch is changed to the ON posi- tion or all doors are locked. - To turn off the DOOR mode, press the DOOR button (2) once again (not pressed). NOTICE The DOOR mode and ROOM mode can not be selected at a time. Room lamp 5ZQF" Front Room Lamp: · Type A (3): (4): Press this switch to turn the front and rear room lamps on. Press this switch to turn the front and rear room lamps off. · Type B (3): Press this switch to turn the front and rear room lamps on and off. 5ZQF# 5ZQF$ 0+' 0+' · : The light stays on at all times. 5 Trunk room lamp (if equipped) 0+' The trunk room lamp comes on when the trunk is opened. 5-127 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle CAUTION The trunk room lamp comes on as long as the trunk lid opens. To pre- vent unnecessary charging system drain, close the trunk lid securely af- ter using the trunk room. Glove box lamp (if equipped) CAUTION To prevent unnecessary charging system drain, close the glove box se- curely after using the glove box. Vanity mirror lamp (if equipped) CAUTION n Vanity mirror lamp Always have the switch in the off position when the vanity mirror lamp is not in use. If the sunvisor is closed without the lamp off, it may discharge the battery or damage the sunvisor. 0+' 0+' The glove box lamp comes on when the glove box is opened. Opening the lid of the vanity mirror will automatically turn on the mirror light. 5-128 Door courtesy lamp (if equipped) 0+' The door courtesy lamp comes ON when the door is opened to assist en- tering or exiting the vehicle. It also serves as a warning to passing vehicles that the vehicle door is open. 5 5-129 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle WELCOME SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Welcome light (if equipped) · With the smart key system - When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key. When all the doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the room lamp will come on for about 15 seconds if any of the below is performed. · With the smart key system - When the vehicle is approached with the smart key in possession. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the position light and headlight will turn off immediately. Interior light When the interior light switch is in the DOOR position and all doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the room lamp will come on for 30 seconds if any of the below is performed. · With the smart key system - When the door unlock button is pressed on the smart key. - When the button of the outside door handle is pressed. At this time, if you press the door lock or unlock button, the room lamp will turn off immediately. Escort welcome (if equipped) When the headlight (light switch in the headlight or AUTO position) is on and all doors (and trunk) are locked and closed, the position light and headlight will come on for 15 seconds if any of the below is performed. 5-130 Features of your vehicle DEFROSTER CAUTION To prevent damage to the conduc- tors bonded to the inside surface of the rear window, never use sharp in- struments or window cleaners con- taining abrasives to clean the win- dow. NOTICE If you want to defrost and defog the front windshield, refer to Wind- shield defrosting and defogging on page 5-146. Rear window defroster The rear window defroster automati- cally turns off after approximately 20 minutes or when the ignition switch is turned off. To turn off the defroster, press the rear window defroster button again. Outside rearview mirror defroster (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the out- 5 side rearview mirror defrosters, they will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window defroster. The defroster heats the window to re- move frost, fog and thin ice from the rear window, while the engine is run- ning. To activate the rear window defroster, press the rear window defroster button located in the center facia switch panel. The indicator on the rear window de- froster button illuminates when the de- froster is ON. If there is heavy accumulation of snow on the rear window, brush it off before operating the rear defroster. Wiper deicer (if equipped) If your vehicle is equipped with the wip- er deicer, it will operate at the same time you turn on the rear window de- froster. 5-131 Features of your vehicle CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM System operation Ventilation 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed. Heating 1. Set the mode to the position. 2. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position. 3. Set the temperature control to the desired position. 4. Set the fan speed control to the desired speed. 5. If dehumidified heating is desired, turn the air conditioning system (if equipped) on. Operation tips · To keep dust or unpleasant fumes from entering the vehicle through the ventilation system, temporarily set the air intake control to the recircula- ted air position. Be sure to return the control to the fresh air position when the irritation has passed to keep fresh air in the vehicle. This will help keep the driver alert and comforta- ble. · Air for the heating/cooling system is drawn in through the grilles just ahead of the windshield. Care should be taken that these are not blocked by leaves, snow, ice or other obstruc- tions. · To prevent interior fog on the wind- shield, set the air intake control to the fresh air position and fan speed to the desired position, turn on the air conditioning system, and adjust the temperature control to desired temperature. · If the windshield fogs up, set the mode to the or position. CAUTION Operating the blower when the igni- tion switch is in the ON position could cause the battery to discharge. Operate the blower when the engine is running. Air conditioning Kia air conditioning systems are filled with R-134a or R-1234yf refrigerant. 1. Start the hybrid system. Push the air conditioning button. 2. Set the mode to the position. 3. Set the air intake control to the outside air or recirculated air posi- tion. 4. Adjust the fan speed control and temperature control to maintain maximum comfort. 5-132 Features of your vehicle Your vehicle is filled with R-134a or R-1234yf according to the regulation in your country at the time of production. You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied to your vehicle on the label located inside of the hood. Re- fer to Refrigerant label on page 10-18 for the location of the air condi- tioning refrigerant label. CAUTION · The refrigerant system should on- ly be serviced by trained and certi- fied technicians to insure proper and safe operation. · The refrigerant system should be serviced in a well-ventilated place. · The air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) shall never be re- paired or replaced with one re- moved from a used or salvaged vehicle and new replacement MAC evaporators shall be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842. NOTICE · When using the air conditioning system, monitor the temperature gauge closely while driving up hills or in heavy traffic when outside temperatures are high. Air condi- tioning system operation may cause engine overheating. Contin- ue to use the blower fan but turn the air conditioning system off if the temperature gauge indicates engine overheating. · When opening the windows in hu- mid weather air conditioning may create water droplets inside the vehicle. Since excessive water droplets may cause damage to electrical equipment, air condition- ing should only be used with the windows closed. Air conditioning system operation tips · If the vehicle has been parked in di- rect sunlight during hot weather, open the windows for a short time to let the hot air inside the vehicle es- cape. · Use air conditioning to reduce humidi- ty and moisture inside the vehicle on rainy or humid days. · During air conditioning system opera- tion, you may occasionally notice a slight change in engine speed as the air conditioning compressor cycles. This is a normal system operation characteristic. · Use the air conditioning system every 5 month only for a few minutes to en- sure maximum system performance. · When using the air conditioning sys- tem, you may notice clear water dripping (or even puddling) on the ground under the passenger side of the vehicle. This is a normal system operation characteristic. · Operating the air conditioning system in the recirculated air position pro- vides maximum cooling, however, continual operation in this mode may cause the air inside the vehicle to be- come stale. · During cooling operation, you may oc- casionally notice a misty air flow be- cause of rapid cooling and humid air intake. This is a normal system oper- ation characteristic. 5-133 Features of your vehicle Climate control air filter 06.- A: Outside air B: Recirculated air C: Climate control air filter D: Blower E: Evaporator core F: Heater core The climate control air filter installed behind the glove box filters the dust or other pollutants that come into the ve- hicle from the outside through the heating and air conditioning system. If dust or other pollutants accumulate in the filter over a period of time, the air flow from the air vents may de- crease, resulting in moisture accumula- tion on the inside of the windshield even when the outside (fresh) air posi- tion is selected. If this happens, we rec- ommend that the climate control air fil- ter be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. NOTICE · Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule on page 9-09. If the car is being driven in severe conditions such as dusty, rough roads, more frequent climate con- trol air filter inspections and changes are required. (Continued) (Continued) · When the air flow rate suddenly decreases, we recommend that the system be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. 5-134 Air conditioning refrigerant label Each symbol and specification on air conditioning refrigerant label means as WARNING &YBNQMF 5ZQF" below: 1. Classification of refrigerant 2. Amount of refrigerant 3. Classification of compressor lubri- cant n Vehicles equipped with R-134a Because the refrigerant is at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced 5ZQF# You can find out which air conditioning refrigerant is applied your vehicle at the label inside of the engine room. Refer to Refrigerant label on page 10-18 for a more detailed location of the air conditioning refrigerant label. Checking the amount of air conditioner refrigerant and by trained and certified technicians. It is impor- tant that the correct type and amount of oil and re- 5 frigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury. compressor lubricant When the amount of refrigerant is low, WARNING the performance of the air conditioning is reduced. Overfilling also has a bad in- fluence on the air conditioning system. n Vehicles equipped R-1234yf with Therefore, if abnormal operation is found, we recommend that the system (Continued) be inspected by an authorized Kia deal- er. Features of your vehicle The actual air conditioning refriger- ant label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. 5-135 Features of your vehicle (Continued) Because the refrigerant is mildly inflammable and at very high pressure, the air conditioning system should only be serviced by trained and certified technicians. It is impor- tant that the correct type and amount of oil and re- frigerant is used. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the vehicle and personal injury. 5-136 Automatic climate control system (if equipped) 5ZQF" 5ZQF# System overview 1. Driver's temperature control knob 2. AUTO (automatic control) button 3. Front windshield defroster button 4. Rear window defroster button 5. Air conditioning button 6. Air intake control button 7. OFF button 5 8. Fan speed control button 9. Mode selection button 10. Passenger's temperature control knob 11. Dual temperature control selection button 12. Climate information screen selec- tion button 13. DRIVER ONLY button 14. ECON (Economy air conditioning) button 5-137 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Automatic heating and air conditioning 0+' 1. Press the AUTO button. The modes, fan speeds, air intake and air-con- ditioning will be controlled auto- matically according to the temper- ature setting. %SJWFSTTJEF 1BTTFOHFSTTJEF 0+' 2. Turn the temperature control knob to the desired temperature. NOTICE · To turn the automatic operation off, select any button or switch of the following: - Mode selection button - Air conditioning button (Continued) (Continued) - Front windshield defroster button (Press the button one more time to deselect the front windshield defroster function. The 'AUTO' sign will illuminate on the information display once again.) - Air intake control button - Fan speed control button The selected function will be controlled manually while the other functions operate auto- matically. · For your convenience and to im- prove the effectiveness of the climate control, use the AUTO button and set the temperature to 22°C/71°F (for Europe) or 23°C/73°F (for Except Europe). 5-138 0+' NOTICE Never place anything over the sen- sor located on the instrument panel to ensure better control of the heat- ing and cooling system. 5 5-139 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Mode selection 5-140 The mode selection button controls the direction of the air flow through the ventilation system. The air flow outlet port is converted as follows: 0+' Face-Level (B, D) Air flow is directed toward the upper body and face. Additionally, each out- let can be controlled to direct the air discharged from the outlet. Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F) Air flow is directed towards the face and the floor. Floor-Level (A, C, E, F) Most of the air flow is directed to the floor, with a small amount of the air being directed to the windshield and side window defrosters. Floor/Defrost-Level (A, C, E, F) Most of the air flow is directed to the floor and the windshield with a small amount directed to the side window defrosters. Instrument panel vents The outlet vents can be opened or closed separately using the thumb- wheel. Also, you can adjust the direction of air delivery from these vents using the vent control lever as shown. NOTICE n 2nd row outlet vents (E,F) 5 Defrost-Level Most of the air flow is directed to the windshield with a small amount of air directed to the side window defrosters. · The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents is controlled by the front cli- mate control system and delivered through the inside air duct of the floor (E, F). · The air flow of the 2nd row outlet vents (E, F) may be weaker than the instrument panel vents for the long air duct. Features of your vehicle 0+' 5-141 Features of your vehicle Temperature control %SJWFSTTJEF 1BTTFOHFSTTJEF 0+' The temperature will increase to the maximum (HI) by turning the knob to the extreme right. The temperature will decrease to the minimum (Lo) by turning the knob to the extreme left. When turning the knob, the tempera- ture will increase or decrease by 0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest tem- perature setting, the air conditioning will operate continuously. Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature equally 0+' · Press the SYNC button to adjust the driver and passenger side tempera- ture equally. The passenger side temperature will be set to the same temperature as the driver side temperature. · Turn the driver side temperature control knob. The driver and passen- ger side temperature will be adjusted equally. Adjusting the driver and passenger side temperature individually · Press the SYNC button again to ad- just the driver and passenger side temperature individually. The illumi- nation of button turns off. · Operate the driver side temperature control knob to adjust the driver side temperature. · Operate the passenger side tempera- ture control knob to adjust the pas- senger side temperature. Temperature conversion (°C °F) (if equipped) You can switch the temperature mode between Centigrade to Fahrenheit as follows; While pressing the OFF button, depress the AUTO button for 3 seconds or more. The display will change from Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from Fah- renheit to Centigrade. 5-142 Air intake control Outside (fresh) air position With the outside (fresh) air position selected, air enters the vehicle from outside and is heated or cooled according to the function selected. This is used to select the outside (fresh) air position or recirculated air position. To change the air intake control posi- tion, push the control button. Recirculated air position With the recirculated air position selected, air from the passenger compart- ment will be drawn through the heating sys- tem and heated or cooled according to the function selected. NOTICE Prolonged operation of the heater in the recirculated air position (without air conditioning selected) may cause fogging of the windshield and side windows and the air within the pas- senger compartment may become stale. In addition, prolonged use of the air conditioning with the recirculated air position selected will result in exces- sively dry air in the passenger com- partment. WARNING · Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated air posi- tion may allow humidity to in- crease inside the vehicle which may fog the glass and obscure vis- ibility. · Do not sleep in a vehicle with the air conditioning or heating system on. It may cause serious harm or death due to a drop in the oxygen 5 level and/or body temperature. · Continue using the climate control system in the recirculated air posi- tion can cause drowsiness or sleepiness, and loss of vehicle con- trol. Set the air intake control to the outside (fresh) air position as much as possible while driving. 5-143 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle Fan speed control Air conditioning OFF mode The fan speed can be set to the desired speed by pushing the fan speed control button. The higher the fan speed is, the more air is delivered. Pressing the OFF button turns off the fan. Press the A/C button to turn the air conditioning system on (indicator light will illuminate). Press the button again to turn the air conditioning system off. Press the front blower OFF button to turn off the front air climate control system. However, you can still operate the mode and air intake buttons as long as the ignition switch is in the ON posi- tion. 5-144 Climate information screen selection (if equipped) Driver Only 4. DRIVER ONLY button re-push Economy air conditioning button (ECON) Features of your vehicle 5 Press the climate information screen selection button to display climate in- formation on the screen. If you press the DRIVER ONLY button and the indicator light illuminates, cold air mostly blows in the direction of the driver s seat. However, some of the cold air may come out of other seats ducts to keep indoor air pleasant. If you use the button with no passen- ger in the front passenger seat, energy consumption will be reduced. DRIVER ONLY button will be turned off under the following conditions: 1. Defrost on 2. SYNC on 3. Adjusted front passenger seat temperature If you push the ECON button while the air conditioning system is working, the air conditioning system will work less and may improve fuel efficiency. If you want maximum air conditioning turn the ECON system off by pushing the ECON button. 5-145 Features of your vehicle WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING Automatic climate control system To defog inside windshield If the air conditioning and outside (fresh) air position are not selected au- tomatically, adjust the corresponding button manually. If the position is selected, lower fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan speed. To defrost outside windshield 0+' 1. Set the fan speed to the desired position. 2. Select the desired temperature. 3. Press the defroster button ( ). 4. The air conditioning will turn on ac- cording to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automati- cally. 0+' 1. Set the fan speed to the highest position. 2. Set the temperature to the ex- treme hot (HI) position. 3. Press the defroster button . 4. The air conditioning will turn on ac- cording to the detected ambient temperature and outside (fresh) air position will be selected automati- cally. Operation tips · For maximum defrosting, set the temperature control to the extreme right/hot position and the fan speed control to the highest speed. · If warm air to the floor is desired while defrosting or defogging, set the mode to the floor-defrost position. · Before driving, clear all snow and ice from the windshield, rear window, outside rear view mirrors, and all side windows. · Clear all snow and ice from the hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to im- prove heater and defroster efficiency and to reduce the probability of fog- ging up the inside of the windshield. WARNING n Windshield heating (Continued) 5-146 Features of your vehicle (Continued) Do not use the or position during cooling operation in extreme- Automatic climate control system Auto defogging system (Only for automatic climate control system, if equipped) ly humid weather. The difference be- tween the temperature of the out- side air and the windshield could cause the outer surface of the wind- shield to fog up, causing loss of visi- bility. In this case, set the mode se- lection to the position and fan speed control to the lower speed. 5 Defogging logic (if equipped) To reduce the possibility of fogging up the inside of the windshield, the air in- take or air conditioning are controlled automatically according to certain con- ditions such as the or position. To cancel or return to the defogging logic, do the following. 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 2. Press the defrost button ( ). 3. While pressing the air conditioning button (A/C), press the air intake control button at least 5 times within 3 seconds. The indicator on the air intake button will blink 3 times. It indicates that the defogging logic is canceled or returned to the programmed status. If the battery has been discharged or disconnected, it resets to the defog logic status. 0+'- Auto defogging reduces the possibility of fogging up the inside of the wind- shield by automatically sensing the moisture of inside the windshield. This indicator illuminates when the auto defogging system senses the moisture of inside the windshield and operates. If more moisture is in the vehicle, high- er steps operate as follow. 5-147 Features of your vehicle (For European region) Step 1: Blowing air flow toward the windshield Step 2: Increasing air flow toward the windshield Step 3: Operating the air condition- ing. Step 4: Outside air position (For except European region) Step 1: Outside air position Step 2: Operating the air condition- ing. Step 3: Blowing air flow toward the windshield Step 4: Increasing air flow toward the windshield To cancel or reset the Auto Defogging System Press the front windshield defroster button for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is in the ON position. When the Auto Defogging System is canceled, ADS OFF symbol will blink 3 times and the ADS OFF will be displayed on the climate control information screen. When the Auto Defogging System is re- set, ADS OFF symbol will blink 6 times without a signal. 5-148 CLEAN AIR (IF EQUIPPED) 0+'- When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the clean air function turns on automatically. Also, the clean air function turns off automatically, when the ignition switch turns to the OFF position. 5 5-149 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle STORAGE COMPARTMENT These compartments can be used to store small items. Center console storage Glove box CAUTION · To avoid possible theft, do not leave valuables in the storage compartment. · Always keep the storage compart- ment covers closed while driving. Do not attempt to place so many items in the storage compartment that the storage compartment cover cannot close securely. WARNING n Flammable materials Do not store cigarette lighters, pro- pane cylinders, or other flammable/ explosive materials in the vehicle. These items may catch fire and/or explode if the vehicle is exposed to hot temperatures for extended peri- ods. 0+'- To open the center console storage, pull up the lever. The glove box can be locked and un- locked with a master key. (if equipped) To open the glove box, pull the lever (1) and the glove box will automatically open. Close the glove box after use. WARNING To reduce the risk of injury in an ac- cident or sudden stop, always keep the glove box door closed while driv- ing. 5-150 CAUTION Do not keep food in the glove box for a long time. Sunglass holder 0+' To open the sunglass holder, press the cover and the holder will slowly open. Place your sunglasses with the lenses facing out. To close the sunglass holder, push it up. WARNING · Do not keep objects except sun- glasses inside the sunglass holder. Such objects can be thrown from the holder in the event of a sudden stop or an accident, possibly injur- ing the passengers in the vehicle. · Do not open the sunglass holder while the vehicle is moving. The rear view mirror of the vehicle can be blocked by an opened sunglass holder. · Do not put the glasses forcibly into a sunglass holder to prevent breakage or deformation of the glasses. It may cause personal in- jury if you try to open it forcibly when the glasses are jammed in the holder. 5 5-151 Features of your vehicle Features of your vehicle INTERIOR FEATURES Cigarette lighter (if equipped) 0+' For the cigarette lighter to work, the ignition switch must be in the ACC posi- tion or the ON position. To use the cigarette lighter, push it all the way into its socket. When the ele- ment has heated, the lighter will pop out to the ready position. We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING · Do not hold the lighter in after it is already heated because it will overheat. · If the lighter does not pop out within 30 seconds, remove it to prevent overheating. · Do not insert foreign objects into the socket of the cigarette lighter. It may damage the cigarette light- er. CAUTION The use of plug-in accessories (sha- vers, hand-held vacuums, and coffee pots, etc.) may damage the socket or cause electrical failure. Ashtray (if equipped) 0+' To use the ashtray, open the cover. To clean or empty the ashtray, pull it out. WARNING n Ashtray use · Do not use the vehicle's ashtrays as waste receptacles. · Putting lit cigarettes or matches in an ashtray with other combustible materials may cause a fire. 5-152 Cup holder WARNING n Hot liquids · Do not place uncovered cups of hot liquid in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. If the hot liq- uid spills, you may burn yourself. Such a burn to the driver could lead to loss of control of the vehi- cle. · To reduce the risk of a personal in- jury in the event of a sudden stop or collision, do not place uncovered or unsecured bottles, glasses, cans, etc., in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. (Continued) (Continued) · If uncovered cups and cans con- taining any form of liquid are put into the front/center seat cup holders and the vehicle brakes heavily, the liquid may flow into the narrow openings around cup holders and console, and soak into the vehicle's internal electrical sys- tem. To avoid subsequent system mal- function, always firmly cover any container holding liquid. WARNING Keep cans or bottles out of direct sun light and do not put them in a vehicle that is heated up. They may explode. NOTICE · Keep your drinks sealed while driv- ing to prevent spilling your drink. If liquid spills, it may get into the ve- hicle's electrical/electronic system and damage electrical/electronic parts. · When cleaning spilled liquids, do not dry the cup holder at high temperature. This may damage 5 the cup holder. Features of your vehicle 5-153 Features of your vehicle 5ZQF" Sunvisor 5ZQF# 0+' 0+' 0+'# Cups or small beverage cans may be placed in the cup holders. Use the sunvisor to shield direct light through the front or side windows. To use the sunvisor, pull it downward. To use the sunvisor for the side win- dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from the bracket (1) and swing it to the side (2). To use the vanity mirror, pull down the visor and slide the mirror cover (3). Adjust the sunvisor extension forward or backward (4). The ticket holder (5) is provided for holding a tollgate ticket. (if equipped) CAUTION n Vanity mirror lamp (if equip- ped) If you use the vanity mirror lamp, turn off the lamp before returning the sunvisor to its original position, otherwise it could result in battery discharge and possible sunvisor damage. 5-154 Features of your vehicle Seat warmer (if equipped) The seat warmer is provided to warm the front seats during cold weather. NOTICE 'SPOUTFBU With the ignition switch in the ON posi- tion, push either of the switches to With the seat warmer switch in the warm the driver's seat or the front ON position, the heating system in passenger's seat. the seat turns off or on automati- During mild weather or under condi- tions where the operation of the seat warmer is not needed, keep the cally depending on the seat temper- ature. switches in the "OFF" position. · Each time you press the switch, the temperature setting of the seat will change as follows: - Front seat CAUTION · When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as 5 3FBSTFBU 0+' OFFHIGH( )MIDDLE( )LOW( ) paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gasoline. Doing so may damage the surface of the heater or seats. 0+' - Rear seat · The seat warmer defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on. · To prevent overheating the seat warmer, do not place anything on the seats that insulates against heat, such as blankets, cushions or seat covers while the seat warmer is in operation. · Do not place heavy or sharp ob- jects on seats equipped with seat warmers. Damage to the seat warming components could occur. · Do not change the seat cover. It may damage the seat warmer or airventilation system. 5-155 Features of your vehicle WARNING n Seat warmer burns Passengers should use extreme cau- tion when using seat warmers due to the possibility of excess heating or burns. The seat warmer may cause burns even at low tempera- tures, especially if used for long pe- riods of time. In particular, the driver must exercise extreme care for the following types of passengers: 1. Infants, children, elderly or handicapped persons, or hospital outpatients 2. Persons with sensitive skin or those that burn easily 3. Fatigued individuals 4. Intoxicated individuals 5. Individuals taking medication that can cause drowsiness or sleepiness (sleeping pills, cold tablets, etc.) Air ventilation seat (if equipped) · The seat warmer (with air ventila- tion) defaults to the OFF position whenever the ignition switch is turned on. CAUTION When cleaning the seats, do not use an organic solvent such as paint thinner, benzene, alcohol and gaso- line. Doing so may damage the sur- face of the heater or seats. 0+' The temperature setting of the seat changes according to the switch posi- tion. · If you want to warm your seat cush- ion, press the switch (red color). · If you want to ventilate your seat cushion, press the switch (blue color). · Each time you press the button, the airflow will change as follows: OFFHIGH( )MIDDLE( )LOW( ) 5-156 Features of your vehicle Power outlet 0+' The power outlet is designed to provide power for mobile telephones or other devices designed to operate with vehi- cle electrical systems. The devices should draw less than 10 amps with the engine running. CAUTION · Use the power outlet only when the engine is running and remove the accessory plug after use. Using the accessory plug for prolonged periods of time with the engine off could cause the battery to dis- charge. · Only use 12V electric accessories which are less than 10A in electric capacity. · Adjust the air-conditioner or heat- er to the lowest operating level when using the power outlet. · Close the cover when not in use. · Some electronic devices can cause electronic interference when plug- ged into a vehicle's power outlet. These devices may cause exces- sive audio static and malfunctions in other electronic systems or de- vices used in your vehicle. · Refrain from using the heater or A/C if you need to use the multi- purpose socket. If the heater or A/C has to be used simultaneously, have it to the lowest setting. (Continued) (Continued) · Some add-on electrical equipment will induce electromagnetic inter- ference. This will lead to subse- quent malfunction or hinder good reception of the Audio/Video and electrical system. · Always make sure that electric add-ons are fully plugged into the multipurpose sockets. Insecure contacts may lead to electrical 5 malfunctions. WARNING Do not put a finger or a foreign ele- ment (pin, etc.) into a power outlet and do not touch with a wet hand. You may get an electric shock. 5-157 Features of your vehicle USB charger (if equipped) 0+'- The USB charger is designed to re- charge batteries of small size electrical devices using a USB cable. The electrical devices can be recharged when the En- gine Start/Stop button is in ACC/ON/ START position. The battery charging state may be monitored on the electrical device. Disconnect the USB cable from the USB port after use. · Some devices are not supported for fast charging but will be charged with normal speed. · Use the USB charger when the engine is running to prevent battery dis- charge. · Only devices that fits the USB port can be used. · The USB charger can be used only for battery charging purposes. · Battery chargers cannot be charged. Wireless smart phone charging system (if equipped) A wireless smart phone charging sys- tem located in front of the center con- sole. Firmly close all doors, and turn the igni- tion to ACC or IGN ON. To start wireless charging, place the smart phone equip- ped with wireless charging function on the wireless charging pad. For best wireless charging results, place the smart phone on the center of the charging pad. The wireless charging system is de- signed for one smart phone equipped with QI per single usage only. Please re- fer to the smart phone accessory cover or the smart phone manufacturer homepage to check whether your smart phone supports QI function. Wireless smart phone charging 1. Remove any object on the smart phone charging pad including the smart key. If there is any foreign object on the pad other than a smart phone, the wireless charging function may not operate properly. 2. Place the smart phone on the cen- ter of the wireless charging pad. 3. The indicator light will change to orange once the wireless charging begins. After the charging is com- plete, the orange light will change to green. 4. You can choose to turn the wireless charging function to either ON or OFF by selecting the USM on the in- strument cluster. (Please refer to Instrument cluster on page 5-48 for details.) 5-158 Features of your vehicle If the wireless charging does not work, gently move your smart phone around the pad until the charging indicator light turns yellow. Depending on the smart phone, the charging indicator light may not turn green even after the charging is complete. If the wireless charging is not function- ing properly, the orange light will blink and flash for ten seconds then turn off. In such cases, remove the smart phone from the pad and replace it on the pad again, or double check the charging sta- tus. If you leave the smart phone on the charging pad when the vehicle ignition is in OFF, the vehicle will alert you through warning messages and sound (applicable for vehicles with voice guid- ance function) after the Good bye function on the instrument cluster ends. CAUTION · Securely close the tray cover when using the wireless smart phone charge function. Otherwise, some liquid held by the cup holder may flow onto the wireless charging pad during sudden stops. · Close the tray cover when the smart phone is placed in it at all times. If the vehicle is in motion without the tray cover closed, it is more likely that the driver may use the smart phone. The use of smart phones while driving may lead to possible injuries and acci- dents. · If it is not possible to close the tray cover due to the size of the smart phone, do not use the wire- less smart phone charging func- tion at all. · When the tray cover is broken, do not use the wireless charging function before the tray cover is repaired. (Continued) (Continued) · When the interior temperature of the wireless charging system rises above a set temperature, the wireless charging will cease to function. After the interior tem- perature drops below the thresh- old, the wireless charging function will resume. · If any metallic object such as coins is located between the wireless 5 charging system and the smart phone, the charging may be dis- rupted. Also, the metallic object may heat up. · If there is any metallic object be- tween the smart phone and the wireless charging pad, immediate- ly remove the smart phone. Re- move the metallic object after it has completely cooled down. · The wireless charging may not function properly when there is a heavy accessory cover on the smart phone. (Continued) 5-159 Features of your vehicle (Continued) · The wireless charging will stop when using the wireless smart key search function to prevent radio wave disruption. · The wireless charging will stop when the smart key is moved out of the vehicle with the ignition in ON. · The wireless charging will stop when any of the doors is opened (applicable for vehicles equipped with smart keys). · The wireless charging will stop when the vehicle is turned OFF. · The wireless charging will stop when the smart phone is not in complete contact with the wireless charging pad. · Items equipped with magnetic components such as credit card, telephone card, bankbook, any transportation ticket and such may become damaged during wireless charging. (Continued) (Continued) · Place the smart phone on the cen- ter of the charge pad for best re- sults. The smart phone may not charge when placed near the rim of the charging pad. When the smart phone does get charged, it may heat up excessively. · For smart phones without built in wireless charging system, an ap- propriate accessory has to be equipped. · Smart phones of some manufac- turers may display messages on weak current. This is due to the particular characteristic of the smart phone and does not imply a malfunction on wireless charging function. · The indicator light of some manu- facturers' smart phones may still be yellow after the smart phone is fully charged. This is due to the particular characteristic of the smart phone and not a malfunc- tion of the wireless charging. (Continued) (Continued) · When any smart phone without a wireless charging function or a metallic object is placed on the charging pad, a small noise may sound. This small sound is due to the vehicle discerning compatibility of the object placed on the charg- ing pad. It does not affect your ve- hicle or the smart phone in any way. Clothes hanger (if equipped) 0+' The actual feature may differ from the illustration. 5-160 Features of your vehicle To use the hanger, pull down the upper portion of hanger. CAUTION Do not hang heavy clothes, since those may damage the hook. Floor mat anchor(s) (if equipped) 5ZQF" 5ZQF# (Continued) · Ensure that the floor mats are se- curely attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchor(s) before driving the vehicle. · Do not use ANY floor mat that cannot be firmly attached to the vehicle's floor mat anchors. WARNING Do not hang other objects except clothes. In an accident it may cause vehicle damage or personal injury. · Do not stack floor mats on top of one another (e.g. all-weather rub- ber mat on top of a carpeted floor 5 mat). Only a single floor mat should be installed in each position. IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was man- 09. ufactured with driver's side floor mat anchors that are designed to When using a floor mat on the front floor carpet, make sure it attaches to the floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle. This keeps the floor mat from sliding forward. securely hold the floor mat in place. To avoid any interference with pedal operation, Kia recommends that the Kia floor mat designed for use in your vehicle be installed. WARNING The following must be observed when installing ANY floor mat to the vehicle. (Continued) 5-161 Features of your vehicle Side curtain (if equipped) 0+' To use the side curtain: 1. Lift the curtain by the hook (1). 2. Hang the curtain on both sides of the hook. 5-162 Audio system Audio system............................................................................. 6-02 Antenna.................................................................................. 6-02 êteering wheel audio controls ........................................... 6-03 Aux, UêB port.........................................................................6-04 How vehicle radio works...................................................... 6-04 Audio (Without Touch êcreen)................................................ 6-07 Feature of your audio...........................................................6-07 Audio (Without Touch êcreen)............................................ 6-10 Feature of your audio...........................................................6-11 Before using the audio system.......................................... 6-12 éadio mode (Type A-1, Type A-2 with éDê)....................6-22 éadio mode (Type A-3, Type A-4)..................................... 6-23 Media mode............................................................................6-24 çhone mode .......................................................................... 6-29 Voice éecognition Mode ...................................................... 6-31 êetup mode (Type A-1, Type A-2).................................... 6-37 êetup Mode (Type A-3, Type A-4).....................................6-43 êetup Mode (Type A-3, Type A-4, For Colombia Model)..................................................................................... 6-48 Audio (With Touch êcreen) (Only for hybrid vehicle)...........6-54 Feature of your audio...........................................................6-54 éadio Mode (Type B-1)........................................................ 6-66 éadio Mode (Type B-2)........................................................ 6-68 Media mode............................................................................6-69 çhone Mode........................................................................... 6-79 Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-1)................... 6-80 Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-2)................... 6-86 Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-2, For Colombia model).................................................................... 6-91 Voice éecognition Mode ...................................................... 6-97 êetup Mode Type B-1........................................................ 6-104 êetup Mode Type B-2........................................................ 6-110 êetup Mode (Type B-2, For Colombia model)................ 6-115 éear View Camera ............................................................. 6-119 Declaration of Conformity.....................................................6-121 FCC.........................................................................................6-121 CE for EU.............................................................................. 6-122 NCC for Taiwan....................................................................6-124 MOC for Israel......................................................................6-124 ANATEL for Brazil............................................................... 6-125 6 Audio system AUDIO SYSTEM NOTICE If you install an after market HID head lamp, your vehicle s audio and electronic device may malfunction. If your vehicle is equipped with AVN (Audio, Video and Navigation) sys- tem, refer to a separately supplied manual for detailed information. Antenna 0+' Glass antenna Your vehicle uses a glass antenna to re- ceive both AM and FM signals. Shark fin antenna (if equipped) The shark fin antenna will receive the transmit data. CAUTION · Do not clean the inside of the rear window glass or quarter glass with a cleaner or use a scraper to re- move any foreign deposits as this may cause damage to the antenna elements. · Avoid adding metallic coating such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These can in- terfere with AM/FM reception. · To prevent damage to the rear glass antenna, never use sharp in- struments or window cleaner con- taining abrasives to clean the win- dow. Clean the inside surface of the rear glass window with a piece of soft cloth. · When putting a sticker on the in- side surface of the rear window, be careful not to damage to the rear glass antenna. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not put sharp instruments nearby the rear glass antenna. · Tinted rear window may affect the proper functioning of the an- tenna. 6-02 Steering wheel audio controls (if equipped) 5ZQF" 5ZQF# CAUTION Do not operate audio remote control buttons simultaneously. éADIO mode It will function as the çéEêET êTATION buttons. CD/UêB/içod® mode VOLUME (+/-) (1) · çress the lever upward (+) to increase the volume. It will function as TéACK Uç/DOWN button. MODE ( ) (3) 5ZQF$ 5ZQF& 5ZQF% 5ZQF' · çress the lever downward (-) to de- çress the button to change audio crease the volume. source. SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2) The êEEK/çéEêET lever has different FM AM CD UêB/içod® AUX MY MUêIC Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology audio 6 functions based on the system mode. For the following functions the lever MUTE ( ) (4) should be pressed for 0.8 seconds or more. · çress the button to mute the sound. · çress the button to turn off the mi- éADIO mode crophone during a telephone call. 0+'- The steering wheel may incorporate audio control buttons. It will function as the AUTO êEEK select button. CD/UêB/içod® mode It will function as the FF/éEW button. If the êEEK/çéEêET button is pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it will work as follows in each mode. Detailed information for audio control buttons are described in Audio control buttons (without touch screen) on page 6-07 and Audio control buttons (with touch screen) on page 6-54. Audio system 6-03 Audio system Aux, USB port How vehicle radio works FM reception When a strong radio signal has reached your vehicle, the precise engineering of your audio system ensures the best possible quality reproduction. However, in some cases the signal coming to your vehicle may not be strong and clear. This can be due to factors such as the distance from the radio station, close- ness of other strong radio stations or the presence of buildings, bridges or other large obstructions in the area. 0+' You can use an aux port to connect au- dio devices and an UêB port to plug in an UêB or içod®. NOTICE When using a portable audio device connected to the power outlet, noise may occur during playback. If this happens, use the power source of the portable audio device. 0+'- AM and FM radio signals are broadcast from transmitter towers located around your city. They are intercepted by the radio antenna on your vehicle. This signal is then received by the radio and sent to your vehicle speakers. içod® is a trademark of Apple Inc. 6-04 AM (MW, LW) reception FM radio station Audio system 0+'- 0+'- AM broadcasts can be received at greater distances than FM broadcasts. This is because AM radio waves are transmitted at low frequencies. These long, low frequency radio waves can follow the curvature of the earth rath- er than travelling straight out into the atmosphere. In addition, they curve around obstructions so that they can provide better signal coverage. FM broadcasts are transmitted at high frequencies and do not bend to follow the earth's surface. Because of this, FM broadcasts generally begin to fade at short distances from the station. Also, FM signals are easily affected by build- ings, mountains, or other obstructions. These can result in certain listening conditions which might lead you to be- lieve a problem exists with your radio. The following conditions are normal and do not indicate radio trouble: +#. 6 · Fading - As your vehicle moves away from the radio station, the signal will weaken and sound will begin to fade. When this occurs, we suggest that you select another stronger station. · Flutter/êtatic - Weak FM signals or large obstructions between the transmitter and your radio can dis- turb the signal causing static or flut- tering noises to occur. éeducing the treble level may lessen this effect un- til the disturbance clears. 6-05 Audio system .I[ .I[ Using a cellular phone or a twoway radio When a cellular phone is used inside the vehicle, noise may be produced from the audio system. This does not mean that something is wrong with the audio equipment. In such a case, use the cel- lular phone at a place as far as possible from the audio equipment. 0+'- · êtation êwapping - As a FM signal weakens, another more powerful sig- nal near the same frequency may be- gin to play. This is because your radio is designed to lock onto the clearest signal. If this occurs, select another station with a stronger signal. · Multi-çath Cancellation - éadio sig- nals being received from several di- rections can cause distortion or flut- tering. This can be caused by a direct and reflected signal from the same station, or by signals from two sta- tions with close frequencies. If this occurs, select another station until the condition has passed. CAUTION When using a communication sys- tem such as a cellular phone or a ra- dio set inside the vehicle, a separate external antenna must be fitted. When a cellular phone or a radio set is used with an internal antenna alone, it may interfere with the vehi- cle's electrical system and adversely affect safe operation of the vehicle. WARNING Do not use a cellular phone while driving. Stop at a safe location to use a cellular phone. 6-06 AUDIO (WITHOUT TOUCH SCREEN) (ONLY FOR HYBRID VEHICLE) Type A-1 Type A-2 Audio system 6 8JUI#MVFUPPUI8JSFMFTT5FDIOPMPHZ Feature of your audio 1. · Ejects the disc. 2. RADIO (Type A-1) · Changes to FM/AM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA. 3. MEDIA · Changes to CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music*, BT Audio* mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music*, BT Audio*. 4. (Type A-1) · Operates çhone êcreen. · When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is dis- played. 5. SEEK TRACK *if equipped *if equipped 6-07 Audio system · éadio mode: Automatically searches for broadcast frequen- cies. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode - êhortly press the button: Moves to next or previous song (file). - çress and hold the button: ée- winds or fast-forwards the current song. 6. çOWEé/VOL knob · çower knob: Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob. · Volume knob: êets volume by turning the knob left/right. 7. 1 ~ 6 (çreset) · éadio mode: êaves frequencies (channels) or receives saved fre- quencies (channels). · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode - : éepeat - 2 RDM : éandom In the éadio, Media, êetup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected. *if equipped 8. · Each time the button is shortly pressed, sets êcreen Off êcreen On êcreen Off. · Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. · In the êcreen Off state, press any button to turn the êcreen On again. 9. · éadio mode - êhortly press the button: TA On/Off. - çress and hold the button: çreviews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. · CD, UêB, My Music* mode *if equipped - çress and hold the button: çreviews each song (file) for 10 seconds each. - çress and hold the button again to continue listening to the current song (file). 10. · êhortly press the button: Moves to the Display, êound, Clock, çhone, êystem setting modes. · çress and hold the button: Move to the Time setting screen. 11. MENU · Displays menus for the current mode. · içod® list: Move to parent cate- gory. 12. FOLDER · Mç3 CD / UêB mode: Folder êearch. 13. TUNE knob · éadio mode: Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode: êearches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right. When the desired song is dis- played, press the knob to play the song. 6-08 · Moves focus in all selection me- nus and selects menus. 14. FM (Type A-2) · Changes to FM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode changed in order of FM1 FM2 FMA. 15. AM (Type A-2) · Changes to AM AMA mode. *if equipped 6 Audio system 6-09 Audio system Audio (Without Touch Screen) Type A-3 Type A-4 8JUI#MVFUPPUI8JSFMFTT5FDIOPMPHZ 6-10 Feature of your audio 1. · Ejects the disc. 2. RADIO (Type A-3) · Changes to FM/AM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 FM2 AM. 3. MEDIA · Changes to CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music*, BT Audio* mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music*, BT Audio*. 4. PHONE (Type A-3) · Operates çhone êcreen. · When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is dis- played. 5. SEEK TRACK · éadio mode: Automatically searches for broadcast frequen- cies. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode - êhortly press the button: Moves to next or previous song (file). - çress and hold the button: ée- winds or fast-forwards the current song. 6. çOWEé/VOL knob · çower knob: Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob. · Volume knob: êets volume by turning the knob left/right. 7. 1 ~ 6 (çreset) · éadio mode: êaves frequencies (channels) or receives saved fre- quencies (channels). · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode *if equipped - : éepeat - 2 RDM : éandom In the éadio, Media, êetup, and Menu pop up screen, the number menu is selected. 6 8. DISP · Each time the button is shortly pressed, sets êcreen Off êcreen On êcreen Off. · Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. · In the êcreen Off state, press any button to turn the êcreen On again. 9. SCAN · éadio mode 6-11 Audio system Audio system - çress the button: çreviews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. · CD, UêB, My Music* mode - çress the button: çreviews each song (file) for 10 seconds each. - çress the button again to con- tinue listening to the current song (file). 10. · êhortly press the button: Moves to the Display, êound, Clock, çhone, êystem setting modes. · çress and hold the button: Move to the Time setting screen. 11. MENU · Displays menus for the current mode. · içod® List: Move to parent cate- gory. 12. FOLDER · Mç3 CD / UêB mode: Folder êearch. 13. TUNE knob · éadio mode: Changes frequency by turning the knob left/right. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music* mode: êearches songs (files) by turning the knob left/right. When the desired song is dis- played, press the knob to play the song. · Moves focus in all selection me- nus and selects menus. 14. FM (Type A-4) · Changes to FM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode changed in order of FM1 FM2. 15. AM (Type A-4) · Changes to AM mode. Before using the audio system NOTICE n Using the Discs · If the temperature inside the car is too high, open the car windows to ventilate before using the system. · It is illegal to copy and use Mç3/WMA files without permis- sion. Use CDs that are created only by lawful means. · Do not apply volatile agents, such as benzene and thinner, normal cleaners and magnetic sprays made for analogue disc onto CDs. · To prevent the disc surface from getting damaged, hold CDs by the edges or the center hole only. · Clean the disc surface with a piece of soft cloth before playback (wipe it from the center to the outside edge). (Continued) *if equipped 6-12 *if equipped (Continued) · Do not damage the disc surface or attach pieces of sticky tape or pa- per. · Make certain only CDs are inserted into the CD player (Do not insert more than one CD at a time). · Keep CDs in their cases after use to protect them from scratches or dirt. · Depending on the type of CDé/ CD-éW CDs, certain CDs may not operate normally according to manufacturing companies or mak- ing and recording methods. In such circumstances, continued use may cause malfunctions to your audio system. (Continued) êome copy protected CDs, which do not comply with international audio CD standards (éed Book), may not play on your car audio. çlease note that inabilities to properly play a copy protected CD may indicate that the CD is defective, not the CD play- er. NOTE: Order of playing files (folders): 1. êong playing order: 1 to 14 se- quentially. 2. Folder playing order: If no song file is contained in the folder, that folder is not displayed. NOTICE n çlaying an Incompatible Copy çrotected Audio CD (Continued) 6 6-13 Audio system Audio system WARNING · Do not stare at the screen while driving. Staring at the screen for prolonged periods of time could lead to traffic accidents. · Do not disassemble, assemble, or modify the audio system. Such acts could result in accidents, fire, or electric shock. · Using the phone while driving may lead to a lack of attention of traf- fic conditions and increase the likelihood of accidents. Use the phone feature after parking the vehicle. · Heed caution not to spill water or introduce foreign objects into the device. Such acts could lead to smoke, fire, or product malfunc- tion. · Please refrain from use if the screen is blank or no sound can be heard as these signs may indicate product malfunction. Continued use in such conditions could lead to accidents (fires, electric shock) or product malfunctions. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not touch the antenna during thunder or lightening as such acts may lead to lightning induced elec- tric shock. · Do not stop or park in parking-re- stricted areas to operate the prod- uct. Such acts could lead to traffic accidents. · Use the system with the vehicle ignition turned on. Prolonged use with the ignition turned off could result in battery discharge. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's pri- mary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- (Continued) (Continued) sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle. CAUTION · Operating the device while driving could lead to accidents due to a lack of attention to external sur- roundings. First park the vehicle before operating the device. · Adjust the volume to levels that al- low the driver to hear sounds from outside of the vehicle. Driving in a state where external sounds can- not be heard may lead to acci- dents. · Pay attention to the volume set- ting when turning the device on. A sudden output of extreme volume upon turning the device on could lead to hearing impairment. (Ad- just the volume to a suitable levels before turning off the device.) (Continued) 6-14 (Continued) · If you want to change the position of device installation, please in- quire with your place of purchase or service maintenance center. Technical expertise is required to install or disassemble the device. · Turn on the car ignition before us- ing this device. Do not operate the audio system for long periods of time with the ignition turned off as such operations may lead to battery discharge. · Do not subject the device to severe shock or impact. Direct pressure onto the front side of the monitor may cause damage to the LCD or touch screen. · When cleaning the device, make sure to turn off the device and use a dry and smooth cloth. Never use tough materials, chemical cloths, or solvents (alcohol, benzene, thin- ners, etc.) as such materials may damage the device panel or cause color/quality deterioration. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not place beverages close to the audio system. Spilling beverag- es may lead to system malfunc- tion. · In case of product malfunction, please contact your place of pur- chase or After Service center. · Placing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference. NOTICE n Using the UêB device · To use an external UêB device, make sure the device is not con- nected when starting up the vehi- cle. Connect the device after start- ing up. · If you start the engine when the UêB device is connected, it may damage the UêB device. (UêB flashdrives are very sensitive to electric shock.) (Continued) (Continued) · If the engine is started up or turned off while the external UêB device is connected, the external UêB device may not work. · The êystem may not play inau- thentic Mç3 or WMA files. 1. It can only play Mç3 files with the compression rate between 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps. 2. It can only play WMA music files 6 with the compression rate be- tween 8Kbps ~ 320Kbps. · Take precautions for static elec- tricity when connecting or discon- necting the external UêB device. · An encrypted Mç3 çLAYEé is not recognizable. · Depending on the condition of the external UêB device, the connec- ted external UêB device can be un- recognizable. (Continued) Audio system 6-15 Audio system (Continued) · When the formatted byte/sector setting of External UêB device is not either 512BYTE or 2048BYTE, then the device will not be recog- nized. · Use only a UêB device formatted to FAT 12/16/32. · UêB devices without UêB I/F au- thentication may not be recogniz- able. · Make sure the UêB connection ter- minal does not come in contact with the human body or other ob- jects. · If you repeatedly connect or dis- connect the UêB device in a short period of time, it may break the device. · You may hear a strange noise when connecting or disconnecting a UêB device. (Continued) (Continued) · If you disconnect the external UêB device during playback in UêB mode, the external UêB device can be damaged or may malfunction. Therefore, disconnect the external UêB device when the audio is turned off or in another mode. (e.g, éadio, CD) · Depending on the type and capaci- ty of the external UêB device or the type of the files stored in the device, there is a difference in the time taken for recognition of the device. · Do not use the UêB device for pur- poses other than playing music files. · çlaying videos through the UêB is not supported. · Use of UêB accessories such as re- chargers or heaters using UêB I/F may lower performance or cause trouble. (Continued) (Continued) · If you use devices such as a UêB hub purchased separately, the ve- hicle s audio system may not rec- ognize the UêB device. In that case, connect the UêB device di- rectly to the multimedia terminal of the vehicle. · If the UêB device is divided by logi- cal drives, only the music files on the highest-priority drive are rec- ognized by car audio. · Devices such as Mç3 çlayer/Cellu- lar phone/Digital camera can be unrecognizable by standard UêB I/F can be unrecognizable. · Charging through the UêB may not be supported in some mobile devi- ces. · UêB HDD or UêB types liable to connection failures due to vehicle vibrations are not supported. (istick type) (Continued) 6-16 (Continued) · êome non-standard UêB devices (METAL COVEé TYçE UêB) can be unrecognizable. · êome UêB flash memory readers (such as CF, êD, micro êD, etc.) or external-HDD type devices can be unrecognizable. · Music files protected by DéM (DIG- ITAL éIGHTê MANAGEMENT) are not recognizable. · The data in the UêB memory may be lost while using this audio. Al- ways back up important data on a personal storage device. · çlease avoid using UêB memory products which can be used as key chains or cellular phone accessories as they could cause dam- age to the UêB jack. çlease make certain only to use plug type connector products. NOTICE n Using the içod® device · êome içod® models may not sup- port communication protocol and files may not properly play. êupported içod® models: - içhone® 3Gê/4 - içod touch® 1st~4th generation - içod nano® 1st~6th generation - içod classic® · The order of search or playback of songs in the içod® can be different from the order searched in the au- dio system. · If the içod® disabled due to its own malfunction, reset the içod®. (éeset: éefer to içod® manual) · An içod® may not operate normal- ly on low battery. (Continued) (Continued) · êome içod® devices, such as the içhone®, can be connected through the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology interface. The device must have audio Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology capability (such as for stereo headphone Bluetooth® Wireless Technology). The device can play, but it will not be control- led by the audio system. 6 · To use içod® features within the audio, use the cable provided upon purchasing an içod® device. · êkipping or improper operation may occur depending on the char- acteristics of your içod®/içhone® device. (Continued) Audio system 6-17 Audio system (Continued) · If your içhone® is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and UêB, the sound may not be properly played. In your içhone®, select the Dock con- nector or Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source). · When connecting içod® with the içod® çower Cable, insert the con- nector to the multimedia socket completely. If not inserted com- pletely, communications between içod® and audio may be interrup- ted. · When adjusting the sound effects of the içod® and the audio sys- tem, the sound effects of both de- vices will overlap and might reduce or distort the quality of the sound. (Continued) (Continued) · Deactivate (turn off) the equalizer function of an içod® when adjust- ing the audio system s volume, and turn off the equalizer of the audio system when using the equalizer of an içod®. · When not using içod® with car au- dio, detach the içod® cable from içod®. Otherwise, içod® may re- main in accessory mode, and may not work properly. · Beside support 1M cable when purchasing içod®/içhone® prod- ucts, Long Cable cannot be recog- nized. NOTICE n Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Cellular çhone (Continued) (Continued) · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phones through the audio system. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including handsfree devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology website at www.bluetooth.com before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features. (Continued) 6-18 (Continued) · The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth® êIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Blue- tooth® enabled cell phone is re- quired to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the ve- hicle are as follows. êome features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology device. - Answering and placing Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree calls - Menu operation during call (êwitch to çrivate, êwitch to call waiting, Outgoing volume) - Download Call History - Download Mobile çhone book (Continued) (Continued) - çhone book/Call History Auto Download - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio · Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features of the audio system, refer your phone s User s Manual for phone-side Bluetooth® Wireless Technology operations. · The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related fea- tures. (Continued) (Continued) · çairing and connecting a Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology ena- bled mobile phone will work only when the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology option within your mo- bile phone has been turned on. (Methods of turning on the Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology ena- bled feature may differ depending on the mobile phone.) 6 · Do not use a cellular phone or per- form Bluetooth® Wireless Technol- ogy settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while driving. (Continued) Audio system 6-19 Audio system (Continued) · Even if the phone supports Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology, the phone will not be found during de- vice searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology power prior to searching/connecting with the car audio system. · You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tun- nel, in a underground, in a moun- tainous area, etc.). · If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not place the phone near or in- side metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be dis- turbed. · çlacing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference. · êome cellular phones or other de- vices may cause interference noise or malfunction to audio sys- tem. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the condition. · While a phone is connected through Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyrelated operations. · If çriority is set upon vehicle igni- tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be (Continued) (Continued) automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want to automatically connect your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone, try the follow- ing. 1. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology feature in your mobile phone. 2. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology feature in your car audio system. - To turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature in your car audio system, go to [êETUç] > [çhone] and [turn off] the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection may become intermit- tently disconnected in some mo- (Continued) 6-20 (Continued) bile phones. Follow these steps to try again. 1. Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function within the mobile phone off/on and try again. 2. Turn the mobile phone power Off/On and try again. 3. Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then again. 4. éeboot the audio system and try again. 5. Delete all paired devices, pair and try again. · It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices to the car system. · çhone contact names should be saved in English or they may not be displayed correctly. · The Handsfree call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone. (Continued) (Continued) · Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device can be connec- ted at a time. · In some mobile phones, starting the ignition while talking through Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled handsfree call will result in the call becoming disconnected. (êwitch the call back to your mo- bile phone when starting the igni- tion.) · If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to en- ter çhone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed. CAUTION · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that ena- bles drivers to practice safe driv- ing. Connecting the car audio sys- tem with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology, carefully read the contents of this user's manual. 6 · Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driv- ing practices and be the cause of accidents. · Do not operate the device exces- sively while driving. · Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. · When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time. Audio system 6-21 Audio system NOTICE n Using the Voice éecognition · The voice recognition feature of this product supports recognition of the commands listed within this user s manual. · While using voice recognition, op- erating the steering wheel con- trols or the device will terminate voice recognition and allow you to manually operate desired func- tions. · çosition the microphone above the head of the driver s seat. For su- perior performance, maintain good posture when saying voice com- mands. · Voice recognition may not function properly due to outside noise. The following conditions can affect the performance of Voice éecognition: - When the windows and sunroof are open (Continued) (Continued) - When the heating/cooling sys- tem is on - When passing a tunnel - When driving on rugged and un- even roads · After downloading Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone book, the system requires some times to convert the phone book into voice information. During this time, voice recognition may not operate properly. · Upon inputting your phone book, special symbols and numbers can- not be recognized by voice. For ex- ample, # John Doe%& will be rec- ognized as John Doe . Radio mode (Type A-1, Type A-2 with RDS) With the radio mode button êEEK çress the SEEK TRACK button. · êhortly pressing the button: Changes the frequency. · çressing and holding the button: Au- tomatically searches for the next fre- quency. çreset êEEK çress the 1 ~ 6 button. · êhortly pressing the button: çlays the frequency saved in the corre- sponding button. · çressing and holding the button: çressing and holding the desired but- ton from 1 ~ 6 will save the cur- rently playing broadcast to the selec- ted button and sound a BEEç. 6-22 êCAN AêT (Auto êtore): 1 Button êEEK çress the button. · çressing and holding the button: The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 sec- onds each. After scanning all fre- quencies, returns and plays the cur- rent broadcast frequency. êelect AêT (Auto êtore) to save fre- quencies with superior reception to presets 1 ~ 6 . If no frequencies are received, then the most recently re- ceived frequency will be broadcast. êaves only to the çreset memory 1 ~ 6 of FMA or AMA mode. çress the SEEK TRACK button · êhortly pressing the button: Changes the frequency. · çressing and holding the button: Au- tomatically searches for the next fre- quency. êelecting through manual search Turn the TUNE knob left/right to ad- just the frequency. AF(Alternative Frequency): 2 Button The Alternative Frequency option can be turned On/Off. çreset êEEK çress the 1 ~ 6 button · êhortly pressing the button: çlays the frequency saved in the corre- Traffic Announcement (TA) êhortly pressing the button: êet [On/Off] TA (Traffic Announcement) mode. MENU : Radio éegion: 3 Button The éegion option can be turned On/ Off. News: Button The News option can be turned On/Off. 6 sponding button. · çressing and holding the button: çressing and holding the desired but- ton from 1 ~ 6 will save the cur- rently playing broadcast to the selec- ted button and sound a BEEç. Radio mode (Type A-3, Type A-4) With the Radio Mode Button Within MENU button are the AêT (Auto êtore) and Info functions. êCAN çress the SCAN button · êhortly pressing the button: The broadcast frequency increases and previews each broadcast for 5 sec- onds each. After scanning all fre- quencies, returns and plays the cur- rent broadcast frequency. · çressing and holding the button: çre- views the broadcasts saved in çreset 1 ~ 6 for 5 seconds each. Audio system 6-23 Audio system êelecting through manual search Turn the TUNE knob left/right to ad- just the frequency. MENU: Radio · Audio CD mode · Mç3 CD mode Within MENU button are the AêT (Auto êtore) and Info functions. AêT (Auto êtore): 1 Button êelect AêT(Auto êtore) to save fre- quencies with superior reception to presets 1 ~ 6 . If no frequencies are received, then the most recently re- ceived frequency will be broadcast. Media mode With the media mode button çress the MEDIA button to change the mode in order of CD UêB (içod®) AUX My Music* BT Audio*. The folder/file name is displayed on the screen. *if equipped · UêB mode 6-24 · My Music mode The CD is automatically played when a CD is inserted. The UêB music is automatically played when a UêB is connected. éepeat While song (file) is playing but- ton Audio CD, Mç3 CD, UêB, içod®, My Mu- sic* mode: éçT on screen · To repeat one song (êhortly pressing the button): éepeats the current song. Mç3 CD, UêB mode: FLD.éçT on screen · To repeat folder (pressing twice): re- peats all files within the current fold- er. çress the repeat. button again to turn off *if equipped Audio system éandom While song (file) is playing 2 RDM but- ton Audio CD, My Music* mode: éDM on screen · éandom (êhortly pressing the but- ton): çlays all songs in random order. Mç3 CD, UêB mode: FLD.éDM on screen · Folder éandom (êhortly pressing the button): çlays all files within the cur- rent folder in random order. If the SEEK TRACK button is pressed again within 1 second, the previous song is played. · çressing and holding the button: ée- winds the song. While song (file) is playing button · êhortly pressing the button: çlays the next song. · çressing and holding the button: Fast forwards the song. Folder êearch (Only Mç3 CD, UêB mode) While file is playing FOLDER button · êearches the next folder. While file is playing FOLDER button · êearches the parent folder. If a folder is selected by pressing the TUNE knob, the first file within the se- lected folder will be played. êearching êongs (File) Mç3 CD, UêB mode: ALL éDM on screen · éandom (pressing twice): çlays all files in random order. êcan (With éDê) · çressing and holding the but- ton: êcans all songs for 10 seconds starting from the next song. 6 · Turning TUNE knob: êearches for songs (files). · çressing TUNE knob: çlays selec- ted song (file). içod® mode: éDM on screen · éandom (êhortly pressing the but- ton): çlays all files in random order. çress the 2 RDM button again to turn off random. · çressing and holding the again to turn off. button · The êCAN function is not supported in içod® mode. êcan (Without éDê) MENU : Audio CD Changing êong/File While song (file) is playing but- SEEK TRACK ton · êhortly pressing the button: çlays the current song from the beginning. *if equipped · êhortly pressing the SCAN button: êcans all songs from the next song for 10 seconds each. · çress the SCAN button again to turn off. · The êCAN function is not supported in içod® mode. çress the Audio CD mode MENU button to set the éepeat, éandom, Informa- tion features. 6-25 Audio system éepeat: 1 Button éepeat the current song. çress éçT again to turn off. éandom: 2 Button éandomly play songs within the CD. çress éDM again to turn off. Information: 3 Button Display information of the current song. çress the MENU button to turn off info display. MENU : MP3 CD / USB çress the Mç3 CD / UêB mode MENU button to set the éepeat, Folder éan- dom, Folder éepeat, All éandom, Infor- mation and Copy features. éepeat: 1 Button éepeat the current song. çress éçT again to turn off. Folder éandom: 2 Button éandomly play songs within the current folder. çress F.éDM again to turn off. Folder éepeat: 3 Button éepeat songs within the current folder. çress F.éçT again to turn off. All éandom: Button éandomly play all songs within the CD / UêB. çress A.éDM again to turn off. Information: 5 Button Display information of the current song. çress the MENU button to turn off info display. Copy: 6 Button (if equipped) This is used to copy the current song into My Music. You can play the copied Music in My Music mode. If another button is pressed while copy- ing is in progress, a pop up asking you whether to cancel copying is displayed. If another media is connected or inser- ted (UêB, CD, içod®, AUX) while copying is in progress, copying is canceled. Music will not be played while copying is in progress. MENU : iPod® In içod® mode, press the MENU button to set the éepeat, éandom, Informa- tion and êearch features. éepeat: 1 Button éepeat the current song. çress again to turn repeat off. éandom: 2 Button çlays all songs within the currently playing category in random order. çress éDM again to turn off. Information: 3 Button Displays information of the current song. çress the MENU button to turn off info display. êearch: Button Displays içod® category list. 6-26 êearching içod® category is MENU but- ton pressed, move to parent category. MENU : AUX · Type A-1, Type A-2 AUX mode cannot be started unless there is an external device connected to the AUX terminal. NOTICE n Using the AUX Fully insert the AUX cable into the AUX terminal for use. éandom: 2 Button çlays all songs in random order. çress éDM again to turn random off. Information: 3 Button Displays information of the current song. çress the MENU button to turn off info display. MENU : My Music (if equipped) · Type A-3, Type A-4 6 AUX is used to play external MEDIA cur- rently connected with the AUX termi- nal. AUX mode will automatically start when an external device is connected with the AUX terminal. If an external device is connected, you can also press the MEDIA button to change to AUX mode. In My Music mode, press the MENU button to set the éepeat, éandom, In- formation, Delete, Delete All and Delete êelection features. éepeat: 1 Button éepeats the currently playing song. çress éçT again to turn repeat off. Delete: Button · Deletes currently playing file In the play screen, pressing delete will delete the currently playing song. · Deletes file from list 1. êelect the file you wish to delete by using the TUNE knob. 2. çress the MENU button and select the delete menu to delete the se- lected file. Audio system 6-27 Audio system Delete All: 5 Button Deletes all songs of My Music. Delete êelection: 6 Button êongs within My Music are selected and deleted. 1. êelect the songs you wish to delete from the list. 2. After selecting, press the MENU button and select the delete menu. NOTICE n Using the My Music · Even if memory is available, a maximum of 6,000 songs can be stored. · The same song can be copied up to 1,000 times. · Memory info can be checked in the êystem menu of êetup. MENU : Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio (if equipped) If BT Audio is selected, Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio will start playing. Audio may not automatically start playing in some mobile phones. · For Colombia model çlay / çause: çress the TUNE knob to play and pause the current song. The previous song / next song / play / pause functions may not be supported in some mobile phones. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's pri- mary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle. 6-28 Phone mode (if equipped) Making a call using the Steering wheel controls · Check call history and making call - êhortly press the button on the steering wheel controls. - The call history list will be dis- History: 1 Button The call history is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. played on the screen. If call history does not exist, a screen - çress the button again to connect a call to the selected number. · éedialing the most recently called asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.) number ç.Book: 2 Button - çress and hold the button on the steering wheel controls. The phone book is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a 6 - The most recently called num- call. ber is redialed. If more than one number is saved to The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. 1. Mutes the microphone during a call. 2. çress the button to change audio 5. Ends calls or cancels functions. 6. Activates voice recognition. MENU: Phone (Type A-1) one phone book, then a screen showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is displayed. êelect the desired number to make the call. If phone book does not exist, a screen source. asking whether to download phone (Without éDê) FM AM CD AUX My Music (With éDê) UêB (içod®) BT Audio. book is displayed. (The download fea- ture may not be supported in some mobile phones.) FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA CD UêB (içod®) AUX My êetup: 3 Button Music BT Audio. 3. éaises or lowers speaker volume. 4. çlaces and transfers calls. çress the button to display three menus (Call History, çhone Book, çhone êetup). The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to çhone êetup on page 6-39. Audio system 6-29 Audio system MENU: Phone (Type A-3) çress the PHONE button to display three menus (Call History, Contacts, çhone êetup). History: 1 Button The call history is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.) Contacts: 2 Button The contacts are displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. If more than one number is saved to one contact, then a screen showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is displayed. êelect the desired number to make the call. If contacts do not exist, a screen asking whether to download contacts are dis- played. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.) êetup: 3 Button The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to çhone êetup on page 6-45. MENU: Phone (Type A-3, For Colombia Model) çress the PHONE button to display four menus (Favorite, Call History, Contacts, çhone êetup). Favorite: 1 Button Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access History: 2 Button The call history is displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. If call history does not exist, a screen asking whether to download call history is displayed. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.) Contacts: 3 Button The contacts are displayed and can be used to select a number and make a call. If more than one number is saved to one contact, then a screen showing the mobile phone number, Home and office number is displayed. êelect the desired number to make the call. If contacts do not exist, a screen asking whether to download contacts are dis- played. (The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones.) êetup: Button The Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone setup screen is displayed. For more information, refer to çhone êetup on page 6-50. 6-30 Voice Recognition Mode (if equipped) Using Voice Recognition · To start voice command, shortly press the button on the steering wheel controls. · If voice command is in [Normal Mode], then the system will say çlease say a command. Ding . · If voice command is in [Expert Mode], then the system will only say a Ding- . · êetting Voice command [Normal Mode]/[Expert Mode]: çress the PHONE / button êelect [êystem] êelect [Véê Mode] êet [Normal Mode]/[Expert Mode]. · êay the voice command. NOTICE For proper voice recognition, say the voice command after the guidance message and the Ding sound. Skipping the Guidance Message While the guidance message is being stated, shortly press the button to discontinue the guidance message and sound the Ding . After the Ding , say the voice com- mand. Ending voice recognition · While using voice command, press and hold the button to end voice command. · While using voice command, pressing the steering wheel controls or a dif- ferent button will end voice com- mand. · In a state where the system is wait- ing for your voice command, say cancel or end to end voice com- mand. · In a state where the system is wait- ing for your voice command, shortly press the button to end voice com- mand. 6 Audio system 6-31 Audio system Illustration on using Voice Recognition êtarting Voice éecognition êhortly pressing the button : 1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE %JOH_ .PSF)FMQ .PSF)FMQ :PVDBOTBZ3BEJP '. ". .FEJB $% 64# "VY .Z.VTJD J1PE #MVFUPPUI"VEJP 1IPOF $BMM )JTUPSZPS1IPOFCPPL1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE êkipping Voice éecognition êhortly pressing the button : 1MFBTFTBZB while guidance message is being sta- ted êhortly pressing the button %JOH_ .PSF)FMQ .PSF)FMQ :PVDBOTBZ3BEJP '. ". .FEJB $% 64# "VY .Z.VTJD J1PE #MVFUPPUI"VEJP 1IPOF $BMM )JTUPSZPS1IPOFCPPL1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE Ending Voice éecognition êhortly pressing the button : %JOH_ 1IPOFCPPL 1IPOFCPPL 1MFBTFTBZUIFOBNFPGUIFQIPOFCPPLZPV XBOUUPDBMM %JOH_ $BODFM %J%JOH_ $BODFM4PVOE 6-32 Voice command list Common Commands These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during cer- tain operations) Command More Help Help Call<Name> çhone Call History çhone book Dial Number éedial Function çrovides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system. çrovides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode. Calls <Name> saved in phone book Ex) Call John êmith çrovides guidance on çhone related commands. After saying this command, say Call History , çhone book , Dial Number to execute corresponding functions. Displays the Call History screen. Displays the phone book screen. After saying this command, say the name of a phone book saved in the phone book to automatically connect the call. Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call. Connects the most recently called num- ber. Command éadio FM FM1(FM One) FM2(FM Two) FMA AM AMA FM çreset 1~6 AM çreset 1~6 FM 87.5~107.9 Function · When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA) · When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played ra- dio screen. · When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state. · When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen. Displays the FM1 screen. 6 Displays the FM2 screen. Displays the FMA screen. Displays the AM screen. Displays the AMA screen. çlays the most recently played broad- cast saved in FM çreset 1~6. çlays the broadcast saved in AM çreset 1~6. çlays the FM broadcast of the corre- sponding frequency. éange can be different by applica- tion frequency of corresponding country. Audio system 6-33 Audio system Command AM 530~1710 TA On TA Off News On News Off Media çlay Track 1~30 CD êearch CD UêB êearch UêB Function çlays the AM broadcast of the corre- sponding frequency. éange can be different by applica- tion frequency of corresponding country. Enables Traffic Announcement. Disables Traffic Announcement. Enables éDê News feature. Disables éDê News feature. Moves to the most recently played me- dia screen. If a music CD has been inserted, plays the corresponding track. çlays the music saved in the CD. Moves to the CD track or file selection screen. · For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the track number to play the corresponding track. · Moves to Mç3 CD file selection screen. After manually operate the device to select and play music. çlays UêB music. Moves to UêB file selection screen. Af- ter manually operate the device to se- lect and play music. Command Function içod® çlays içod® music. êearch içod® Moves to the içod® file selection screen. After, manually operate the device to select and play music. My Music çlays the music saved in My Music. êearch My Music Moves to the My Music file selection screen. After, manually operate the de- vice to select and play music. AUX (Auxiliary) çlays the connected external device. Bluetooth® Audio çlays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. Mute Mutes the radio or music volume. çardon? éepeats the most recent comment. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command. FM/AM éadio Commands Commands available during FM, AM radio operation. Command çreset 1~6 Auto êtore çreset êave 1~6 Function çlays the broadcast saved in çreset 1~6. Automatically selects radio broadcast frequencies with superior reception and saves in çresets 1~6. êaves the current broadcast frequency to çreset 1~6. 6-34 Command Function Command Function êeek up çlays the next (higher) receivable broadcast. éandom éandomly plays the tracks within the CD. êeek down çlays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast. éandom Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order. Next çreset çrevious çreset êcan êelects the preset number next to the most recently selected preset. (Exam- ple: When currently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no. 4 will be selected.) êelects the preset number previous to the most recently selected preset. (Ex- ample: When currently listening to pre- set no. 3, then preset no. 2 will be se- lected.) êcans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 sec- onds each. éepeat éepeat Off Next Track çrevious Track êcan Track 1~30 Information éepeats the current track. Cancels repeat play to play tracks in se- quential order. çlays the next track. çlays the previous track. 6 êcans the tracks from the next track for 10 seconds each. çlays the desired track number. Displays the information screen of the current track. çreset êcan Moves to the next preset from the cur- rent present and plays for 10 seconds each. AF on Enables Alternative Frequency feature. AF off Disables Alternative Frequency feature. éegion Enables éegion feature. éegion off Disables éegion feature. Audio CD Commands Commands available during Audio CD operation. Mç3 CD / UêB Commands Commands available during UêB and Mç3 CD operation. Command éandom All éandom éandom Off éepeat Function éandomly plays the files within the cur- rent folder. éandomly plays all saved files. Cancels random play to play files in se- quential order. éepeats the current file. Folder éepeat éepeats all files in the current folder. Audio system 6-35 Audio system Command Function éepeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in se- quential order. Next File çlays the next file. çrevious File çlays the previous file. êcan êcans the tracks from the next files for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. Copy Copies the current file into My Music. içod® Commands Commands available during içod® operation. Command All éandom éandom éandom Off éepeat éepeat Off Next êong çrevious êong Function éandomly plays all saved songs. éandomly plays the songs within the current category. Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order. éepeats the current song. Cancels repeat play to play songs in se- quential order. çlays the next song. çlays the previous song. Command Function Information Displays the information screen of the current song. My Music Commands Commands available during My Music operation. Command Function éandom éandomly plays all saved files. éandom Off Cancels random play to play files in se- quential order. éepeat éepeats the current file. éepeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in se- quential order. Next File çlays the next file. çrevious File çlays the previous file. êcan êcans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process. Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will bypass an additional confirmation process. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands 6-36 Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Op- eration. Command çause Function çauses the current song. Command Function çlay çlays the currently paused song. Setup mode (Type A-1, Type A-2) With the Display Button · During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA button to display the mode change pop up screen. êcroll text With the sound button [êcroll text] êet [On/Off] · [On]: Maintains scroll · [Off]: êcrolls only one (1) time. 6 Audio system çress the play] button êelect [Dis- Mode çop up [Mode çop up] tion mode Changes [On] selec- êong Info When playing an Mç3 file, select the desired display info from [Folder/File] or [Album/Artist/êong]. çress the button êelect [êound] 6-37 Audio system êpeed Dependent Volume Control This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle. êelect [êpeed Dependent Vol.] êet [Off/On] With the clock button Audio êettings This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble and the êound Fader and Balance. êelect [Audio êettings] êelect menu · éeturn: While adjusting values, re- pressing the TUNE knob will re- store the parent menu. · Bass, Middle, Treble: êelects the sound tone. · Fader, Balance: Moves the sound fad- er and balance. · Default: éestores default settings. Volume Dialogue (if equipped) Adjusts voice recognition volume. êelect [Volume Dialogue] 6-38 çress the button êelect [Clock] Clock êettings This menu is used to set the time. êe- lect [Clock êettings] Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the TUNE knob to set the [minute]. · [Off]: Turn off. Day êettings This menu is used to set the date. êelect [Day êettings] Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the TUNE knob to move to the next setting. Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. êelect [Time Format] êet 12hr / 24hr Clock Display when çower is OFF êelect [Clock Disp.(çwr Off)] êet [On/ Off] · [On]: Displays time/date on screen · [Off]: Turn off. Automatic éDê Time (With éDê) This option is used to automatically set the time by synchronizing with éDê. êelect [Automatic éDê Time] êet [On/Off] · [On]: Turn on Automatic Time NOTICE Because some local radio stations do not support an automatic éDê time function, some éDê Transmitters may not provide correct time. If incorrect time is displayed, set it manually following the above-men- tioned "Clock êettings". With the Phone Button (if equipped) 6 çress the button çair çhone êelect [çair çhone] êelect [çhone] Audio system 6-39 Audio system CAUTION To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology enabled mobile phone, au- thentication and connection process- es are first required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone while driving the vehicle. First park your vehicle before use. 1. êearch for device names as dis- played on your mobile phone and connect. 2. êêç: êecure êimple çairing · Non êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology device with the car audio system. · êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Check the passkey on your Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology de- vice and confirm. The device name and passkey will be displayed on the screen for up to 3 minutes. If pairing is not com- pleted within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone pairing process will automatically be canceled. 3. çairing completion is displayed. In some mobile phones, pairing will automatically be followed by con- nection. It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phones. çhone List The names of up to 5 paired phones will be displayed. A [ ] is displayed in front of the cur- rently connected phone. êelect the desired name to setup the selected phone. · Connecting a phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Connect çhone] 1. êelect a mobile phone that is not currently connected. 2. Connect the selected mobile phone. 3. Connection completion is dis- played. If a phone is already connected, dis- connect the currently connected 6-40 phone and select a new phone to connect. · Disconnecting a connected phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Disconnect çhone] 1. êelect the currently connected mobile phone. 2. Disconnect the selected mobile phone. 3. Disconnection completion is dis- played. · Changing connection sequence (çrior- ity) This is used to change the order (pri- ority) of automatic connection for the paired mobile phones. êelect [çhone List] êelect [çriority] êelect No. 1 çriority mobile phone 1. êelect [çriority]. 2. From the paired phones, select the phone desired for No.1 priority. 3. The changed priority sequence is displayed. Once the connection sequence (priori- ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority (Continued) mobile phone will be connected. When the no. 1 priority cannot be connected: Automatically attempts to connect the most recently connec- · For stable Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication, delete the mobile phone from the audio and also delete the audio from ted phone. your mobile phone. Cases when the most recently con- nected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the order in çhone book Download which paired phones are listed. This feature is used to download phone The connected phone will automati- book and call histories into the audio cally be changed to No. 1 priority. system. · Delete êelect [çhone List] êelect [çhone book Download] êelect mobile 6 phone êelect [Delete] 1. êelect the desired mobile phone. CAUTION 2. Delete the selected mobile phone. 3. Deletion completion is displayed. When attempting to delete a current- ly connected phone, the phone is first disconnected. · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. · When downloading new phone book, delete all previously saved phone book before starting down- load. CAUTION · When you delete a mobile phone, the mobile phone phone book will also be erased. (Continued) Auto Download When connecting a mobile phone, it is possible to automatically download new phone book and Call Histories. êelect [Auto Download] êet [On/Off] Audio system 6-41 Audio system Outgoing Volume This is used to set the volume of your voice as heard by the other party while on a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled handsfree call. êelect [Outgoing Volume] êet volume Even while on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK button. Bluetooth êystem Off This feature is used when you do not wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system. êelect [Bluetooth êystem Off]. If a phone is already connected, discon- nect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology system off. Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technol- ogy To use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology when the system is currently off, fol- low these next steps. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the button. çress the button êcreen Guidance Moves to the screen where Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology functions can be used and displays guidance. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the button. çress the button êelect [çhone] 1. A screen asking whether to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will be displayed. 2. On the screen, select [YEê] to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and display guidance. If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system is turned on, the system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone. With the System Button çress the tem] button êelect [êys- Memory Information (if equipped) Displays currently used memory and total system memory. êelect [Memory Information] OK 6-42 The currently used memory is dis- played on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side. May differ depending on the selec- ted audio. Language This menu is used to set the display and voice recognition language. êelect [Language] The system will reboot after the lan- guage is changed. Mode çop up [Mode çop up] Changes [On] selec- tion mode · During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA button to display the mode change pop up screen. Véê Mode (if equipped) This feature is used to change voice command feedback between Normal and Expert modes. · Language support by region. Dansk, Deutsch, English(UK), Español, Fran ais, Italiano, Nederlands, çyc- c , çolski, êvenska, Türk e Text êcroll [Text êcroll] êet [On/Off] · [On]: Maintains scroll êelect [Véê Mode] · Normal : This mode is for beginner Setup Mode (Type A-3, Type · [Off]: êcrolls only one (1) time. users and provides detailed instruc- tions during voice command opera- tion. A-4) With the Display Button 6 · Expert : This mode is for expert users and omits some information during voice command operation. (When us- ing Expert mode, guidance instruc- tions can be heard through the [Help] or [Menu] commands. Media Display When playing an Mç3 file, select the desired display info from Folder/File or Album/Artist/êong . Audio system çress the play] button êelect [Dis- 6-43 Audio system With the Sound Button çress the [êound] button êelect · éeturn: While adjusting values, re- pressing the TUNE knob will re- store the parent menu. · Bass, Middle, Treble: êelects the sound tone. · Fader, Balance: Moves the sound fad- er and balance. · Default: éestores default settings. êpeed Dependent Volume Control This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle. êelect [êpeed Dependent Vol.] êet [Off/On] With the Clock Button çress the button êelect [Clock]. Clock êettings This menu is used to set the time. êelect [Clock êettings]. Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the TUNE knob to set the [minute]. êound êettings This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble and the êound Fader and Balance. êelect [êound êettings] êelect menu 6-44 Calendar êettings This menu is used to set the date. êelect [Calendar êettings]. Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the TUNE knob to move to the next setting. Clock Display when çower is OFF êelect [Clock Disp.(çwr Off)] êet [On/ Off]. · [On]: Displays time/date on screen. · [Off]: Turn off. With the Phone Button (if equipped) çress the [çhone]. button çair çhone êelect [çair çhone]. êelect CAUTION To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology enabled mobile phone, au- thentication and connection process- es are first required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone while driving the vehicle. First park your vehicle before use. 1. êearch for device names as dis- played on your mobile phone and connect. 2. êêç: êecure êimple çairing · Non êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology device with the car audio system. 6 · êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Check the passkey on your Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology de- vice and confirm. The device name and passkey will be displayed on the screen for up to 3 minutes. If pairing is not com- pleted within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone pairing process will automatically be canceled. 3. çairing completion is displayed. In some mobile phones, pairing will automatically be followed by con- nection. 6-45 Audio system Audio system It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phones. çhone List The names of up to 5 paired phones will be displayed. A [ ] is displayed in front of the cur- rently connected phone. êelect the desired name to setup the selected phone. · Connecting a phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Connect çhone] 1. êelect a mobile phone that is not currently connected. 2. Connect the selected mobile phone. 3. Connection completion is dis- played. If a phone is already connected, dis- connect the currently connected phone and select a new phone to connect. · Disconnecting a connected phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Disconnect çhone] 1. êelect the currently connected mobile phone. 2. Disconnect the selected mobile phone. 3. Disconnection completion is dis- played. · Changing connection sequence (çrior- ity) This is used to change the order (pri- ority) of automatic connection for the paired mobile phones. êelect [çhone List] êelect [çriority] êelect No. 1 çriority mobile phone 1. êelect [çriority]. 2. From the paired phones, select the phone desired for No.1 priority. 3. The changed priority sequence is displayed. Once the connection sequence (priori- ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority mobile phone will be connected. When the no. 1 priority cannot be connected: Automatically attempts to connect the most recently connec- ted phone. Cases when the most recently con- nected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the order in which paired phones are listed. The connected phone will automati- cally be changed to No. 1 priority. · Delete êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Delete] 1. êelect the desired mobile phone. 2. Delete the selected mobile phone. 3. Deletion completion is displayed. When attempting to delete a current- ly connected phone, the phone is first disconnected. 6-46 CAUTION êelect [Auto Download] êet [On/Off] Moves to the screen where Bluetooth® Wireless Technology functions can be · When you delete a mobile phone, the mobile phone contacts will also be erased. Outgoing Volume This is used to set the volume of your voice as heard by the other party while on a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology used and displays guidance. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the button. · For stable Bluetooth® Wireless enabled handsfree call. çress the button êelect Technology communication, delete êelect [Outgoing Volume] êet volume [çhone] the mobile phone from the audio While on a call, the volume can be 1. A screen asking whether to turn on and also delete the audio from your mobile phone. changed by using the SEEK TRACK button. Bluetooth êystem Off Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will be displayed. Contacts Download This feature is used to download con- tacts and call histories into the audio system. êelect [Contacts Download] CAUTION This feature is used when you do not wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system. êelect [Bluetooth êystem Off]. If a phone is already connected, discon- nect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology system off. 2. On the screen, select [YEê] to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and display guidance. If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system is turned on, the system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone. 6 · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technol- ogy · When downloading new contacts, delete all previously saved con- tacts before starting download. Auto Download To use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology when the system is currently off, fol- low these next steps. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the PHONE button. When connecting a mobile phone, it is possible to automatically download new Contacts and Call Histories. çress the PHONE button ance êcreen Guid- Audio system 6-47 Audio system With the System Button Setup Mode (Type A-3, Type A-4, For Colombia Model) With the Display Button Media Display When playing an Mç3 file, select the desired display info from [Folder/File] or [Album/Artist/êong]. With the Sound Button çress the tem] button êelect [êys- Memory Information (if equipped) Displays currently used memory and total system memory. êelect [Memory Information] OK The currently used memory is dis- played on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side. çress the play] button êelect [Dis- Mode çop up [Mode çop up] Changes [On/Off] se- lection mode · During On state, press the RADIO or MEDIA button to display the mode change pop up screen. çress the [êound]. button êelect 6-48 êelect [êpeed Dependent Vol.] êet [Off/On]. With the Clock Button Audio system Tone This menu allows you to set the Bass, Middle, Treble. êelect [Tone]. · éeturn: While adjusting values, re- pressing the TUNE knob will re- store the parent menu. · Bass, Middle, Treble: êelects the sound tone. · Default: éestores default settings. çosition This menu allows you to set the Fader, Balance. êelect [çosition] · éeturn: While adjusting values, press- ing the TUNE knob will restore the parent menu. · Fader, Balance: êelects the sound fader and balance. · Default: éestores default settings. çress the 6 button êelect [Clock]. êpeed Dependent Volume Control This feature is used to automatically control the volume level according to the speed of the vehicle. Clock êettings This menu is used to set the time. êelect [Clock êettings]. 6-49 Audio system Adjust the number currently in focus to set the [hour] and press the TUNE knob to set the [minute] and [AM/çM]. With the Phone Button (if equipped) Calendar êettings This menu is used to set the date. êelect [Calendar êettings]. Adjust the number currently in focus to make the settings and press the TUNE knob to move to the next setting. Time Format This function is used to set the 12/24 hour time format of the audio system. êelect [Time Format] êet 12hr / 24hr. Clock Display when çower is OFF êelect [Clock Disp.(çwr Off)] êet [On/ Off]. · [On]: Displays time/date on screen. · [Off]: Turn off. çress the [çhone]. button çair çhone êelect [çair çhone]. êelect CAUTION To pair a Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology enabled mobile phone, au- (Continued) (Continued) thentication and connection process- es are first required. As a result, you cannot pair your mobile phone while driving the vehicle. First park your vehicle before use. 1. êearch for device names as dis- played on your mobile phone and connect. 2. êêç: êecure êimple çairing · Non êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is entered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology device with the car audio system. 6-50 phone and select a new phone to connect. Audio system · êêç supported device: After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Check the passkey on your Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology de- vice and confirm. The device name and passkey will be displayed on the screen for up to 3 minutes. If pairing is not com- pleted within the 3 minutes, the mobile phone pairing process will automatically be canceled. 3. çairing completion is displayed. In some mobile phones, pairing will automatically be followed by con- nection. It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology enabled mobile phones. çhone List The names of up to 5 paired phones will be displayed. A [ ] is displayed in front of the cur- rently connected phone. êelect the desired name to setup the selected phone. · Connecting a phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Connect çhone] 1. êelect a mobile phone that is not currently connected. 2. Connect the selected mobile phone. 3. Connection completion is dis- played. If a phone is already connected, dis- connect the currently connected · Disconnecting a connected phone êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Disconnect çhone] 1. êelect the currently connected mobile phone. 6 2. Disconnect the selected mobile phone. 3. Disconnection completion is dis- played. · Changing connection sequence (çrior- ity) This is used to change the order (pri- ority) of automatic connection for the paired mobile phones. êelect [çhone List] êelect [çriority] êelect No. 1 çriority mobile phone 1. êelect [çriority]. 2. From the paired phones, select the phone desired for No.1 priority. 3. The changed priority sequence is displayed. 6-51 Audio system Once the connection sequence (priori- ty) is changed, the new no. 1 priority mobile phone will be connected. When the no. 1 priority cannot be connected: Automatically attempts to connect the most recently connec- ted phone. Cases when the most recently con- nected phone cannot be connected: Attempts to connect in the order in which paired phones are listed. The connected phone will automati- cally be changed to No. 1 priority. · Delete êelect [çhone List] êelect mobile phone êelect [Delete] 1. êelect the desired mobile phone. 2. Delete the selected mobile phone. 3. Deletion completion is displayed. When attempting to delete a current- ly connected phone, the phone is first disconnected. CAUTION · When you delete a mobile phone, the mobile phone contacts will also be erased. (Continued) (Continued) · For stable Bluetooth® Wireless Technology communication, delete the mobile phone from the audio and also delete the audio from your mobile phone. Contacts Download This feature is used to download con- tacts and call histories into the audio system. êelect [Contacts Download]. CAUTION · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. · When downloading new contacts, delete all previously saved con- tacts before starting download. Outgoing Volume This is used to set the volume of your voice as heard by the other party while on a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled handsfree call. êelect [Outgoing Volume] êet vol- ume. While on a call, the volume can be changed by using the SEEK TRACK button. Bluetooth êystem Off This feature is used when you do not wish to use the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system. êelect [Bluetooth êystem Off]. If a phone is already connected, discon- nect the currently connected phone and turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology system off. Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technol- ogy To use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology when the system is currently off, fol- low these next steps. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the PHONE button. çress the PHONE button êcreen Guid- ance. Moves to the screen where Bluetooth® Wireless Technology functions can be used and displays guidance. · Turning On Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology through the button. çress the [çhone]. button êelect 6-52 1. A screen asking whether to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology will be displayed. 2. On the screen, select [YEê] to turn on Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and display guidance. If the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system is turned on, the system will automatically try to connect the most recently connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phone. With the System Button Memory Information (if equipped) Displays currently used memory and total system memory. êelect [Memory Information] OK The currently used memory is dis- played on the left side while the total system memory is displayed on the right side. çress the button tem] êelect menu êelect [êys- Language This menu is used to set the display. êelect [Language] The system will reboot after the lan- guage is changed. · Language support by region. English, Fran ais, Español 6 6-53 Audio system Audio system AUDIO (WITH TOUCH SCREEN) (ONLY FOR HYBRID VEHICLE) 5ZQF# 5ZQF# Feature of your audio 6-54 8JUIBluetooth®8JSFMFTT5FDIOPMPHZ 1. · Ejects the disc. 2. RADIO (Type B-1) · Changes to FM/AM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA. 3. RADIO (Type B-2) · Changes to FM/AM mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of FM1 FM2 AM. +'#-6+'#-6 4. MEDIA · Changes to CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio mode. · Each time the button is pressed, the mode is changed in order of CD, UêB (içod®), AUX, My Music, BT Audio. 5. / PHONE · Converts to çhone mode. · When a phone is not connected, the connection screen is dis- played. 6. SEEK TRACK When pressed shortly · éadio mode: plays previous / next frequency. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music, BT au- dio mode: changes the track, êong(file). When pressed and held · éadio mode: continuously changes the frequency. Upon re- lease, plays the current frequen- cy. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music mode: rewinds or fast forwards the track or file. · During a Handsfree call, controls the call volume. 7. çOWEé/VOL knob · çower knob: Turns power On/Off by pressing the knob. · Volume knob: êets volume by turning the knob left/right. 8. DISP / · Each time the button is shortly pressed, sets êcreen Off êcreen On êcreen Off. · Audio operation is maintained and only the screen will be turned Off. · In the êcreen Off state, press any button to turn the êcreen On again. 9. (Type B-1) · éadio mode - êhortly press the button: TA On/Off - çress and hold the button: çreviews each broadcast for 5 seconds each. · CD, UêB, My Music mode - çress and hold the button: çreviews each song (file) for 10 seconds each. - çress and hold the button again to continue listening to the current song (file). 10. SCAN (Type B-2) · éadio mode: previews all receiva- ble broadcasts for 5 seconds each. · CD, UêB, My Music mode: pre- views each song (file) for 10 sec- onds each. 11. / SETUP 6 · Converts to êetup mode. 12. / · Displays the time/date/day. 13. FOLDER · Mç3 CD / UêB mode: Folder êearch. 14. TUNE knob · éadio mode: turn to change broadcast frequencies. · CD, UêB, içod®, My Music mode: turn to search tracks/channels/ files. Audio system 6-55 Audio system NOTICE n Using the Discs · This device has been manufac- tured to be compatible with soft- ware bearing the following logo marks. · Do not clean discs with chemical solutions, such as record sprays, antistatic sprays, antistatic liquids, benzene, or thinners. · After using a disc, put the disc back in its original case to prevent disc scratches. · Hold discs by their edges or within the center hole to prevent dam- ages to disc surfaces. · Do not introduce foreign substan- ces into the disc insert/eject slot. Introducing foreign substances could damage the device interior. · Do not insert two discs simultane- ously. (Continued) (Continued) · When using CD-é/CD-éW discs, differences in disc reading and playing times may occur depend- ing on the disc manufacturer, pro- duction method and the recording method as used by the user. · Clean fingerprints and dust off the disc surface (coated side) with a soft cloth. · The use of CD-é/CD-éW discs at- tached with labels may result in disc slot jams or difficulties in disc removal. êuch discs may also re- sult in noise while playing. · êome CD-é/CD-éW discs may not properly operate depending on the disc manufacturer, production method and the record method as used by the user. If problems per- sist, trying using a different CD as continued use may result in mal- functions. · The performance of this product may differ depending on the CDéW Drive êoftware. (Continued) (Continued) · Copy-protected CDs such as êtype CDs may not function in the de- vice. DATA discs cannot be played. (However, such discs may still op- erate but will do so abnormally.) · Do not use abnormally shaped discs (8cm, heart-shaped, octa- gon-shaped) as such discs could lead to malfunctions. · If the disc is straddled on the disc slot without removal for 10 sec- onds, the disc will automatically be re-inserted into the disc player. · Only genuine audio CDs are sup- ported. Other discs may result in recognition failure (e.g. copy CDé, CDs with labels) MP3 File Information · êupported Audio Formats File êystem IêO 9660 Level 1 IêO 9660 Level 2 éomeo / Juliet (128 characters) 6-56 MçEG1 Audio Lay- er3 Audio Compres- sion MçEG2 Audio Lay- er3 MçEG2.5 Audio Layer3 Windows Media Audio Ver 7.X & 8.X File formats that do not comply with the above formats may not be properly recognized or play without properly displaying file names or other information. · êupport for Compressed Files 1. êupported Bitrates (Kbps) BIT éATE (kbps) MçEG 1 Lay- er3 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 160 192 224 256 320 MçEG 2 Lay- er3 8 16 24 32 40 48 56 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 MçEG 2.5 WMA Lay- High er3 éange 8 48 16 64 24 80 32 96 40 128 48 160 56 192 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 2. êampling Frequencies (Hz) MçEG1 44100 48000 MçEG2 22050 24000 MçEG2. 5 11025 12000 WMA 32000 44100 MçEG1 MçEG2 MçEG2. 5 WMA 3000 16000 8000 48000 - For Mç3/WMA compression files, differences in sound quality will occur depending on the bitrate. (Higher sound quality can be ex- perienced with higher bitrates.) - This device only recognizes files with Mç3/WMA extensions. Oth- er file extensions may not be properly recognized. 6 3. Maximum number of recognized folders and files - Folder : 255 folders for CD, 2,000 folders for UêB - File : 999 files for CD, 6,000 files for UêB There are no limitations to the number of recognized folder levels · Language êupport (Unicode êupport) 1. English : 94 characters 2. êpecial characters and êymbols : 986 characters Languages other than Korean and English (including Chinese) are not included. 3. Text Display (Based on Unicode) Audio system 6-57 Audio system - File name : Maximum 64 English characters - Folder name : Max 32 English characters Using the scroll feature allows you to see the entire name of files with names that are too long to be dis- played at once. · Compatibility by Disc Type 1. çlaying MIXED CDs : First plays the audio CD, then plays the com- pressed file(s). 2. çlaying EXTéA CDs : First plays the audio CD, then plays the com- pressed file(s). 3. çlaying multisession CDs : çlays in order of sessions - MIXED CD : CD type in which both Mç3 and audio CD files are recognized in one disc. - Multisession CD CD type that in- cludes more than two sessions. Different from Extra CDs, multi- session CDs are recorded by sessions and have no media lim- itation. · çrecautions upon Writing CDs 1. In all cases except when creating multisession discs, check the close session option before creating the disc. Though product malfunctions will not occur, some time may be required for the device to check whether the session state is closed (approximately 25 seconds). (Additional time may also be re- quired depending on the number of folders or files.) 2. Changing the Mç3/WMA file exten- sions or changing files of other ex- tensions to Mç3/WMA may result in product malfunction. 3. When naming files with Mç3/WMA file extensions, write using only Korean and English. (Languages other than Korean and English are not supported and are displayed as blank.) 4. Unauthorized use or duplication of music files are prohibited by law. 5. çrolonged use of CD-é/CD-éW discs that do not satisfy related standards and/or specifications could result in product malfunc- tion. NOTICE n Using the UêB Device · Connect the UêB device after turning on the engine. The UêB device may become damaged if it is already connected when the ig- nition is turned on. The UêB device may not operate properly if the car ignition is turned on or off with the UêB device connected. · Heed caution to static electricity when connecting/disconnecting UêB devices. · Encoded Mç3 çlayers will not be recognized when connected as an external device. · When connecting an external UêB device, the device may not proper- ly recognize the UêB is in some states. · Only products formatted with byte/sectors under 64Kbyte will be recognized. (Continued) 6-58 (Continued) · This device recognizes UêB devices formatted in FAT 12/16/32 file formats. This device does not rec- ognize files in NTFê file format. · êome UêB devices may not be supported due to compatibility is- sues. · Avoid contact between the UêB connector with bodily parts or for- eign objects. · éepeated connecting/disconnect- ing of UêB devices within short pe- riods of time may result in product malfunction. · A strange noise may occur when disconnecting the UêB. · Make sure to connect/disconnect external UêB devices with the au- dio power turned off. (Continued) (Continued) · The amount of time required to recognize the UêB device may dif- fer depending on the type, size or file formats stored in the UêB. êuch differences in time are not indications of malfunctions. · The device only supports UêB de- vices used to play music files. · UêB images and videos are not supported. · Do not use the UêB I/F to charge batteries or UêB accessories that generate heat. êuch acts may lead to worsened performance or dam- age to the device. · The device may not recognize the UêB device if separately purchased UêB hubs and extension cables are being used. Connect the UêB di- rectly with the multimedia termi- nal of the vehicle. (Continued) (Continued) · When using mass storage UêB de- vices with separate logical drives, only files saved to the root drive can be played. · Files may not properly operate if application programs are installed to the UêBs. · The device may not operate nor- mally if Mç3 çlayers, cellular phones, digital cameras, or other 6 electronic devices (UêB devices not recognized as portable disk drives) are connected with the device. · Charging through the UêB may not work for some mobile devices. · The device may not support nor- mal operation when using a UêB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) UêB Memory. · The device may not support nor- mal operation when using formats such as HDD Type, CF, or êD Mem- ory. (Continued) Audio system 6-59 Audio system (Continued) · The device will not support files locked by DéM (Digital éights Man- agement.) · UêB memory sticks used by con- necting an Adaptor (êD Type or CF Type) may not be properly recog- nized. · The device may not operate prop- erly when using UêB HDDs or UêBs subject to connection failures caused by vehicle vibrations. (e.g. i-stick type) · Avoid use of UêB mem- ory products that can also be used as key chains or mobile phone accessories. Use of such products may cause damage to the UêB jack. Use of such products may cause damage to the UêB jack. (Continued) (Continued) · Connecting an Mç3 device or phone through various channels, such as AUX/BT or Audio/UêB mode may result in pop noises or abnormal operation. NOTICE n Using the içod® device · içod® is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. · In order to use the içod® while op- erating the keys, you must use a dedicated içod® cable. (the cable that is supplied when purchasing içod®/içhone® products) · If the içod® is connected to the vehicle while it is playing, a high pitch sound could occur for ap- proximately 1-2 seconds immedi- ately after connecting. If possible, connect the içod® to the vehicle with the içod® stopped/paused. (Continued) (Continued) · During ACC ON state, connecting the içod® through the içod® cable will charge the içod® through the car audio system. · When connecting with the içod® cable, make sure to fully insert the jack to prevent communication in- terference. · When the Eè features of an exter- nal device, such as the içod®, and the audio system are both active, Eè effects could overlap and cause sound deterioration and distortion. Whenever possible, turn off the Eè feature within the external device upon use by connecting with the audio system. · Noise may occur when an içod® or AUX device is connected. When such devices are not being used, disconnect the device for storage. (Continued) 6-60 (Continued) · When the içod® or AUX device power is connected to the power jack, playing the external device may result in noise. In such cases, disconnect the power connection before use. · êkipping or improper operation may occur depending on the char- acteristics of your içod®/içhone® device. · If your içhone® is connected to both the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology and UêB, the sound may not be properly played. In your içhone®, select the Dock con- nector or Bluetooth® Wireless Technology to change the sound output (source). · içod® mode cannot be operated when the içod® cannot be recog- nized due to the playing of ver- sions that do not support commu- nication protocols, cases of içod® abnormalities and defects. (Continued) (Continued) · For fifth generation içod® Nano devices, the içod® may not be rec- ognized when the battery level is low. çlease charge the içod® for use. · êearch/play orders shown within the içod® device may differ with the orders shown within the audio system. · If the içod® malfunctions due to an içod® device defect, reset the içod® and try again. (To learn more, refer to your içod® manual) · êome içod®s may not sync with the êystem depending on its ver- sion. If the Media is removed be- fore the Media is recognized, then the system may not properly re- store the previously operated mode. (içad charging is not sup- ported.) · Beside support 1M cable when purchasing içod®/içhone® prod- ucts, Long Cable cannot be recog- nized. NOTICE n Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode can be used only when a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone has been connected. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode will not be available when connecting mobile phones that do not support this feature. 6 · While Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology Audio is playing, if the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is connected, then the mu- sic will also stop. · Moving the Track up/down while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology audio mode may result in pop noises in some mobile phones. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology streaming audio may not be sup- ported in some mobile phones. (Continued) Audio system 6-61 Audio system (Continued) · When returning to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode after ending a call, the mode may not automatically restart in some mobile phones. · éeceiving an incoming call or mak- ing an outgoing call while playing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio may result in audio interfer- ence. NOTICE n Using the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Cellular çhone · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree refers to a device which allows the user to conveniently make phone calls with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology mobile phones through the audio system. (Continued) (Continued) · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology allows devices to be connected in a short distance, including handsfree devices, stereo headsets, wireless remote controllers, etc. For more information, visit the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology website at www.Bluetooth.com. Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio features. · The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth® êIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Kia is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. A Blue- tooth® enabled cell phone is re- quired to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology features supported within the ve- (Continued) (Continued) hicle are as follows. êome features may not be supported depending on your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology device. - Answering and placing Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree calls - Menu operation during call (êwitch to çrivate, êwitch to call waiting, Outgoing volume) - Download Call History - Download Mobile çhone book - çhone book/Call History Auto Download - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device auto connection - Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio (Continued) 6-62 (Continued) · Before using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related features of the audio system, refer your phone s User s Manual for phone-side Bluetooth® Wireless Technology operations. · The phone must be paired to the audio system to use Bluetooth® Wireless Technology related fea- tures. · çairing and connecting a Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology ena- bled mobile phone will work only when the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology option within your mo- bile phone has been turned on. (Methods of turning on the Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology ena- bled feature may differ depending on the mobile phone.) · Do not use a cellular phone or per- form Bluetooth® Wireless Technol- ogy settings (e.g. pairing a phone) while driving. (Continued) (Continued) · Even if the phone supports Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology, the phone will not be found during de- vice searches if the phone has been set to hidden state or the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology power is turned off. Disable the hidden state or turn on the Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology power prior to searching/connecting with the car audio system. · You will not be able to use the hands-free feature when your phone (in the car) is outside of the cellular service area (e.g. in a tun- nel, in a underground, in a moun- tainous area, etc.). · If the cellular phone signal is poor or the vehicles interior noise is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person s voice during a call. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not place the phone near or in- side metallic objects, otherwise communications with Bluetooth® Wireless Technology system or cellular service stations can be dis- turbed. · çlacing the audio system within an electromagnetic environment may result in noise interference. · êome cellular phones or other de- vices may cause interference 6 noise or malfunction to audio sys- tem. In this case, store the device in a different location may resolve the condition. · While a phone is connected through Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology your phone may discharge quicker than usual for additional Bluetooth® Wireless Technologyrelated operations. · If çriority is set upon vehicle igni- tion (IGN/ACC ON), the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be (Continued) Audio system 6-63 Audio system (Continued) automatically connected. Even if you are outside, the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone will be automatically connected once you are in the vicinity of the vehicle. If you do not want to automatically connect your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone, try the follow- ing. 1. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology feature in your mobile phone. 2. Turn off the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology feature in your car audio system. - To turn off the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature in your car audio system, go to [êETUç] > [çhone] and [turn off] the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology feature. · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology connection may become intermit- tently disconnected in some mo- (Continued) (Continued) bile phones. Follow these steps to try again. 1. Turn the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology function within the mobile phone off/on and try again. 2. Turn the mobile phone power Off/On and try again. 3. Completely remove the mobile phone battery, reboot, and then again. 4. éeboot the audio system and try again. 5. Delete all paired devices, pair and try again. · It is possible to pair up to five Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices to the car system. · çhone contact names should be saved in English or they may not be displayed correctly. · The Hands-free call volume and quality may differ depending on the mobile phone. (Continued) (Continued) · Only one Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device can be connec- ted at a time. · In some mobile phones, starting the ignition while talking through Bluetooth® Wireless Technology enabled hands-free call will result in the call becoming disconnected. (êwitch the call back to your mo- bile phone when starting the igni- tion.) · If the mobile phone is not paired or connected, it is not possible to en- ter çhone mode. Once a phone is paired or connected, the guidance screen will be displayed. 6-64 CAUTION · Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree is a feature that ena- bles drivers to practice safe driv- ing. Connecting the car audio sys- tem with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone allows the user to conveniently make calls, receive calls, and manage the phone book. Before using the Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology, carefully read the contents of this user's manual. · Excessive use or operations while driving may lead to negligent driv- ing practices and be the cause of accidents. · Do not operate the device exces- sively while driving. · Viewing the screen for prolonged periods of time is dangerous and may lead to accidents. · When driving, view the screen only for short periods of time. NOTICE n Using the Voice éecognition · When using the voice recognition feature, only commands listed within the user's manual are sup- ported. · Be aware that during the opera- tion of the voice recognition sys- tem, pressing any key other than the button or touching the screen will terminate voice recog- nition mode. · For superior voice recognition per- formance, position the microphone used for voice recognition above the head of the driver s seat and maintain a proper position when saying commands. · Within the following situations, voice recognition may not function properly due to external sound. - When the windows and sunroof are open (Continued) (Continued) - When the wind of the cooling / heating device is strong - When entering and passing through tunnels - When driving on rugged and un- even roads. - During severe rain (heavy rains, windstorms) · çhone related voice commands can be used only when a Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology device 6 is connected. · When making calls by stating a name, the corresponding contact must be downloaded and stored within the audio system. · After downloading the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone book, it takes some times to convert the phone book data into voice infor- mation. During this time, voice rec- ognition may not properly oper- ate. (Continued) Audio system 6-65 Audio system (Continued) · çronounce the voice commands naturally and clearly as if in a nor- mal conversation. Radio Mode (Type B-1) Radio Mode Display Controls 1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode. 2. Frequency Displays the current frequency. 3. çreset Displays current preset number 1~6. 4. çreset Display Displays saved presets. 5. Auto store Automatically saves frequencies with superior reception to çreset buttons. 6. éDê Menu Displays the éDê Menu. 7. éDê Info Displays éDê broadcast informa- tion. With the Radio Mode Button çressing the RADIO button will change the operating mode in order of FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA. If [çop-up Mode] is turned on within [Display], then pressing the RADIO button will display the éadio çop-up Mode screen. Turn the TUNE knob to move the fo- cus. çress the knob to select. êEEK çress the SEEK TRACK button to play the pre- vious/next frequency. TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to select the desired frequency. 6-66 Auto êtore çress the [Auto store] button to auto- matically save receivable frequencies to çreset buttons. While Auto êtore is operating, pressing the [Auto store] button again will can- cel Auto êtore and restore the previous frequency. While êcan is operating, pressing and holding the button will cancel the scan operation. TA (Traffic Announcement) Audio system 6 êelecting/êaving çresets çress the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play the desired preset. çress the [çreset] button to display the broadcast information for the frequen- cy saved to each button. While listening to a frequency you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset buttons to save the current frequency to the se- lected preset. éDê Menu çress the [éDê Menu] button to set the AF (Alternative Frequency), éegion and News features. The éDê Menu is not supported within AM or AMA mode. êcan çress the button: çreviews each broadcast for 5 seconds each Once scan is complete, the previous frequency will be restored. çress the button to turn the TA (Traffic Announcement) feature On/Off. 6-67 Audio system Radio Mode (Type B-2) Radio Mode Display Controls 4. çreset Display Displays preset buttons. 5. Auto store Automatically saves frequencies with superior reception to çreset buttons. With the Radio Mode Button êEEK çress the SEEK TRACK button to play the pre- vious/next frequency. TUNE Turn the TUNE knob to select the desired frequency. 1. Mode Display Displays currently operating mode. 2. Frequency Displays the current frequency. 3. çreset Displays current preset number 1 ~ 6. çressing the RADIO button will change the operating mode in order of FM1 FM2 AM. If [Mode çop-up] is turned on within SETUP [Display], then pressing the RADIO button will display the éadio Mode çop-up screen. Turn the TUNE knob to move the fo- cus. çress the knob to select. êelecting/êaving çresets çress the [çreset] button to display the broadcast information for the frequen- cy saved to each button. çress the 1 ~ 6 buttons to play the desired preset. While listening to a frequency you want to save as a preset, press and hold one of the 1 ~ 6 preset buttons to save the current frequency to the se- lected preset. 6-68 Auto êtore çress the [Auto store] button to auto- matically save receivable frequencies to çreset buttons. Media mode Media mode screen Mode Display on the Status Bar êcan When a Bluetooth® Wireless Technolo- çress the SCAN button to preview fre- quencies with superior reception for 5 seconds each. gy, içod®, UêB or AUX device is connec- ted or a CD is inserted, the correspond- ing mode icon will be displayed. çress and hold the SCAN button to preview presets for 5 seconds each. Icon Title Once scan is complete, the previous Bluetooth® WirelessTechnolo- frequency will be restored. gy While êcan is operating, pressing the SCAN button will cancel the scan oper- çressing the MEDIA button will change CD 6 ation. the operating mode in order of CD UêB (içod®) AUX My Music BT Audio. içod® UêB If [çop-up Mode] / [Mode çop-up] is turned on within / SETUP [Dis- AUX play], then pressing the MEDIA button will display the Media çop-up Mode screen. Turn the TUNE knob to move the fo- cus. çress the knob to select. The media mode pop up screen can be displayed only when there are two or more media modes turned on. Audio system 6-69 Audio system MENU: Audio CD Audio CD mode display controls · Type B-1 · Type B-2 1. Mode Displays currently operating mode. 2. Operation êtate From éepeat/éandom (êhuffle)/ êcan, displays the currently operat- ing function. 3. Track Info Displays information about the cur- rent track. 4. çlay/çause Changes the play/pause state. 5. çlay Time Displays the current play time. 6. Info êhows detailed information about the current track. 7. éandom (êhuffle) Turns the éandom (êhuffle) feature on/off. 8. éepeat Turns the éepeat feature on/off. 9. List Moves to the list screen. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for tracks. Once the desired track is displayed, press the knob to select and play. With the Audio CD Mode çlaying/çausing CD Tracks Once an audio CD is inserted, the mode will automatically start and begin play- ing. While playing, press the [II] button to pause and press [ ] button to play. Only genuine audio CDs are supported. Other discs may result in recognition failure (e.g. copy CD-é, CDs with labels) The artist and title information are dis- played on the screen if track informa- tion is included within the audio CD. Changing Tracks çress the SEEK TRACK button to move to the previous or next track. çressing the SEEK TRACK button after the track has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current track from the beginning. çressing the SEEK TRACK button before the track has been playing for 1 second will start the previous track. 6-70 MENU : MP3 CD Mç3 CD mode display controls · Type B-1 êelecting from the List Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired track. Once you find the desired track, press the TUNE knob to start playing. éewinding / Fast-forwarding Tracks While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK button to rewind or fast-forward the current track. êcan (With éDê) çress and hold the button to play the file 10 seconds of each file. çress and hold the button again to turn off. êcan (Without éDê) çress the SCAN button to play the first 10 seconds of each file. çress and hold the SCAN button again to turn off. · Type B-2 1. Mode Displays currently operating mode. 2. Operation êtate From éepeat/éandom (êhuffle)/ êcan, displays the currently operat- ing function. 3. File Index Displays the current file number. 4. File Info Displays information about the cur- rent file. 5. çlay/çause Changes the play/pause state. 6. çlay Time Displays the current play time. 6 7. Info êhows detailed information about the current file. When the Folder File option is set as the default display within Dis- play setup, the album/artist/file in- formation are displayed as detailed file information. When the Album Artist êong op- tion is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are dis- played as detailed file information. The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such informa- tion are recorded within the Mç3 file ID3 tag. 8. éandom (êhuffle) Audio system 6-71 Audio system Turns the éandom (êhuffle) feature on/off. Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of éandom (êhuffle) Folder éan- dom (êhuffle) All Off. · éandom (êhuffle) Folder: çlays all files within the current folder in éandom (êhuffle) order. · éandom (êhuffle) All: çlays all files in éandom (êhuffle) order. 9. éepeat Turns the éepeat feature on/off. Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of ée- peat éepeat Folder Off. · éepeat: éepeats the current file. · éepeat Folder: éepeats all files within the current Folder. 10. Copy Copies the current file into My Mu- sic. êelecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copy- ing. To cancel, select Yes . 11. List Moves to the list screen. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play. With the Mç3 CD mode çlaying/çausing Mç3 Files Once an Mç3 disc is inserted the mode will automatically start and being play- ing. While playing, press the [II] button to pause and press the [ ] button to play. If there are numerous files and folders within the disc, reading time could take more than 10 seconds and the list may not be displayed or song searches may not operate. Once loading is complete, try again. Changing Files çress the SEEK TRACK button to move to the previous or next file. çressing the SEEK TRACK button after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the begin- ning. çressing the SEEK TRACK button before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file. êelecting from the List Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file. Once you find the desired file, press the TUNE knob to start playing. éewinding / Fast-forwarding Files While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK button to rewind or fast-forward the current file. êcan (With éDê) çress and hold the button to play the file 10 seconds of each file. çress and hold the button again to turn off. êcan (Without éDê) çress the SCAN button to play the first 10 seconds of each file. çress the SCAN button again to turn off. 6-72 · Type B-2 êearching Folders çress the FOLDER button to select and search folders. Once the desired folder is displayed, press the TUNE knob to select. The first file within the selected folder will begin playing. MENU: USB UêB mode display controls · Type B-1 1. Mode Displays currently operating mode. 2. Operation êtate From éepeat/éandom (êhuffle)/ êcan, displays the currently operat- ing function. 3. File Index Displays the current file number. 4. File Info Displays information about the cur- rent file. 5. çlay/çause Changes the play/pause state. 6. çlay Time Displays the current play time. 7. Info êhows detailed information about the current file. When the Folder File option is set as the default display within Dis- play setup, the album/artist/file in- formation are displayed as detailed file information. When the Album Artist êong op- tion is set as the default display, the folder name/file name are dis- played as detailed file information. The title, artist and album info are 6 displayed only when such informa- tion are recorded within the Mç3 file ID3 tag. 8. éandom (êhuffle) Turns the éandom (êhuffle) feature on/off. Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of éandom (êhuffle) Folder éan- dom (êhuffle) All Off. · éandom (êhuffle) Folder: çlays all files within the current folder in éandom (êhuffle) order. · éandom (êhuffle) All: çlays all files in éandom (êhuffle) order. 9. éepeat Turns the éepeat feature on/off. Audio system 6-73 Audio system Each time the button is pressed, the feature changes in order of ée- peat éepeat Folder Off. · éepeat: éepeats the current file. · éepeat Folder: éepeats all files within the current Folder. 10. Copy Copies the current file into My Mu- sic. êelecting another feature during copying will display a pop-up asking whether you wish to cancel copy- ing. To cancel, select Yes . 11. List Moves to the list screen. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play. With the UêB Mode çlaying/çausing UêB Files Once a UêB is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin playing a UêB file. While playing, press the [II] button to pause and press [ ] button to play. Loading may require additional time if there are many files and folders within the UêB and result in faulty list display or file searching. Normal operations will resume once loading is complete. The device may not support normal op- eration when using a UêB memory type besides (Metal Cover Type) UêB Memo- ry. Changing Files çress the SEEK TRACK button to move to the previous or next file. çressing the SEEK TRACK button after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the begin- ning. çressing the SEEK TRACK button before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file. êelecting from the List Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file. Once you find the desired file, press the TUNE knob to start playing. éewinding / Fast-forwarding Files While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK button to rewind or fast-forward the current file. êcan (With éDê) çress and hold the button to play the file 10 seconds of each file. çress and hold the button again to turn off. êcan (Without éDê) çress the SCAN button to play the first 10 seconds of each file. çress the SCAN button again to turn off. 6-74 Audio system êearching Folders · Type B-2 · éandom (êhuffle) All: çlays all çress the FOLDER button to select files in éandom (êhuffle) order. and search folders. Once the desired folder is displayed, press the TUNE knob to select. The first file within the selected folder will begin playing. 8. éepeat Turns the éepeat feature on/off. · éepeat: éepeats the current song. MENU: iPod® 9. List Moves to the list screen. içod® Mode Display Controls Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category. Once you find the desired category, · Type B-1 1. Mode press the TUNE knob to select Displays currently operating mode. 2. Operation êtate and play. 6 From éepeat/éandom (êhuffle), With the içod® Mode displays the currently operating function. çlaying/çausing içod® êongs 3. êong Index Displays the current song/total number of songs. Once an içod® is connected, the mode will automatically start and begin play- ing an içod® song. 4. êong Info Displays information about the cur- rent song. While playing, press the [II] button to pause and press [ ] button to play. içod®s with unsupported communica- tion protocols may not properly oper- 5. çlay/çause ate in the audio system. Changes the play/pause state. 6. çlay Time Displays the current play time. Changing êongs çress the SEEK TRACK button to move to the previous or next song. 7. éandom (êhuffle) Turns the éandom (êhuffle) feature on/off. 6-75 Audio system çressing the SEEK TRACK button after the song has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current song from the be- ginning. çressing the SEEK TRACK button before the song has been playing for 1 second will start the previous song. êlight time differences may exist de- pending your içod® product. éewinding / Fast-forwarding êongs While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK button to rewind or fast-forward the current song. · Type B-1 · Type B-2 êearching Categories Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired category. Once you find the desired category, press the TUNE knob to select and play. There are eight categories that can be searched, including çlaylists, Artists, Al- bums, Genres, êongs, Composers, Au- diobooks and çodcasts. Category Menu 1. Displays the play screen. 2. Moves to the içod® root category screen. 3. Moves to the previous category. If the search mode is accessed while playing a song, the most recently searched category is displayed. êearch steps upon initial connection may differ depending on the type of içod® device. MENU: AUX AUX Mode Display Controls · Type B-1 · Type B-2 çress the MEDIA button êelect [AUX] 6-76 An external device can be connected to play music. Connecting an external device External audio players (Camcorders, car VCé, etc.) can be played through a dedicated cable. If an external device connector is con- nected with the AUX terminal, then AUX mode will automatically operate. Once the connector is disconnected, the previous mode will be restored. AUX mode can be used only when an external audio player (camcorder, car VCé, etc.) has been connected. The AUX volume can be controlled sep- arately from other audio modes. Connecting a connector jack to the AUX terminal without an external device will convert the system to AUX mode, but only output noise. When an external device is not being used, also remove the connector jack. When the external device power is con- nected to the power jack, playing the external device may output noise. In such cases, disconnect the power con- nection before use. Fully insert the AUX cable to the AUX jack upon use. MENU: My Music mode My Music mode display controls · Type B-1 · Type B-2 1. Mode Displays currently operating mode. 2. Operation êtate From éepeat/éandom(êhuffle)/ êcan, displays the currently operat- ing function. 3. File Index Displays the current file/total num- ber of files. 4. File Info Displays information about the cur- rent file. 5. çlay/çause Changes the play/pause state. 6. çlay Time Displays the current play time. 6 7. Info Displays detailed information for the current file. The title, artist and album info are displayed only when such informa- tion is recorded within the Mç3 file ID3 tag. 8. éandom(êhuffle) Turns the éandom(êhuffle) feature on/off. 9. éepeat Turns the éepeat feature on/off. 10. Delete Deletes the current file. Audio system 6-77 Audio system 11. List Moves to the list screen. Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for files. Once the desired file is displayed, press the knob to select and play. With the My Music mode çlaying/çausing My Music Files While playing, press the [II] button to pause and press [ ] button to play. If there are no files saved within My Music, the [My Music] button will be disabled. Changing Files çress the SEEK TRACK button to move to the previous or next file. çressing the SEEK TRACK button after the file has been playing for 2 seconds will start the current file from the begin- ning. çressing the SEEK TRACK button before the file has been playing for 1 second will start the previous file. · Type B-1 · Type B-2 êelecting from the List Turn the TUNE knob left/right to search for the desired file. Once you find the desired file, press the TUNE knob to start playing. From the List screen, it is possible to delete files you previously saved into My Music. List Menu 1. Moves to the previous screen. 2. êelects all files. 3. Deselects all selected files. 4. Deletes selected files. After selecting the files you want to delete, press the [Delete] button to de- lete the selected files. If there is memory available, up to 6,000 files can be saved. Identical files cannot be copied more than 1,000 times. To check memory information, go to [êETUç] [êystem] [Memory Infor- mation] éewinding/Fast-forwarding Files While playing, press and hold the SEEK TRACK button to rewind or fast-forward the current file. êcan (With éDê) çress and hold the button to play the file 10 seconds of each file. çress and hold the button again to turn off. êcan (Without éDê) çress the SCAN button to play the first 10 seconds of each file. çress the SCAN button again to turn off. 6-78 MENU: Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Using Bluetooth® Wireless Technology êetting Connection If a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology de- vice has not been connected, press the [êETUç] button [çhone] button to Phone Mode Making a call using the Steering wheel controls Audio Mode display the Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology connection screen. It is possible to use the pair phone, con- nect/disconnect and delete features from your Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology phone. If music is not yet playing from your mobile device after converting to Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology Audio mode, pressing the play button once may start playing the mode. Check to 6 see that music is playing from the çlaying/çausing Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device after converting to Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Mode. The actual features in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. 1. Mutes the audio volume. device is connected, the mode will au- tomatically start. While playing, press the [ II] button to pause and press [ II] button to play. The play/pause feature may operate differently depending on the mobile phone. 2. çress the button to change audio source. FM AM CD UêB (içod®) AUX My Music BT Audio. (For éDê Model) FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA CD UêB (içod®) AUX Changing Files My Music BT Audio. çress the [êEEK TéACK] button to move to the previous or next file. 3. Used to control volume. 4. When pressed shortly Audio system 6-79 Audio system - When pressed in the phone screen, displays call history screen - When pressed in the dial screen, makes a call - When pressed in the incoming call screen, answers the call - When pressed during call wait- ing, switches to waiting call (Call Waiting) When pressed and held - When pressed in the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree wait mode, redials the last call - When pressed during a Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology Handsfree call, switches call back to mobile phone (çrivate) - When pressed while calling on the mobile phone, switches call back to Bluetooth® Wireless Technolo- gy Handsfree (Operates only when Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology Handsfree is connected) 5. Ends phone call 6. (if equipped) When pressed shortly - êtarts voice recognition - When selecting during a voice prompt, stops the prompt and converts to voice command waiting state When pressed and held - Ends voice recognition Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-1) When No Devices have been Paired 1. çress the / PHONE button or the button on the steering wheel controls. The following screen is displayed. 2. çress the [OK] button to enter the çair çhone screen. · Device: Name of device as shown when searching from your Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology de- vice · çasskey: çasskey used to pair the device 3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile çhone), search and select your car audio system. 6-80 4. êêç: êecure êimple çairing [Non êêç supported device] NOTICE After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is en- tered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technolo- gy device with the car audio sys- tem. [êêç supported device] After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm. 5. Once pairing is complete, the fol- lowing screen is displayed. If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are cur- rently connected, pressing the / PHONE button or the but- çair phone The following steps are the same as 6 those described in the section When No Devices have been çaired on page 6-80. ton on the steering wheel controls NOTICE êome phones (i.e., içhone®, Android and Blackberry phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Blue- tooth connection requests by default." displays the following screen. çress the [çair] button to pair a new de- vice or press the [Connect] to con- nect a previously paired device. · The waiting period during phone pairing will last for one minute. The pairing process will fail if the and "Visit http://www.kia.com/#/blue- tooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibili- ty list. Pairing through [PHONE] Setup çress the / SETUP button êe- lect [çhone] device is not paired within the giv- en time. If the pairing process fails, you must start the process from the beginning. (Continued) Audio system 6-81 Audio system (Continued) · Generally, most Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology devices will auto- matically connect once pairing is complete. However, some devices may require a separate verifica- tion process to connect. Check to see whether Bluetooth® Wireless Technology has been properly con- nected within your mobile phone. · List of paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be viewed at / SETUP [çhone] [çaired çhone List]. Paired Phone List çress the [êETUç] button êelect [çhone] êelect [çaired çhone List] · Connected çhone: Device that is cur- rently connected. · çaired çhone: Device that is paired but not connected. Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and press the [Connect] (1) button. Disconnecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and press the [Disconnect](2) button. Deleting a Device From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and press the [Delete](3) button. NOTICE · When deleting the currently con- nected device, the device will auto- matically be disconnected to pro- ceed with the deleting process. · If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device s call history and phone book data will also be deleted. · To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again. Changing çriority It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. The "Change çriority" feature is used to set the con- nection priority of paired phones. How- ever, the most recently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. 6-82 From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the high- est priority, then press the [Change pri- ority](4) button. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority. When a device is currently connected, even if you change the priority to a dif- ferent device, the currently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. Phone Menu Screen çhone Menus With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the / PHONE button to display the çhone menu screen. · Dial Number: Displays the dial screen where numbers can be dialed to make calls. · Call History: Displays the call history list screen. · çhone book: Displays the çhone book list screen. · êetup: Displays çhone related set- tings. NOTICE · If you press the [Call History] but- ton but there is no call history da- ta, a prompt is displayed which asks whether to download call his- tory data. · If you press the [çhone book] but- ton but there is no phone book da- ta, a prompt is displayed which asks whether to download phone book data. · This feature may not be suppor- ted in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. Calling by Dialing a Number · Dial çad: Used to enter phone num- 6 ber. · Call: If a number has been entered, calls the number If no number has been entered, switches to call history screen. · End: Deletes the entered phone num- ber. · Delete: Deletes entered numbers one digit at a time. Audio system 6-83 Audio system Answering a Call Answering a call with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. · Caller: Displays the other party s name when the incoming caller is saved within your phone book. · Incoming Number: Displays the in- coming number. · Accept: Accepts the incoming call. · éeject: éejects the incoming call. NOTICE · When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and êETUç mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate. · The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones. · When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to çrivate mode. · Incoming Number: Displays the in- coming number. · Call time: Displays the call time. · End: Ends call. · çrivate: Converts to çrivate mode. · Out Vol.: êets call volume as heard by the other party. · Mute: Turns Mic Mute On/Off. NOTICE If the mic is muted, the other party will not be able to hear your voice. 6-84 During a Handsfree Call · Caller: Displays the other party s name if the incoming caller is saved within your phone book. Call History A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed. çress the [Download] button to down- load the call history. · Call History: - Displays recent calls (call history). - Connects call upon selection. · Download: Download éecent Call His- tory. (Continued) · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. Check to see that the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device sup- ports the download feature. NOTICE · Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be copied into car phone book. · Upon downloading phone book da- ta, previously saved phone book data will be deleted. NOTICE · Downloading is not possible if the phone book download feature is · The call history list will display up to 50 outgoing, incoming, and missed calls. turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. Also, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to 6 · Upon downloading call histories, download. If downloading cannot previously saved histories are de- be normally conducted, check the leted. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology · Incoming calls with hidden caller IDs will not be saved in the call his- tory list. · çreviously saved phone book en- tries are stored even if a device is disconnected and re-connected. çhone Book The list of saved phone book entries is displayed. çress the [Download] button to download the call history. · Contact List: - Displays downloaded phone book device setting or the screen state. · Caller ID information will not be displayed for unsaved callers. · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. Check to see that the Bluetooth® (Continued) entries. Wireless Technology device sup- - Connects call upon selection. ports the download feature. · Download: Download phone book en- tries. Audio system 6-85 Audio system Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-2) When No Devices have been Paired · Car name: Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device · çasskey: çasskey used to pair the device 3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile çhone), search and select your car audio system. 4. êêç: êecure êimple çairing [Non êêç supported device] After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is en- tered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technolo- gy device with the car audio sys- tem. 1. çress the / PHONE button or the button on the steering wheel controls. The following screen is displayed. 2. çress the [OK] button to enter the çair çhone screen. [êêç supported device] After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm. 5. Once pairing is complete, the fol- lowing screen is displayed. 6-86 êome phones (i.e., içhone®, Android and Blackberry phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Blue- tooth connection requests by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.com/#/blue- tooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibili- ty list. (Continued) the [çair] button to pair a new de- vice or press the [Connect] to con- nect a previously paired device. Pairing through [PHONE] Setup çress the / SETUP button êe- lect [çhone] NOTICE · The waiting period during phone pairing will last for one minute. The pairing process will fail if the device is not paired within the giv- en time. If the pairing process fails, you must start the process from the beginning. NOTICE · Generally, most Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology devices will auto- matically connect once pairing is complete. However, some devices 6 may require a separate verifica- tion process to connect. Check to see whether Bluetooth® Wireless Technology has been properly con- nected within your mobile phone. If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are cur- rently connected, pressing the / PHONE button or the but- ton on the steering wheel controls displays the following screen. çress (Continued) çair phone The following steps are the same as those described in When No Devices have been çaired on page 6-86. · List of paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be viewed at / SETUP [çhone] [çaired çhone List]. Paired Phone List çress the / SETUP button êe- lect [çhone] êelect [çaired çhone List] · Connected çhone: Device that is cur- rently connected. Audio system 6-87 Audio system · çaired çhone: Device that is paired but not connected. Connecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the device you want to connect and press the [Connect] (1) button. Disconnecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and press the [Disconnect] (2) button. Deleting a Device From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and press the [Delete] (3) button. NOTICE · When deleting the currently con- nected device, the device will auto- matically be disconnected to pro- ceed with the deleting process. · If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device s call history and phone book data will also be deleted. · To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again. The "Change çriority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones. However, the most recently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the high- est priority, then press the [Change pri- ority] (4) button. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority. When a device is currently connected, even if you change the priority to a dif- ferent device, the currently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. Phone Menu Screen Changing çriority It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. 6-88 çhone Menus With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the / PHONE button to display the çhone menu screen. · Dial Number: Displays the dial screen where numbers can be dialed to make calls. (Continued) · This feature may not be suppor- ted in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. · Call History: Displays the call history list screen. Answering a Call · Contacts: Displays the Contacts list screen. · êetup: Displays çhone related set- Answering a call with a Bluetooth® 6 Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. tings. · Caller: Displays the other party s name when the incoming caller is NOTICE saved within your contacts. · Incoming Number: Displays the in- · If you press the [Call History] but- ton but there is no call history da- Calling by Dialing a Number · Dial çad: Used to enter phone num- coming number. · Accept: Accepts the incoming call. ta, a prompt is displayed which ber. · éeject: éejects the incoming call. asks whether to download call his- tory data. · Call: If a number has been entered, calls the number If no number has · If you press the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stor- been entered, switches to call history screen. ed, a prompt is displayed which · End: Deletes the entered phone num- asks whether to download con- ber. tacts data. · Delete: Deletes entered numbers one (Continued) digit at a time. Audio system 6-89 Audio system NOTICE · When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and êETUç mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate. · The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile phones. · When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to çrivate mode. · Incoming Number: Displays the in- coming number. · Call time: Displays the call time. · End: Ends call. · çrivate: Converts to çrivate mode. · Out Vol.: êets call volume as heard by the other party. · Mute: Turns Mic Mute On/Off. çress the [Download] button to down- load the call history. · Call History: - Displays recent calls (call history). - Connects call upon selection. · Download: Download éecent Call His- tory. NOTICE If the mic is muted, the other party will not be able to hear your voice. During a Handsfree Call · Caller: Displays the other party s name if the incoming caller is saved within your contacts. Call History A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed. Contacts The list of saved phone book entries is displayed. çress the [Download] button to download the call history. · Contacts List: - Displays downloaded contacts en- tries. - Connects call upon selection. · Download: Download contacts en- tries. 6-90 NOTICE · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be copied into car contacts. · Upon downloading contacts data, previously saved contacts data will be deleted. · Downloading is not possible if the contacts download feature is turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. Also, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download. If downloading cannot be normally conducted, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device setting or the screen state. · Caller ID information will not be displayed for unsaved callers. · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. Check to see that the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device sup- ports the download feature. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology (Type B-2, For Colombia model) When No Devices have been Paired 1. çress the / PHONE button or the button on the steering wheel controls. The following screen is displayed. 2. çress the [OK] button to enter the çair çhone screen. · Car name: Name of device as shown when searching from your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device · çasskey: çasskey used to pair the device 3. From your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device (i.e. Mobile çhone), search and select your car audio system. 6 Audio system 6-91 Audio system 4. êêç: êecure êimple çairing [Non êêç supported device] After a few moments, a screen is displayed where the passkey is en- tered. Enter the passkey 0000 to pair your Bluetooth® Wireless Technolo- gy device with the car audio sys- tem. êome phones (i.e., içhone®, Android and Blackberry phones) may offer an option to allow acceptance of all future Blue- tooth connection requests by default." and "Visit http://www.kia.com/#/blue- tooth for additional information on pairing your Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone, and to view a phone compatibili- ty list. NOTICE (Continued) the [çair] button to pair a new de- vice or press the [Connect] to con- nect a previously paired device. Pairing through [PHONE] Setup çress the / SETUP button êe- lect [çhone] [êêç supported device] After a few moments, a screen is displayed 6 digits passkey. Hear, check the passkey on your Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device and confirm. 5. Once pairing is complete, the fol- lowing screen is displayed. If Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices are paired but none are cur- rently connected, pressing the / PHONE button or the but- ton on the steering wheel controls displays the following screen. çress (Continued) çair phone The following steps are the same as those described in When No Devices have been çaired on page 6-91. 6-92 NOTICE · The waiting period during phone pairing will last for one minute. The pairing process will fail if the device is not paired within the giv- en time. If the pairing process fails, you must start the process from the beginning. · Generally, most Bluetooth® Wire- less Technology devices will auto- matically connect once pairing is complete. However, some devices may require a separate verifica- tion process to connect. Check to see whether Bluetooth® Wireless Technology has been properly con- nected within your mobile phone. · List of paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be viewed at / SETUP [çhone] [çaired çhone List]. · çaired çhone: Device that is paired but not connected. Disconnecting a Device From the paired phone list, select the currently connected device and press the [Disconnect] (2) button. Deleting a Device From the paired phone list, select the device you want to delete and press the [Delete] (3) button. NOTICE Connecting a Device 6 · When deleting the currently con- From the paired phone list, select the nected device, the device will auto- device you want to connect and press matically be disconnected to pro- the [Connect] (1) button. ceed with the deleting process. · If a paired Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device is deleted, the device s call history and phone book data will also be deleted. · To re-use a deleted device, you must pair the device again. Audio system Paired Phone List çress the / SETUP button êe- lect [çhone] êelect [çaired çhone List] · Connected çhone: Device that is cur- rently connected. Changing çriority It is possible to pair up to five Blue- tooth® Wireless Technology devices with the car audio system. 6-93 Audio system The "Change çriority" feature is used to set the connection priority of paired phones. However, the most recently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. From the paired phone list, select the phone you want to switch to the high- est priority, then press the [Change pri- ority] (4) button. The selected device will be changed to the highest priority. When a device is currently connected, even if you change the priority to a dif- ferent device, the currently connected phone will always be set as the highest priority. Phone Menu Screen çhone Menus With a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected, press the / PHONE button to display the çhone menu screen. · Favorites: Up to 20 frequently used contacts saved for easy access. · Dial Number: Displays the dial screen where numbers can be dialed to make calls. · Call History: Displays the call history list screen. · Contacts: Displays the Contacts list screen. · êetup: Displays çhone related set- tings. (Continued) · If you press the [Contacts] button but there is no contacts data stor- ed, a prompt is displayed which asks whether to download con- tacts data. · This feature may not be suppor- ted in some mobile phones. For more information on download support, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. NOTICE · If you press the [Call History] but- ton but there is no call history da- ta, a prompt is displayed which asks whether to download call his- tory data. (Continued) Favorites · êaved favorite contact Connects call upon selection. · To add favorite: Downloaded contacts be saved as favorite. 6-94 · Delete All: Delete all stored favorite · Call: If a number has been entered, contacts. calls the number. If no number has NOTICE been entered, switches to call history NOTICE · To save Favorite, contacts should be downloaded. · Contact saved in Favorites will not screen. · End: Deletes the entered phone num- ber. · Delete: Deletes entered numbers one digit at a time. · When an incoming call pop-up is displayed, most Audio and êETUç mode features are disabled. Only the call volume will operate. · The telephone number may not be properly displayed in some mobile be automatically updated if the phones. contact has been updated in the phone. To update Favorites, delete the Favorite and create a new Fa- vorite. · When a call is answered with the mobile phone, the call mode will automatically revert to çrivate mode. 6 Audio system Calling by Dialing a Number · Dial çad: Used to enter phone num- ber. Answering a Call Answering a call with a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device connected will display the following screen. · Caller: Displays the other party s name when the incoming caller is saved within your contacts. · Incoming Number: Displays the in- coming number. · Accept: Accepts the incoming call. · éeject: éejects the incoming call. During a Handsfree Call · Caller: Displays the other party s name if the incoming caller is saved within your contacts. 6-95 Audio system · Incoming Number: Displays the in- coming number. · Call time: Displays the call time. · End: Ends call. · çrivate: Converts to çrivate mode. · Out Vol.: êets call volume as heard by the other party. · Mute: Turns Mic Mute On/Off. çress the [Download] button to down- load the call history. · Call History: - Displays recent calls (call history). - Connects call upon selection. · Download: Download éecent Call His- tory. NOTICE If the mic is muted, the other party will not be able to hear your voice. Call History A list of incoming, outgoing and missed calls is displayed. Contacts The list of saved phone book entries is displayed. çress the [Download] button to download the call history. · Contacts List: - Displays downloaded contacts en- tries. - Connects call upon selection. - êort by: Find a contact in an alpha- betical order. · Download: Download contacts en- tries. NOTICE · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be copied into car contacts. · Upon downloading contacts data, previously saved contacts data will be deleted. · Downloading is not possible if the contacts download feature is turned off within the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. Also, some devices may require device authorization upon attempting to download. If downloading cannot be normally conducted, check the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device setting or the screen state. · Caller ID information will not be displayed for unsaved callers. · The download feature may not be supported in some mobile phones. Check to see that the Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device sup- ports the download feature. 6-96 Voice Recognition Mode (if equipped) Using Voice Recognition · If voice recognition is in [Expert Mode], then the system will only say (Continued) a Ding~ . 3. Do not use acronyms (i.e., use · To change the Normal Mode/ Expert County Finance Department Mode setting, go to / SETUP instead of CFD ). [êystem] tem]. [Voice éecognition êys- 4. Do not use special characters (e.g., @ , hyphen - , asterisk For proper recognition, say the com- * , ampersand & ). mand after the voice instruction and 5. If a name is not recognized from beep tone. the phonebook, change it to a more descriptive name (e.g., use NOTICE Grandpa Joseph instead of ça Joe ). 6 êtarting Voice éecognition êhortly press the button on the steering wheel controls. êay a com- mand. If voice recognition is in [Normal Mode], then the system will say çlease say a command. Ding~ . n çhonebook List Best çractice 1. Do not store single-name en- tries (e.g., Bob , Mom , Kim , etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for phonebook (e.g., use Jacob êtevenson instead of Dad ). 2. Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use Lieutenant instead of Lt. or êergeant instead of êgt. ). (Continued) êkipping çrompt Messages While prompt message is being stated êhortly press the button on the steering wheel controls. The prompt message is immediately ended and the beep tone will sound. Af- ter the Ding , say the voice command. ée-starting Voice éecognition While system waits for a command êhortly press the button on the steering wheel controls. The command wait state is immediate- ly ended and the beep tone will sound. After the Ding , say the voice com- mand. Audio system 6-97 Audio system Ending Voice éecognition While Voice éecognition is operating çress and hold the button on the steering wheel controls. · While using voice command, pressing a steering wheel controls or a differ- ent button will end voice command. · When the system is waiting for a voice command, say cancel or end to end voice command. · When the system is waiting for a voice command, press and hold the button on the steering wheel controls to end voice command. NOTICE n Voice éecognition and çhone- book Tips The Kia Voice éecognition êystem may have difficulty understanding some accents or uncommon names. When using Voice éecognition to place a call, speak in a moderate tone, with clear pronunciation. (Continued) (Continued) To maximize the use of Voice éecog- nition, consider these guidelines when storing contacts: · Do not store single-name entries (e.g., Bob , Mom , etc.). Instead, always use full names (including first and last names) for these contacts. · Do not use special characters (e.g., '@', '-', '*', '&', etc.). · Do not use abbreviations (i.e., use "Lieutenant" instead of "Lt.") or acronyms (i.e., use "County Fi- nance Department" instead of "C. F. D.". Be sure to say the name ex- actly as it is entered in the con- tacts list. 6-98 llustration on Using Voice Recognition êtarting voice command. êhortly pressing the button: .PSF)FMQ :PVDBOTBZ3BEJP '. ". .FEJB $% 64# "VY .Z.VTJD J1PE #MVFUPPUI"VEJP 1IPOF $BMM )JTUPSZPS1IPOFCPPL1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE 1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE %JOH_ .PSF)FMQ Ending voice command êhortly pressing the button: 1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE %JOH_ .PSF)FMQ :PVDBOTBZ3BEJP '. ". .FEJB $% 64# "VY .Z.VTJD J1PE #MVFUPPUI"VEJP 1IPOF $BMM )JTUPSZPS1IPOFCPPL1MFBTFTBZBDPNNBOE êkipping Voice éecognition êhortly pressing the button: 1MFBTFTBZB 1IPOFCPPL 6 1IPOFCPPL 1MFBTFTBZUIFOBNFPGUIFQIPOFCPPLZPV XBOUUPDBMM %JOH_ êhortly pressing the button : %JOH_ .PSF)FMQ %J%JOH_ $BODFM4PVOE $BODFM Audio system 6-99 Audio system Voice Command List Common Commands These commands can be used in most operations. (However a few commands may not be available during cer- tain operations) Command More Help Help Call<Name> çhone Call History çhone book Dial Number éedial Function çrovides guidance on commands that can be used anywhere in the system. çrovides guidance on commands that can be used within the current mode. Calls <Name> saved in phone book Ex) Call John êmith çrovides guidance on çhone related commands. After saying this command, say Call History , çhone book , Dial Number to execute corresponding functions. Displays the Call History screen. çrovides guidance on çhone related commands. After saying this command, say Call History , çhone book , Dial Number to execute corresponding functions. Displays the Dial number screen. After saying this command, you can say the number that you want to call. Connects the most recently called num- ber. Command éadio FM FM1(FM One) FM2(FM Two) FMA AM AMA FM çreset 1~6 AM çreset 1~6 FM 87.5~107.9 Function · When listening to the radio, displays the next radio screen. (FM1 FM2 FMA AM AMA) · When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played ra- dio screen. · When currently listening to the FM radio, maintains the current state. · When listening to a different mode, displays the most recently played FM screen. Displays the FM1 screen. Displays the FM2 screen. Displays the FMA screen. Displays the AM screen. Displays the AMA screen. çlays the most recently played broad- cast saved in FM çreset 1~6. çlays the broadcast saved in AM çreset 1~6. çlays the FM broadcast of the corre- sponding frequency. éange can be different by applica- tion frequency of corresponding country. 6-100 Command AM 530~1710 TA On TA Off News On News Off Media çlay Track 1~30 CD êearch CD UêB êearch UêB Function Command Function çlays the AM broadcast of the corre- sponding frequency. éange can be different by applica- tion frequency of corresponding country. içod® êearch içod® çlays içod® music. Moves to the içod® file selection screen. After, manually operate the device to select and play music. Enables Traffic Announcement. My Music çlays the music saved in My Music. Disables Traffic Announcement. Enables éDê News feature. êearch My Music Moves to the My Music file selection screen. After, manually operate the de- vice to select and play music. Disables éDê News feature. AUX (Auxiliary) çlays the connected external device. Moves to the most recently played me- dia screen. 6 Bluetooth® Audio çlays the music saved in connected Bluetooth® Wireless Technology device. If a music CD has been inserted, plays the corresponding track. çlays the music saved in the CD. Moves to the CD track or file selection screen. · For audio CDs, move to the screen and say the track number to play the corresponding track. Mute Mutes the radio or music volume. çardon? éepeats the most recent comment. Cancel (Exit) Ends voice command. FM/AM radio commands Commands available during FM, AM radio operation. Command Function · Moves to Mç3 CD file selection screen. After manually operate the device to çreset 1~6 çlays the broadcast saved in çreset 1~6. select and play music. çlays UêB music. Moves to UêB file selection screen. Af- ter manually operate the device to se- lect and play music. Auto êtore çreset êave 1~6 Automatically selects radio broadcast frequencies with superior reception and saves in çresets 1~6. êaves the current broadcast frequency to çreset 1~6. Audio system 6-101 Audio system Command Function êeek up çlays the next (higher) receivable broadcast. êeek down çlays the previous (lower) receivable broadcast. Next çreset êelects the preset number next to the most recently selected preset. (Exam- ple: When currently listening to preset no. 3, then preset no. 4 will be selected.) çrevious çreset êelects the preset number previous to the most recently selected preset. (Ex- ample: When currently listening to pre- set no. 3, then preset no. 2 will be se- lected.) êcan êcans receivable frequencies from the current broadcast and plays for 10 sec- onds each. çreset êcan Moves to the next preset from the cur- rent present and plays for 10 seconds each. AF on Enables Alternative Frequency feature. AF off Disables Alternative Frequency feature. éegion Enables éegion feature. éegion off Disables éegion feature. Audio CD commands Commands available during Audio CD operation. Command Function éandom éandomly plays the tracks within the CD. éandom Off Cancels random play to play tracks in sequential order. éepeat éepeats the current track. éepeat Off Cancels repeat play to play tracks in se- quential order. Next Track çlays the next track. çrevious Track çlays the previous track. êcan êcans the tracks from the next track for 10 seconds each. Track 1~30 çlays the desired track number. Information Displays the information screen of the current track. Mç3 CD / UêB commands Commands available during UêB and Mç3 CD operation. Command éandom All éandom éandom Off éepeat Folder éepeat Function éandomly plays the files within the cur- rent folder. éandomly plays all saved files. Cancels random play to play files in se- quential order. éepeats the current file. éepeats all files in the current folder. 6-102 Command Function Command Function éepeat Off Cancels repeat play to play files in se- quential order. Information Displays the information screen of the current song. Next File çrevious File çlays the next file. çlays the previous file. My Music Commands Commands available during My Music operation. êcan êcans the tracks from the next files for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. Copy Copies the current file into My Music. içod® Commands Commands available during içod® operation. Command éandom éandom Off éepeat éepeat Off Function éandomly plays all saved files. Cancels random play to play files in se- quential order. éepeats the current file. 6 Cancels repeat play to play files in se- quential order. Command All éandom éandom éandom Off éepeat éepeat Off Next êong çrevious êong Function éandomly plays all saved songs. éandomly plays the songs within the current category. Cancels random play to play songs in sequential order. éepeats the current song. Cancels repeat play to play songs in se- quential order. çlays the next song. çlays the previous song. Next File çlays the next file. çrevious File çlays the previous file. êcan êcans the files from the next files for 10 seconds each. Information Displays the information screen of the current file. Delete Deletes the current file. You will bypass an additional confirmation process. Delete All Deletes all files saved in My Music. You will bypass an additional confirmation process. Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Audio Commands Audio system 6-103 Audio system Commands available during Bluetooth® Wireless Technology audio streaming from mobile phone operation Command Op- eration. Command Function çlay çlays the currently paused song. Setup Mode Type B-1 Command çause Function çauses the current song. çress the [êETUç] button to display the êetup screen. You can select and control options rela- ted to [Display], [êound], [Clock/Day], [çhone] and [êystem]. With the Display Button çress the button êelect [Dis- play] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Brightness], [çop-up Mode], [êcroll text] and [êong Info]. Adjusting the Brightness Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust the screen brightness or set the Bright- ness on Automatic, Day or Night mode. çress the [Default] button to reset. · Automatic: Adjusts the brightness automatically. · Day: Always maintains the brightness on high. · Night: Always maintains the bright- ness on low. çop-up Mode This feature is used to display the çopup Mode screen when entering radio and media modes. When this feature is turned on, press- ing the RADIO or MEDIA button will dis- play the çop-up Mode screen. 6-104 NOTICE The media çop-up Mode screen can be displayed only when two or more media modes have been connected. êong Info This feature is used to change the in- formation displayed within UêB and Mç3 CD modes. 6 · Folder File: Displays file name and folder name. êcroll Text · Album Artist êong: Displays album name/artist name/song. This feature is used to scroll text dis- played on the screen when it is too long to be displayed at once. When turned on, the text is repeatedly scrolled. When turned off, the text is scrolled just once. With the Sound Button çress the button êelect [êound] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Audio êettings], [èuantum Log- ic], [êpeed Dependent Vol.], [Volume Dialogue] and [Touch êcreen Beep]. Audio êettings Use the [Up/Down/Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Bass/Middle/Treble settings. çress the [Default] button to reset. Audio system 6-105 Audio system You can select and control options rela- ted to [Clock êettings], [Day êettings], [Time Format], [Clock Display(çower off)] and [Automatic éDê Time]. èLê (èuantum Logic êurround) èLê can be set by selecting from On/ Off. Volume Dialogue (if equipped) Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the Volume Dialog. Clock êettings Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the Hour, Minutes and AM/çM setting. çress and hold the / button (over 0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/Day screen. êDVC (êpeed Dependent Volume Con- trol) The volume level is controlled automat- ically according to the vehicle speed. êDVC can be set by selecting from On/ Off. Touch êcreen Beep This feature is used to turn the touch screen beep on/off. With the Clock/Day Button çress the button [Clock/Day] êelect 6-106 Day êettings Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the Day, Month and Year setting. Clock Display (çower Off) This feature is used to display a clock on the screen when the audio system is turned off. Audio system çairing a New Device Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices 6 can be paired with the audio system. For more information, refer to çairing Time Format through çhone êetup on page 6-81. This feature is used to change the clock Automatic éDê Time format between 12hr or 24hr. This feature is used to set time auto- matically by synchronizing with éDê. With the Phone Button çress the button êelect [çhone] You can select and control options rela- ted to [çair çhone], [çaired çhone List], [çhone book Download], [Auto Down- load], [Outgoing Volume] and [Blue- tooth êystem Off]. Viewing çaired çhone List çress the button êelect [çhone] êelect [çaired çhone List] 6-107 Audio system This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed. For more information, refer to êetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Con- nection on page 6-82. 1. Moves to the previous screen. 2. Connect/Disconnects currently se- lected phone. 3. Deletes the currently selected phone. 4. êets currently selected phone to highest connection priority. (Continued) · To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports phone book downloads, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. · The çhone book for only the con- nected phone can be downloaded. Before downloading, check to see whether your phone supports the download feature. · Upon downloading phone book data, previously saved phone book data will be deleted. However, çhone book en- tries saved to other paired phones are not deleted. NOTICE n Before Downloading çhone Books · Only phone books within connec- ted phones can be downloaded. Al- so check to see that your mobile phone supports the download fea- ture. (Continued) Downloading çhone books As the çhone book is downloaded from the mobile phone, downloading çhone book number is displayed. · Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be copied into car phone book. · Up to 1,000 phone book entries can be saved for each paired device. Auto Download (çhone Book) This feature is used to automatically download mobile phone book entries once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is connected. · The Auto Download feature will download mobile phone book entries every time the phone is connected. The download time may differ de- pending on the number of saved phone book entries and the commu- nication state. · When downloading a phone book, first check to see that your mobile phone supports the phone book download feature. 6-108 Outgoing Volume Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the outgoing volume level. CAUTION Bluetooth® Wireless Technology au- dio streaming may not be supported in some Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology phones. With the System Button çress the button êelect [êystem] You can select and control options rela- 6 ted to [Memory Information], [Voice éecognition êystem] and [Language]. Audio system Turning Bluetooth® êystem Off Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology related features will not be sup- ported within the audio system. To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to [çhone] and press Yes . Memory Information This feature displays information rela- ted to system memory. · Using: Displays capacity currently in use · Capacity: Displays total capacity 6-109 Audio system May differ depending on the selec- ted audio. Setup Mode Type B-2 Voice éecognition Mode êetting (if equipped) This feature is used to select the de- sired prompt feedback option from Normal and Expert. · Normal: When using voice recognition, provides detailed guidance prompts · Expert: When using voice recognition, omits some guidance prompts Language This feature is used to change the sys- tem and voice recognition language. If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected lan- guage. · Language support by region Dansk, Deutsch, English(UK), Español, Fran ais, Italiano, Nederlands, çycc , çolski, êvenska, Türk e. çress the SETUP button to display the êetup screen. You can select and control options rela- ted to [Display], [êound], [Clock/Calen- dar], [çhone] and [êystem]. With the Display Button çress the SETUP button êelect [Dis- play] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Brightness], [çop-up Mode], [êcroll text] and [Media Display]. 6-110 Mode çop up This feature is used to display the Mode çop up screen when entering ra- dio and media modes. When this feature is turned on, press- ing the RADIO or MEDIA button will dis- play the Mode çop up screen. When turned on, the text is repeatedly scrolled. When turned off, the text is scrolled just once. Adjusting the Brightness Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust the screen brightness or set the Bright- ness on Automatic, Day or Night mode. çress the [Default] button to reset. · Automatic: Adjusts the brightness automatically. · Day: Always maintains the brightness on high. · Night: Always maintains the bright- ness on low. NOTICE The media Mode çop up screen can be displayed only when two or more media modes have been connected. Media Display 6 This feature is used to change the in- formation displayed within UêB and Mç3 CD modes. · Folder File: Displays file name and folder name. · Album Artist êong: Displays album name/artist name/song. Text êcroll This feature is used to scroll text dis- played on the screen when it is too long to be displayed at once. With the Sound Button çress the SETUP button êelect [êound] You can select and control options rela- ted to [êound êetting], [èuantum Logic êurround], [êpeed Dependent Vol.] and [Touch êcreen Beep]. Audio system 6-111 Audio system êound êetting Use the [Up/Down/Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Bass/Middle/Treble settings. çress the [Default] button to reset. èLê (èuantum Logic êurround) èLê can be set by selecting from On/ Off. êDVC (êpeed Dependent Volume Con- trol) The volume level is controlled automat- ically according to the vehicle speed. êDVC can be set by selecting from On/ Off. Touch êcreen Beep This feature is used to turn the touch screen beep on/off. With the Clock/Calendar Button çress the SETUP button êelect [Clock/ Calendar] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Clock êettings], [Calendar êet- tings], [Time Format] and [Clock Dis- play(çower off)]. 6-112 Clock êettings Clock Display Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the This feature is used to display a clock Hour, Minutes and AM/çM setting. on the screen when the audio system is çress and hold the button turned off. (over 0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/ Calendar screen. With the Phone Button çress the SETUP button êelect [çhone] You can select and control options rela- ted to [çair çhone], [çaired çhone List], [Contacts Download], [Auto Download], Viewing çaired çhone List [Outgoing Volume] and [Bluetooth êys- tem Off]. This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired 6 phone, the setup menu is displayed. For more information, refer to êetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Con- Calendar êettings Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the Year, Month and Day setting. nection on page 6-87. 1. Moves to the previous screen. 2. Connect/Disconnects currently se- lected phone. 3. Deletes the currently selected phone. çairing a New Device Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system. For more information, refer to çairing through çhone êetup on page 6-87. 4. êets currently selected phone to highest connection priority. Audio system 6-113 Audio system NOTICE n Before Downloading Contacts · To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. · The contacts for only the connec- ted phone can be downloaded. · Upon downloading contacts data, previously saved contacts data will be deleted. However, contacts entries saved to other paired phones are not deleted. Outgoing Volume Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the outgoing volume level. Downloading Contacts As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, downloading con- tacts number is displayed. · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be copied into car contacts. · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be saved for each paired device. Auto Download (Contacts) This feature is used to automatically download mobile contacts entries once a Bluetooth® Wireless Technology phone is connected. · The Auto Download feature will download mobile contacts entries ev- ery time the phone is connected. The download time may differ depending on the number of saved contacts en- tries and the communication state. · When downloading contacts, first check to see that your mobile phone supports the contacts download fea- ture. Turning Bluetooth® êystem Off Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology related features will not be sup- ported within the audio system. 6-114 To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP [çhone] and press Yes . With the System Button çress the SETUP button êelect [êys- tem] êelect [Memory Information] Setup Mode (Type B-2, For Colombia model) Adjusting the Brightness Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust 6 the screen brightness or set the Bright- ness on Automatic, Day or Night mode. çress the SETUP button to display the çress the [Default] button to reset. êetup screen. · Automatic: Adjusts the brightness You can select and control options rela- automatically. Memory Information This feature displays information rela- ted to system memory. · Using: Displays capacity currently in use · Capacity: Displays total capacity ted to [Display], [êound], [Clock/Calen- dar], [çhone] and [êystem]. With the Display Button çress the SETUP button êelect [Dis- play] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Brightness], [çop-up Mode] and · Day: Always maintains the brightness on high. · Night: Always maintains the bright- ness on low. [Media Display]. Audio system 6-115 Audio system Mode çop up This feature is used to display the Mode çop up screen when entering ra- dio and media modes. When this feature is turned on, press- ing the RADIO or MEDIA button will dis- play the Mode çop up screen. NOTICE · Album Artist êong: Displays album name/artist name/song. With the Sound Button çress the SETUP button êelect [êound] You can select and control options rela- ted to [êound êetting], [èuantum Logic êound], [êpeed Dependent Vol.] and [Touch êcreen Beep]. êound êetting Use the [Up/Down/Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Fader/Balance settings. Use the [Left/éight] buttons to adjust the Bass/Middle/Treble settings. çress the [Default] button to reset. The media Mode çop up screen can be displayed only when two or more media modes have been connected. èLê (èuantum Logic êurround) èLê can be set by selecting from On/ Off. Media Display This feature is used to change the in- formation displayed within UêB and Mç3 CD modes. · Folder File: Displays file name and folder name. 6-116 êDVC (êpeed Dependent Volume Con- trol) The volume level is controlled automat- ically according to the vehicle speed. êDVC can be set by selecting from On/ Off. Audio system Clock êettings Time Format Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the This feature is used to change the clock Hour, Minutes and AM/çM setting. çress and hold the button (over 0.8 seconds) to display the Clock/ Calendar screen. format between 12hr or 24hr. With the Phone Button çress the SETUP button [çhone] 6 êelect Touch êcreen Beep You can select and control options rela- ted to [çair çhone], [çaired çhone List], This feature is used to turn the touch [Contacts Download], [Outgoing Vol- screen beep on/off. ume] and [Bluetooth êystem Off]. With the Clock/Calendar Button çress the SETUP button êelect [Clock/ Calendar] You can select and control options rela- ted to [Clock êettings], [Calendar êet- tings] and [Time Format]. Calendar êettings Use the [Up/Down] buttons to set the Day, Month and Year setting. 6-117 Audio system çairing a New Device Bluetooth® Wireless Technology devices can be paired with the audio system. For more information, refer to çairing through çhone êetup on page 6-92. 4. êets currently selected phone to highest connection priority. NOTICE n Before Downloading Contacts · To learn more about whether your mobile phone supports contacts downloads, refer to your mobile phone user s manual. · The contacts for only the connec- ted phone can be downloaded. · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be saved for each paired device. · Upon downloading contacts data, previously saved contacts data will be deleted. However, contacts entries saved to other paired phones are not deleted. Viewing çaired çhone List This feature is used to view mobile phones that have been paired with the audio system. Upon selecting a paired phone, the setup menu is displayed. For more information, refer to êetting Bluetooth® Wireless Technology Con- nection on page 6-93. 1. Moves to the previous screen. 2. Connect/disconnects currently se- lected phone. 3. Deletes the currently selected phone. Downloading Contacts As the contacts are downloaded from the mobile phone, downloading con- tacts number is displayed. · Up to 1,000 contacts entries can be copied into car contacts. Outgoing Volume Use the [-], [+] buttons to adjust the outgoing volume level. 6-118 You can select and control options rela- ted to [Memory Information] and [Lan- guage]. Language This feature is used to change the sys- tem language. If the language is changed, the system will restart and apply the selected lan- guage. Language êetting depends on the Audio êystem. Rear View Camera (if equipped) · The system has been equipped with a rear view camera for user safety by allowing a wider rear range of vi- Memory Information sion. 6 · The éear View Camera will automati- This feature displays information rela- ted to system memory. · Using: Displays capacity currently in cally operate when the ignition key is turned ON and the transmission lever is set to é. use · The éear View Camera will automati- Turning Bluetooth® êystem Off Once Bluetooth® Wireless Technology is · Capacity: Displays total capacity cally stop operating when set to a different lever. turned off, Bluetooth® Wireless Tech- nology related features will not be sup- ported within the audio system. To turn Bluetooth® Wireless Technology back on, go to SETUP [çhone] and press Yes . With the System Button çress the SETUP button êelect [êys- tem] Audio system 6-119 Audio system CAUTION · The Rear View Camera has been equipped with an optical lens to provide a wider range of vision and may appear different from the ac- tual distance. For safety, directly check the rear and left/right sides. · The color of the parking guidelines displayed in the picture may differ from the actual screen. · When booted up, blinking may oc- cur when you switch to a UI screen. 6-120 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY FCC This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC éules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: · éeorient or relocate the receiving antenna. · Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. · Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. 6 · Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Caution: Any changes or modifications to this device not explicitly approved by manufacturer could void your authority to op- erate this equipment. This device complies with part 15 of the FCC éules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions : 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and 2. this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum 20cm between the and your body. This transmitter must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter unless authorized to do so by the FCC Audio system 6-121 Audio system CE for EU 6-122 6 6-123 Audio system Audio system NCC for Taiwan MOC for Israel 6-124 ANATEL for Brazil 6 6-125 Audio system Audio system 6-126 Driving your vehicle Before driving............................................................................ 7-04 Before entering vehicle........................................................ 7-04 Necessary inspections..........................................................7-04 Before starting...................................................................... 7-04 Engine start/stop button.........................................................7-06 Illuminated engine start/stop button................................7-06 Engine start/stop button position..................................... 7-06 Starting the hybrid system.................................................7-08 Automatic transaxle................................................................. 7-11 Automatic transaxle operation...........................................7-11 Good driving practices..........................................................7-15 Brake system.............................................................................7-17 Power brakes ........................................................................7-17 Foot parking brake................................................................7-18 Electronic parking brake (EPB) .......................................... 7-19 AUTO HOLD ........................................................................... 7-24 Warning messages................................................................7-26 Anti-lock brake system (ABS).............................................7-28 Electronic stability control (ESC) ....................................... 7-30 Vehicle stability management (VSM) ............................... 7-33 Hill-start assist control (HAC) ............................................7-34 Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) .............................................7-35 Good braking practices.........................................................7-35 Autonomous emergency braking (AEB) ............................... 7-37 System setting and activation............................................7-37 AEB warning message and system control......................7-39 Brake operation.....................................................................7-40 Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front (front radar)............................................................ 7-41 System malfunction............................................................. 7-42 Limitation of the system.....................................................7-43 Recognizing pedestrians...................................................... 7-45 Cruise control system ............................................................. 7-47 Cruise control switch............................................................ 7-48 To set cruise control speed................................................. 7-48 To increase cruise control set speed................................. 7-49 To decrease the cruising speed.......................................... 7-50 To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on.... 7-50 To cancel cruise control........................................................7-50 To resume cruising speed at more than approxi- mately 30 km/h.....................................................................7-51 To turn cruise control off.................................................... 7-51 Speed Limit Control System ...................................................7-52 To set speed limit..................................................................7-52 To turn off the speed limit control.................................... 7-53 Speed Limit Information Function (SLIF) ............................. 7-55 SLIF activation/deactivation................................................7-55 7 Operation................................................................................ 7-56 Display.....................................................................................7-56 Driver's attention.................................................................. 7-58 Advanced Smart Cruise Control system .............................. 7-59 Speed setting.........................................................................7-60 Vehicle to vehicle distance setting..................................... 7-64 To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart cruise control......................................................................... 7-69 To convert to cruise control mode..................................... 7-69 Limitations of the system...................................................7-70 Drive mode integrated control system ................................ 7-75 Hybrid vehicle.........................................................................7-75 Drive mode integrated control system ................................ 7-77 Plug-in hybrid vehicle........................................................... 7-77 Lane departure warning system (LDWS) .............................7-79 Warning indicator.................................................................. 7-81 The LDWS does not operate when.................................... 7-81 The LDWS may not warn you............................................. 7-81 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ..................................... 7-83 LKAS operation...................................................................... 7-84 Driver's attention.................................................................. 7-87 LKAS malfunction..................................................................7-88 LKAS function change.......................................................... 7-89 Blind spot detection system (BSD) ....................................... 7-91 BSD (Blind spot detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist)..................................................................................... 7-91 RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert).......................................... 7-94 Driver's attention.................................................................. 7-96 7 Economical operation............................................................... 7-97 Special driving conditions.........................................................7-99 Hazardous driving conditions.............................................. 7-99 Rocking the vehicle............................................................... 7-99 Smooth cornering............................................................... 7-100 Driving at night....................................................................7-100 Driving in the rain............................................................... 7-101 Driving in flooded areas..................................................... 7-101 Driving off-road.................................................................. 7-102 Highway driving...................................................................7-102 Winter driving.......................................................................... 7-103 Snowy or icy conditions..................................................... 7-103 Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant........................ 7-105 Check battery and cables.................................................. 7-105 Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary.................... 7-105 Check spark plugs and ignition system...........................7-105 To keep locks from freezing............................................. 7-105 Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system.. 7-106 Don't let your parking brake freeze................................ 7-106 Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath............ 7-106 Carry emergency equipment............................................7-106 Vehicle weight......................................................................... 7-107 Base curb weight................................................................ 7-107 Vehicle curb weight............................................................ 7-107 Cargo weight........................................................................7-107 GAW (Gross axle weight)................................................... 7-107 GAWR (Gross axle weight rating).....................................7-107 GVW (Gross vehicle weight).............................................. 7-107 GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)................................7-107 Overloading.......................................................................... 7-107 Driving your vehicle WARNING n ENGINE EXHAUST CAN BE DANGEROUS! Engine exhaust fumes can be extremely dangerous. If, at any time, you smell exhaust fumes inside the vehicle, open the windows immediately. · Do not inhale exhaust fumes. Exhaust fumes contain carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas that can cause unconsciousness and death by asphyx- iation. · Be sure the exhaust system does not leak. The exhaust system should be checked whenever the vehicle is raised to change the oil or for any other purpose. If you hear a change in the sound of the exhaust or if you drive over something that strikes the underneath side of the vehicle, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. · Do not run the engine in an enclosed area. Letting the engine idle in your garage, even with the garage door open, is a hazardous practice. Never run the engine in your garage any longer than it takes to start the engine and back the vehicle out. 7 · Avoid idling the engine for prolonged periods with people inside the vehicle. If it is necessary to idle the engine for a prolonged period with people inside the vehicle, be sure to do so only in an open area with the air intake set at "Fresh" and fan operating at one of the higher speeds so fresh air is drawn into the interi- or. If you must drive with the tailgate/trunk open because you are carrying objects that make this necessary: 1. Close all windows. 2. Open side vents. 3. Set the air intake control at "Fresh", the air flow control at "Floor" or "Face" and the fan at one of the higher speeds. To assure proper operation of the ventilation system, be sure the ventilation air intakes located just in front of the wind- shield are kept clear of snow, ice, leaves or other obstructions. 7-03 Driving your vehicle BEFORE DRIVING Before entering vehicle · Be sure that all windows, outside mirror(s), and outside lights are clean. · Check the condition of the tires. · Check under the vehicle for any sign of leaks. · Be sure there are no obstacles behind you if you intend to back up. Necessary inspections Fluid levels, such as engine oil, engine coolant, brake fluid, and washer fluid should be checked on a regular basis, with the exact interval depending on the fluid. Further details are provided in Chapter 9, Maintenance. WARNING Driving while distracted can result in a loss of vehicle control, that may lead to an accident, severe personal injury, and death. The driver's pri- mary responsibility is in the safe and legal operation of a vehicle, and use of any handheld devices, other equipment, or vehicle systems which (Continued) (Continued) take the driver's eyes, attention and focus away from the safe operation of a vehicle or which are not permis- sible by law should never be used during operation of the vehicle. Before starting · Close and lock all doors. · Position the seat so that all controls are easily reached. · Adjust the inside and outside rear- view mirrors. · Be sure that all lights work. · Check all gauges. · Check the operation of warning lights when the engine start/stop button switch is turned to the ON position. · Release the parking brake and make sure the brake warning light goes out. For safe operation, be sure you are fa- miliar with your vehicle and its equip- ment. WARNING All passengers must be properly bel- ted whenever the vehicle is moving. Refer to Seat belts on page 4-18 for more information on their proper use. WARNING Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, espe- cially children, before putting a vehi- cle into D (Drive) or R (Reverse) . WARNING n Driving under the influence of alcohol or drugs Drinking and driving is dangerous. Drunk driving is the number one con- tributor to the highway death toll each year. Even a small amount of alcohol will affect your reflexes, per- ceptions and judgement. Driving (Continued) 7-04 (Continued) while under the influence of drugs is as dangerous or more dangerous than driving drunk. You are much more likely to have a serious accident if you drink or take drugs and drive. If you are drinking or taking drugs, don't drive. Do not ride with a driver who has been drinking or taking drugs. Choose a designated driver or call a cab. WARNING · When you intend to park or stop the vehicle with the engine on, be careful not to depress the acceler- ator pedal for a long period of time. It may overheat the engine or exhaust system and cause fire. (Continued) (Continued) · When you make a sudden stop or turn the steering wheel rapidly, loose objects may drop on the floor and it could interfere with the operation of the foot pedals, possibly causing an accident. Keep all things in the vehicle safely stor- ed. · If you do not focus on driving, it may cause an accident. Be careful when operating what may disturb driving such as audio or heater. It is the responsibility of the driver to always drive safely. 7 7-05 Driving your vehicle Driving your vehicle ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON Illuminated engine start/stop button Whenever the front door is opened, the engine start/stop button will illuminate for your convenience. The light will go off after about 30 seconds when the door is closed. It will also go off imme- diately when the engine start/stop but- ton is ON position. Engine start/stop button position OFF To turn off the hybrid sys- tem (START/RUN position) or vehicle power (ON posi- tion), press the engine /PUJMMVNJOBUFE start/stop button with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. When you press the engine start/stop button without the shift lever in the P (Park) position, the engine start/stop button will not change to the OFF posi- tion but to the ACC position. Vehicles equipped with anti-theft steering column lock The steering wheel locks when the en- gine start/stop button is in the OFF po- sition to protect you against theft. It locks when the door is opened. If the steering wheel is not locked prop- erly when you open the driver's door, the warning chime will sound. Try lock- ing the steering wheel again. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that the system be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. In addition, if the engine start/stop but- ton is in the OFF position after the driv- er's door is opened, the steering wheel will not lock and the warning chime will sound. In such a situation, close the door. Then the steering wheel will lock and the warning chime will stop. NOTICE If the steering wheel doesn't unlock properly, the engine start/stop but- ton will not work. Press the engine start/stop button while turning the steering wheel right and left to re- lease the tension. CAUTION You are able to turn off the hybrid system (START/RUN) or vehicle pow- er (ON), only when the vehicle is not in motion. In an emergency situation while the vehicle is in motion, you are able to turn the hybrid system off and to the ACC position by press- ing the engine start/stop button for (Continued) 7-06 Driving your vehicle (Continued) The warning lights can be checked be- fore the hybrid system is started. Do NOTICE more than 2 seconds or 3 times suc- cessively within 3 seconds. If the ve- not leave the hybrid system start/stop button in the ON position for a long If you leave the engine start/stop hicle is still moving, you can restart time. The battery may discharge, be- button in the ACC or ON position for the hybrid system without depress- cause the engine is not running. a long time, the battery will dis- ing the brake pedal by pressing the START/RUN charge. engine start/stop button with the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position. To start the hybrid system, depress the brake pedal and ACC (Accessory) Press the engine start/stop button while it is in the OFF position without depressing the brake pedal. "NCFS The steering wheel unlocks (if equipped press the engine start/stop button with the shift lever /PUJMMVNJOBUFE in the P (Park) or the N (Neutral) position. For your safety, start the hybrid system with the shift lever in the P (Park) position. NOTICE WARNING · Never press the engine start/stop button while the vehicle is in mo- tion. This would result in loss of di- rectional control and braking func- tion, which could cause an acci- dent. 7 with anti-theft steering column lock) · The anti-theft steering column and electrical accessories are opera- tional. If the engine start/stop button is in the ACC position for more than 1 hour, the button is turned off automatically to prevent battery discharge. ON Press the engine start/stop button while it is in the ACC If you press the engine start/stop button without depressing the brake pedal for automatic transaxle vehi- cles, the hybrid system will not start and the engine start/stop button changes as follows: OFF ACC ON OFF or ACC lock (if equipped) is not a substi- tute for the parking brake. Before leaving the driver's seat, always make sure the shift lever is engag- ed in P (Park), set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehi- cle movement may occur if these precautions are not taken. position without depressing (Continued) the brake pedal. 3FEEJTIPSBOHF 7-07 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Never reach for the engine start/ stop button or any other controls through the steering wheel while the vehicle is in motion. The pres- ence of your hand or arm in the area could cause loss of vehicle control, an accident and serious bodily injury or death. · Do not place any movable objects around the driver's seat as they may move while driving, interfere with the driver and lead to an acci- dent. Starting the hybrid system WARNING · Always wear appropriate shoes when operating your vehicle. Un- suitable shoes, such as high heels, ski boots, sandals, flip-flops, etc., may interfere with your ability to use the brake and accelerator ped- als. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not start the vehicle with the accelerator pedal depressed. The vehicle can move and lead to an accident. NOTICE · The hybrid system will start by pressing the Engine Start/Stop button, only when the smart key is in the vehicle. · Even when the smart key is in the vehicle, and when it is far away from the driver, the hybrid system may not start. (Continued) (Continued) · When the Engine Start/Stop but- ton is in the ACC or ON position, any door is open, the system checks for the smart key. When the smart key is not in the vehicle, the " " indicator will blink and the warning "Key not in vehicle" will come on. When all doors are closed, the chime will also sound for about 5 seconds. Keep the smart key in the vehicle when in the ACC position or if the hybrid system is ON. 1. Always carry the smart key with you. 2. Make sure the parking brake is ap- plied. 3. Make sure the shift lever is in P (Park). 4. Depress the brake pedal. 5. Press the Engine Start/Stop button. If the hybrid system starts, the " " indicator will come on. 7-08 Driving your vehicle NOTICE · Do not wait for the engine to warm up while the vehicle remains stationary. Start driving at moderate engine speeds. (Steep accelerating and decelerating should be avoided.) · Always start the vehicle with your foot on the brake pedal. Do not depress the accelerator while starting the vehicle. Do not race the engine while warming it up. · If ambient temperature is low, the " " indicator may remain illumi- nated longer than the normal amount of time. NOTICE To prevent damage to the vehicle: (Continued) (Continued) · If the " " indicator turns off while you are in motion, do not at- tempt to move the shift lever to the P (Park) position. If traffic and road conditions per- mit, you may put the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position while the vehicle is still moving and press the Engine Start/Stop button in an attempt to restart the hybrid sys- tem. · Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the hybrid system. NOTICE · If the battery is weak or the smart key does not work correctly, you can start the hybrid system by pressing the engine start/stop button with the smart key. The side with the lock button should be contacted directly. When you press the engine start/ stop button directly with the smart key, the smart key should contact the button at a right an- gle. · When the stop lamp fuse is blown, you cannot start the hybrid sys- 7 tem normally. Replace the fuse with a new one. If it is not possible, you can start the hybrid system by pressing the engine start/stop button for 10 seconds while it is in the ACC posi- tion. The engine can start without depressing the brake pedal. But for your safety always depress the brake pedal before starting the engine. 7-09 Driving your vehicle CAUTION Do not press the engine start/stop button for more than 10 seconds ex- cept when the stop lamp fuse is blown. 7-10 Driving your vehicle AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE %FQSFTTUIFCSBLFQFEBMBOEUIFMPDLSFMFBTFCVUUPOXIFOTIJGUJOH 1SFTTUIFMPDLSFMFBTFCVUUPOXIFOTIJGUJOH 5IFTIJGUMFWFSDBOCFTIJGUFEGSFFMZ 0+' Automatic transaxle operation The automatic transaxle has 6 forward speeds and one reverse speed. The in- dividual speeds are selected automati- cally, depending on the position of the shift lever. NOTICE The first few shifts on a new vehicle, if the battery has been disconnec- ted, may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and the shift- ing sequence will adjust after shifts 7 are cycled a few times by the TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or PCM (Power train Control Module). For smooth operation, depress the brake pedal when shifting from N (Neu- tral) to a forward or reverse gear. WARNING n Automatic transaxle (Continued) 7-11 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Always check the surrounding areas near your vehicle for people, especially children, before shifting a vehicle into D (Drive) or R (Re- verse). · Before leaving the driver's seat, al- ways make sure the shift lever is in the P (Park) position; then set the parking brake fully and shut the engine off. Unexpected and sudden vehicle movement can oc- cur if these precautions are not followed in the order identified. · Do not use the engine brake (shift- ing from a high gear to lower gear) rapidly on slippery roads. The vehicle may slip causing an ac- cident. CAUTION · To avoid damage to your trans- axle, do not accelerate the engine in R (Reverse) or any forward gear position with the brakes on. (Continued) 7-12 (Continued) · When stopped on an uphill grades, do not hold the vehicle stationary with engine power. Use the brake pedal or the parking brake. · Do not shift from N (Neutral) or P (Park) into D (Drive), or R (Reverse) when the engine is above idle speed. Transaxle ranges The indicator lights in the instrument cluster displays the shift lever position when the engine start/stop button switch is in the ON position. P (Park) Always come to a complete stop before shifting into P (Park). This position locks the transaxle and prevents the front wheels from rotating. To shift from P (Park), you must de- press firmly on the brake pedal and make sure your foot is off the acceler- ator pedal. If you have done all of the above and still cannot shift the lever out of P (Park), see Shift-lock override on page 7-14. The shift lever must be in P (Park) be- fore turning the hybrid system off. WARNING · Shifting into P (Park) while the ve- hicle is in motion will cause the drive wheels to lock which will cause you to lose control of the vehicle. · Do not use the P (Park) position in place of the parking brake. Always make sure the shift lever is latch- ed in the P (Park) position and set the parking brake fully. · Never leave a child unattended in a vehicle. CAUTION The transaxle may be damaged if you shift into P (Park) while the ve- hicle is in motion. R (Reverse) Use this position to drive the vehicle backward. Driving your vehicle CAUTION Always come to a complete stop be- fore shifting into or out of R (Re- verse); you may damage the trans- axle if you shift into R (Reverse) while the vehicle is in motion, except as explained in Rocking the vehicle on page 7-99. For extra power when passing another vehicle or climbing grades, depress the accelerator pedal fully (more than 82%) until the kick down mechanism (if equipped) works with a clicking noise, at which time the transaxle will auto- matically downshift to the next lower gear. NOTICE N (Neutral) The wheels and transaxle are not en- gaged. The vehicle will roll freely even on the slightest incline unless the park- ing brake or service brakes are applied. WARNING Do not drive with the shift lever in N (Neutral). The engine brake will not work and lead to an accident. · Always come to a complete stop before shifting into D (Drive). · A clicking noise heard from the kick down mechanism by depress- ing the accelerator pedal fully is a normal condition. 0+'- Manual mode Whether the vehicle is stationary or in 7 motion, manual mode is selected by pushing the shift lever from the D (Drive) position into the manual gate. To return to D (Drive) range operation, push the shift lever back into the main gate. In manual mode, moving the shift lever backwards and forwards will allow you to make gearshifts rapidly. D (Drive) This is the normal forward driving posi- tion. The transaxle will automatically shift through a 6-gear sequence, pro- viding the best fuel economy and pow- er. Up (+): Down (-): Push the lever forward once to shift up one gear. Pull the lever backwards once to shift down one gear. 7-13 Driving your vehicle NOTICE · In manual mode, the driver must execute upshifts in accordance with road conditions, taking care to keep the engine speed below the red zone. · In manual mode, only the 6 for- ward gears can be selected. To re- verse or park the vehicle, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) or P (Park) position as required. · In manual mode, downshifts are made automatically when the ve- hicle slows down. When the vehicle stops, 1st gear is automatically selected. · In manual mode, when the engine rpm approaches the red zone shift points are varied to upshift auto- matically. · To maintain the required levels of vehicle performance and safety, the system may not execute cer- tain gearshifts when the shift lev- er is operated. (Continued) (Continued) · When driving on a slippery road, push the shift lever forward into the + (up) position. This causes the transaxle to shift into the 2nd gear which is better for appropri- ate driving on a slippery road. Push the shift lever to the (down) side to shift back to the 1st gear. Shift lock system For your safety, the automatic trans- axle has a shift lock system which pre- vents shifting the transaxle from P (Park) into R (Reverse) unless the brake pedal is depressed. To shift the transaxle from P (Park) in- to R (Reverse): 1. Depress and hold the brake pedal. 2. Start the hybrid system or turn the ignition switch to the ON position. 3. Move the shift lever. If the brake pedal is repeatedly de- pressed and released with the shift lev- er in the P (Park) position, a chattering noise & vibration near the shift lever may be heard. This is a normal condi- tion. WARNING Always fully depress the brake pedal before and while shifting out of the P (Park) position into another posi- tion to avoid inadvertent motion of the vehicle which could injure per- sons in or around the vehicle. 0+'-# 7-14 Driving your vehicle Shift-lock override If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position into R (Reverse) position with the brake pedal de- pressed, continue depressing the brake, then do the following: 1. Place the engine start/stop button switch in the LOCK/OFF position. 2. Apply the parking brake. 3. Carefully remove the cap (1) cover- ing the shift-lock release access hole. 4. Insert a tool (e.g. flathead screw- driver) into the access hole and press down on the tool. 5. Move the shift lever. 6. Remove the tool from the shiftlock override access hole then in- stall the cap. 7. We recommend that the system be inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. Good driving practices · Never move the shift lever from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to any other po- sition with the accelerator pedal de- pressed. · Never move the shift lever into P (Park) when the vehicle is in motion. · Be sure the vehicle is completely stopped before you attempt to shift into R (Reverse) or D (Drive). · Never take the vehicle out of gear and coast down a hill. This may be extremely hazardous. Always leave the vehicle in gear when moving. · Do not "ride" the brakes. This can cause them to overheat and malfunc- tion. Instead, when you are driving down a long hill, slow down and shift to a lower gear. When you do this, engine braking will help slow down the vehicle. · Slow down before shifting to a lower gear. Otherwise, the lower gear may not be engaged. · Always use the parking brake. Do not depend on placing the transaxle in P (Park) to keep the vehicle from mov- ing. · Exercise extreme caution when driv- ing on a slippery surface. Be especial- ly careful when braking, accelerating or shifting gears. On a slippery sur- face, an abrupt change in vehicle speed can cause the drive wheels to lose traction and the vehicle to go out of control. · Optimum vehicle performance and economy is obtained by smoothly de- pressing and releasing the accelera- tor pedal. WARNING 7 · Always buckle-up! In a collision, an unbelted occupant is significantly more likely to be seriously injured or killed than a properly belted oc- cupant. · Avoid high speeds when cornering or turning. · Do not make quick steering wheel movements, such as sharp lane changes or fast, sharp turns. · The risk of rollover is greatly in- creased if you lose control of your vehicle at highway speeds. (Continued) 7-15 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Loss of control often occurs if two or more wheels drop off the road- way and the driver oversteers to reenter the roadway. · In the event your vehicle leaves the roadway, do not steer sharply. Instead, slow down before pulling back into the travel lanes. · Never exceed posted speed limits. WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the ve- hicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move for- ward of backward as it becomes un- stuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. Moving up a steep grade from a standing start To move up a steep grade from a standing start, depress the brake pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive). Select the appropriate gear depending on load weight and steepness of the grade, and release the parking brake. Depress the accelerator gradually while releasing the brake pedal. When accelerating from a stop on a steep hill, the vehicle may have a ten- dency to roll backwards. Shifting the shift lever into 2 (Second Gear) will help prevent the vehicle from rolling back- wards. 7-16 Driving your vehicle BRAKE SYSTEM Power brakes Your vehicle has power-assisted brakes that adjust automatically through nor- mal usage. If the hybrid system is not on or is turned off while driving, the power as- sist for the brakes will not work. You can still stop your vehicle by applying greater force to the brake pedal than typical. The stopping distance, however, will be longer than with power brakes. When the hybrid system is not on, the reserve brake power is partially deple- ted each time the brake pedal is ap- plied. Do not pump the brake pedal when the power assist has been inter- rupted. Pump the brake pedal only when nec- essary to maintain steering control on slippery surfaces. WARNING n Brakes (Continued) (Continued) · Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake pedal. This will create abnormal high brake tempera- tures, excessive brake lining and pad wear, and increased stopping distances. · When descending a long or steep hill, shift to a lower gear and avoid continuous application of the brakes. Continuous brake applica- tion will cause the brakes to over- heat and could result in a tempo- rary loss of braking performance. · Wet brakes may impair the vehi- cle's ability to safely slow down; the vehicle may also pull to one side when the brakes are applied. Applying the brakes lightly will in- dicate whether they have been af- fected in this way. Always test your brakes in this fashion after driving through deep water. To dry the brakes, apply them lightly while maintaining a safe forward speed until brake performance returns to normal. (Continued) (Continued) · Always confirm the position of the brake and accelerator pedal before driving. If you don't check the posi- tion of the accelerator and brake pedal before driving, you may de- press the accelerator instead of the brake pedal. It may cause a se- rious accident. NOTICE Do not depress the brake pedal con- tinuously without the " " indicator ON. The battery may be discharged. 7 Disc brakes wear indicator When your brake pads are worn and new pads are required, you will hear a high-pitched warning sound from your front brakes or rear brakes (if equip- ped). You may hear this sound come and go or it may occur whenever you depress the brake pedal. 7-17 Driving your vehicle Please remember that some driving conditions or climates may cause a brake squeal when you first apply (or lightly apply) the brakes. This is normal and does not indicate a problem with your brakes. CAUTION · To avoid costly brake repairs, do not continue to drive with worn brake pads. · Always replace the front or rear brake pads as pairs. WARNING n Brake wear This brake wear warning sound means your vehicle needs service. If you ignore this audible warning, you will eventually lose braking perform- ance, which could lead to a serious accident. Foot parking brake Applying the parking brake 0:', To engage the parking brake, first apply the foot brake and then depress the parking brake pedal down as far as possible. CAUTION · Driving with the parking brake ap- plied will cause excessive brake pad (or lining) and brake rotor wear. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and make endanger driving safety. Releasing the parking brake To release the parking brake, depress the parking brake pedal a second time while applying the foot brake. The ped- al will automatically extend to the fully released position. 7-18 Driving your vehicle WARNING · Whenever leaving the vehicle or parking, always come to a com- plete stop and continue to depress the brake pedal. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position, then apply the parking brake, and place the Engine Start/Stop button in the OFF position. Vehicles with the parking brake not fully engaged are at risk for moving inadvertently and causing injury to yourself or others. · Never allow anyone who is unfa- miliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur. · All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedes- trians. If at all possible, cease driving the vehi- cle immediately. If that is not possible, use extreme caution while operating the vehicle and only continue to drive the vehicle until you can reach a safe location or repair shop. Electronic parking brake (EPB) (if equipped) Applying the parking brake 8,@5' Check the brake warning light by press- ing engine start/stop button switch ON (do not start the hybrid system). This 7 light will be illuminated when the park- ing brake is applied with the engine start/stop button switch in the START or ON position. Before driving, be sure the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off. 0+'- If the brake warning light remains on after the parking brake is released To apply the EPB (Electronic Parking while the hybrid system is on, there Brake): may be a malfunction in the brake sys- tem. Immediate attention is necessary. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Pull up the EPB switch. Make sure the warning light comes on. 7-19 Driving your vehicle Also, the EPB is applied automatically if the Auto Hold button is on when the engine is turned off. NOTICE On a steep incline or when pulling a trailer if the vehicle does not stand still, do as follows: 1. Apply the EPB. 2. Pull up the EPB switch for more than 3 seconds. CAUTION Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. It could damage the vehicle system and en- danger driving safety. Releasing the parking brake 0+' To release the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake), press the EPB switch in the fol- lowing condition: · Have the engine start/stop button in the ON position. · Depress the brake pedal. Make sure the brake warning light goes off. To release EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) automatically: · Shift lever in P (Park) With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of P (Park) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). · Shift lever in N (Neutral) With the engine running depress the brake pedal and shift out of N (Neu- tral) to R (Reverse) or D (Drive). 1. Start the engine. 2. Fasten the driver's seat belt. 3. Close the driver's door, engine hood and trunk. 4. Depress the accelerator pedal while the shift lever is in R (Rear), D (Drive) or manual mode. Make sure the brake warning light goes off. NOTICE · For your safety, you can engage the EPB even though the engine stop/start button is in the OFF po- sition, but you cannot release it. (Continued) 7-20 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · For your safety, depress the brake pedal and release the parking brake manually with the EPB switch when you drive downhill or when backing up the vehicle. CAUTION · If the parking brake warning light is still on even though the EPB has been released, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. · Do not drive your vehicle with the EPB applied. It may cause exces- sive brake pad and brake rotor wear. NOTICE If the driver turns the hybrid system off while Auto Hold is operating, EPB will be automatically applied. Howev- er, if you press the EPB switch with- in one second after the hybrid sys- tem is turned off, the EPB will not be applied. System warning EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) may be automatically applied when: · The EPB is overheated · Requested by other systems · The hybrid system is turned off with the EPB applied 0+'- · If you try to drive off depressing the accelerator pedal with the EPB ap- plied, but doesn't release automati- cally, a warning will sound and a mes- sage will appear. · If the driver's seat belt is not fas- tened and the engine hood or trunk is opened, a warning will sound and a message will appear. · If there is a problem with the vehicle, a warning may sound and a message may appear. If the above situation occurs, depress the brake pedal and release EPB by pressing the EPB switch. 7 WARNING · To prevent unintentional move- ment when stopped and leaving the vehicle, do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. Set the parking brake and make sure the shift lever is securely positioned in P (Park). (Continued) 7-21 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Never allow anyone who is unfa- miliar with the vehicle to touch the parking brake. If the parking brake is released unintentionally, serious injury may occur. · All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the car which can in- jure occupants or pedestrians. System warning 5ZQF" CAUTION Depress the brake pedal when the above message appears for the Auto Hold and EPB may not activate. CAUTION · A click sound may be heard while operating or releasing the EPB, but these conditions are normal and indicate that the EPB is function- ing properly. · When leaving your keys with a parking lot attendant or valet, make sure to inform him/her how to operate the EPB. · The EPB may malfunction if you drive with the EPB applied. · When you automatically release EPB by depressing the accelerator pedal, depress it slowly. 5ZQF# 0+'- 0+'- When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear. 7-22 Driving your vehicle System warning 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'0+'- If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is activated because of ESC (Electronic Stability Control) signal, a warning will sound and a message will appear. EPB malfunction indicator (if equipped) If the EPB malfunction indicator re- mains on, comes on while driving, or does not come on when the ignition switch or the engine start/stop button is changed to the ON position, this indi- cates that the EPB may have malfunc- tioned. If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The EPB malfunction indicator may illu- minate when the ESC indicator comes on to indicate that the ESC is not work- ing properly, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the EPB. CAUTION 7 0+' This warning light illuminates if the en- gine start/stop button is changed to the ON position and goes off in approxi- mately 3 seconds if the system is oper- ation normally. · The EPB warning light may illumi- nate if the EPB switch operates abnormally. Shut the engine off and turn it on again after a few minutes. The warning light will go off and the EPB switch will oper- ate normally. However, if the EPB warning light is still on, we recom- mend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. (Continued) 7-23 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · If the parking brake warning light does not illuminate or blinks even though the EPB switch was pulled up, the EPB is not applied. · If the parking brake warning light blinks when the EPB warning light is on, press the switch, then pull it up. Once more press it back to its original position and pull it back up. If the EPB warning does not go off, we recommend that the sys- tem be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. Emergency braking If there is a problem with the brake pedal while driving, emergency braking is possible by pulling up and holding the EPB switch. Braking is possible only while you are holding the EPB switch. WARNING Do not operate the parking brake while the vehicle is moving except in an emergency situation. NOTICE During emergency braking by the EPB, the parking brake warning light will illuminate to indicate that the system is operating. CAUTION If you continuously notice a noise or burning smell when the EPB is used for emergency braking, we recom- mend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. When the EPB (Electronic Parking Brake) does not release If the EPB does not release normally, we recommend that you contact an au- thorized Kia dealer by loading the vehi- cle on a flatbed tow truck and have the system checked. AUTO HOLD (if equipped) The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle in a standstill even though the brake ped- al is not depressed after the driver brings the vehicle to a complete stop by depressing the brake pedal. Set up 0+'- 1. With the driver's door, engine hood closed, fasten the driver's seat belt or depress the brake pedal and then press the Auto Hold button. The white AUTO HOLD indicator will come on and the system will be in the standby position. 7-24 Driving your vehicle 0+'- WARNING When driving off from Auto Hold by depressing the accelerator pedal, al- ways check the surrounding area near your vehicle. Slowly depress the accelerator pedal for a smooth launch. Cancel To cancel the Auto Hold operation when the vehicle is at a standstill, press the Auto Hold switch while depressing the brake pedal. NOTICE · The Auto Hold does not operate when: - The driver's seat belt is unfas- tened and driver's door is opened 2. When you stop the vehicle com- pletely by depressing the brake pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator changes from white to green. - The engine hood is opened - The shift lever is in P (Park) or R (Reverse) 7 3. The vehicle will remain stationary even if you release the brake pedal. - The EPB is applied · For your safety, the Auto Hold au- 4. If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be released. tomatically switches to EPB in such cases: Leaving - The driver's seat belt is unfas- tened and driver's door is If you press the accelerator pedal with the shift lever in D (Drive) or manual mode, the Auto Hold will be released automatically and the vehicle will start to move. The indicator changes from green to white. 0+'- To cancel the Auto Hold operation, press the Auto Hold switch. The AUTO HOLD indicator will go out. opened - The engine hood is opened - The vehicle is in a standstill for more than 10 minutes (Continued) 7-25 Driving your vehicle (Continued) - The vehicle is standing on a steep slope - The vehicle moved several times In these cases, the brake warning light comes on, the AUTO HOLD in- dicator changes from green to white, and a warning sounds and a message will appear to inform you that EPB has been automatically engaged. Before driving off again, press foot brake pedal, check the surrounding area near your vehicle and release parking brake manual- ly with the EPB switch. · If the AUTO HOLD indicator lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is not working properly. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. · While operating Auto Hold, you may hear mechanical noise. How- ever, it is normal operation noise. WARNING · Press the accelerator pedal slowly when you start the vehicle. · For your safety, cancel the Auto Hold when you drive downhill or back up the vehicle or park the ve- hicle. Warning messages Parking brake automatically locked 5ZQF" CAUTION If there is a malfunction with the driver's door, engine hood open de- tection system, the Auto Hold may not work properly. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. 5ZQF# 0+'- 0+'- When the EPB is applied from Auto Hold, a warning will sound and a mes- sage will appear. 7-26 Driving your vehicle AUTO HOLD deactivating. Press brake pedal 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'- NOTICE When this message is displayed, the Auto Hold and EPB may not operate. For your safety, depress the brake pedal. Press brake pedal to deactivate AUTO HOLD 5ZQF" If you did not apply the brake pedal when you release the Auto Hold by pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch, a warning will sound and a message will appear. AUTO HOLD conditions not met. Close door, hood, and fasten seatbelt 7 0+'- When the conversion from Auto Hold to EPB is not working properly a warning will sound and a message will appear. 5ZQF# 0+'0+'- 0+'- When you press the [AUTO HOLD] switch, if the driver's door, engine hood are not closed or the driver's seat belt is unfastened, a warning will sound and a message will appear on the LCD dis- play. At this moment, press the [AUTO HOLD] button after closing the driver's door, engine hood and fastening the seat belt. 7-27 Driving your vehicle Anti-lock brake system (ABS) WARNING ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci- dents due to improper or dangerous driving maneuvers. Even though ve- hicle control is improved during emergency braking, always maintain a safe distance between you and ob- jects ahead. Vehicle speeds should always be reduced during extreme road conditions. The braking distance for vehicle equipped with an anti-lock braking system (or Electronic Stability Con- trol) may be longer than for those without it in the following road con- ditions. During these conditions the vehicle should be driven at reduced speeds: · Rough, gravel or snow-covered roads. · With tire chains installed. · On roads where the road surface is pitted or has different surface height. (Continued) (Continued) The safety features of an ABS (or ESC) equipped vehicle should not be tested by high speed driving or cor- nering. This could endanger the safety of yourself or others. The ABS continuously senses the speed of the wheels. If the wheels are going to lock, the ABS system repeatedly modulates the hydraulic brake pressure to the wheels. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik'' sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen- sation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ABS is active. In order to obtain the maximum benefit from your ABS in an emergency situa- tion, do not attempt to modulate your brake pressure and do not try to pump your brakes. Press your brake pedal as hard as possible or as hard as the sit- uation warrants and allow the ABS to control the force being delivered to the brakes. NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehi- cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are nor- mal and indicate that the anti-lock brake system is functioning proper- ly. · Even with the anti-lock brake sys- tem, your vehicle still requires suffi- cient stopping distance. Always main- tain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. · Always slow down when cornering. The anti-lock brake system cannot prevent accidents resulting from ex- cessive speeds. · On loose or uneven road surfaces, op- eration of the anti-lock brake system may result in a longer stopping dis- tance than for vehicles equipped with a conventional brake system. 7-28 Driving your vehicle 8 CAUTION · If the ABS warning light is on and stays on, you may have a problem with the ABS. In this case, howev- er, your regular brakes will work normally. (Continued) (Continued) · The ABS warning light will stay on for approximately 3 seconds after the engine start/stop button switch is ON. During that time, the ABS will go through self-diagnosis and the light will go off if every- thing is normal. If the light stays on, you may have a problem with your ABS. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION · When you drive on a road having poor traction, such as an icy road, and operate your brakes continu- ously, the ABS will be active con- tinuously and the ABS warning light may illuminate. Pull your ve- hicle over to a safe place and stop the engine. · Restart the engine. If the ABS warning light is off, then your ABS system is normal. Otherwise, you may have a problem with the ABS. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. NOTICE When you jump start your vehicle because of a drained battery, the engine may not run as smoothly and the ABS warning light may turn on at the same time. This happens be- cause of the low battery voltage. It does not mean your ABS is malfunc- tioning. · Do not pump your brakes! · Have the battery recharged before driving the vehicle. 7 7-29 Driving your vehicle Electronic stability control (ESC) (if equipped) 0+' The electronic stability control (ESC) system is designed to stabilize the ve- hicle during cornering maneuvers. ESC checks where you are steering and where the vehicle is actually going. ESC applies the brakes at individual wheels and intervenes with engine manage- ment system to stabilize the vehicle. WARNING Never drive too fast for the road conditions or too quickly when cor- nering. Electronic stability control (ESC) will not prevent accidents. Ex- cessive speed in turns, abrupt ma- neuvers and hydroplaning on wet surfaces can still result in serious ac- cidents. Only a safe and attentive driver can prevent accidents by avoiding maneuvers that cause the vehicle to lose traction. Even with ESC installed, always follow all the normal precautions for driving - in- cluding driving at safe speed for the conditions. The electronic stability control (ESC) system is an electronic system de- signed to help the driver maintain vehi- cle control under adverse conditions. It is not a substitute for safe driving practices. Factors including speed, road conditions and driver steering input can all affect whether ESC will be effective in preventing a loss of control. It is still your responsibility to drive and corner at reasonable speed and to leave a suf- ficient margin of safety. When you apply your brakes under conditions which may lock the wheels, you may hear a tik-tik'' sound from the brakes, or feel a corresponding sen- sation in the brake pedal. This is normal and it means your ESC is active. NOTICE A click sound may be heard in the engine compartment when the vehi- cle begins to move after the engine is started. These conditions are nor- mal and indicate that the electronic stability control (ESC) system is functioning properly. 7-30 Driving your vehicle ESC operation When operating ESC operation off ESC ON condition · When the engine start/stop - button is turned ON, ESC and ESC OFF indicator lights illuminate for approximate- ly 3 seconds, then ESC is turned on. · Press the ESC OFF button for at least half a second after turning the ignition ON to turn ESC off. (ESC OFF indicator will illumi- nate). To turn the ESC on, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF indicator light will go off). · When starting the engine, you may hear a slight tick- ing sound. This is the ESC performing an automatic system self-check and does not indicate a problem. When the ESC is in operation, ESC indicator light blinks. · When the Electronic Stabili- ty Control is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehi- cle. This is only the effect of brake control and indi- cates nothing unusual. ESC OFF state This car has 2 kinds of ESC off states. If the engine stops when ESC is off, ESC remains off. Upon restarting the engine, the ESC will automatically turn on again. · When moving out of the mud or slippery road, the engine rpm (revolution per minute) may not increase even if you press the accel- erator pedal deeply. This is 7 to maintain the stability and traction of the vehicle and does not indicate a problem. 7-31 Driving your vehicle 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'- means the traction control function does not operate. Brake control func- tion only operates. 5ZQF" To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indica- tor light (ESC OFF ) illuminates and ESC OFF warning chime will sound. At this state, the engine control function and brake control function do not op- erate. It means the car stability con- trol function does not operate any more. Indicator light 5ZQF# 0+'- &4$JOEJDBUPSMJHIU &4$0''JOEJDBUPSMJHIU 0+'- · ESC off state 1 To cancel ESC operation, press the ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) shortly (ESC OFF indicator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this state, the engine control function does not operate. It · ESC off state 2 7-32 0+'- When engine start/stop button switch is turned to ON, the indicator light illu- minates, then goes off if the ESC sys- tem is operating normally. Driving your vehicle The ESC indicator light blinks whenever ESC is operating or illuminates when ESC fails to operate. ESC OFF indicator light comes on when the ESC is turned off with the button. CAUTION Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the ESC system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires. WARNING The Electronic Stability Control sys- tem is only a driving aid; use precau- tions for safe driving by slowing down on curved, snowy, or icy roads. Drive slowly and don't attempt to accelerate whenever the ESC indica- tor light is blinking, or when the road surface is slippery. ESC OFF usage When driving · ESC should be turned on for daily driving whenever possible. · To turn ESC off while driving, press the ESC OFF button while driving on a flat road surface. WARNING Never press the ESC OFF button while ESC is operating (ESC indicator light blinks). If ESC is turned off while ESC is op- erating, the vehicle may slip out of control. Vehicle stability management (VSM) (if equipped) This system provides further enhance- ments to vehicle stability and steering responses when a vehicle is driving on a slippery road or a vehicle detected changes in coefficient of friction be- tween right wheels and left wheels when braking. VSM operation When the VSM is in operation, · ESC (Electronic Stability Control) ( ) light will blink. NOTICE · When operating the vehicle on a dynamometer, ensure that the ESC is turned off by pressing the ESC OFF button for more than 3 seconds (ESC OFF light illumina- ted). If the ESC is left on, it may prevent the vehicle speed from in- creasing, and result in false diag- nosis. · The steering wheel may be control- led. 7 When the vehicle stability management is operating properly, you can feel a slight pulsation in the vehicle. This is only the effect of brake control and in- dicates nothing unusual. The VSM does not operate when: · Driving on bank road such as gradient or incline · Turning the ESC off does not af- fect ABS or brake system opera- tion. · Driving rearward · ESC OFF indicator light ( ) remains on the instrument cluster 7-33 Driving your vehicle · EPS (Electronic Power Steering) indi- cator light remains on the instrument cluster VSM operation off If you press the ESC OFF button to turn off the ESC, the VSM will also cancel and the ESC OFF indicator light ( ) illu- minates. To turn on the VSM, press the button again. The ESC OFF indicator light goes out. Malfunction indicator The VSM can be deactivated even if you don't cancel the VSM operation by pressing the ESC OFF button. It indi- cates that a malfunction has been de- tected somewhere in the EPS (Elec- tronic Power Steering) system or VSM system. If the ESC indicator light ( ) or EPS warning light remains on, we rec- ommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. NOTICE · The VSM is designed to function above approximately 22 km/h (13 mph) on curves. (Continued) (Continued) · The VSM is designed to function above approximately 10 km/h (6 mph) when a vehicle is braking on a split-mu road. The split-mu road is made of surfaces which have different friction forces. WARNING · The Vehicle Stability Management system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a supplemen- tary function only. It is the respon- sibility of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. Always hold the steering wheel firmly while driving. · Your vehicle is designed to activate according to the driver's intention, even with the VSM installed. Al- ways follow all the normal precau- tions for driving at safe speed for the conditions including driving in inclement weather and on a slip- pery road. (Continued) (Continued) · Driving with varying tire or wheel sizes may cause the VSM system to malfunction. When replacing tires, make sure they are the same size as your original tires. Hill-start assist control (HAC) (if equipped) A vehicle has the tendency to slip back on a steep hill when it starts to go af- ter stopping. The Hill-start Assist Con- trol (HAC) prevents the vehicle from slipping back by operating the brakes automatically for about 1~2 seconds. The brakes are released when the ac- celerator pedal is depressed or after about 1~2 seconds. WARNING The HAC is activated only for about 1~2 seconds, so when the vehicle is starting off always depress the ac- celerator pedal. 7-34 Driving your vehicle NOTICE · The HAC does not operate when the transaxle shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position. · The HAC activates even though the ESC is off but it does not acti- vate when the ESC has malfunc- tioned. Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) (if equipped) The Emergency Stop Signal system alerts the driver behind by blinking the stop light when the vehicle is braked rapidly and severely. The system is activated when: · The vehicle suddenly stops (vehicle speed is over 55 km/h and the vehicle deceleration at greater than 7 m/s2). · The ABS is activating. When the vehicle speed is under 40 km/h and the ABS deactivates or the sudden stop situation is over, the stop light blinking will stop. Instead, the hazard warning flasher will turn on au- tomatically. The hazard warning flasher will turn off when vehicle speed is over 10 km/h af- ter the vehicle has stopped. Also, it will turn off when the vehicle is driven at low speed for some time. You can turn it off manually by pushing the hazard warning flasher switch. CAUTION The Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) system will not work if the hazard warning flasher is already on. Good braking practices WARNING · Whenever you leave or park your vehicle, always set the parking brake as far as possible and fully engage the vehicle's transaxle into the P (Park) position. If the parking brake is not fully engaged, the ve- hicle may move inadvertently and injure yourself and others. (Continued) (Continued) · All vehicles should always have the parking brake fully engaged when parking to avoid inadvertent movement of the vehicle which can injure occupants or pedes- trians. · Check to be sure the parking brake is not engaged and that the parking brake indicator light is out before driving away. · Driving through water may get the brakes wet. They can also get wet 7 when the vehicle is washed. Wet brakes can be dangerous! Your vehi- cle will not stop as quickly if the brakes are wet. Wet brakes may cause the vehicle to pull to one side. To dry the brakes, apply the brakes lightly until the braking action returns to normal, taking care to keep the ve- hicle under control at all times. If the braking action does not return to normal, stop as soon as it is safe to do so and we recommend that you call an authorized Kia dealer. 7-35 Driving your vehicle · Do not coast down hills with the vehi- cle out of gear. This is extremely haz- ardous. Keep the vehicle in gear at all times, use the brakes to slow down, then shift to a lower gear so that en- gine braking will help you maintain a safe speed. · Do not "ride" the brake pedal. Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving can be dangerous because it can result in the brakes overheating and losing their effectiveness. It also increases the wear of the brake com- ponents. · If a tire goes flat while you are driv- ing, apply the brakes gently and keep the vehicle pointed straight ahead while you slow down. When you are moving slowly enough for it to be safe to do so, pull off the road and stop in a safe place. · If your vehicle is equipped with an Automatic Transaxle / Dual clutch transmission, do not let your vehicle creep forward. To avoid creeping for- ward, keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when the vehicle is stop- ped. · Be cautious when parking on a hill. Firmly engage the parking brake and place the shift lever in P (automatic transaxle) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle). If your vehicle is facing downhill, turn the front wheels into the curb to help keep the vehicle from rolling. If your vehicle is facing uphill, turn the front wheels away from the curb to help keep the vehi- cle from rolling. If there is no curb or if it is required by other conditions to keep the vehicle from rolling, block the wheels. · Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged posi- tion. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk that the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lever in P (Au- tomatic Transaxle / Dual clutch trans- mission) or in first or reverse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake. · Do not hold the vehicle on the up- grade with the accelerator pedal. This can cause the transaxle to overheat. Always use the brake pedal or park- ing brake. 7-36 Driving your vehicle AUTONOMOUS EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (IF EQUIPPED) The AEB system is to reduce or to avoid accident risk. It recognizes the distance from the vehicle ahead or the pedestrian through the sensors (i.e. ra- dar and camera), and, if necessary, warns the driver of accident risk with the warning message or the warning alarms. (Continued) · Always drive cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occurring. AEB does not stop the vehicle completely and does not avoid collisions. WARNING Take the following precautions when using the Autonomous Emergency Braking (AEB): · This system is only a supplemen- tal system and it is not intended to, nor does it replace the need for extreme care and attention of the driver. The sensing range and ob- jects detectable by the sensors are limited. Pay attention to the road conditions at all times. · NEVER drive too fast in accordance with the road conditions or while cornering. (Continued) System setting and activation System setting 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'-# 7 0+'-# 7-37 Driving your vehicle The driver can activate the AEB by placing the engine start/stop button switch to the ON position and by se- lecting 'User Settings', 'Driving Assist', and 'Autonomous Braking System'. The AEB deactivates, when the driver can- cels the system setting. The warning light illuminates on the LCD display, when you cancel the AEB system. The driver can monitor the AEB ON/OFF status on the LCD display. When the warning light remains ON with the AEB activated, we recom- mend you to have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'-# 0+'-# 7-38 The driver can select the initial warning activation time in the User Settings in the instrument cluster LCD display. The options for the initial Forward Collision Warning include the following: Driving your vehicle EARLY - When this condition is se- lected, the initial Forward Prerequisite for activation The AEB gets ready to be activated, (Continued) Collision Warning is activa- ted earlier than normal. This setting maximizes the amount of distance when the AEB is selected on the LCD display, and when the following prereq- uisites are satisfied. - The ESC is activated. · Set or cancel AEB with controlling switches on steering wheel after stopping the vehicle in a safe place for your safety. NORMAL - between the vehicle or pedestrian ahead before the initial warning occurs. When this condition is se- lected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activa- ted normally. This setting allows for a nominal - The driving speed is over 10 km/h. (However, AEB is activated within certain driving speed.) - When recognizing the vehicle or the pedestrian in front. (However, AEB does not activate according to condi- tions in front and vehicle systems, but it notices only certain warnings.) AEB warning message and system control The AEB produces warning messages and warning alarms in accordance with the collision risk levels of followings like vehicle's sudden braking in front or lack of vehicle to vehicle distance or collision amount of distance be- tween the vehicle or pe- destrian ahead before the WARNING 7 to pedestrians. Also, it controls the brakes in accordance with the collision risk levels. LATE - initial warning occurs. When this condition is se- lected, the initial Forward Collision Warning is activa- · The AEB automatically activates upon placing the ignition switch to the ON position. The driver can de- activate the AEB by canceling the ted later than normal. system setting on the LCD display. This setting reduces the amount of distance be- · The AEB automatically deactivates upon canceling the ESC. When the tween the vehicle or pe- ESC is canceled, the AEB cannot be destrian ahead before the activated on the LCD display. initial warning occurs. (Continued) 7-39 Driving your vehicle Forward warning (1st warning) Collision warning (2nd warning) Emergency braking (3rd warning) 0+'- The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning alarms. 0+'- 0+'- · The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning alarms. · The AEB controls the brakes within certain limit to release shock from the collision. · The warning message appears on the LCD display with the warning alarms. · The AEB controls the brakes within certain limit to release shock from the collision. The AEB controls the maximum brakes just before the collision. Brake operation · In an urgent situation, the braking system enters into the ready status for prompt reaction against the driv- er's depressing the brake pedal. 7-40 Driving your vehicle · The AEB provides additional braking power for optimum braking perform- ance, when the driver depresses the brake pedal. · The braking control is automatically deactivated, when the driver sharply depresses the brake pedal, or when the driver abruptly operates the steering wheel. · The braking control is automatically canceled, when risk factors disappear. CAUTION The driver should always pay great caution to vehicle operation, even though there is no warning message or warning alarm. WARNING The AEB cannot avoid all collisions. The AEB might not completely stop the vehicle before collision, due to ambient, weather and road condi- tions. The driver has the responsibili- ty to drive safely and control the ve- hicle. WARNING The AEB operates in accordance with the risk levels, such as the distance from the vehicle/passer-by in front, the speed of the vehicle/passer-by in front, and the driver's vehicle op- eration. Sensor to detect the distance from the vehicle in front (front radar) 7 0+')1 The sensor is to maintain a certain dis- tance from the vehicle in front. Howev- er, the smudged sensor lens with for- eign substances, such as snow and rain, adversely affects the sensing perform- ance. It may even temporarily cancel the AEB. Always keep the sensor lens clean. 7-41 Driving your vehicle Warning message and warning light 0+'- When the sensor cover or the sensor lens is smudged with the foreign sub- stances, such as snow or rain, the AEB operation may temporarily stop. In this case, the warning message appears to warn the driver. This is not a malfunction with the AEB. To operate the AEB again, remove the foreign substances. NOTICE · Do not install any accessories, such as license plate molding or sticker, on the sensor area. Nor ar- bitrarily replace the bumper. Those may adversely affect the sensing performance. · Always keep the sensor/bumper area clean. · Use only soft clothes to wash the vehicle. Also, do not spray highly pressurized water on the sensor installed on the bumper. · Be careful not to apply unnecessa- ry force on the frontal sensor area. When the sensor moves out of the correct position due to ex- ternal force, the system may not normally operate even without the warning light or message. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an au- thorized Kia dealer. · Use only the genuine Kia sensor cover. Do not arbitrarily apply paint on the sensor cover. System malfunction 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+'0+'- 7-42 Driving your vehicle · When the AEB is not working proper- ly, the AEB warning light ( ) will illu- minate and the warning message will appear for a few seconds. After the message disappears, the master warning light ( ) will illuminate. In this case, we recommend you to have the vehicle inspected by an author- ized Kia dealer. · The AEB warning message may ap- pear along with the illumination of the ESC warning light. (Continued) · The AEB may unnecessarily pro- duce the warning message and the warning alarms. Also, due to the sensing limitation, the AEB may not produce the warning message and the warning alarm at all. · When there is a malfunction with the AEB, the braking control does not operate upon detecting a colli- sion risk even with other braking systems normally operating. The AEB monitors the driving situations through the radar and the camera sen- sor. Thus, for a situation out of the sensing range, the AEB may not nor- mally operate. The driver should pay great caution in the following situa- tions. The AEB operation may be limi- ted. Recognizing vehicles - The radar or the camera is contami- nated with foreign substances. - It heavily rains or snows. WARNING · The AEB is only a supplemental system for the driver's conven- ience. The driver should hold the responsibility to control the vehicle operation. Do not solely depend on the AEB system. Rather, maintain a safe braking distance, and, if necessary, depress the brake ped- al to lower the driving speed. (Continued) · The AEB operates only for the ve- hicle / pedestrian in front, while driving forward. It does not oper- ate for any animals or vehicles in the opposite direction. · The AEB does not recognize the vehicle, which horizontally drives across the crossroad, or the vehi- cle, which is parked in the horizon- tal direction. - There is interruption by electric waves. 7 - There is severe irregular reflection from the radar. - The vehicle in front has a narrow body. (i.e. motor cycle and bicycle) - The driver's view is unclear due to the backlight, the reflected light, or darkness. Limitation of the system The AEB is an assistant system for a driver in a certain risky driving condition and it does not take every responsibili- ty for all risks from driving condition. - The camera cannot contain the full image of the vehicle in front. 7-43 Driving your vehicle - The vehicle in front is a special vehi- cle, such as a heavily-loaded truck or a trailer. The vehicle in front does not turn ON the rear lights, does not have rear lights, has asymmetric rear lights, or has rear lights out of angle. - The outside brightness is greatly changed, such as entering/exiting the tunnel. - The vehicle driving is unstable. - The radar/camera sensor recognition is limited. 0+' - Driving on a curve The AEB performance decreases while driving on a curve. The AEB may not recognize the vehicle in front even in the same lane. It may unnec- essarily produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm at all. While driving on a curve, pay great caution, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal. 0+' - While driving on a curve, the AEB may recognize the vehicle in front in the next lane. Pay great caution, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal. Or, depress the accelerator pedal to maintain the driving speed. Always, take a look around the vehicle for your safety. 0+' - Driving on a slope The AEB performance decreases while driving upward or downward on a slope, not recognizing the vehicle in front in the same lane. It may unnec- essarily produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm, or it may not produce the warning mes- sage and the warning alarm at all. When the AEB suddenly recognizes the vehicle in front while passing over a slope, you may experience sharp deceleration. Always keep your eyes forward while driving upward or downward on a slope, and, if necessary, depress the brake pedal. 7-44 Driving your vehicle 0+' - Changing lanes Even though the vehicle in the next lane enters into your lane, it may not be recognized by the AEB, until it en- ters the AEB sensing range. Especially when the vehicle in the next lane abruptly enters into your lane, it is more likely not to be recog- nized. Always pay great attention. - Recognizing the vehicle When the vehicle in front has heavy loading extended rearward, or when the vehicle in front has higher ground clearance, it may induce a hazardous situation. Recognizing pedestrians 0+' - The pedestrian is not fully captured by the camera sensor, or the pedes- trian does not walk in the upright po- sition. - The pedestrian moves very fast. When the stopped vehicle in front gets out of the lane, it may not be recognized by your AEB. Always pay great attention. - The pedestrian abruptly appears in front. - The pedestrian wears clothes in the color similar to the background. 7 - The outside is too bright or too dark. - The vehicle drives at night or in the darkness. - There is an item similar to a person's body structure. - The pedestrian is small. - The pedestrian has impaired mobility. - It is difficult to distinguish the pedes- trian from the surroundings. 0+' - The sensor recognition is limited. 7-45 Driving your vehicle - There is a group of pedestrians. WARNING · Cancel the AEB in the User Set- tings on the LCD display, before towing another vehicle. While tow- ing, the brake application may ad- versely affect your vehicle safety. · Pay great caution to the vehicle in front, when it has heavy loading extended rearward, or when it has higher ground clearance. · The sensor only detects pedes- trians, not carts, bicycles, motor- cycles, luggage bags, or strollers. · The AEB does not operate in a cer- tain situation. Thus, never testoperate the AEB against a person or an object. It may cause a severe injury or even death. NOTICE The system may temporarily cancel due to the strong electric waves. 7-46 CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) 5ZQF" This system is designed to function above approximately 30 km/h (20 mph). 5ZQF# 0+' 0+'- 1. Cruise indicator 2. Cruise set indicator The cruise control system allows you to program the vehicle to maintain a con- stant speed without pressing the accel- erator pedal. WARNING · If the cruise control is left on (cruise indicator light is illumina- ted), the cruise control can be switched on accidentally. Keep the cruise control system off when the cruise control is not in use, to avoid inadvertently setting a speed. · Use the cruise control system only when traveling on open highways in good weather. · Do not use the cruise control when it may not be safe to keep the ve- hicle at a constant speed, for in- stance, driving in heavy or varying traffic, or on slippery (rainy, icy or snow covered) or winding roads or over 6% up-hill or down-hill roads. · Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the cruise control system. (Continued) (Continued) · Be careful when driving downhill using the cruise control system, which may increase the vehicle speed. CAUTION During cruise-speed driving of a manual transaxle vehicle, do not shift into neutral without depressing the clutch pedal, since the engine will be over revved. If this happens, depress the clutch pedal or release the cruise control ON-OFF switch. 7 NOTICE · During normal cruise control oper- ation, when the SET switch is acti- vated or reactivated after applying the brakes, the cruise control will energize after approximately 3 seconds. This delay is normal. (Continued) 7-47 Driving your vehicle Driving your vehicle (Continued) · To activate cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the engine start/stop but- ton switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel cruise control is in normal condition. Cruise control switch CRUISE/ : Turns cruise control system on or off. RES+: Resumes or increases cruise con- trol speed. SET-: Sets or decreases cruise control speed. To set cruise control speed: 5ZQF" 1. Press the CRUISE/ button on the steering wheel, to turn the system on. The cruise indicator light will il- luminate. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed, which must be more than approxi- mately 30 km/h (20 mph). NOTICE n Manual transaxle For manual transaxle vehicles, you should depress the brake pedal at least once to set the cruise control after starting the engine. 5ZQF# 0+' 0+'- CANCEL/O: Cancels cruise control oper- ation. 7-48 0+'- Driving your vehicle 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+' On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going downhill. To increase cruise control set speed: 5ZQF" Follow either of these procedures: · Move the lever up (to RES+) and hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate. Re- lease the lever at the speed you want. · Move the lever up (to RES+) and re- lease it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 2 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner. 7 5ZQF# 0+' 0+'- 3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The cruise set indicator light will illumi- nate. Release the accelerator pedal at the same time. The desired speed will automatically be main- tained. 0+'- 7-49 Driving your vehicle To decrease the cruising speed: 5ZQF" 5ZQF# 0+' · Move the lever down (to SET-) and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 2 km/h (1 mph) each time you move the lev- er down (to SET-) in this manner. To cancel cruise control, do one of the following: 5ZQF" To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control op- eration or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator pedal. 5ZQF# 0+' 0+'- Follow either of these procedures: · Move the lever down (to SET-) and hold it. Your vehicle will gradually slow down. Release the lever at the speed you want to maintain. 7-50 0+'- · Depress the brake pedal. · Depress the clutch pedal if equipped with a manual transaxle. Driving your vehicle · Shift into N (Neutral) if equipped with an Automatic Transaxle / Dual clutch transmissione. · Press the CANCEL/O button located on the steering wheel. · Decrease the vehicle speed lower than the memory speed by approxi- mately 20 km/h (12 mph) . · Decrease the vehicle speed to less than approximately 25 km/h (15 mph) . To resume cruising speed at more than approximately 30 km/h (20 mph) 5ZQF" Each of these actions will cancel cruise control operation (the cruise set indica- tor light will go off), but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to resume cruise control operation, move up the lever (to RES+) located on your steering wheel. You will return to your previous- ly preset speed. 5ZQF# 0+' 0+'- If any method other than the CRUISE/ button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the most recent set speed will auto- matically resume when the RES+ switch is pushed. It will not resume, however, if the vehi- cle speed has dropped below approxi- mately 30 km/h (20 mph). To turn cruise control off, do one of the following: · Press the CRUISE/ button (the cruise indicator light will be turned off). 7 · If your vehicle equipped the speed limit system, press the CRUISE/ button twice. (The cruise indicator light will be turned off.) · Turn the engine start/stop button off. Both of these actions cancel cruise con- trol operation. If you want to resume cruise control operation, repeat the steps provided in To set cruise control speed on page 7-48. 7-51 Driving your vehicle SPEED LIMIT CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) You can set the speed limit when you do not want to drive over a specific speed. If you drive over the preset speed limit, the warning system operates (set speed limit will blink and chime will sound) until the vehicle speed returns within the speed limit. 1. Press the cruise switch twice to set speed limit. Once you press it only one time, the cruise control system is ready. NOTICE While speed limit control is in opera- tion, the cruise control system can- not be activated. 0+'-$ To set speed limit: 0+'- The speed limit indicator light will illuminate. 0+'-# 2. Move the lever down (to SET-). 7-52 0+'-# Driving your vehicle 3. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. Move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) and hold it. The speed will increase or decrease by 5 km/h (3 mph) . Move the lever up (to RES+) or down (SET-) and release it immedi- ately. The speed will increase or decrease by 1 km/h. The set speed limit will display on the instrument cluster. 0+'- NOTICE · Depressing the accelerator pedal less than approximately 50%, the vehicle will not speed over the pre- set speed limit but maintain the vehicle speed within the speed lim- it. · A clicking noise heard from the kick down mechanism by depress- ing the accelerator pedal fully is a normal condition. The set speed limit will be displayed. To drive over the preset speed limit you must depress hard on the accelerator pedal (more than approximately 80%) To turn off the speed limit control, do one of the following: 7 until the kick down mechanism works with a clicking noise. Then the set speed limit will blink and chime will sound until you return the vehicle speed within the speed limit. 0+'-# 7-53 Driving your vehicle · Press the cruise switch. · Turn the engine start/stop button off. If you press the cancel O switch once, the set speed limit will cancel, but it will not turn the system off. If you wish to reset the speed limit, move the lever up (to RES+) or down (to SET-) to the de- sired speed. CAUTION The --- indicator will blink if there is a problem with speed limit control system. If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. 7-54 0+'- Driving your vehicle SPEED LIMIT INFORMATION FUNCTION (SLIF) (IF EQUIPPED) 06. The system displays the information of speed limit and no passing restriction to the driver in both the instrument cluster and navigation screen. SLIF de- tects traffic signs with camera system attached on the top of the windscreen. The SLIF also utilizes the navigation in- formation to display the speed limit in- formation. WARNING · Speed Limit Information Function is only an aid and is not always able to correctly display speed lim- its and overtaking restrictions. · The driver always keeps the re- sponsibility not to exceed the maximum allowed speed. · Do not place any accessories, stickers or tint the windshield near the rearview mirror. · The system detects traffic signs and displays speed limit informa- tion by a camera therefore, if traf- fic signs are hard to detect, the system may not work properly. Please refer to Driver's attention on page 7-58. · Do not remove any LKAS parts or apply impact. · Do not place objects on the dash- board that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys- tem may malfunction if the sun- light is reflected. · The system is not available in all countries. SLIF activation/deactivation 0+'- 7 · SLIF Setting method: Cluster User Settings Driving Assist SLIF (Speed Limit Information Function) · The information of speed limit and no passing restriction will appear on the cluster using a symbol if you have ac- tivated SLIF in User Settings of clus- ter. · If SLIF is activated in navigation set- ting, the information is also displayed in navigation screen. 7-55 Driving your vehicle Operation 0+'- · If a traffic sign that is relevant to your vehicle is passed, the system displays the information of the speed limits and no passing restrictions to the driver. · When the driver turns on the ignition, the system displays stored informa- tion of the speed limit before turning off the ignition. · Sometimes different speed limits are displayed for the same road. The in- formation displayed is depending on the situation. Because, traffic signs with additional sign (e.g rainy, ar- row...) are also detected and com- pared with vehicle interior data (e.g wiper operation, turn signal...). · The system can update the speed limit information without visible speed limit signs in the following sit- uations. - When you change your driving di- rection with right or left or U turn- ing. - When vehicle changes roads. (e.g. from highway to country road...) - When you enter or exit into town or village. Display /PSFMJBCMFTQFFEMJNJUJOGPSNBUJPO 86. · If the system doesn't have a reliable speed limit information, the following symbol is displayed in both the in- strument cluster and navigation screen. /PQBTTJOHJOGPSNBUJPO NOTICE If speed limit value has the differ- ence between cluster and naviga- tion, check the speed unit setting in navigation. 86.86. · If the system detects no passing sign, no passing is displayed in both the in- strument cluster and navigation screen. 7-56 &OEPGBTQFFEMJNJU Warning message Driving your vehicle 86.86. · After passing "end of speed limita- tion sign SLIF provides information 0+'- from navigation to inform driver of perhaps afterwards applicable speed limit. 6OMJNJUFETQFFE POMZJO(FSNBOZ 0+'- The message will appear when cam- era's field of view is covered by some objects. The system stops until the field of view is normal. Check the windshield around the cam- era view area. If the system does not work normally even though camera's field of view is cleared, we recommend that the sys- tem be checked by an authorized Kia When SLIF is not working properly, the warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disap- pears, the master warning light will illu- minate. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. The system may not fully operate and provide correct information in the fol- lowing situations. · Traffic signs are positioned on sharp curve. 7 86. dealer. · Poorly positioned traffic sign. (eg. Ro- · For some areas on highways in Ger- many there's no speed limit applica- tated, shaded by any object, dam- aged...) ble. In that case SLIF shows "end of limitation" traffic sign as long as you don't pass another speed limit sign. · Concealed traffic signs by other vehi- cle. 7-57 Driving your vehicle · Broken LED traffic signs. · Poor weather like snow, rain, fog. · Reflected glare around and/or on the traffic sign. · There is insufficient illumination of the traffic signs in the night. · There is bright lights around traffic signs. · There is dirt, ice or frost on the wind- shield in the area of the camera. · When camera field of view is covered by objects such as a sticker, paper, leaf fall. · When driving very close to the vehicle in front of you. · When navigation system has mal- function. · When bus or trucks attached with a speed sticker are passing you. · When you are at a certain location not covered by the navigation sys- tem. · When the navigation system is not updated to the latest map version. Driver's attention The driver must be cautious in the be- low situations for the system may not assist the driver and may not work properly. · Do not stick or attach anything to the windshield in front of the camera as this may reduce effectiveness or cause one more of the systems de- pendent on the camera to stop work- ing. · Keep the windshield in the area be- hind the interior rear view mirror clean. · Do not place reflective materials, such as white paper or a mirror, on the instrument panel. · Do not strike or damage the areas around the camera unit. · Do not touch the camera lens or re- move the screw located on the cam- era unit. · The system does not work in all sit- uations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. · The system assists the driver and does not replace the human eye. · The driver always bears ultimate re- sponsibility for ensuring that the ve- hicle is driven safely and that applica- ble road traffic rules and regulations are followed. 7-58 Driving your vehicle ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) WARNING For your safety, please read the owner's manual before using the ad- vanced smart cruise control system. 1. Cruise indicator 2. Set speed 3. Vehicle-to-vehicle distance The advanced smart cruise control sys- tem allows you to program the vehicle to maintain constant speed and dis- tance detecting the vehicle ahead with- out depressing the accelerator or brake pedal. NOTICE To activate advanced smart cruise control, depress the brake pedal at least once after turning the engine start/stop button switch to the ON position or starting the engine. This is to check if the brake switch which is important part to cancel advanced smart cruise control is in normal condition. WARNING · If the advanced smart cruise con- trol is left on, (cruise indicator in the instrument cluster illuminated) the smart cruise control can be ac- tivated unintentionally. Keep the smart cruise control system off (cruise indicator turn off) when the smart cruise control is not used. · Use the smart cruise control sys- tem only when traveling on open highways in good weather. · Do not use the smart cruise con- trol when it may not be safe to 7 keep the car at a constant speed. For instance: - Highway interchange and toll- gate - Road surrounded by abnormally multiple steel constructions (subway construction, steel tunnel, etc) - Parking lot - Lanes beside guard rail on a road (Continued) 7-59 Driving your vehicle (Continued) - Slippery road with rain, ice, or snow covered - Abrupt curved road - Steep hills - Windy roads - Off roads - Roads under construction - Rumble strip - The sensing ability decreases if the level of front and rear vehi- cle is changed from the factory. · Pay particular attention to the driving conditions whenever using the smart cruise control system. · The advanced smart cruise control system is not a substitute for safe driving. It is the responsibility of the driver to always check the speed and distance of the vehicle ahead. · Be careful when driving downhill using the ASCC. Speed setting To set cruise control speed: 0+' 1. Press the CRUISE button, to turn the system on. The CRUISE indica- tor in the instrument cluster will il- luminate. 2. Accelerate to the desired speed. The advanced smart cruise control speed can be set as follows: · 30 km/h (20 mph) ~ 180 km/h (110 mph): when there is no vehi- cle in front · 0 km/h (0 mph) ~ 180 km/h (110 mph): when there is a vehi- cle in front 0+' 3. Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it at the desired speed. The set speed and vehicle to vehicle dis- tance on the LCD screen will illumi- nate. 4. Release the accelerator pedal. The desired speed will automatical- ly be maintained. If there is a vehicle in front of you, the speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. On a steep grade, the vehicle may slow down or speed up slightly while going uphill or downhill. 7-60 Driving your vehicle To increase cruise control set speed: To decrease the cruise control set speed: To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on: If you want to speed up temporarily when the cruise control is on, depress the accelerator pedal. Increased speed will not interfere with cruise control op- eration or change the set speed. To return to the set speed, take your foot off the accelerator. If you move the lever down (to SET-) at increased speed, the cruising speed will be set again. NOTICE 0+' 0+' 7 Be careful when accelerating tempo- Follow either of these procedures: · Move the lever up (to RES+), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will increase by 10 km/h (5 mph). Release the lev- Follow either of these procedures: · Move the lever down (to SET-), and hold it. Your vehicle set speed will de- crease by 10 km/h (5 mph). Release rarily, because the speed is not con- trolled automatically at this time even if there is a vehicle in front of you. er at the speed you want. the lever at the speed you want. · Move the lever up (to RES+), and re- lease it immediately. The cruising speed will increase by 1.0 km/h (1.0 mph) each time you move the lever up (to RES+) in this manner. · Move the lever down (to SET-), and release it immediately. The cruising speed will decrease by 1.0 km/h (1.0 mph) each time you move the lever down (to SET-) in this manner. · You can set the speed to 180 km/h · You can set the speed to 30 km/h (110 mph). (20 mph). 7-61 Driving your vehicle Advanced smart cruise control will be temporarily canceled when: 0+'- Cancelled manually The advanced smart cruise control is temporarily canceled when the brake pedal is depressed or the CANCEL but- ton is pressed. The speed and vehicle to vehicle distance indicator on the cluster is disappeared and the CRUISE indicator is illuminated continuously. Cancelled automatically · The driver's door is opened. · The shift lever is shifted to N (Neu- tral), R (Reverse) or P (Parking). · The EPB (electronic parking brake) is applied. · The vehicle speed is over 190 km/h (120 mph). · The ESC, ABS or TCS is operating. · The ESC is turned off. · The sensor or the cover is dirty or blocked with foreign matter. · When the vehicle is stopped for over 5 minutes. · The driver starts driving by pushing the lever up (RES +) or down (SET -) or depressing the accelerator pedal approximately 3 seconds after the vehicle is stopped by the advanced smart cruise control system with no other vehicle ahead or a vehicle stop- ped far away in front. · The accelerator pedal is continuously depressed for a long time. · The engine RPM is in dangerous range. · The SCC system has malfunctioned. Each of these actions will cancel the advanced smart cruise control opera- tion. (the set speed and vehicle to vehi- cle distance on the LCD display will go off.) In a condition the advanced smart cruise control is cancelled automatical- ly, the advanced smart cruise control will not resume even though the RES+ or SET- lever is moved. Also, the EPB (electronic parking brake) will be ap- plied when the vehicle is stopped. · When activating the ISG mode. · When activating the AEB (Autono- mous Emergency Braking). CAUTION If the advanced smart cruise control is cancelled by other than the rea- sons mentioned, we recommend have the system checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. 7-62 Driving your vehicle To resume cruise control set speed: NOTICE To reduce the risk of an accident, al- ways check the road conditions when reactivating the advanced smart cruise control using the RES+ lever to ensure the road conditions permit safe use of the cruise con- trol. 0+'- To turn cruise control off: CAUTION If the system is automatically can- celled, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear for a few seconds. You must adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. Always check the road conditions. Do not rely on the warning chime. 0+' If any method other than the CRUISE button was used to cancel cruising speed and the system is still activated, the cruising speed will automatically re- sume when you move the lever up (to RES+). If you move the lever up (to RES+), the speed will resume to the recently set speed. It will not resume if the vehicle speed has dropped below approximate- ly 30 km/h (20 mph). 7 0+' Press the CRUISE button. (the CRUISE indicator in the instrument cluster will go off). 7-63 Driving your vehicle Vehicle to vehicle distance setting To set vehicle to vehicle distance: Each time the button is pressed, the vehicle to vehicle distance changes as follows: %JTUBODF %JTUBODF %JTUBODF %JTUBODF For example, if you drive at 90 km/h (56 mph), the distance maintain as fol- lows: Distance 4 - approximately 52.5 m Distance 3 - approximately 40 m Distance 2 - approximately 32.5 m Distance 1 - approximately 25 m 0+' This function allows you to program the vehicle to maintain relative distance to the vehicle ahead without depressing the accelerator pedal or brake pedal. The vehicle to vehicle distance will au- tomatically activate when the advanced smart cruise control system is on. Select the appropriate distance accord- ing to road conditions and vehicle speed. NOTICE The 'Distance 4' is always set when the system is used for the first time after starting the engine. The advanced smart cruise control system remember the last vehicle to vehicle distance which the driver used in the vehicle with AEB. 7-64 Driving your vehicle To set vehicle to vehicle distance: %JTUBODF 0+' %JTUBODF 0+' %JTUBODF 0+' %JTUBODF 0+' · The vehicle will maintain the set speed, when the lane ahead is clear. · The vehicle will slow down or speed up to maintain the selected distance, when there is a vehicle ahead of you in the lane. (A vehicle will appear in front of your vehicle in the LCD dis- play only when there is an actual ve- hicle in front of you) · If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising speed after accelerating to the selec- ted speed. CAUTION 7 · The warning chime sounds and LCD display blinks if it is hard to maintain the selected distance to the vehicle ahead. · If the warning chime sounds, ac- tively adjust the vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal accord- ing to the road condition ahead and driving condition. (Continued) 7-65 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Even if the warning chime is not activated, always pay attention to the driving conditions to prevent dangerous situations from occur- ring. Collision alert 0+' When the ASCC system is on, and there is a high risk of collision due to sudden braking of the vehicle in front or not securing enough space with the vehicle in front, the driver needs to control the brake system or the steering wheel manually. In this case, the collision alert warning displays on the instrument cluster and warning sounds. Decrease vehicle speed immediately. WARNING · Even when the indicator displaying the distance with the vehicle in front does not blink or the collision alert does not sound, always drive safely. · Depending on the use of radio, sound quality, and driving condi- tions, you may not be able to hear the warning sound. Therefore, al- ways pay close attention to traffic in front. 0+'- 7-66 Driving your vehicle CAUTION If the vehicle ahead (vehicle speed: less than 30 km/h) disappears to the next lane, the warning chime will sound and a message will appear. Adjust your vehicle speed for vehi- cles or objects that can suddenly ap- pear in front of you by depressing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. In traffic situation Radar to detect distance to the vehicle ahead 0+'- In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the 0+')1 7 vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if the vehicle ahead of you starts moving, your vehicle will start as well. However, if the vehicle stops for more than 3 seconds, you must depress the acceler- ator pedal or move up/down the lever (to RES+ or SET-) to start driving. The sensor detects the distance to the vehicle ahead. If the sensor is covered with dirt or other foreign matter, the vehicle to ve- hicle distance control may not operate correctly. Always keep the area in front of the sensor clean. 7-67 Driving your vehicle Radar check message SCC (Advanced smart cruise control) malfunction message 0+'- If the radar or cover is dirty or ob- scured with foreign matter such as snow, this message will appear and it will disappear after for a while. In this case, the system may not function temporarily, but it does not indicate a malfunction of the advanced smart cruise control System. Clean the radar or cover by using a soft cloth and it will operate normally. 0+'- The message will appear when the ve- hicle to vehicle distance control system is not functioning normally. We recommend have the system checked by an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION · Do not install accessories around the sensor and do not replace the bumper by yourself. It may inter- fere with the sensor performance. · Always keep the sensor and bumper clean. · To prevent sensor cover damage from occurring, wash the car with a soft cloth. · Do not damage the sensor or sen- sor area by a strong impact. If the sensor moves slightly off position, the advanced smart cruise control system will not operate correctly without any warning or indicator from the cluster. If this occurs, we recommend that the system be checked by an au- thorized Kia dealer. · Use only a genuine Kia sensor cov- er for your vehicle. Do not paint anything on the sensor cover. 7-68 Driving your vehicle To adjust the sensitivity of advanced smart cruise control · Normal: Vehicle speed following the front ve- hicle to maintain the set distance is normal · Fast: Vehicle speed following the front ve- hicle to maintain the set distance is faster than normal speed. To convert to cruise control mode: NOTICE The last selected mode is remained in the system 0+'- The sensitivity of vehicle speed when following the front vehicle to maintain the set distance can be adjusted. Go to the User Settings Mode (Driving Assist) and select SCC (Advanced smart cruise control). You may select one of the three stages you prefer. · Slow: Vehicle speed following the front ve- hicle to maintain the set distance is slower than normal speed. 0+'- 7 0+'- 7-69 Driving your vehicle The driver may choose to only use the cruise control mode (speed control function) by doing as follows: 1. Turn the advanced smart cruise control system on (the cruise indi- cator light will be on but the sys- tem will not be activated). 2. Push the distance to distance switch for more than 2 seconds. 3. Choose between "Advanced smart cruise control (SCC) mode" and "Cruise control (CC) mode". Limitations of the system · Select the appropriate set speed on curves and adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. WARNING When using the cruise control mode, you must manually access the dis- tance to other vehicles as the sys- tem will not automatically brake to slow down for other vehicles. 0+' The advanced smart cruise control sys- tem may have limits to its ability to de- tect distance to the vehicle ahead due to road and traffic conditions. On curves · On curves, the advanced smart cruise control system may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and then your vehicle could accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly down when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly. 0+' · Your vehicle speed can be reduced due to a vehicle in the adjacent lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by depress- ing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving con- dition. Apply the accelerator pedal and select the appropriate set speed. Check to be sure that the road condi- tions permit safe operation of the advanced smart cruise control. 7-70 On inclines Lane changing Driving your vehicle 0+' · During uphill or downhill driving, the advanced smart cruise control sys- tem may not detect a moving vehicle in your lane, and cause your vehicle to accelerate to the set speed. Also, the vehicle speed will rapidly down when the vehicle ahead is recognized suddenly. · Select the appropriate set speed on inclines and adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the accelerator or brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. 0+' · A vehicle which moves into your lane from an adjacent lane cannot be rec- ognized by the sensor until it is in the sensor's detection range. · The sensor may not detect immedi- ately when a vehicle cuts in suddenly. Always pay attention to the traffic, road and driving conditions. · If a vehicle which moves into your lane is slower than your vehicle, your speed may decrease to maintain the distance to the vehicle ahead. · If a vehicle which moves into your lane is faster than your vehicle, your vehicle will accelerate to the selected speed. 0+' · Your vehicle may accelerate when a vehicle ahead of you disappears. 7 · When you are warned that the vehi- cle ahead of you is not detected, drive with caution. 7-71 Driving your vehicle Vehicle recognition A vehicle ahead cannot be recognized correctly by the sensor if any of follow- ing occurs: - When the vehicle is pointing upwards due to overloading in the trunk - While making turns by steering - When driving to one side of the lane - When driving on narrow lanes or on curves 0+' Adjust your vehicle speed by depressing the brake pedal according to the road condition ahead and driving condition. Some vehicles ahead in your lane can- not be recognized by the sensor as fol- lows: - Narrow vehicles such as motorcycles or bicycles - Vehicles offset to one side - Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-de- celerating vehicles - Stopped vehicles - Vehicles with small rear profile such as trailers with no loads 0+' · When vehicles are at a standstill and the vehicle in front of you changes to the next lane, be careful when your vehicle starts to move because it may not recognize the stopped vehi- cle in front of you. 0+' · Always look out for pedestrians when your vehicle is maintaining a distance with the vehicle ahead. 7-72 Driving your vehicle 0+' · Always be cautious for vehicles with higher height or vehicles carrying loads that stick out to the back of the vehicle. WARNING · The advanced smart cruise control system cannot guarantee the stop for every emergency situation. If an emergency stop is necessary, you must apply the brakes. (Continued) (Continued) · Keep a safe distance according to road conditions and vehicle speed. If the vehicle to vehicle distance is too close during a high-speed driv- ing, a serious collision may result. · The advanced smart cruise control system cannot recognize a stop- ped vehicle, pedestrians or an on- coming vehicle. Always look ahead cautiously to prevent unexpected and sudden situations from occur- ring. · SCC system may have difficulty in maintaining the correct distance or speed, if the vehicle is driving on a steep incline or towing a trailer. · When other vehicles are changing lanes in front of you frequently, the advanced smart cruise control system may not operate appropri- ately. Always look ahead cautious- ly to prevent unexpected and sud- den situations from occurring. (Continued) (Continued) · The advanced smart cruise control system is not a substitute for safe driving practices but a convenience function only. It is the responsibili- ty of the driver to always check the speed and the distance to the vehicle ahead. · Always be aware of the selected speed and vehicle to vehicle dis- tance. · Always maintain sufficient braking distance and decelerate your vehi- cle by applying the brakes if nec- essary. · As the advanced smart cruise con- 7 trol system may not recognize complex driving situations, always pay attention to driving conditions and control your vehicle speed. · For safe operation, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual before use. · After an engine start, please stop for several seconds. If system ini- tialization is not completed, the SCC does not normally operate. (Continued) 7-73 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · After an engine start, if any ob- jects are not detected or the sen- sor cover is obscured with foreign substances, there is a possibility that the SCC system may not work. · Below conditions are not allowed: over baggage loading in a trunk, suspension remodeling, tire re- placement with unauthorized tires or tires with different worn-out and pressure levels. CAUTION The advanced smart cruise control system may not operate temporari- ly due to electrical interference. 7-74 Driving your vehicle DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Hybrid vehicle 5ZQF" The system resets to be in the ECO mode, when the hybrid system is re- started. If there is a problem with the instru- ment cluster, the drive mode will be in ECO mode and may not change to NOR- MAL mode or SPORT mode. The mode changes whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed. /03."- · When the DRIVE MODE button is pressed and the ECO mode is selec- ted, the ECO indicator (green) will illu- minate to show that the Active ECO is operating. · When the Active ECO is activated, it does not turn off even though the engine is restarted again. To turn off the system, press the DRIVE MODE button again. 41035&$0 When Active ECO is activated: 5ZQF# 0+' When normal mode is selected, it is not displayed on the cluster. ECO mode (Active ECO) ECO Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- ciency by control- ling certain en- · The acceleration may slightly be re- duced even though you depress the accelerator fully. 7 · The air conditioner performance may be limited. · The shift pattern of the automatic transaxle may change. gine and trans- · The engine noise may get louder. axle system op- 0+' erating parame- ters. Fuel effi- ciency depends on the driver's The above situations are normal condi- tions when the active eco system is ac- tivated to improve fuel efficiency. driving habit and Limitation of Active ECO operation: The drive mode may be selected ac- cording to the driver's preference or road condition. road condition. If the following conditions occur while Active ECO is operating, the system op- eration is limited even though there is no change in the ECO indicator. 7-75 Driving your vehicle · When the coolant temperature is low: The system will be limited until en- gine performance becomes normal. · When driving up a hill: The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted. · When using manual mode: The system will be limited according to the shift location. · When the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up. SPORT mode SPORT SPORT mode focu- ses on dynamic driv- ing by automatically controlling the steering wheel, en- gine and transaxle system. · When the DRIVE MODE button is pressed and the SPORT mode is se- lected, the SPORT indicator (yellow) will illuminate. · Whenever the hybrid system is re- started, the Drive Mode will revert back to ECO mode. If SPORT mode is desired, re-select SPORT mode from the DRIVE MODE button · If the system is activated: - After speeding, it maintains the gear and RPM for some time even though the accelerator pedal is not depressed. - Up-shifting is delayed. NOTICE In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi- ciency may decrease. 7-76 Driving your vehicle DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) Plug-in hybrid vehicle /03."- &$0 When Active ECO is activated: When normal mode is selected, it is not displayed on the cluster. ECO mode (Active ECO) · The acceleration may slightly be re- duced eventhough you depress the accelerator fully. · The air conditioner performance may be limited 0+')1- The drive mode may be selected ac- cording to the driver's preference or road condition. The system resets to be in the ECO mode, when the hybrid system is re- started. If there is a problem with the instru- ment cluster, the drive mode will be in ECO mode and may not change to NOR- MAL mode. The mode changes whenever the DRIVE MODE button is pressed. ECO Active ECO helps improve fuel effi- · The shift pattern of the automatic transaxle may change. ciency by control- · The engine noise may get louder. ling certain en- gine and trans- The above situations are normal condi- axle system op- tions when the active eco system is ac- erating parame- tivated to improve fuel efficiency. ters. Fuel effi- ciency depends Limitation of Active ECO operation: 7 on the driver's driving habit and road condition. If the following conditions occur while Active ECO is operating, the system op- eration is limited even though there is · When the DRIVE MODE button is pressed and the ECO mode is selec- ted, the ECO indicator (green) will illu- minate to show that the Active ECO no change in the ECO indicator. · When the coolant temperature is low: The system will be limited until en- gine performance becomes normal. is operating. · When driving up a hill: · When the Active ECO is activated, it does not turn off even though the engine is restarted again. To turn off The system will be limited to gain power when driving uphill because the engine torque is restricted. the system, press the DRIVE MODE button again. · When using manual mode: The system will be limited according to the shift location. 7-77 Driving your vehicle · When the accelerator pedal is deeply depressed for a few seconds: The system will be limited, judging that the driver wants to speed up. 7-78 Driving your vehicle LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED) (Continued) · Do not turn the steering wheel suddenly, when the LDWS warns you that your vehicle is leaving the lane. · If the sensor can not detect the lane or if the vehicle speed does not exceed around 60 km/h, the LDWS won't warn you even though the vehicle leaves the lane. · If your vehicle has window tint or 0+' other types of coating and acces- sory on the front windshield, the This system detects the lane with the LDWS may not work properly. sensor at the front windshield and warns you when your vehicle leaves the lane. · Do not let water or any kind of liq- uid come in contact with the LDWS sensor. 7 06. WARNING · The LDWS does not make the vehi- cle change lanes. It is the driver's responsibility to always check the road conditions. (Continued) · Do not remove the LDWS parts and do not affect the sensor by a strong impact. · Do not put objects that reflect light on the dash board. · Always check road conditions be- cause you may not hear the warn- ing chime because of audio and ex- ternal conditions. 7-79 Driving your vehicle To operate the LDWS, press the switch with the engine start/stop button in the ON position. The indicator illumi- nates white on the cluster. To cancel the LDWS, press LDWS button again. The indicator on the cluster will go off. 0+'- If you select this symbol, the LDWS mode on the LCD display will appear. If your vehicle leaves the lane when the LDWS is operating and vehicle speed exceeds around 60 km/h, the warning operates as follows: -FGUMBOFEFQBSUJOH 2. Auditory warning If you leave the lane, the warning sound operates for maximum 3 seconds. 3JHIUMBOFEFQBSUJOH 0+'- 0+'- 1. Visual warning If you leave a lane, the lane you cross will blink (yellow) and LDWS indicator will blink green on LCD during max 3 seconds. The color of symbol will change de- pending on the condition of LDWS sys- tem. · White color: When you activate the lane departure warning system by pressing the LDWS button, system oper- ating conditions are not satisfied or the sensor does not de- tect the lane line. · Green color: When you activate the lane departure warning system by pressing the LDWS button, system oper- ating conditions are satisfied and the sen- sor detect the lane line. · Yellow color: When there is a mal- function with the lane departure warning system. 7-80 Warning indicator 0+'0+'- When the LDWS is not working proper- ly, the warning light will illuminate and the warning message will come on for a few second. After the message disap- pears, the master warning light will illu- minate. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer The LDWS does not operate when: · The driver turns on the turn signal or the hazard warning flasher to change lane. · Driving on the lane line. NOTICE To change lanes, operate the turn signal switch, then change the lane. The LDWS may not warn you even if the vehicle leaves the lane or may warn you even if the vehicle does not leave the lane when: · The lane is not visible due to snow, rain, stain, a puddle or many other things. · The brightness of the outside changes suddenly. · The headlights are off at night or in a tunnel. · The color of the lane marking from the road is difficult to distinguish. · Driving on a steep grade or a curve. · Light reflects from the water on the road. · The lens or windshield is stained with foreign matter. · The sensor can not detect the lane because of fog, heavy rain or heavy 7 snow. · The surrounding temperature of the inside rear view mirror is high due to a direct ray of light. · The lane is very wide or narrow. · The lane line is damaged or indistinct. · The shadow is on the lane line by a median strip. · There is a mark similar to a lane line. · There is a boundary structure. · The distance from vehicle ahead is very short or the vehicle ahead hides the lane line. · The vehicle shakes heavily. 7-81 Driving your vehicle Driving your vehicle · The lane number increases or decrea- ses or the lane lines are crossing complicatedly. · Putting something on the dashboard. · Driving with the sun in front of you. · Driving in areas under construction. · The lane line is more than two in ei- ther side (Left/Right). · The windshield is fogged by humid air in the vehicle. 7-82 Driving your vehicle LANE KEEPING ASSIST SYSTEM (LKAS) (IF EQUIPPED) When the system detects the vehicle straying from its lane, it alerts the driv- (Continued) er with a visual and audible warning, while applying a slight counter steering torque, trying to prevent the vehicle from moving out of its lane. · LKAS prevents the driver from moving out of the lane uninten- tionally by assisting the driver's steering. However, the driver should not solely rely on the sys- WARNING tem but always pay attention on the steering wheel to stay in the lane. 05'4 · The steering wheel is not continu- ously controlled so if the vehicle speed is very fast when leaving a lane the vehicle may not be con- trolled by the system. · The operation of the LKAS can be affected by several factors (in- cluding environmental conditions). It is the responsibility of the driver to pay attention to the roadway and to maintain the vehicle in its lane at all times. · Do not steer the steering wheel suddenly when the steering wheel is being assisted by the system. (Continued) · Always check the road condition and surroundings and be cautious when the system cancels, does not operate or malfunctions. · Do not place any accessories, stickers or tint the windshield near the rearview mirror. 7 · The system detects lane markers and controls the steering wheel by a camera, therefore, if the lane markers are hard to detect, the system may not work properly. Please refer to Driver's attention on page 7-87. · Do not remove any LKAS parts or apply impact. The Lane Keeping Assist System de- tects lane markers on the road, and as- sists the driver's steering to help keep the vehicle between lanes. (Continued) 7-83 Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Do not place objects on the dash- board that reflects light such as mirrors, white paper, etc. The sys- tem may malfunction if the sun- light is reflected. · Loud audio sounds may interfere with the passenger from hearing warning chimes. · Always have your hands on the steering wheel while the LKAS system is activated. If you contin- ue to drive with your hands off the steering wheel after the "Hand on" warning, the system will turn off automatically. · If you drive very fast, the vehicle may stray out of the lane. Always be cautious when using the sys- tem. · When you tow the trailer, make sure that you turn off LKAS func- tion. LKAS operation - The sensor does not detect lane lines. · [Yellow] - There is a malfunction with the LKAS. In this case, we recommend you to have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Kia dealer. LKAS activation 0+' To turn ON the LKAS, press the switch, after turning ON the ignition switch. The indicator illuminates on the instru- ment cluster. To turn OFF the LKAS, press the switch again. The LKAS indicator illuminates in 3 colors as follows: · [Green] - When the system operating condi- tions are satisfied. · [White] - The system operation conditions are not satisfied. 0+'- · The LKAS screen will appear on the LCD display if the system is activa- ted. · When both lanes are detected and all the conditions to activate the LKAS are satisfied, the steering wheel will 7-84 Driving your vehicle be controlled (green steering wheel indicator will illuminate). WARNING The Lane Keeping Assist System is a system to prevent the driver from leaving the lane. However, the driver should not solely rely on the system but always check the road conditions when driving. -BOFVOEFUFDUFE -BOFEFUFDUFE · If the system detects the left lane, the left lane color will change from black to white. · If the system detects the right lane, the right lane color will change from black to white. · Both lanes must be detected for the system to fully activate. · If only one of the lanes is detected, the system will warn (warning beep and blinking yellow lane) the driver when the driver crosses the detected lane. Warning -FGUMBOF 3JHIUMBOF blink green on LCD with an audible warning during max 3 seconds. · If the steering wheel appears, the system will control the vehicle's steering to prevent the vehicle from crossing the lane. -FGUMBOF 3JHIUMBOF 7 0+'-0+'- · If the system detects a lane, the col- or changes from black to white. 0+'-0+'- · If you cross a lane, the lane you cross will blink (yellow) and symbol will 0+'-0+'- · If all the conditions to activate LKAS is not satisfied, the system will con- vert to LDWS and warn the driver on- ly when the driver crosses the lane markers. 7-85 Driving your vehicle (Continued) - In bad weather - In bad road condition - When the steering wheel needs to be controlled by the driver frequently. 0+'- · If the driver takes one's hands off the steering wheel while the LKAS is acti- vated, the system will warn the driv- er after several seconds with a visual and audible warning. WARNING The warning message may appear late according to road conditions. Therefore, always have your hands on the steering wheel while driving. NOTICE 0+')1- · If the driver still does not have one's hand on the steering wheel, the sys- tem will not control steering auto- matically. When system does not control steer- ing automatically, if you hold steering wheel, system will control steering automatically. WARNING · The driver is responsible for accu- rate steering. · Turn off the system and drive the vehicle personally in below situa- tions. (Continued) · Even though the steering is assis- ted by the system, the driver may control the steering. · The steering wheel may feel heav- ier when the steering wheel is as- sisted by the system than when it is not. The system will be cancelled when: · Vehicle speed is below 55 km/h (34.2 mph) and over 180 km/h (111.8 mph). · Only one lane is detected. · Always turn on the turn signal to change lanes. If you change lanes without the turn signal on, the steer- ing wheel might be controlled. · The hazard warning light is on. 7-86 Driving your vehicle · The width of the lane is below 2.6 m or over 4.5 m. · ESC(Electronic Stability Control) and VSM(Vehicle stability management) are activated. · When the system is on or after changing a lane, drive in the middle of the lane. If not, the system will not provide the steering assist function. · The steering will not be assisted when you drive fast on a sharp curve. · The steering will not be assisted when you change lanes fast. · The steering will not be assisted when you brake suddenly. Driver's attention The driver must be cautious in the be- low situations for the system may not assist the driver and may not work properly. · The lane is not visible due to snow, rain, stain, a puddle or many other things. · The brightness of the outside changes suddenly such as passing through a tunnel. · Not turning on the headlight or the light is weak even at night or in a tunnel. · Difficult to distinguish the color of the lane marker from the road. · Driving on a steep grade or a curve. · Light reflects from the water on the road such as sunlight, streetlight or the light of oncoming vehicles. · The lens or windshield is stained with foreign matter. · The surrounding of the inside rear view mirror temperature is high due to direct light. · The lane is very wide or narrow. · The lane marker is damaged or indis- tinct. · The shadow is on the lane marker by a median strip. · There is a mark similar to a lane marker. · There is a boundary structure. · The distance from vehicle ahead is very short or the vehicle ahead drives hiding the lane marker. · The vehicle shakes heavily. · The lane number increases or decrea- ses or the lane marker are crossing complicatedly. · Placing something on the dashboard. · Driving with the sun in front of you. · Driving in areas under construction. · The lane marker is more than two. · The lane marker in a tunnel is hard to distinguish due to dust or grease. · The lane marker is hard to distinguish after raining at night. · The lane marker is hard to distinguish due to dust. · MDPS (motor driven power steering) is not operational. · Some objects are attached in steering wheel. 7 · The windshield is fogged by humid air in the vehicle. · The distance from the vehicle ahead is very short or the vehicle ahead drives covering the lane line. · The lane line is merged or divided. · Driving through a toll plaza or toll gate. 7-87 Driving your vehicle LKAS malfunction LKAS fail indicator · Check if there is foreign matter on the camera lens If the problem is not solved, we recom- mend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 0+'- · If there is a problem with the system a message will appear. If the problem continues the LKAS fail indicator will illuminate. 0+'- The LKAS fail indicator (yellow) will illu- minate with an audible warning if the LKAS is not working properly. We rec- ommend that you contact an author- ized Kia dealer. When there is a problem with the sys- tem do one of the following: · Turn the system on after turning the engine off and on again. · Check if the ignition switch is in the ON position. · Check if the system is affected by the weather. (ex: fog, heavy rain, etc.) 7-88 LKAS function change The driver can change LKAS to Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS) or change the LKAS mode between Stand- ard LKA and Active LKA from the User Settings Mode on the LCD display. The system is automatically set to Stand- ard LKA. Lane Departure Warning system (LDWS) · The system can be converted to LKA to LDW at the User setting mode. · Refer to User settings on page 5-58. · LDWS alerts the driver with a visual 7 and audible warning when the sys- tem detects the vehicle straying from its lane. · If the LDWS is operating the indicator green/white will illuminate. · The steering wheel will not be con- trolled. Standard LKA · LKAS only starts intervention when the vehicle is predicted to cross the line. · It's useful to a driver who dislikes fre- quent intervention by LKAS 7-89 Driving your vehicle Driving your vehicle · LDW is generated when the vehicle is about to cross the line. Active LKA · LKAS operates for a vehicle to keep the region of lane center more effi- ciently. · The steering assistance is activated more frequently and earlier than standard LKA. · LDW is generated when the vehicle is about to cross the line. 7-90 Driving your vehicle BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED) 1. BSD (Blind spot detection) Warning range is dependent on your vehicle speed. However, if the speed of your vehicle is faster by 10 km/h or more than other nearby vehicles, the warning is not operat- ed. BSD (Blind spot detection) / LCA (Lane Change Assist) Operating conditions 2. LCA (Lane change assist) When vehicles are approaching to your vehicle at high speed, the warning is operated. 3. RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) When your vehicle moves back- ward, the sensor detects approach- ing vehicles to the left or right side direction and warning is operated. 7 06.- The BSD (Blind spot detection) system uses a radar sensor to alert the driver while driving. It senses the rear side territory of the vehicle and provides information to the driver. WARNING · Always check the road condition while driving for unexpected situa- tions even though the BSD (Blind spot detection) system is operat- ing. · BSD (Blind spot detection) system is a system made for convenience. Do not solely rely on the system but always pay attention to drive safely. The indicator on the switch will illumi- nate when the BSD (Blind spot detec- tion) system switch is pressed with the engine start/stop button switch ON. If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h (18.6 mph), the system will activate. If you press the switch again, the switch indicator and system will be turned off. If the engine start/stop button switch is turned OFF and ON the system re- turns to the previous state. 7-91 Driving your vehicle When the system is not used turn the system off by pressing the switch. When the system is turned on the warning light will illuminate for 3 sec- onds on the outside rearview mirror. Warning type The system will activate when: 1. The system is on 2. Vehicle speed is above 30 km/h (18.6 mph) 3. Other vehicles are detected in the rear side TUTUBHF If the detected vehicle is not in detec- tion range, the warning will be turned off. OETUBHF 06. The second stage alarm can be deacti- vated. · To activate the alarm: Go to the User Settings Mode Sound and select "BSD" on the LCD display. · To deactivate the alarm: Go to the User Settings Mode Sound and deselect "BSD" on the LCD display. CAUTION The alarm function helps alert the driver. Deactivate this function only when it is necessary The second stage alarm will activate when: 1. The first stage alert is on 2. The turn signal is on to change a lane 06. If a vehicle is detected within the boun- dary of the system, a warning light will illuminate on the outside rearview mir- ror. When the second stage alert is activa- ted, a warning light will be blinking on the outside rearview mirror and an alarm will sound. If you move the turn signal switch to origin position, the second stage alert will be deactivated. 7-92 Detecting sensor Warning message It is possible to get the message with no foreign substance on the rear bumper, for example, when driving in sparse rural or open area, such as des- ert, where there is insufficient data for operation. This message may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. In this case, the vehicle does not need service. Driving your vehicle 0+'- The sensors are located inside the rear The message will appear to notify the 7 bumper. driver if there are foreign substances Always keep the rear bumper clean for on the rear bumper or it is hot near the the system to work properly. rear bumper. The light on the switch and the system will be turned off auto- matically. Remove the foreign substance on the rear bumper. 0+'- After the foreign substance is removed, if you drive for approximately 10 mi- nutes, the system will work normally. If the system does not work normally even though the foreign substance is removed, take your vehicle to an au- thorized Kia dealer and have the sys- tem checked. If the system does not work properly, a warning message will appear and the light on the switch will turn off. The system will turn off automatically. We recommend you to have the sys- tem checked by an authorized Kia deal- er. 7-93 Driving your vehicle RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) Operating conditions · The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) detection range is 0.5 m~20 m based on side direction. If an approaching vehicle speed is 7 km/h~36 km/h in detection range, The warning is on. However, the system sensing range is different based on conditions. Always pay attention to surrounding. 0:', When your vehicle moves backwards from a parking position, the sensor de- tects approaching vehicles to the left or right side direction and gives informa- tion to the driver. 0+'- · Select RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert) in "User Settings" under "Driving As- sist" on the instrument cluster. The system will turn on and stand by to be activated. · Select RCTA again, to turn the sys- tem off. · If the vehicle is turned off and on again, the RCTA system will return to the state right before the vehicle was turned off. Turn the RCTA system off when not in use. · The system is operated when the ve- hicle speed is below 10 km/h with the shift lever in R (Reverse). 7-94 Warning type WARNING · The warning light on the outside rearview mirror will illuminate whenever a vehicle is detected at the rear side by the system. To avoid accidents, do not focus only on the warning light and ne- glect to see the surrounding of the vehicle. · Drive safely even though the vehi- 0+'- cle is equipped with a BSD (Blind spot detection) system. Do not 0+'- · If an approaching vehicle detected by sensors, the warning is chime and the warning light will blink on the outside rearview mirror. solely rely on the system but check for yourself before changing lanes. The system may not alert the 7 driver in some conditions so al- · If the detected vehicle is out of de- tection range, moving away in the ways check the surroundings while driving. opposite direction or moving slow, the warning is cancelled. · The system may not be operating CAUTION properly due to other factors or cir- cumstances, so always pay attention to your surrounding. · The system may not work proper- ly if the bumper has been replaced or if a repair work has been done 0+'- If the bumper on either side is near the sensor. blocked by a barrier or vehicles, the (Continued) system sensing ability may be de- teriorated. 7-95 Driving your vehicle Driving your vehicle (Continued) · The detection area differs accord- ing to the roads width. If the road is narrow the system may detect other vehicles in the second next lane. · On the contrary, if the road is very wide the system may not detect other vehicles in the next lane. · The system might be turned off due to strong electromagnetic waves. Non-operating condition Outside rearview mirror may not alert the driver when: - The outside rearview mirror housing is damaged or covered with debris. - The window is covered with debris. - The windows are severely tinted. Driver's attention The driver must be cautious in the be- low situations, because the system may not detect other vehicles or ob- jects in certain circumstances. - The vehicle drives on a curved road or through a tollgate. - The sensor is polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc. - The rear bumper, in which the sensor is located, is covered or blocked with a foreign matter such as a sticker, a bumper guard, a bicycle stand, etc. - The rear bumper is damaged, or the sensor is out of the original default position. - The vehicle height gets lower or high- er due to heavy loading in a trunk, abnormal tire pressure, etc. - The vehicle drives in a bad weather such as heavy rain or snow. - There is a fixed object near the vehi- cle, such as a guardrail. - A big vehicle is near such as a bus or truck. - A motorcycle or bicycle is near. - A flat trailer is near. - If the vehicle has started at the same time as the vehicle next to you and has accelerated. - When the other vehicle passes at a very fast speed. - While changing lanes. - While going down or up a steep road where the height of the lane is differ- ent. - When the other vehicle approaches very close. - When a trailer or carrier is installed. - When the temperature of the rear bumper is high. - When the sensors are blocked by other vehicles, walls or parking-lot pillars. - When the detected vehicle also moves back, as your vehicle drives back. - If there are small things like shopping cart and baby carriage. - If there is low height vehicle like sport vehicle. - When other vehicles are close to your vehicle. - When the vehicle in the next lane moves two lanes away from you OR when the vehicle two lanes away moves to the next lane from you. 7-96 Driving your vehicle ECONOMICAL OPERATION Your vehicle's fuel economy depends mainly on your style of driving, where you drive and when you drive. Each of these factors affects how many kilometers (miles) you can get from a liter (gallon) of fuel. To operate your vehicle as economically as possi- ble, use the following driving sugges- tions to help save money in both fuel and repairs: · Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a mod- erate rate. Do not make "jack-rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts and maintain a steady cruising speed. Do not race between stop lights. Try to adjust your speed to the traffic so you do not have to change speeds unnecessarily. Avoid heavy traffic whenever possible. Always maintain a safe distance from other vehicles so you can avoid un- necessary braking. This also reduces brake wear. · Drive at a moderate speed. The fast- er you drive, the more fuel your vehi- cle uses. Driving at a moderate speed, especially on the highway, is one of the most effective ways to re- duce fuel consumption. · Do not "ride" the brake or clutch ped- al. This can increase fuel consumption and also increase wear on these com- ponents. In addition, driving with your foot resting on the brake pedal may cause the brakes to overheat, which reduces their effectiveness and may lead to more serious consequences. · Take care of your tires. Keep them inflated to the recommended pres- sure. Incorrect inflation, either too much or too little, results in unneces- sary tire wear. Check the tire pres- sures at least once a month. · Be sure that the wheels are aligned correctly. Improper alignment can re- sult from hitting curbs or driving too fast over irregular surfaces. Poor alignment causes faster tire wear and may also result in other prob- lems as well as greater fuel con- sumption. · Keep your vehicle in good condition. For better fuel economy and reduced maintenance costs, maintain your ve- hicle in accordance with the mainte- nance schedule in Chapter 9, Mainte- nance. If you drive your vehicle in se- vere conditions, more frequent main- tenance is required (see Chapter 9, Maintenance for details). · Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi- mum service, your vehicle should be kept clean and free of corrosive ma- terials. It is especially important that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be allowed to accumulate on the underside of the vehicle. This extra weight can result in increased fuel consumption and al- so contribute to corrosion. · Travel lightly. Do not carry unneces- sary weight in your vehicle. Weight reduces fuel economy. · Do not let the engine idle longer than necessary. If you are waiting (and not 7 in traffic), turn off your engine and restart only when you're ready to go. · Remember, your vehicle does not re- quire extended warm-up. After the engine has started, allow the engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds prior to placing the vehicle in gear. In very cold weather, however, give your engine a slightly longer warmup period. · Do not "lug" or "over-rev" the engine. Lugging is driving too slowly in too high a gear resulting engine bucking. If this happens, shift to a lower gear. Over-revving is racing the engine be- yond its safe limit. This can be avoi- ded by shifting at the recommended speeds. 7-97 Driving your vehicle · Use your air conditioning sparingly. The air conditioning system is oper- ated by engine power so your fuel economy is reduced when you use it. · Open windows at high speeds can re- duce fuel economy. · Fuel economy is less in crosswinds and headwinds. To help offset some of this loss, slow down when driving in these conditions. Keeping a vehicle in good operating condition is important both for econo- my and safety. Therefore, we recom- mend that the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING n Engine off during motion Never turn the engine off to coast down hills or anytime the vehicle is in motion. The power steering and power brakes will not function prop- erly without the engine running. In- stead, keep the engine on and down- shift to an appropriate gear for en- gine braking effect. In addition, turn- (Continued) (Continued) ing off the engine start/stop button while driving could engage the steer- ing wheel lock (if equipped) resulting in loss of vehicle steering which could cause serious injury or death. 7-98 Driving your vehicle SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS Hazardous driving conditions When hazardous driving conditions are WARNING CAUTION encountered such as water, snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar hazards, follow these suggestions: · Drive cautiously and allow extra dis- n Downshifting Downshifting with an automatic transaxle, while driving on slippery Prolonged rocking may cause engine over-heating, transaxle damage or failure, and tire damage. tance for braking. surfaces can cause an accident. The · Avoid sudden braking or steering. sudden change in tire speed could cause the tires to skid. Be careful WARNING · When braking with non-ABS brakes when downshifting on slippery sur- pump the brake pedal with a light up- faces. n Spinning tires and-down motion until the vehicle is stopped. WARNING n ABS Do not pump the brake pedal on a vehicle equipped with ABS. Rocking the vehicle If it is necessary to rock the vehicle to free it from snow, sand, or mud, first turn the steering wheel right and left to clear the area around your front wheels. Then, shift back and forth be- tween 1 (First) and R (Reverse) in vehi- cles equipped with a manual transaxle or R (Reverse) and any forward gear in Do not spin the wheels, especially at speeds more than 56 km/h (35 mph). Spinning the wheels at high speeds when the vehicle is sta- tionary could cause a tire to over- heat which could result in tire dam- age that may injure bystanders. NOTICE 7 · If stalled in snow, mud, or sand, use vehicles equipped with an Automatic second gear. Accelerate slowly to Transaxle / Dual clutch transmission. Do The ESC system should be turned avoid spinning the drive wheels. not race the engine, and spin the OFF prior to rocking the vehicle. · Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or other non-slip material under the drive wheels to provide traction when stalled in ice, snow, or mud. wheels as little as possible. If you are still stuck after a few tries, have the vehicle pulled out by a tow vehicle to avoid engine overheating and possible damage to the transaxle. 7-99 Driving your vehicle WARNING If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow, mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt to rock the vehicle free by moving it forward and backward. Do not attempt this procedure if people or objects are anywhere near the ve- hicle. During the rocking operation the vehicle may suddenly move for- ward or backward as it becomes un- stuck, causing injury or damage to nearby people or objects. Smooth cornering Driving at night 0+'- Avoid braking or gear changing in cor- ners, especially when roads are wet. Ideally, corners should always be taken under gentle acceleration. If you follow these suggestions, tire wear will be held to a minimum. Because night driving presents more hazards than driving in the daylight, here are some important tips to re- member: · Slow down and keep more distance between you and other vehicles, as it may be more difficult to see at night, especially in areas where there may not be any street lights. · Adjust your mirrors to reduce the glare from other driver's headlights. 7-100 Driving your vehicle · Keep your headlights clean and prop- erly aimed on vehicles not equipped with the automatic headlight aiming feature. Dirty or improperly aimed headlights will make it much more difficult to see at night. · Avoid staring directly at the head- lights of oncoming vehicles. You could be temporarily blinded, and it will take several seconds for your eyes to readjust to the darkness. Driving in the rain · If your tires are not in good condition, making a quick stop on wet pave- ment can cause a skid and possibly lead to an accident. Be sure your tires are in good shape. · Turn on your headlights to make it easier for others to see you. · Driving too fast through large pud- dles can affect your brakes. If you must go through puddles, try to drive through them slowly. · If you believe you may have gotten your brakes wet, apply them lightly while driving until normal braking op- eration returns. Rain and wet roads can make driving dangerous, especially if you're not pre- Driving in flooded areas 7 pared for the slick pavement. Here are Avoid driving through flooded areas un- a few things to consider when driving in less you are sure the water is no higher the rain: than the bottom of the wheel hub. · A heavy rainfall will make it harder to Drive through any water slowly. Allow see and will increase the distance adequate stopping distance because needed to stop your vehicle, so slow brake performance may be affected. down. After driving through water, dry the · Keep your windshield wiping equip- ment in good shape. Replace your windshield wiper blades when they brakes by gently applying them several times while the vehicle is moving slow- ly. show signs of streaking or missing areas on the windshield. 7-101 Driving your vehicle Driving off-road Drive carefully off-road because your vehicle may be damaged by rocks or roots of trees. Become familiar with the off-road conditions where you are going to drive before you begin driving. Highway driving Tires Adjust the tire inflation pressures to specification. Low tire inflation pres- sures will result in overheating and pos- sible failure of the tires. Avoid using worn or damaged tires which may result in reduced traction or tire failure. NOTICE Never exceed the maximum tire in- flation pressure shown on the tires. WARNING · Underinflated or overinflated tires can cause poor handling, loss of vehicle control, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, inju- ries, and even death. Always check the tires for proper inflation be- fore driving. For proper tire pres- sures, refer to Tires and wheels on page 10-09. · Driving on tires with no or insuffi- cient tread is dangerous. Worn-out tires can result in loss of vehicle control, collisions, injury, and even death. Worn-out tires should be replaced as soon as possible and should never be used for driving. Always check the tire tread before driving your vehicle. For further in- formation and tread limits, refer to Tires and wheels on page 9-43 Fuel engine coolant and engine oil High speed travel consumes more fuel than urban motoring. Do not forget to check both engine coolant and engine oil. Drive belt A loose or damaged drive belt may re- sult in overheating of the engine. 7-102 Driving your vehicle WINTER DRIVING Severe weather conditions in the winter result in greater wear and other prob- NOTICE WARNING lems. To minimize the problems of win- ter driving, you should follow these Tire chains are not legal in all coun- n Snow tire size suggestions: Snow tires and tire chains for the national language (Icelandic, Bul- garian) see Chapter 11, Appendix. Snowy or icy conditions tries. Check the country laws before fitting tire chains. Snow tires Snow tires should be equivalent in size and type to the vehicle's stand- ard tires. Otherwise, the safety and handling of your vehicle may be ad- versely affected. To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it If you mount snow tires on your vehi- may be necessary to use snow tires or cle, make sure they are radial tires of to install tire chains on your tires. If the same size and load range as the snow tires are needed, it is necessary original tires. Mount snow tires on all to select tires equivalent in size and four wheels to balance your vehicle's type of the original equipment tires. handling in all weather conditions. Keep Failure to do so may adversely affect in mind that the traction provided by the safety and handling of your vehicle. snow tires on dry roads may not be as 7 Furthermore, speeding, rapid accelera- high as your vehicle's original equip- tion, sudden brake applications, and ment tires. You should drive cautiously sharp turns are potentially very haz- even when the roads are clear. Check ardous practices. with the tire dealer for maximum During deceleration, use engine braking speed recommendations. to the fullest extent. Sudden brake ap- Do not install studded tires without plications on snowy or icy roads may first checking local, state and municipal cause skids to occur. You need to keep regulations for possible restrictions sufficient distance between the vehicle against their use. in operation in front and your vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently. It should be noted that installing tire chains on the tire will provide a greater driving force, but will not prevent side skids. 7-103 Driving your vehicle Tire chains CAUTION Since the sidewalls of radial tires are thinner, they can be damaged by mounting some types of snow chains on them. Therefore, the use of snow tires is recommended instead of snow chains. Do not mount tire chains on ve- hicles equipped with aluminum wheels; snow chains may cause damage to the wheels. If snow chains must be used, use wire-type chains with a thickness of less than 12 mm (0.47 in). Damage to your vehicle caused by improper snow chain use is not covered by your vehicle manufacturers warranty. Install tire chains only on the front tires. · Make sure the snow chains are the correct size and type for your tires. Incorrect snow chains can cause damage to the vehicle body and suspension and may not be covered by your vehicle manufac- turer warranty. Also, the snow chain connecting hooks may be damaged from contacting vehicle components causing the snow chains to come loose from the tire. Make sure the snow chains are SAE class "S" certified. · Always check chain installation for proper mounting after driving ap- proximately 0.5 to 1 km (0.3 to 0.6 miles) to ensure safe mounting. Retighten or remount the chains if they are loose. Chain installation When installing chains, follow the man- ufacturer's instructions and mount them as tightly as you can. Drive slowly with chains installed. If you hear the chains contacting the body or chassis, stop and tighten them. If they still make contact, slow down until it stops. Remove the chains as soon as you be- gin driving on cleared roads. 7-104 WARNING n Mounting chains When mounting snow chains, park the vehicle on level ground away from traffic. Turn on the vehicle Hazard Warning flashers and place a triangular emergency warning device behind the vehicle if available. Al- ways place the vehicle in P (Park), apply the parking brake and turn off the engine before installing snow chains. WARNING n Tire chains · The use of chains may adversely affect vehicle handling. · Do not exceed 30 km/h (20 mph) or the chain manufacturer's rec- ommended speed limit, whichever is lower. (Continued) Driving your vehicle (Continued) · Drive carefully and avoid bumps, holes, sharp turns, and other road hazards, which may cause the ve- hicle to bounce. · Avoid sharp turns or locked wheel braking. CAUTION · Chains that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspen- sion, body and wheels. · Stop driving and retighten the chains any time you hear them hitting the vehicle. Use high quality ethylene glycol Change to "winter weight" oil if coolant necessary Your vehicle is delivered with high quali- In some climates it is recommended ty ethylene glycol coolant in the cooling that a lower viscosity "winter weight" system. It is the only type of coolant oil be used during cold weather. See that should be used because it helps Recommendations on page 10-12. If prevent corrosion in the cooling sys- you aren't sure what weight oil you tem, lubricates the water pump and should use, we recommend that you prevents freezing. Be sure to replace or consult an authorized Kia dealer. replenish your coolant in accordance with the maintenance schedule on page 9-09. Before winter, have your coolant tested to assure that its freez- ing point is sufficient for the tempera- tures anticipated during the winter. Check spark plugs and ignition system Inspect your spark plugs as described in 9-21 and replace them if necessary. Also check all ignition wiring and com- Check battery and cables Winter puts additional burdens on the ponents to be sure they are not cracked, worn or damaged in any way. 7 battery system. Visually inspect the To keep locks from freezing battery and cables as described in Bat- tery on page 9-39.We recommend that the level of charge in your battery be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. To keep the locks from freezing, squirt an approved de-icer fluid or glycerine into the key opening. If a lock is covered with ice, squirt it with an approved de- icing fluid to remove the ice. If the lock is frozen internally, you may be able to thaw it out by using a heated key. Han- dle the heated key with care to avoid injury. 7-105 Driving your vehicle Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system To keep the water in the window wash- er system from freezing, add an ap- proved window washer anti-freeze sol- ution in accordance with instructions on the container. Window washer antifreeze is available from an authorized Kia dealer and most auto parts outlets. Do not use engine coolant or other types of anti-freeze as these may damage the paint finish. Don't let your parking brake freeze Under some conditions your parking brake can freeze in the engaged posi- tion. This is most likely to happen when there is an accumulation of snow or ice around or near the rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If there is a risk the parking brake may freeze, apply it only temporarily while you put the shift lev- er in P (Automatic Transaxle / Dual clutch transmission) or in first or re- verse gear (manual transaxle) and block the rear wheels so the vehicle cannot roll. Then release the parking brake. Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath Under some conditions, snow and ice can build up under the fenders and in- terfere with the steering. When driving in severe winter conditions where this may happen, you should periodically check underneath the vehicle to be sure the movement of the front wheels and the steering components is not ob- structed. Carry emergency equipment Depending on the severity of the weather, you should carry appropriate emergency equipment. Some of the items you may want to carry include tire chains, tow straps or chains, flash- light, emergency flares, sand, shovel, jumper cables, window scraper, gloves, ground cloth, coveralls, blanket, etc. 7-106 Driving your vehicle VEHICLE WEIGHT This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and/or trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating capability, with or without a trailer. Properly loading your GAW (Gross axle weight) This is the total weight placed on each axle (front and rear) - including vehicle curb weight and all payload. Overloading WARNING vehicle will provide maximum return of the vehicle design performance. Before loading your vehicle, familiarize your- self with the following terms for deter- mining your vehicle's weight ratings, with or without a trailer, from the vehi- cle's specifications and the certification label: Base curb weight This is the weight of the vehicle includ- ing a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment. It does not include passen- gers, cargo, or optional equipment. GAWR (Gross axle weight rating) This is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle (front or rear). These numbers are shown on the certification label. The total load on each axle must never ex- ceed its GAWR. GVW (Gross vehicle weight) This is the Base Curb Weight plus actual Cargo Weight plus passengers. GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating) n Vehicle weight The gross axle weight rating (GAWR) and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) for your vehicle are on the certification label attached to the driver's (or front passenger's) door. Exceeding these ratings can cause an accident or vehicle damage. You can calculate the weight of your load by weighing the items (and people) before putting them in the vehicle. Be careful not to overload your vehi- cle. 7 Vehicle curb weight This is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your dealer plus any aftermarket equipment. This is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle (including all options, equipment, passengers and cargo). The GVWR is shown on the cer- tification label. Cargo weight This figure includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight, including cargo and optional equipment. 7-107 What to do in an emergency Road warning............................................................................. 8-02 Hazard warning flasher........................................................8-02 In case of an emergency while driving.................................. 8-03 If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing.................8-03 If you have a flat tire while driving.................................... 8-03 If engine stalls while driving................................................ 8-03 If the engine will not start.......................................................8-04 If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly............. 8-04 If engine turns over normally but does not start........... 8-04 Emergency starting.................................................................. 8-05 Jump starting.........................................................................8-05 Push-starting........................................................................ 8-06 If the engine overheats............................................................ 8-07 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ........................... 8-09 Check tire pressure............................................................... 8-09 Low tire pressure position telltale..................................... 8-10 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System) mal- function indicator..................................................................8-11 Changing a tire with TPMS.................................................. 8-12 If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit).......................8-14 Introduction............................................................................8-14 Components of the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK)......................8-16 Using the TMK....................................................................... 8-17 Distributing the sealant....................................................... 8-19 Checking the tire inflation pressure...................................8-19 Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit ............... 8-20 Technical data........................................................................ 8-20 Towing......................................................................................... 8-21 Towing service....................................................................... 8-21 Removable towing hook ..................................................... 8-22 Emergency towing................................................................ 8-22 If an accident occurs.................................................................8-25 Emergency commodity ........................................................... 8-27 First aid kit............................................................................. 8-27 Triangle reflector.................................................................. 8-27 Tire pressure gauge .............................................................8-27 8 What to do in an emergency ROAD WARNING Hazard warning flasher · The hazard warning flasher operates whether your vehicle is running or not. · The turn signals do not work when the hazard flasher is on. · Care must be taken when using the hazard warning flasher while the ve- hicle is being towed. The hazard warning flasher serves as a warning to other drivers to exercise ex- treme caution when approaching, over- taking, or passing your vehicle. It should be used whenever emergency repairs are being made or when the ve- hicle is stopped near the edge of a roadway. Depress the flasher switch with the ig- nition switch in any position. The flash- er switch is located in the center con- sole switch panel. All turn signal lights will flash simultaneously. 8-02 IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing · If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing, set the shift lever in the N (Neutral) position and then push the vehicle to a safe place. If you have a flat tire while driving 1. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and let the vehicle slow down while driving straight ahead. Do not apply the brakes immediately or attempt to pull off the road as this may cause a loss of control. When the vehicle has slowed down to such a speed that it is safe to do so, brake carefully and pull off the road. Drive off the road as far as possible and park on a firm level ground. If you are on a divided highway, do not park in the median area between the two traffic lanes. 2. When the vehicle is stopped, turn on your emergency hazard flash- ers, set the parking brake and put the transaxle in P. 3. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle. Be sure they all get out on the side of the vehicle that is away from traffic. 4. When changing a flat tire, follow the instruction provided in If you have a flat tire (with Tire Mobility Kit) on page 8-14. If engine stalls while driving 1. Reduce your speed gradually, keep- ing a straight line. Move cautiously off the road to a safe place. 2. Turn on your emergency flashers. 3. Try to start the hybrid system again. If your vehicle does not start, we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer. 8 8-03 What to do in an emergency What to do in an emergency IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly 1. Be sure the shift lever is in N (Neu- tral) or P (Park) and the emergency brake is set. 2. Check the battery connections to be sure they are clean and tight. 3. Turn on the interior light. If the light dims or goes out when you operate the starter, the battery is discharged. 4. Check the starter connections to be sure they are securely tightened. 5. Do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. See instructions for Jump starting on page 8-05. If engine turns over normally but does not start 1. Check the fuel level. 2. With the ignition switch in the LOCK position, check all connectors at the ignition coils and spark plugs. Re- connect any that may be discon- nected or loose. 3. Check the fuel line in the engine compartment. 4. If the engine still does not start, we recommend that you call an au- thorized Kia dealer. WARNING If the engine will not start, do not push or pull the vehicle to start it. This could result in a collision or cause other damage. In addition, push or pull starting may cause the catalytic converter to be overloaded and create a fire hazard. 8-04 What to do in an emergency EMERGENCY STARTING CAUTION Use only a 12-volt jumper system. You can damage a 12-volt starting motor, ignition system, and other electrical parts beyond repair by use of a 24- volt power supply (either two 12-volt batteries in series or a 24-volt motor generator set). Connect cables in numerical order and disconnect in reverse order. (A): Jumper cables (B): Booster battery (C): Discharged battery Jump starting Jump starting can be dangerous if done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid harm to yourself or damage to your vehicle or battery, follow the jump starting pro- cedures. If in doubt, we strongly rec- ommend that you have a competent technician or towing service jump start your vehicle. WARNING n Battery Never attempt to check the electro- lyte level of the battery as this may cause the battery to rupture or ex- plode causing serious injury. WARNING n Battery (Continued) (Continued) · Keep all flames or sparks away from the battery. The battery produces hydrogen gas which may explode if exposed to flame or sparks. If these instructions are not fol- lowed exactly, serious personal in- jury and damage to the vehicle may occur! If you are not sure how to follow this procedure, seek qualified assistance. Automobile batteries contain sulfuric acid. This is poisonous and highly corrosive. When jump starting, wear protec- tive glasses and be careful not to get acid on yourself, your clothing or on the vehicle. · Do not attempt to jump start the 8 vehicle if the discharged battery is frozen or if the electrolyte level is low; the battery may rupture or explode. · Do not allow the (+) and (-) jumper cables to touch. It may cause sparks. · The battery may rupture or ex- plode when you jump start with a low or frozen battery. 8-05 What to do in an emergency Jump starting procedure 1. Make sure the booster battery is 12-volt and that its negative termi- nal is grounded. 2. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, do not allow the vehicles come in contact. 3. Turn off all unnecessary electrical loads. 4. Connect the jumper cables in the exact sequence shown in the illus- tration. First connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive termi- nal of the discharged battery (1), then connect the other end to the positive terminal on the booster battery (2). Proceed to connect one end of the other jumper cable to the negative terminal of the booster battery (3), then the other end to a solid, sta- tionary, metallic point (for example, the engine lifting bracket) away from the battery (4). Do not con- nect it to or near any part that moves when the engine is cranked. Do not allow the jumper cables to contact anything except the correct battery terminals or the correct ground. Do not lean over the bat- tery when making connections. CAUTION n Battery cables Do not connect the jumper cable from the negative terminal of the booster battery to the negative ter- minal of the discharged battery. This can cause the discharged battery to overheat and crack, releasing bat- tery acid. 5. Start the engine of the vehicle with the booster battery and let it run at 2,000 rpm, then start the engine of the vehicle with the discharged battery. If the cause of your battery discharging is not apparent, we recommend that the system be checked by an author- ized Kia dealer. Push-starting Your manual transaxle-equipped vehi- cle should not be push-started because it might damage the emission control system. Vehicles equipped with automatic transaxle cannot be push-started. Follow the directions in Jump starting on page 8-05. WARNING Never tow a vehicle to start it be- cause the sudden surge forward when the engine starts could cause a collision with the tow vehicle. 8-06 What to do in an emergency IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS If your temperature gauge indicates overheating, you will experience a loss of power, or hear loud pinging or knock- ing, the engine is probably too hot. If this happens, you should: 1. Turn on the emergency warning flasher and stop in a safe place. Move the shift lever to P (Park) and engage the parking brake. 2. If hot steam does not come out from the engine room, carefully open the engine room and check whether the water pump connector is properly engaged. If the connec- tor is not properly engaged, stop the engine immediately and prop- erly engage the connector. Then, turn the engine on. 3. Turn on the air conditioner. 4. If the HEV Warning light turns on in the driver instrument cluster, or engine coolant or hot steam emits from the engine coolant filler, stop the engine immediately. Then, we recommend that you visit the near- est authorized Kia dealer or partner service center for service. If the Engine Warning light re- mains illuminated or the engine coolant is not flowing out, keep the engine running. Open the engine hood for ventilation to help cool down the engine. WARNING While the engine is running, keep hair, hands and clothing away from moving parts such as the fan and drive belts to prevent injury. 5. Check whether the engine coolant temperature is low enough by checking its temperature. If the en- gine coolant level is low, please check the connecting parts be- tween the radiator hose, heater hose, and water pump for any signs of leakage. When there is no sign of leakage, please refill the en- gine coolant. If causes and signs of engine overheating such as warning light illumination, engine coolant leakage, or cooling fan malfunction are found, stop the vehicle the ear- liest. Then, we recommend that you visit the nearest authorized Kia dealer or partner service center for service. WARNING Do not remove the radia- tor cap when the engine is hot. This can allow coolant to blow out of the opening and cause seri- ous burns. 6. If you cannot find the cause of the overheating, wait until the engine temperature has returned to nor- mal. Then, if coolant has been lost, carefully add coolant to the reser- voir to bring the fluid level in the reservoir up to the halfway mark. 8 7. Proceed with caution, keeping alert for further signs of overheating. If overheating happens again, we rec- ommend that you call an author- ized Kia dealer. 8-07 What to do in an emergency CAUTION · Serious loss of coolant indicates there is a leak in the cooling sys- tem and we recommend that the system be checked by an author- ized Kia dealer. · When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly add- ing engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities. 8-08 What to do in an emergency TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) (IF EQUIPPED) Check tire pressure - psi, kpa, bar (Refer to User set- tings on page 5-58). 0+' 0+'- 1. Low tire pressure telltale / TPMS malfunction indicator 2. Low tire pressure position telltale (Shown on the LCD display) Each tire, including the spare (if provi- ded), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pres- sure recommended by the vehicle man- ufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehi- cle placard or tire inflation pressure la- bel, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.) 0+'- As an added safety feature, your vehi- cle has been equipped with a tire pres- sure monitoring system (TPMS) that il- · You can check the tire pressure in the luminates a low tire pressure telltale 8 information mode on the cluster. when one or more of your tires is sig- - Refer to User settings on page nificantly under-inflated. Accordingly, 5-58. when the low tire pressure telltale illu- · Tire pressure is displayed 1~2 mi- nutes later after driving. · If tire pressure is not displayed when the vehicle is stopped, Drive to dis- play message displays. After driving, check the tire pressure. minates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and in- flate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread · You can change the tire pressure unit life, and may affect the vehicle's han- in the user settings mode on the dling and stopping ability. cluster. 8-09 What to do in an emergency Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not oper- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system de- tects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon sub- sequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the TPMS malfunction indicator remains illumina- ted after blinking for approximately 1 minute, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as in- tended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a va- riety of reasons, including the installa- tion of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en- sure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly. NOTICE If any of the below happens, we rec- ommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 1. The low tire pressure telltale/ TPMS malfunction indicator do not illuminate for 3 seconds when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position or en- gine is running. 2. The TPMS malfunction indicator remains illuminated after blink- ing for approximately 1 minute. 3. The Low tire pressure position telltale remains illuminated. Low tire pressure position telltale -PXUJSFQSFTTVSFUFMMUBMF 8#) ¥-PXUJSFQSFTTVSFQPTJUJPOJOGPSNBUJPO 0+'-# 8-10 What to do in an emergency When the tire pressure monitoring sys- tem warning indicators are illuminated and warning massage displayed on the cluster LCD display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-infla- ted. The low tire pressure position tell- tale light will indicate which tire is sig- nificantly under-inflated by illuminating the corresponding position light. If either telltale illuminates, immediate- ly reduce your speed, avoid hard cor- nering and anticipate increased stop- ping distances. You should stop and check your tires as soon as possible. In- flate the tires to the proper pressure as indicated on the vehicle's placard or tire inflation pressure label located on the driver's side center pillar outer panel. If you cannot reach a service station or if the tire cannot hold the newly added air, replace the low pressure tire with a spare tire. If you drive the vehicle for about 10 mi- nutes at speeds above 25 km/h after replacing the low pressure tire with the spare tire, one of the following will hap- pen: · The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel. (changed tire equipped with a sensor not in the vehicle) · The TPMS malfunction indicator will remain continuously illuminated while driving because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel. (changed tire equipped with a sensor in the vehicle) CAUTION (Continued) to the recommended tire inflation pressure. WARNING n Low pressure damage Significantly low tire pressure makes the vehicle unstable and can contrib- ute to loss of vehicle control and in- creased braking distances. Continued driving on low pressure tires can cause the tires to overheat and fail. In winter or cold weather, the low tire pressure telltale may illuminate if the tire pressure was adjusted to the recommended tire inflation pres- sure in warm weather. It does not mean your TPMS is malfunctioning because the decreased temperature leads to a lowering of tire pressure. When you drive your vehicle from a warm area to a cold area or from a cold area to a warm area, or the outside temperature is higher or lower, you should check the tire in- flation pressure and adjust the tires TPMS (Tire Pressure 8 Monitoring System) malfunction indicator The TPMS malfunction indi- cator will illuminate after it blinks for approximately one minute when there is a problem with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. We recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer to determine the cause of the problem. (Continued) 8-11 What to do in an emergency NOTICE If there is a malfunction with the TPMS, the low tire pressure position telltale will not be displayed even though the vehicle has an under-in- flated tire. CAUTION · The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 mi- nute and then remain continuously illuminated if the vehicle is moving around electric power supply ca- bles or radio transmitters such as at police stations, government and public offices, broadcasting sta- tions, military installations, air- ports, or transmitting towers, etc. This can interfere with normal op- eration of the Tire Pressure Moni- toring System (TPMS). (Continued) (Continued) · The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 mi- nute and then remain continuously illuminated if snow chains are used or some separate electronic devi- ces such as notebook computer, mobile charger, remote starter or navigation etc., are used in the ve- hicle. This can interfere with normal op- eration of the Tire Pressure Moni- toring System (TPMS). Changing a tire with TPMS If you have a flat tire, the low Tire Pressure and Position telltales will come on. We recommend that the sys- tem be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION Each wheel is equipped with a tire pres- sure sensor mounted inside the tire be- hind the valve stem. You must use TPMS specific wheels. It is recommen- ded that you have your tires serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. If you drive the vehicle for about 10 mi- nutes at speeds above 25 km/h after replacing the low pressure tire with the spare tire, one of the following will hap- pen: · The TPMS malfunction indicator may blink for approximately 1 minute and then remain continuously illuminated because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel. (changed tire equipped with a sensor not in the vehicle) · The TPMS malfunction indicator will remain continuously illuminated while driving because the TPMS sensor is not mounted on the spare wheel. (changed tire equipped with a sensor in the vehicle) We recommend that you use the sealant approved by Kia. The sealant on the tire pressure sensor and wheel shall be eliminated when you replace the tire with a new one. 8-12 What to do in an emergency You may not be able to identify a low tire by simply looking at it. Always use a good quality tire pressure gauge to measure the tire's inflation pressure. Please note that a tire that is hot (from being driven) will have a higher pres- sure measurement than a tire that is cold (from sitting stationary for at least 3 hours and driven less than 1.6 km (1 mile) during that 3 hour peri- od). Allow the tire to cool before measuring the inflation pressure. Always be sure the tire is cold before inflating to the recommended pressure. A cold tire means the vehicle has been sitting for 3 hours and driven for less than 1.6 km (1 mile) in that 3 hour peri- od. CAUTION We recommend that you use the sealant approved by Kia if your vehi- cle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System. The liquid seal- ant can damage the tire pressure sensors. WARNING n TPMS · The TPMS cannot alert you to se- vere and sudden tire damage caused by external factors such as nails or road debris. · If you feel any vehicle instability, immediately take your foot off the accelerator, apply the brakes grad- ually and with light force, and slowly move to a safe position off the road. WARNING n Protecting TPMS Tampering with, modifying, or disa- bling the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) components may in- terfere with the system's ability to warn the driver of low tire pressure conditions and/or TPMS malfunc- tions. Tampering with, modifying, or disabling the Tire Pressure Monitor- ing System (TPMS) components may void the warranty for that portion of the vehicle. WARNING n For EUROPE · Do not modify the vehicle, it may interfere with the TPMS function. · The wheels on the market do not have a TPMS sensor. For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replace- ment from an authorized Kia deal- er. · If you use the wheels on the mar- ket, use a TPMS sensor approved by a Kia dealer. If your vehicle is not equipped with a TPMS sensor or TPMS does not work properly, you may fail the periodic vehicle inspection conduc- ted in your country. 8 All vehicles sold in the EUROPE market during below period must be equipped with TPMS. - New model vehicle: Nov. 1, 2012 ~ - Current model vehicle: Nov. 1, 2014 ~ (Based on vehi- cle registrations) 8-13 What to do in an emergency IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE (WITH TIRE MOBILITY KIT, IF EQUIPPED) (Continued) When two or more tires are flat, do not use the tire mobility kit because the supported one sealant of Tire Mobility Kit is only used for one flat tire. Introduction Please read the instructions before us- ing the Tire Mobility Kit. 1. Compressor 2. Sealant bottle The Tire Mobility Kit is a temporary fix to the tire and we recommend that the tire is inspected by an authorized Kia dealer as soon as possible. CAUTION n One sealant for one tire (Continued) WARNING n Tire wall Do not use the Tire Mobility Kit to repair punctures in the tire walls. This can result in an accident due to tire failure. WARNING n Temporary fix Have your tire repaired as soon as possible. The tire may lose air pres- sure at any time after inflating with the Tire Mobility Kit. With the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) you stay mobile even after experiencing a tire puncture. The system of compressor and sealing compound effectively and comfortably seals most punctures in a passenger car tire caused by nails or similar ob- jects and reinflates the tire. After you ensured that the tire is prop- erly sealed you can drive cautiously on the tire (up to 200 km (120 miles)) at a max. speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) in or- der to reach a vehicle or tire dealer to have the tire replaced. 8-14 It is possible that some tires, especially with larger punctures or damage to the sidewall, cannot be sealed completely. Air pressure loss in the tire may ad- versely affect tire performance. For this reason, you should avoid abrupt steering or other driving ma- neuvers, especially if the vehicle is heavily loaded or if a trailer is in use. The TMK is not designed or intended as a permanent tire repair method and is to be used for one tire only. This instruction shows you step by step how to temporarily seal the puncture simply and reliably. Read the section Notes on the safe use of the TMK on page 8-20. WARNING Do not use the TMK if a tire is se- verely damaged by driving run flat or with insufficient air pressure. Only punctured areas located within the tread region of the tire can be sealed using the TMK. 8 8-15 What to do in an emergency What to do in an emergency Components of the Tire Mobility Kit (TMK) 8-16 0+' 1. Speed restriction label 2. Sealant bottle and label with speed restriction 3. Filling hose from sealant bottle to wheel 4. Connectors and cable for the bat- tery direct connection 5. Holder for the sealant bottle 6. Compressor 7. On/off switch 8. Pressure gauge for displaying the tire inflation pressure 9. Button for reducing tire inflation pressure 10. Hose to connect compressor and sealant bottle or compressor and wheel Connectors, cable and connection hose are stored in the compressor housing. WARNING n Expired sealant (Continued) What to do in an emergency (Continued) Do not use the tire sealant after the sealant has expired (i.e. past the ex- piration date on the sealant contain- er). This can increase the risk of tire failure. WARNING n Sealant · Keep out of reach of children. · Avoid contact with eyes. · Do not swallow. Strictly follow the specified sequence, otherwise the sealant may escape un- der high pressure. 0+' CAUTION Before using the tire repair kit, please read carefully the instruction attached on the sealant case. Detach the speed limit label on the sealant case and put it on a highly visible place. Always drive within the speed limit. Using the TMK Carefully follow below steps. 05". 1. Shake the sealant case. 8 0+') 2. Screw connection hose (10) onto the connector of the sealant bottle. 8-17 What to do in an emergency 3. Ensure that button (9) on the com- pressor is not pressed. 0+') 4. Unscrew the valve cap from the valve of the flat tire and screw fill- ing hose (3) of the sealant bottle onto the valve. 5. Insert the sealant bottle into the housing (5) of the compressor so that the bottle is upright. 6. Ensure that the compressor is switched off, position 0. WARNING If sealant is dispersed when the in- jection hose and tire air injection valve have not been fully connected, the sealant may overflow and clog the valve. and wheels on page 10-09). The inflation pressure of the tire after filling is unimportant and will be checked/corrected later. Be careful not to overinflate the tire and stay away from the tire when filling it. When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety. CAUTION n Tire pressure Do not attempt to drive your vehicle if the tire pressure is below 200 kPa (29 psi). This could result in an acci- dent due to sudden tire failure. 0+'" 7. Connect between compressor and the vehicle power outlet using the cable and connectors (4). 8. With the engine start/stop button position on or ignition switch posi- tion on, switch on the compressor and let it run for approximately 5~7 minutes to fill the sealant up to proper pressure. (refer to Tires 9. Switch off the compressor. 10. Detach the hoses from the sealant bottle connector and from the tire valve. Return the TMK to its storage location in the vehicle. 8-18 What to do in an emergency WARNING n Carbon monoxide Carbon monoxide poisoning and suf- focation is possible if the engine is left running in a poorly ventilated or unventilated location (such as inside a building). (Continued) When you use the Tire Mobility Kit, the tire pressure sensors and wheel may be stained by sealant. There- fore, remove the tire pressure sen- sors and wheel stained by sealant and we recommend to have it in- spected by an authorized Kia dealer. Distributing the sealant 11. Immediately drive approximately 7~10 km (4~6 miles or, about 10 min) to evenly distribute the seal- ant in the tire. Checking the tire inflation pressure CAUTION Do not exceed a speed of 80 km/h (50 mph). If possible, do not fall be- low a speed of 20 km/h (12 mph). While driving, if you experience any unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise, reduce your speed and drive with caution until you can safely pull off of the side of the road. Call for road side service or towing. (Continued) 0+') 1. After driving approximately 7~10 km (4~6 miles, or about 10 minutes), stop at a suitable loca- tion. 2. Connect connection hose (10) of the compressor directly to the tire valve. 3. Connect between compressor and the vehicle battery using the cable and connectors. 4. Adjust the tire inflation pressure to 200 kPa (29 psi). With the ignition switched on, proceed as follows. - To increase the inflation pres- sure: Switch on the compressor, position I. To check the current inflation pressure setting, briefly switch off the compressor. WARNING Do not let the compressor run for more than 10 minutes, otherwise 8 the device will overheat and may be damaged. - To reduce the inflation pressure: Press the button (9) on the com- pressor. 8-19 What to do in an emergency CAUTION If the inflation pressure is not main- tained, drive the vehicle a second time, refer to Distributing the seal- ant. Then repeat steps 1 to 4. Use of the TMK may be ineffectual for tire damage larger than approxi- mately 4 mm (0.16 in). We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer if the tire can- not be made roadworthy with the Tire Mobility Kit. WARNING The tire inflation pressure must be at least 200 kPa (29 psi). If it is not, do not continue driving. Call for road side service or towing. Notes on the safe use of the Tire Mobility Kit · Park your car at the side of the road so that you can work with the TMK away from moving traffic. Place your warning triangle in a prominent place to make passing vehicles aware of your location. · To be sure your vehicle will not move, even when you're on fairly level ground, always set your parking brake. · Only use the TMK for sealing/inflation passenger car tires. Do not use on motorcycles, bicycles or any other type of tires. · Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws -that have penetrated the tire. · Before using the TMK, read the pre- cautionary advice printed on the seal- ant bottle! · Provided the car is outdoors, leave the engine running. Otherwise oper- ating the compressor may eventually drain the car battery. · Never leave the TMK unattended while it is being used. · Do not leave the compressor running for more than 10 min. at a time or it may overheat. · Do not use the TMK if the ambient temperature is below -30°C (-22°F). · When the tire and wheel are dam- aged, do not use Tire Mobility Kit for your safety. Technical data System voltage: DC 12 V Working voltage: DC 10 - 15 V Amperage rating: max. 15 A Suitable for use at temperatures: -30 ~ +70°C (-22 ~ +158°F) Max. working pressure: 6 bar (87 psi) Size Compressor: 168 x 150 x 68 mm (6.6 x 5.9 x 2.7 in) Sealant bottle: 104 x 85 ø mm (4.1 x 3.3 ø in.) Compressor weight: 1.05 kg (2.31 lbs) Sealant volume: 300 ml (18.3 cu. in.) Sealant and spare parts can be ob- tained and replaced at an author- ized vehicle or tire dealer. Empty sealant bottles may be disposed of at home. Liquid residue from the sealant should be disposed of by your vehicle or tire dealer or in ac- cordance with local waste disposal regulations. 8-20 What to do in an emergency TOWING Towing service It is acceptable to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground (without dollies) and the front wheels off the ground. If any of the loaded wheels or suspen- sion components are damaged or the vehicle is being towed with the front wheels on the ground, use a towing dolly under the front wheels. When being towed by a commercial tow truck and wheel dollies are not used, the front of the vehicle should al- ways be lifted, not the rear. )9% 0+'- If emergency towing is necessary, we recommend having it done by an au- thorized Kia dealer or a commercial tow-truck service. Proper lifting and towing procedures are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies (1) or flatbed is recom- mended. NOTICE If the EPB does not release normally, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. )9% CAUTION · Do not tow the vehicle backwards 8 with the front wheels on the ground as this may cause damage to the vehicle. · Do not tow with sling-type equip- ment. Use wheel lift or flatbed equipment. When towing your vehicle in an emer- gency without wheel dollies: 1. Set the ignition switch in the ACC position. 8-21 What to do in an emergency 2. Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral). 3. Release the parking brake. CAUTION Failure to place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral) may cause inter- nal damage to the transaxle. Removable towing hook (if equipped) 2. Remove the hole cover pressing the lower part of the cover on the bumper. 3. Install the towing hook by turning it clockwise into the hole until it is fully secured. 4. Remove the towing hook and install the cover after use. Emergency towing 'SPOU 3FBS 1. Open the trunk, and remove the towing hook from the tool case. 8-22 What to do in an emergency If towing is necessary, we recommend you to have it done by an authorized CAUTION WARNING Kia dealer or a commercial tow truck service. If towing service is not available in an emergency, your vehicle may be tem- porarily towed using a cable or chain secured to the emergency towing hook under the front (or rear) of the vehicle. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. A driver must be in the vehicle to steer it and operate the brakes. Towing in this manner may be done on- ly on hard-surfaced roads for a short distance and at low speed. Also, the · Attach a towing strap to the tow hook. · Using a portion of the vehicle oth- er than the tow hooks for towing may damage the body of your ve- hicle. · Use only a cable or chain specifi- cally intended for use in towing vehicles. Securely fasten the cable or chain to the towing hook provi- ded. Use extreme caution when towing the vehicle. · Avoid sudden starts or erratic driv- ing maneuvers which would place excessive stress on the emergency towing hook and towing cable or chain. The hook and towing cable or chain may break and cause seri- ous injury or damage. · If the disabled vehicle is unable to be moved, do not forcibly continue the towing. We recommend that wheels, axles, power train, steering and you contact an authorized Kia brakes must all be in good condition. · Before emergency towing, check if dealer or a commercial tow truck · Do not use the tow hooks to pull a the hook is not broken or damaged. service for assistance. vehicle out of mud, sand or other conditions from which the vehicle cannot be driven out under its own power. · Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than · Fasten the towing cable or chain se- curely to the hook. · Do not jerk the hook. Apply it steadily and with even force. · Tow the vehicle as straight ahead as possible. · Keep away from the vehicle during towing. 8 the vehicle doing the towing. · To avoid damaging the hook, do not · The drivers of both vehicles should communicate with each other fre- pull from the side or at a vertical an- gle. Always pull straight ahead. quently. 8-23 What to do in an emergency · Press the brake pedal with more force than normal since you will have reduced brake performance. · More steering effort will be required because the power steering system will be disabled. · If you are driving down a long hill, the brakes may overheat and brake per- formance will be reduced. Stop often and let the brakes cool off. · Use a towing strap less than 5 m (16 feet) long. Attach a white or red cloth (about 30 cm (12 inches) wide) in the middle of the strap for easy visibility. · Drive carefully so that the towing strap is not loosened during towing. Emergency towing precautions · Turn the ignition switch to ACC so the steering wheel isn't locked. · Place the transaxle shift lever in N (Neutral). · Release the parking bake. CAUTION n Automatic transaxle · If the car is being towed with all four wheels on the ground, it can be towed only from the front. Be sure that the transaxle is in neu- tral. Be sure the steering is un- locked by placing the ignition switch in the ACC position. A driver must be in the towed vehicle to operate the steering and brakes. · To avoid serious damage to the automatic transaxle, limit the ve- hicle speed to 15 km/h (10 mph) and drive less than 1.5 km (1 mile) when towing. (Continued) (Continued) · Before towing, check the auto- matic transaxle for fluid leaks un- der your vehicle. If the automatic transaxle fluid is leaking, flatbed equipment or a towing dolly must be used. 8-24 What to do in an emergency IF AN ACCIDENT OCCURS · Avoid the engine compartment. · Avoid any orange or high voltage wires, cables, or components. · Assume that a high voltage compo- nent is exposed and move away from the vehicle as promptly as possible. · Refer to Towing on page 8-21 for towing information. WARNING · After parking the vehicle, shift the transmission into "P" position. Turn off the hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop button. · For your safety, do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package modules. High Voltage components are orange in color. · Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the ve- hicle. Never touch the wires or ca- bles, because an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. · If a fire occurs, to extinguish a small high-voltage battery fire, (Continued) (Continued) the following techniques can be used: - Dry chemical - CO2 - Large amounts of water - Regular foam For a large high-voltage battery fire, use these types of extin- guishing methods: - Large amounts of water - Fog - Regular foam · If you need towing, refer to Tow- ing on page 8-21. WARNING If a vehicle accident occurs: 1. Stop the vehicle and shift the transmission into "P" position and then depress the parking brake. (Continued) (Continued) 2. Turn off the Hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop Button. 3. Evacuate to the safety place. 4. Call emergency services for help and let them know the vehicle is a Hybrid vehicle. Do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package mod- ules. High voltage components are orange in color. Exposed cables or wires may be visible inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, because an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. 8 WARNING If a fire occurs: (Continued) 8-25 What to do in an emergency (Continued) 1. Stop the vehicle and shift the transmission in to "P" position, and then depress the parking brake. To ventilate smoke from a fire, open the windows if possi- ble. 2. Turn off the Hybrid system by pushing the Engine Start/Stop Button. 3. Leave the vehicle and evacuate to the safety place. 4. Call emergency services for help and let them know the vehicle is a Hybrid vehicle. If you have an extinguisher, extin- guish a fire carefully. Do not touch high voltage cables, connectors and package modules. High voltage components are orange in color. Exposed cables or wires may be visi- ble inside or outside of the vehicle. Never touch the wires or cables, be- cause an electrical shock may occur causing injury or death. WARNING If a submersion in water occurs: If your vehicle was flooded and has soaked carpeting or water on the flooring, you should not try to start the Hybrid system. Never touch the high voltage cables, connectors and package modules, because an elec- trical shock may occur causing injury or death. High Voltage cables are or- ange in color. We recommend that the car towed to an authorized Kia dealer. 8-26 EMERGENCY COMMODITY (IF EQUIPPED) There are some emergency commodi- ties in the vehicle to help you respond to the emergency situation. First aid kit There are some items such as scissors, bandage and adhesive tape and etc. in the kit to give first aid to an injured person. Triangle reflector Place the triangle reflector on the road to warn oncoming vehicles during emergencies, such as when the vehicle is parked by the roadside due to any problems. 2. Press and hold the gauge against the tire valve. Some air will escape as you begin and more will escape if you don't press the gauge in firmly. 3. A firm non-leaking push will acti- vate the gauge. 4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge to know whether the tire pressure is low or high. 5. Adjust the tire pressures to the specified pressure. Refer to Tires and wheels on page 10-09. 6. Reinstall the inflation valve cap. Tire pressure gauge (if equipped) Tires normally lose some air in day-today use, and you may have to add a few pounds of air periodically and it is not usually a sign of a leaking tire, but of normal wear. Always check tire pres- sure when the tires are cold because tire pressure increases with tempera- ture. To check the tire pressure, take the fol- lowing steps: 1. Unscrew the inflation valve cap that is located on the rim of the tire. 8 8-27 What to do in an emergency Maintenance Engine compartment................................................................9-03 Maintenance services............................................................... 9-04 Owner's responsibility.......................................................... 9-04 Owner maintenance precautions....................................... 9-04 Owner maintenance................................................................. 9-06 Owner maintenance schedule.............................................9-06 Scheduled maintenance service............................................. 9-08 Scheduled maintenance service precaution..................... 9-08 Normal maintenance schedule - for gasoline en- gine [for Europe (except Russia)].......................................9-09 Normal maintenance schedule - for gasoline en- gine [for Europe (except Russia)] (Continued)................. 9-10 Maintenance under severe usage conditions - for gasoline engine [for Europe (except Russia)]...................9-12 Normal maintenance schedule - for gasoline en- gine [except Europe (including Russia)]............................ 9-14 Normal maintenance schedule - for gasoline en- gine [except Europe (including Russia)] (Continued).......9-15 Maintenance under severe usage conditions - for gasoline engine [except Europe (including Russia)]........ 9-18 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items..................... 9-21 Engine oil and filter...............................................................9-21 HSG (hybrid starter & generator) belt.............................. 9-21 Fuel filter (for gasoline)....................................................... 9-21 Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections.............................. 9-21 Vapor hose (for gasoline engine) and fuel filler cap........9-21 Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses ................................9-21 Air cleaner filter.....................................................................9-21 Spark plugs (for gasoline engine)....................................... 9-21 Cooling system...................................................................... 9-22 Coolant (Engine/Inverter).................................................... 9-22 Automatic transaxle fluid.................................................... 9-22 Brake hoses and lines...........................................................9-22 Brake fluid ............................................................................. 9-22 Parking brake ........................................................................9-22 Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors............................... 9-22 Suspension mounting bolts................................................. 9-22 Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint.................................................................................. 9-22 Drive shafts and boots.........................................................9-22 Air conditioning refrigerant................................................. 9-23 Engine oil.....................................................................................9-24 Checking the engine oil level................................................9-24 Changing the engine oil and filter...................................... 9-24 Coolant........................................................................................ 9-26 Checking the coolant level................................................... 9-26 Engine coolant....................................................................... 9-27 Inverter coolant..................................................................... 9-27 Recommended coolant.........................................................9-28 Changing the coolant............................................................9-29 Brake fluid ................................................................................. 9-30 Checking the brake fluid level............................................. 9-30 9 Washer fluid............................................................................... 9-31 Checking the washer fluid level.......................................... 9-31 Parking brake ............................................................................9-32 Checking the parking brake................................................. 9-32 Air cleaner.................................................................................. 9-33 Filter replacement.................................................................9-33 Climate control air filter...........................................................9-35 Filter inspection.....................................................................9-35 Wiper blades...............................................................................9-36 Blade inspection.................................................................... 9-36 Blade replacement................................................................ 9-36 Battery........................................................................................9-39 For best battery service...................................................... 9-39 Battery capacity label.......................................................... 9-40 Battery recharging................................................................9-41 Reset items............................................................................ 9-41 Tires and wheels....................................................................... 9-43 Tire care..................................................................................9-43 Recommended cold tire inflation pressures.....................9-43 Checking tire inflation pressure..........................................9-44 Tire rotation...........................................................................9-45 Wheel alignment and tire balance......................................9-46 Tire replacement...................................................................9-46 Wheel replacement............................................................... 9-47 Tire traction........................................................................... 9-48 Tire maintenance.................................................................. 9-48 Tire sidewall labeling............................................................ 9-48 Low aspect ratio tire ........................................................... 9-51 9 Fuses........................................................................................... 9-52 Inner panel fuse replacement............................................. 9-53 Engine compartment fuse replacement........................... 9-54 Fuse/relay panel description............................................... 9-56 Light bulbs.................................................................................. 9-70 Bulb replacement precaution.............................................. 9-70 Light bulb position (front)................................................... 9-72 Light bulb position (rear)..................................................... 9-73 Light bulb position (side)......................................................9-73 Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement............................ 9-74 Headlamp (low beam) bulb replacement.......................... 9-74 Headlamp (high beam) bulb replacement.........................9-75 Headlamp (high/low beam) LED replacement..................9-76 Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement......................... 9-76 Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement..........9-77 Side repeater lamp bulb replacement............................... 9-77 Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement...........................9-77 Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement.............9-79 Back-up lamp bulb replacement........................................ 9-79 License plate lamp bulb replacement................................ 9-80 High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement..................... 9-81 Map lamp bulb replacement................................................9-81 Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement............................... 9-81 Room lamp bulb replacement............................................. 9-82 Personal lamp bulb replacement........................................9-83 Glove box lamp bulb replacement...................................... 9-83 Trunk lamp bulb replacement............................................. 9-83 Appearance care........................................................................9-85 Exterior care.......................................................................... 9-85 Interior care........................................................................... 9-89 Emission control system ........................................................ 9-91 Crankcase emission control system.................................. 9-91 Evaporative emission control system............................... 9-91 Exhaust emission control system...................................... 9-91 ENGINE COMPARTMENT (BTPMJOF&OHJOF /V-(%* 5IFBDUVBMFOHJOFSPPNJOUIFWFIJDMFNBZEJGGFSGSPNUIFJMMVTUSBUJPO 1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Engine oil filler cap 3. Engine oil dipstick 4. Brake fluid reservoir 5. Air cleaner 6. Fuse box 7. Inverter coolant reservoir 8. Radiator cap 9. Windshield washer fluid reservoir 9 9-03 Maintenance Maintenance MAINTENANCE SERVICES You should exercise the utmost care to prevent damage to your vehicle and in- jury to yourself whenever performing any maintenance or inspection proce- dures. Inadequate, incomplete or insufficient servicing may result in operational problems with your vehicle that could lead to vehicle damage, an accident, or personal injury. Owner's responsibility NOTICE Maintenance Service and Record Re- tention are the owner's responsibili- ty. We recommend in general that you have your vehicle serviced by an au- thorized Kia dealer. You should retain documents that show proper maintenance has been per- formed on your vehicle in accordance with the scheduled maintenance serv- ice charts shown on the following pa- ges. You need this information to establish your compliance with the servicing and maintenance requirements of your ve- hicle warranties. Detailed warranty information is provi- ded in your Warranty & Maintenance book. Repairs and adjustments required as a result of improper maintenance or a lack of required maintenance are not covered when your vehicle is covered by warranty. Owner maintenance precautions Improper or incomplete service may re- sult in problems. This section gives in- structions only for the maintenance items that are easy to perform. NOTICE Improper owner maintenance during the warranty period may affect warranty coverage. For details, read the separate Warranty & Mainte- nance book provided with the vehi- cle. If you're unsure about any serv- icing or maintenance procedure, we (Continued) (Continued) recommend that the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING n Maintenance work · Performing maintenance work on a vehicle can be dangerous. You can be seriously injured while per- forming some maintenance proce- dures. If you lack sufficient knowl- edge and experience or the proper tools and equipment to do the work, we recommend that the system be serviced by an author- ized Kia dealer. (Continued) 9-04 (Continued) · Working under the hood with the engine running is dangerous. It be- comes even more dangerous when you wear jewelry or loose clothing. These can become entangled in moving parts and result in injury. Therefore, if you must run the en- gine while working under the hood, make certain that you remove all jewelry (especially rings, bracelets, watches, and necklaces) and all neckties, scarves, and similar loose clothing before getting near the engine or cooling fans. CAUTION · Do not put heavy objects or apply excessive force on top of the en- gine cover (if equipped) or fuel re- lated parts. · When you inspect the fuel system (fuel lines and fuel injection devi- ces), we recommend that you con- tact an authorized kia dealer. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not drive long time with the en- gine cover (if equipped) removed. · When checking the engine room, do not go near fire. Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are flam- mable oils that may cause fire. · Before touching the battery, igni- tion cables and electrical wiring, you should disconnect the battery "-" terminal. You may get an elec- tric shock from the electric cur- rent. · When you remove the interior trim cover with a flat bed (-) driver, be careful not to damage the cover. · Be careful when you replace and clean bulbs to avoid burns or elec- trical shock. 9 9-05 Maintenance Maintenance OWNER MAINTENANCE The following lists are vehicle checks and inspections that should be per- formed at the frequencies indicated to help ensure safe, dependable operation of your vehicle. Any adverse conditions should be brought to the attention of your dealer as soon as possible. These Owner Maintenance Checks are generally not covered by warranties and you may be charged for labor, parts and lubricants used. Owner maintenance schedule When you stop for fuel: · Check the engine oil level. · Check the coolant level in the coolant reservoir. · Check the windshield washer fluid level. · Look for low or under-inflated tires. WARNING Be careful when checking your en- gine coolant level when the engine is hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam (Continued) (Continued) may blow out under pressure. This could cause burns or other serious injury. While operating your vehicle: · Note any changes in the sound of the exhaust or any smell of exhaust fumes in the vehicle. · Check for vibrations in the steering wheel. Notice any increased steering effort or looseness in the steering wheel, or change in its straightahead position. · Notice if your vehicle constantly turns slightly or pulls to one side when traveling on smooth, level road. · When stopping, listen and check for unusual sounds, pulling to one side, increased brake pedal travel or hardto-push brake pedal. · If any slipping or changes in the oper- ation of your transaxle occurs, check the transaxle fluid level. · Check the automatic transaxle P (Park) function. · Check the parking brake. · Check for fluid leaks under your vehi- cle (water dripping from the air con- ditioning system during or after use is normal). At least monthly: · Check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir. · Check the operation of all exterior lights, including the stop lights, turn signals and hazard warning flashers. · Check the inflation pressures of all tires including the spare. At least twice a year (i.e., every spring and fall): · Check the radiator, heater and air conditioning hoses for leaks or dam- age. · Check the windshield washer spray and wiper operation. Clean the wiper blades with clean cloth dampened with washer fluid. · Check the headlight alignment. · Check the muffler, exhaust pipes, shields and clamps. · Check the lap/shoulder belts for wear and function. 9-06 · Check for worn tires and loose wheel lug nuts. At least once a year: · Clean the body and door drain holes. · Lubricate the door hinges and checks, and hood hinges. · Lubricate the door and hood locks and latches. · Lubricate the door rubber weather- strips. · Check the air conditioning system. · Inspect and lubricate the automatic transaxle linkage and controls. · Clean the battery and terminals. · Check the brake fluid level. 9 9-07 Maintenance Maintenance SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE Scheduled maintenance service precaution Follow the Normal Maintenance Sched- ule if the vehicle is usually operated where none of the following conditions apply. If any of the following conditions apply, follow the Maintenance Under Severe Usage Conditions. · Repeated driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature · Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances · Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, un- paved, graveled or salt-spread roads · Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather · Driving in heavy dust condition · Driving in heavy traffic area · Driving on uphill, downhill, or moun- tain road repeatedly · Towing a trailer or using a camper, or roof rack · Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use of vehicle towing · Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph) · Frequently driving in stop-and-go condition If your vehicle is operated under the above conditions, you should inspect, replace or refill more frequently than the following Normal Maintenance Schedule. After the periods or distance shown in the chart, continue to follow the prescribed maintenance intervals. 9-08 NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [FOR EUROPE (EXCEPT RUSSIA)] The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first. NO. ITEM REMARK When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle *1 Coolant (Engine / Inverter) and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage. *2 Engine oil and engine oil filter Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start- ing a long trip. Kia recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 87 or higher (except Europe). For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives *3 Fuel additives (Gasoline) regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000 km (for Eu- rope, Australia and New Zealand)/10,000 km (except Europe, Australia and New Zealand). Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with informa- tion on how to use them. Do not mix other additives. 9 Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation *4 HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt and replace if necessary. If drive belt noise occurred, readjust drive belt ten- sion before replace. *5 Spark plug For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items. Maintenance 9-09 Maintenance NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [FOR EUROPE (EXCEPT RUSSIA)] (CONTINUED) Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)] Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 MAINTENANCE ITEM Air cleaner filter I I R I I R I I Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I Automatic transaxle fluid No check, No service required Battery condition I I I I I I I I Brake discs and pads I I I I I I I I Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I Brake fluid I R I R I R I R Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R Coolant (Engine / Inverter)*1 At first, Replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months after that, Replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months Cooling system At first, Inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months after that, Inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I Engine oil and engine oil fil- ter*2 Nu 2.0L GDI R R R R R R R R Exhaust system - I - I - I - I 9-10 Maintenance Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [For Europe (Except Russia)] Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 MAINTENANCE ITEM Fuel additives (Gasoline)*3 Add every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months Fuel filter (Gasoline) - I - R - I - R Fuel lines, hoses and connections - - - I - - - I Fuel tank air filter - I - R - I - R HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt*4 I I I I I I R I Parking brake - I - I - I - I Spark plugs*5 Nu 2.0L GDI Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120 months Steering gear rack, linkage and boots Suspension ball joints Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 9 I I I I I I I I Vacuum hoses and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I Vapor hose and fuel filler cap - - - I - - - I I: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change. 9-11 Maintenance MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [FOR EUROPE (EXCEPT RUSSIA)] MAINTENANCE ITEM Engine oil and engine oil filter HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt Air cleaner filter Spark plugs Automatic transaxle fluid Steering gear rack, linkage and boots Suspension ball joints Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors Parking brake Drive shaft and boots MAINTENANCE IN- TERVALS R R I R R R I I I I I DRIVING CONDITION DRIVING CONDI- TION Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 A, B, C, D, E, F, G, J, months K, L Every 45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months C, D, E, L Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months C, D, E, L Replace more frequently depending on the condition C, E Replace more frequently depending on the condition B, L Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles) A, C, D, E, F, G, L Inspect more frequently depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G Inspect more frequently depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G Inspect more frequently depending on the condition C, D, E, G Inspect more frequently depending on the condition C, D, G Inspect more frequently depending on the condition C, D, E, F, G, K 9-12 MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE IN- TERVALS Climate control air filter R Maintenance operation I: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change. DRIVING CONDITION Replace more frequently depending on the condition DRIVING CONDI- TION C, E, G SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS A: Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature. B: Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances. C: Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads. D: Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather E: Driving in heavy dust condition. F: Driving in heavy traffic area. G: Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads. J: Driving in very cold weather. K: Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph). L: Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions. 9 Maintenance 9-13 Maintenance NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [EXCEPT EUROPE (INCLUDING RUSSIA)] The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the frequency of service is determined by whichever occurs first. NO. ITEM REMARK When adding coolant, use only deionized water or soft water for your vehicle *1 Coolant (Engine/Inverter) and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An improper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine damage. *2 Engine oil and engine oil filter Check the engine oil level and leak every 500 km (350 miles) or before start- ing a long trip. Kia recommends that you use unleaded gasoline which has an octane rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 95 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 91 or higher (for Europe) or Octane Rating of RON (Research Octane Number) 91 / AKI (Antiknock Index) 87 or higher (except Europe). For customers who do not use good quality gasolines including fuel additives *3 Fuel additives (Gasoline) regularly, and have problems starting or the engine does not run smoothly, one bottle of additives added to the fuel tank at every 15,000 km (for Eu- rope, Australia and New Zealand)/10,000 km (except Europe, Australia and New Zealand). Additives are available from your authorized Kia dealer along with informa- tion on how to use them. Do not mix other additives. Inspect HSG belt for evidence of cuts, crocks, excessive wear or oil saturation *4 HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt and replace if necessary. If drive belt noise occurred, readjust drive belt ten- sion before replace. *5 Spark plug For your convenience, it can be replaced prior to it's interval when you do maintenance of other items. 9-14 Maintenance NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [EXCEPT EUROPE (INCLUDING RUSSIA)] (CONTINUED) Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 MAINTENANCE ITEM Air cleaner filter Except China, India, Middle East I I R I I R I I For China, India, Mid- dle East R R R R R R R R Air conditioner compressor/refrigerant I I I I I I I I Automatic transaxle fluid No check, no service required Battery condition I I I I I I I I Brake discs and pads Brake lines, hoses and connections I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I 9 Brake fluid I R I R I R I R Climate control air filter R R R R R R R R Coolant (Engine/Inverter)*1 At first, replace 210,000 km (140,000 miles) or 120 months After that, replace every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months Cooling system At first, inspect 60,000 km (40,000 miles) or 48 months After that, inspect every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 24 months Drive shaft and boots I I I I I I I I 9-15 Maintenance Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 MAINTENANCE ITEM Engine oil and engine oil fil- ter*2 Nu 2.0L GDI Except Middle East, Brazil: Replace every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months For Middle East, Brazil: Replace every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months Exhaust system - I - I - I - I Fuel additives (Gasoline)*3 Add every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 6 months Fuel filter (Gasoline) - I - R - I - R Fuel lines, hoses and connections - - - I - - - I Fuel tank air filter - I - R - I - R HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt*4 Except Middle East, Brazil: Inspect every 15,000 km (10,000 miles) or 12 months, and replace every 105,000 km (70,000 miles) or 48 months For Brazil: Inspect every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months, and re- place every 100,000 km (65,000 miles) or 48 months For Middle East: Inspect every 10,000 km (6,500 miles) or 12 months, and replace every 50,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months Parking brake - I - I - I - I Spark plugs*5 Nu 2.0L GDI Replace every 150,000 km (100,000 miles) or 120 months Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I I I I I I I I 9-16 Normal Maintenance Schedule - For Gasoline Engine [Except Europe (Including Russia)] Number of months or driving distance, whichever comes first MAINTENANCE INTERVALS Months 12 24 36 48 60 72 84 96 Miles×1,000 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 Km×1,000 15 30 45 60 75 90 105 120 MAINTENANCE ITEM Suspension ball joints I I I I I I I I Tire (pressure & tread wear) I I I I I I I I Vacuum hoses and crankcase ventilation hoses I I I I I I I I Vapor hose and fuel filler cap - - - I - - - I I: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change. 9 Maintenance 9-17 Maintenance MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS - FOR GASOLINE ENGINE [EXCEPT EUROPE (INCLUDING RUSSIA)] Engine oil and engine oil filter MAINTENANCE ITEM Except Middle East, Brazil For Middle East, Brazil HSG (Hybrid Starter & Generator) belt Except Middle East, Brazil For Brazil For Middle East Air cleaner filter Spark plugs Automatic transaxle fluid MAINTENANCE INTERVALS R R R I R I R I R R R DRIVING CONDITION Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months Every 45,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months Every 7,500 km (5,000 miles) or 6 months Every 50,000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months Every 30,000 km (20,000 miles) or 12 months Every 5,000 km (3,000 miles) or 6 months Replace more frequently de- pending on the condition Replace more frequently de- pending on the condition Every 90,000 km (60,000 miles) DRIVING CONDI- TION A, B, C, D, E, F, G, J, K, L A, B, C, D, E, F, G, J, K, L C, D, E, L C, D, E, L C, D, E, L C, D, E, L C, D, E, L C, D, E, L C, E B, L A, C, D, E, F, G, L 9-18 Maintenance MAINTENANCE ITEM MAINTENANCE INTERVALS DRIVING CONDITION DRIVING CONDI- TION Steering gear rack, linkage and boots I Inspect more frequently de- pending on the condition C, D, E, F, G Suspension ball joints I Inspect more frequently de- pending on the condition C, D, E, F, G Brake discs and pads, calipers and rotors I Inspect more frequently de- pending on the condition C, D, E, G Parking brake I Inspect more frequently de- pending on the condition C, D, G Drive shaft and boots I Inspect more frequently de- pending on the condition C, D, E, F, G, K Climate control air filter R Replace more frequently de- pending on the condition C, E, G Maintenance operation I: Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean or replace. R: Replace or change. SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS 9 A: Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 8 km (5 miles) in normal temperature or less than 16 km (10 miles) in freezing temperature. B: Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long distances. C: Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or salt-spread roads. D: Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materials or in very cold weather E: Driving in heavy dust condition. F: Driving in heavy traffic area. G: Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain roads. J: Driving in very cold weather. 9-19 Maintenance K: Driving over 170 km/h (106 mph). L: Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions. 9-20 EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS Engine oil and filter The engine oil and filter should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. If the vehi- cle is being driven in severe conditions, more frequent oil and filter changes are required. Fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections for leakage and damage. We recommend that the fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. Inspect the hose routing to assure that the hoses do not come in contact with any heat source, sharp edges or mov- ing component which might cause heat damage or mechanical wear. Inspect all hose connections, such as clamps and couplings, to make sure they are se- cure, and that no leaks are present. Ho- HSG (hybrid starter & generator) belt The HSG belt should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Vapor hose (for gasoline engine) and fuel filler cap The vapor hose and fuel filler cap should be inspected at those intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. ses should be replaced immediately if there is any evidence of deterioration or damage. Air cleaner filter We recommend that the air cleaner fil- Fuel filter (for gasoline) Kia gasoline vehicle is equipped a life- Make sure that a new vapor hose or fuel filler cap is correctly replaced. ter be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. time fuel filter that integrated with the fuel tank. Regular maintenance or re- placement is not needed but depends on fuel quality. If there are some im- portant safety matters like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard starting problem etc, fuel filter inspec- tion or replace is needed. We recommend that the fuel filter be Inspected or replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. Vacuum crankcase ventilation hoses (if equipped) Inspect the surface of hoses for evi- dence of heat and/or mechanical dam- age. Hard and brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and excessive swelling indicate deterioration. Particu- lar attention should be paid to examine those hose surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust manifold. Spark plugs (for gasoline engine) Make sure to install new spark plugs of the correct heat range. WARNING Do not disconnect and inspect spark plugs when the engine is hot. You may burn yourself. 9 Maintenance 9-21 Maintenance Cooling system Check the cooling system components, such as the radiator, coolant reservoir, hoses and connections for leakage and damage. Replace any damaged parts. Coolant (Engine/Inverter) The coolant should be changed at the intervals specified in the maintenance schedule. Automatic transaxle fluid Automatic transaxle fluid should not be checked under normal usage conditions. We recommend that the automatic transmission fluid changed by an au- thorized Kia dealer according to the maintenance schedule. NOTICE Automatic transaxle fluid color is ba- sically red. As the vehicle is driven, the auto- matic transaxle fluid will begin to look darker. It is normal condition and you should not judge the need to replace the fluid based upon the changed color. CAUTION The use of a non-specified fluid could result in transaxle malfunction and failure. Use only specified automatic trans- axle fluid (Refer to Recommended lubricants and capacities on page 10-11.) Brake hoses and lines Visually check for proper installation, chafing, cracks, deterioration and any leakage. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately. Brake fluid (if equipped) Check the brake fluid level in the brake fluid reservoir. The level should be be- tween MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reservoir. Use only hydraulic brake fluid conforming to DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification. Parking brake (if equipped) Inspect the parking brake system in- cluding the parking brake lever (or ped- al) and cables. Brake discs, pads, calipers and rotors Check the pads for excessive wear, discs for run out and wear, and calipers for fluid leakage. For more information on checking the pads or lining wear limit, we recom- mend to refer to the Kia web site. (https://www.kia-hotline.com) Suspension mounting bolts Check the suspension connections for looseness or damage. Retighten to the specified torque. Steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball joint With the vehicle stopped and engine off, check for excessive free-play in the steering wheel. Check the linkage for bends or damage. Check the dust boots and ball joints for deterioration, cracks, or damage. Re- place any damaged parts. Drive shafts and boots Check the drive shafts, boots and clamps for cracks, deterioration, or damage. Replace any damaged parts and, if necessary, repack the grease. 9-22 Air conditioning refrigerant Check the air conditioning lines and connections for leakage and damage. 9 9-23 Maintenance Maintenance ENGINE OIL Checking the engine oil level (BTPMJOF&OHJOF /V-(%* 1. Be sure the vehicle is on level ground. 2. Start the engine and allow it to reach normal operating tempera- ture. 3. Turn the engine off and wait for a few minutes (about 5 minutes) for the oil to return to the oil pan. 4. Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean, and re-insert it fully. WARNING n Radiator hose Be very careful not to touch the ra- diator hose when checking or adding the engine oil as it may be hot enough to burn you. (BTPMJOF&OHJOF /V-(%* 5. Pull the dipstick out again and check the level. The level should be between F (Full) and L (Low). CAUTION · Do not overfill the engine oil. It may damage the engine · Do not spill engine oil, when adding or changing engine oil. If you drop the engine oil on the engine room, wipe it off immediately. · When you wipe the oil level gauge, you should wipe it with a clean cloth. When mixed with debris, it can cause engine damage. If it is near or at L (Low), add enough oil to bring the level to F (Full). Do not overfill. Use a funnel to help prevent oil from being spilled on engine components. Use only the specified engine oil. (Refer to Recommended lubricants and ca- pacities on page 10-11.) Changing the engine oil and filter We recommend that the engine oil and filter be replaced by an authorized Kia dealer. 9-24 WARNING Used engine oil may cause skin irri- tation or cancer if left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods of time. Used engine oil contains chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory animals. Always protect your skin by washing your hands thoroughly with soap and warm wa- ter as soon as possible after han- dling used oil. 9 9-25 Maintenance Maintenance COOLANT The high-pressure cooling system has a reservoir filled with year round anti- freeze coolant. The reservoir is filled at the factory. Check the antifreeze protection and coolant level at least once a year, at the beginning of the winter season, and be- fore traveling to a colder climate. Checking the coolant level WARNING n Removing radiator cap CAUTION · When the engine overheats from low engine coolant, suddenly add- ing engine coolant may cause cracks in the engine. To prevent damage, add engine coolant slowly in small quantities. · Do not drive with no engine cool- ant. It may cause water pump fail- ure and engine seizure, etc. · Never attempt to remove the radi- ator cap while the engine is oper- ating or hot. Doing so might lead to cooling system and engine dam- age. Also, hot coolant or steam could cause serious personal in- jury. · Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down. Use extreme care when removing the radiator cap. Wrap a thick towel around it, and turn it counterclockwise slowly to the first stop. Step back while the pressure is released from the cool- ing system. When you are sure all the pressure has been released, press down on the cap, using a thick towel, and continue turning counterclockwise to remove it. (Continued) (Continued) · Even if the engine is not operating, do not remove the radiator cap or the drain plug while the engine and radiator are hot. Hot coolant and steam may still blow out under pressure, causing serious injury. The engine coolant and/or inverter coolant level is influenced by the hybrid system temperature. Before checking or refilling the engine coolant and/or in- verter coolant, turn the hybrid vehicle off. WARNING The electric motor (cool- ing fan) is controlled by engine coolant tempera- ture, refrigerant pressure and vehicle speed. It may sometimes operate even when the engine is not running. (Continued) 9-26 Maintenance (Continued) Use extreme caution when working near the blades of the cooling fan so that you are not injured by a rotat- ing fan blades. As the engine coolant temperature decreases, the electric motor will automatically shut off. This is a normal condition. If your vehicle is equipped with GDI, the electric motor (cooling fan) may operate until you disconnect the negative battery cable. Engine coolant Inverter coolant 0+' Check the condition and connections of Check the condition and connections of all cooling system hoses and heater ho- all cooling system hoses. Replace any ses. Replace any swollen or deteriora- swollen or deteriorated hoses. ted hoses. The coolant level should be filled be- 9 The coolant level should be filled be- tween MAX and MIN marks on the side tween F (Full) and L (Low) marks on the of the coolant reservoir when the en- side of the coolant reservoir when the gine is cool. engine is cool. If the coolant level is low, add enough If the coolant level is low, add enough specified coolant to provide protection specified coolant to provide protection against freezing and corrosion. Bring against freezing and corrosion. Bring the level to MAX, but do not overfill. If the level to F (Full), but do not overfill. frequent additions are required, we rec- If frequent additions are required, we ommend that the system be inspected recommend that the system be inspec- by an authorized Kia dealer. ted by an authorized Kia dealer. 9-27 Maintenance Recommended coolant · When adding coolant, use only deion- ized water or soft water for your ve- hicle and never mix hard water in the coolant filled at the factory. An im- proper coolant mixture can result in serious malfunction or engine dam- age. · The engine in your vehicle has alumi- num engine parts and must be pro- tected by an ethylene-glycol with phosphate based coolant to prevent corrosion and freezing. · DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol coolant or mix them with the speci- fied coolant. · Do not use a solution that contains more than 60% antifreeze or less than 35% antifreeze, which would re- duce the effectiveness of the solu- tion. For mixture percentage, refer to the following table. Ambient Tempera- ture Mixture Percentage (vol- ume) Antifreeze Water -15°C (5°F) 35 65 Ambient Tempera- ture -25°C (-13°F) -35°C (-31°F) -45°C (-49°F) Mixture Percentage (vol- ume) Antifreeze Water 40 60 50 50 60 40 9-28 0+' WARNING n Radiator cap Do not remove the radiator cap when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding hot coolant and steam may blow out under pressure caus- ing serious injury. WARNING n Coolant · Do not use radiator coolant or an- tifreeze in the washer fluid reser- voir. · Radiator coolant can severely ob- scure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage the paint and body trim. Changing the coolant We recommend that the coolant be re- placed by an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION Put a thick cloth around the radiator cap before refilling the coolant in or- der to prevent the coolant from overflowing into engine parts such as the alternator. 9 9-29 Maintenance Maintenance BRAKE FLUID (IF EQUIPPED) Checking the brake fluid level If the fluid level is excessively low, we recommend that the system be checked by an authorized Kia dealer. Use only the specified brake fluid (Re- fer to Recommended lubricants or ca- pacities on page 10-11.) Never mix different types of fluid. Check the fluid level in the reservoir pe- riodically. The fluid level should be be- tween MAX and MIN marks on the side of the reservoir. Before removing the reservoir cap and adding brake fluid, clean the area around the reservoir cap thoroughly to prevent brake fluid contamination. If the level is low, add fluid to the MAX level. The level will fall with accumula- ted mileage. This is a normal condition associated with the wear of the brake linings. WARNING n Loss of brake fluid In the event the brake system re- quires frequent additions of fluid, we recommend that the system be in- spected by an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING n Brake fluid When changing and adding brake flu- id, handle it carefully. Do not let it come in contact with your eyes. If brake fluid should come in contact with your eyes, immediately flush them with a large quantity of fresh tap water. Have your eyes examined by a doctor as soon as possible. CAUTION Do not allow brake fluid to contact the vehicle's body paint, as paint damage will result. Brake fluid, which has been exposed to open air for an extended time should never be used as its quality cannot be guaranteed. It should be properly disposed. Don't put in the wrong kind of fluid. A few drops of mineralbased oil, such as engine oil, in your brake system can damage brake system parts. 9-30 WASHER FLUID Checking the washer fluid level 0+' The reservoir is translucent so that you can check the level with a quick visual inspection. Check the fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir and add fluid if necessary. Plain water may be used if washer fluid is not available. However, use washer solvent with antifreeze characteristics in cold climates to prevent freezing. WARNING n Coolant · Do not use radiator coolant or an- tifreeze in the washer fluid reser- voir. · Radiator coolant can severely ob- scure visibility when sprayed on the windshield and may cause loss of vehicle control or damage to paint and body trim. · Windshield washer fluid agents contain some amounts of alcohol and can be flammable under cer- tain circumstances. Do not allow sparks or flame to contact the washer fluid or the washer fluid reservoir. Damage to the vehicle or occupants could occur. · Windshield washer fluid is poison- ous to humans and animals. Do not drink and avoid contacting windshield washer fluid. Serious injury or death could occur. 9 9-31 Maintenance Maintenance PARKING BRAKE (IF EQUIPPED) Checking the parking brake 0+' Check whether the stroke is within specification when the parking brake pedal is depressed with 30 kg (66 lb, 294N) of force. Also, the parking brake alone should securely hold the vehicle on a fairly steep grade. If the stroke is more or less than specified, we recom- mend that the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. Stroke : 6~7 notch 9-32 AIR CLEANER Filter replacement Maintenance 1. Pull out the air cleaner cover. It must be replaced when necessary, and should not be washed. You can clean the filter when inspecting the air cleaner element. Clean the filter by using compressed air. 9 2. Unlock by turning the locking lever downward. 3. Pull the air cleaner filter to replace. 9-33 Maintenance 4. Lock the cover with the reverse or- der. Replace the filter according to the Maintenance Schedule. If the vehicle is operated in extremely dusty or sandy areas, replace the ele- ment more often than the usual rec- ommended intervals. (Refer to Main- tenance under severe usage conditions on page 9-12.) CAUTION · Do not drive with the air cleaner removed; this will result in exces- sive engine wear. · When removing the air cleaner fil- ter, be careful that dust or dirt does not enter the air intake, or damage may result. · We recommend that you use parts for replacement from an author- ized Kia dealer. 9-34 CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER Filter inspection The climate control air filter should be replaced according to the maintenance schedule. If the vehicle is operated in severely air-polluted cities or on dusty rough roads for a long period, it should be inspected more frequently and re- placed earlier. When you replace the cli- mate control air filter, replace it per- forming the following procedure, and be careful to avoid damaging other components. 0+' 1. Open the glove box and remove the stoppers on both sides. 0+' 2. With the glove box open, pull the support strap (1). 0+' 3. Remove the climate control air fil- ter cover while pressing the lock on the right side of the cover. 0+' 4. Replace the climate control air fil- ter. 5. Reassemble in the reverse order of disassembly. NOTICE 9 When replacing the climate control air filter install it properly. Other- wise, the system may produce noise and the effectiveness of the filter may be reduced. 9-35 Maintenance Maintenance WIPER BLADES Blade inspection +#" NOTICE Commercial hot waxes applied by automatic car washes have been known to make the windshield diffi- cult to clean. Contamination of either the windshield or the wiper blades with foreign matter can reduce the effectiveness of the windshield wipers. Common sources of contamination are insects, tree sap, and hot wax treatments used by some commercial car washes. If the blades are not wiping properly, clean both the window and the blades with a good cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse thoroughly with clean water. CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper blades, do not use gasoline, kero- sene, paint thinner, or other solvents on or near them. Blade replacement When the wipers no longer clean ade- quately, the blades may be worn or cracked, and require replacement. CAUTION To prevent damage to the wiper arms or other components, do not (Continued) (Continued) attempt to move the wipers man- ually. CAUTION The use of a non-specified wiper blade could result in wiper malfunc- tion and failure. 9-36 Maintenance Front windshield wiper blade Type A 0+' For your convenience, move the wind- shield wiper blades to the service posi- tion as follows; After turning off the engine, move the wiper switch to the single wiping (MIST) position within 20 seconds and hold the switch more than 2 seconds until the wiper blade is in the fully up position. CAUTION Do not allow the wiper arm to fall against the windshield, since it may chip or crack the windshield. 1. Raise the wiper arm. 2. Lift up the wiper blade clip. Then pull down the blade assembly and remove it. 3. Install the new blade assembly. 4. Return the wiper arm on the wind- shield. 5. Turn ignition to the ON position and wiper arms will return to the nor- mal operating position. Type B 0). 9 0). -%" 1. Raise the wiper arm and turn the wiper blade assembly to expose the plastic locking clip. 9-37 Maintenance 5. Return the wiper arm on the wind- shield. 6. Turn ignition to the ON position and wiper arms will return to the nor- mal operating position. +#" +#" 2. Compress the clip and slide the blade assembly downward. 3. Lift it off the arm. 4. Install the new blade assembly. 9-38 BATTERY For best battery service · Keep the battery securely mounted. · Keep the battery top clean and dry. · Keep the terminals and connections clean, tight, and coated with petrole- um jelly or terminal grease. · Rinse any spilled electrolyte from the battery immediately with a solution of water and baking soda. · If the vehicle is not going to be used for an extended time, disconnect the battery cables. NOTICE Basically equipped battery is main- tenance free type. If your vehicle is equipped with the battery marked with LOWER and UPPER on the side, you can check the electrolyte level. The electrolyte level should be be- tween LOWER and UPPER. If the electrolyte level is low, it needs to add distilled (demineralized) water (Never add sulfuric acid or other electrolyte). When refill, be careful not to splash the battery and adja- cent components. And do not overfill the battery cells. It can cause corro- sion on other parts. After then en- sure that tighten the cell caps. We recommend that you contact an au- thorized Kia dealer. WARNING n Battery dangers (Continued) (Continued) Always read the following instructions carefully when handling a battery. Keep lighted cigarettes and all other flames or sparks away from the battery. Hydrogen, a highly com- bustible gas, is always present in battery cells and may explode if ignited. Keep batteries out of the reach of children because batteries contain highly corrosive SULFURIC ACID. Do not allow battery acid to contact your skin, eyes, clothing or paint finish. (Continued) 9 Maintenance 9-39 Maintenance (Continued) If any electrolyte gets into your eyes, flush your eyes with clean water for at least 15 minutes and get immediate medical atten- tion. If electrolyte gets on your skin, thoroughly wash the contacted area. If you feel pain or burning sensation, get medical attention im- mediately. Wear eye protection when charging or working near a battery. Always provide ventilation when working in an enclosed space. An inappropriately dis- posed battery can be harmful to the environ- ment and human health. Dispose the battery ac- cording to your local law(s) or regulation. (Continued) (Continued) The battery contains lead. Do not dispose of it after use. We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. · When lifting a plastic-cased bat- tery, excessive pressure on the case may cause battery acid to leak, resulting in personal injury. Lift with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners. · Never attempt to recharge the battery when the battery cables are connected. · The electrical ignition system works with high voltage. Never touch these components with the engine running or the ignition switched on. Failure to follow the above warnings can result in serious bodily injury or death. CAUTION · When you don't use the vehicle for a long time in the low temperature area, separate the battery and keep it indoors. · Always charge the battery fully to prevent battery case damage in low temperature area. · If you connect unauthorized elec- tronic devices to the battery, the battery may be discharged. Never use unauthorized devices. Battery capacity label &YBNQMF 06.- 9-40 Maintenance The actual battery label in the vehi- cle may differ from the illustration. 1. AGM90L-DIN : The Kia model name of battery 2. 90Ah(20HR) : The nominal capacity (in Ampere hours) 3. 170RC : The nominal reserve ca- pacity (in min.) 4. 12V : The nominal voltage 5. 850CCA (SAE) : The cold-test cur- rent in amperes by SAE 6. 680A : The cold-test current in am- peres by EN Battery recharging Your vehicle has a maintenance-free, calcium-based battery. · If the battery becomes discharged in a short time (because, for example, the headlights or interior lights were left on while the vehicle was not in use), recharge it by slow charging (trickle) for 10 hours. · If the battery gradually discharges because of high electric load while the vehicle is being used, recharge it at 20-30A for two hours. WARNING n Recharging battery When recharging the battery, ob- serve the following precautions: · The battery must be removed from the vehicle and placed in an area with good ventilation. · Do not allow cigarettes, sparks, or flame near the battery. · Watch the battery during charg- ing, and stop or reduce the charg- ing rate if the battery cells begin gassing (boiling) violently or if the temperature of the electrolyte of any cell exceeds 49°C (120°F). · Wear eye protection when check- ing the battery during charging. · Disconnect the battery charger in the following order. 1. Turn off the battery charger main switch. 2. Unhook the negative clamp from the negative battery ter- minal. 3. Unhook the positive clamp from the positive battery terminal. WARNING · Before performing maintenance or recharging the battery, turn off all accessories and stop the engine. · The negative battery cable must be removed first and installed last when the battery is disconnected. · Operation related to the battery is recommended to an authorized Kia dealer. CAUTION · Keep the battery away from wa- ter or any liquid. · For your safety, we recommend that you use parts for replace- ment from an authorized Kia deal- er. 9 Reset items Items should be reset after the battery has been discharged or the battery has been disconnected. · Auto up/down window (if equipped) · Sunroof (if equipped) · Trip computer 9-41 Maintenance · Climate control system · Integrated Memory System (if equip- ped) · Audio (if equipped) 9-42 TIRES AND WHEELS Maintenance Tire care For proper maintenance, safety, and maximum fuel economy, you must al- ways maintain recommended tire infla- tion pressures and stay within the load limits and weight distribution recom- mended for your vehicle. (Continued) hot days and when driving for long periods at high speeds. CAUTION Recommended cold tire inflation pressures · Underinflation also results in ex- cessive wear, poor handling and All tire pressures (including the spare) reduced fuel economy. Wheel de- should be checked when the tires are formation also is possible. Keep cold. Cold Tires means the vehicle has 0+' your tire pressures at the proper not been driven for at least three hours levels. If a tire frequently needs or driven less than 1.6 km (one mile). All specifications (sizes and pressures) refilling, we recommend that the Recommended pressures must be can be found on a label attached to the system be checked by an author- maintained for the best ride, top vehi- vehicle. ized Kia dealer. cle handling, and minimum tire wear. For recommended inflation pressure, refer to Tires and wheels on page 10-09. WARNING n Tire underinflation · Overinflation produces a harsh ride, excessive wear at the center of the tire tread, and a greater possibility of damage from road 9 hazards. Severe underinflation (70 kPa (10 psi) or more) can lead to severe heat build-up, causing blowouts, tread separation and other tire fail- ures that can result in the loss of ve- hicle control leading to severe injury or death. This risk is much higher on (Continued) 9-43 Maintenance CAUTION · Warm tires normally exceed rec- ommended cold tire pressures by 28 to 41 kPa (4 to 6 psi). Do not release air from warm tires to ad- just the pressure or the tires will be underinflated. · Be sure to reinstall the tire infla- tion valve caps. Without the valve cap, dirt or moisture could get into the valve core and cause air leak- age. If a valve cap is missing, in- stall a new one as soon as possi- ble. WARNING n Tire inflation Overinflation or underinflation can reduce tire life, adversely affect ve- hicle handling, and lead to sudden tire failure. This could result in loss of vehicle control and potential in- jury. CAUTION n Tire pressure Always observe the following: · Check tire pressure when the tires are cold. (After vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or hasn't been driven more than 1.6 km (one mile) since startup.) · Check the pressure of your spare tire each time you check the pres- sure of other tires. · Never overload your vehicle. Be careful not to overload a vehicle luggage rack if your vehicle is equipped with one. · Worn, old tires can cause acci- dents. If your tread is badly worn, or if your tires have been dam- aged, replace them. Checking tire inflation pressure Check your tires once a month or more. Also, check the tire pressure of the spare tire. How to check Use a good quality gauge to check tire pressure. You can not tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they're underinfla- ted. Check the tire's inflation pressure when the tires are cold. - "Cold" means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1.6 km (one mile). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gauge firmly onto the valve to get a pressure meas- urement. If the cold tire inflation pres- sure matches the recommended pres- sure on the tire and loading information label, no further adjustment is necessa- ry. If the pressure is low, add air until you reach the recommended amount. If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the cen- ter of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gauge. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. 9-44 Maintenance WARNING · Inspect your tires frequently for proper inflation as well as wear and damage. Always use a tire pressure gauge. · Tires with too much or too little pressure wear unevenly causing poor handling, loss of vehicle con- trol, and sudden tire failure leading to accidents, injuries, and even death. The recommended cold tire pressure for your vehicle can be found in this manual and on the tire label located on the driver's side center pillar. During rotation, check the tires for cor- rect balance. When rotating tires, check for uneven wear and damage. Abnormal wear is usually caused by incorrect tire pres- sure, improper wheel alignment, outof-balance wheels, severe braking or severe cornering. Look for bumps or bulges in the tread or side of tire. Re- place the tire if you find either of these conditions. Replace the tire if fabric or cord is visible. After rotation, be sure to bring the front and rear tire pressures to specification and check lug nut tight- ness. Refer to Tires and wheels on page 10-09. 8JUIPVUBTQBSFUJSF %JSFDUJPOBMUJSFT JGFRVJQQFE 4#-"" · Worn tires can cause accidents. Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. · Remember to check the pressure of your spare tire. Kia recom- mends that you check the spare every time you check the pressure of the other tires on your vehicle. Tire rotation To equalize tread wear, it is recommen- ded that the tires be rotated every 12,000 km (7,500 miles) or sooner if ir- regular wear develops. 9 $#(2" Disc brake pads should be inspected for wear whenever tires are rotated. 9-45 Maintenance NOTICE Rotate radial tires that have an asymmetric tread pattern only from front to rear and not from right to left. WARNING If you notice your vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your wheels may need to be rebalanced. Tire replacement CAUTION Improper wheel weights can damage your vehicle's aluminum wheels. Use only approved wheel weights. · Do not use the compact spare tire (if equipped) for tire rotation. · Do not mix bias ply and radial ply tires under any circumstances. This may cause unusual handling characteristics that could result in death, severe injury, or property damage. Wheel alignment and tire balance The wheels on your vehicle were aligned and balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest tire life and best overall performance. In most cases, you will not need to have your wheels aligned again. However, if you notice unusual tire wear or your vehicle pulling one way or the other, the alignment may need to be reset. 06.- If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear Indicator (A) will appear as a solid band across the tread. This shows there is less than 1.6 mm (1/16 in.) of tread left on the tire. Replace the tire when this happens. Do not wait for the band to appear across the entire tread before replacing the tire. 9-46 Maintenance NOTICE We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally sup- plied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving perform- ance. CAUTION When replacing the tires, recheck and tighten the wheel nuts after driving about 50 km (31 miles) and recheck after driving about 1,000 km (620 miles). If the steering wheel shakes or the vehicle vibrates while driving, the tire is out of balance. Align the tire balance. If the problem is not solved, we recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer. WARNING n Replacing tires (Continued) (Continued) To reduce the chance of serious or fatal injuries from an accident caused by tire failure or loss of vehi- cle control: · Replace tires that are worn, show uneven wear, or are damaged. Worn tires can cause loss of brak- ing effectiveness, steering control, and traction. · Do not drive your vehicle with too little or too much pressure in your tires. This can lead to uneven wear and tire failure. · When replacing tires, never mix ra- dial and bias-ply tires on the same car. You must replace all tires (in- cluding the spare) if moving from radial to bias-ply tires. · Using tires and wheels other than the recommended sizes could cause unusual handling character- istics and poor vehicle control, re- sulting in a serious accident. (Continued) (Continued) · Wheels that do not meet Kia's specifications may fit poorly and result in damage to the vehicle or unusual handling and poor vehicle control. · The ABS works by comparing the speed of the wheels. The tire size affects wheel speed. When replac- ing tires, all 4 tires must use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a differ- ent size can cause the ABS (Antilock Brake System) and ESC (Elec- tronic Stability Control) to work ir- regularly. Wheel replacement When replacing the metal wheels for 9 any reason, make sure the new wheels are equivalent to the original factory units in diameter, rim width and offset. WARNING A wheel that is not the correct size may adversely affect wheel and (Continued) 9-47 Maintenance (Continued) bearing life, braking and stopping abilities, handling characteristics, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, snow chain clearance, speedometer and odometer calibra- tion, headlight aim and bumper height. Tire traction Tire traction can be reduced if you drive on worn tires, tires that are improperly inflated or on slippery road surfaces. Tires should be replaced when tread wear indicators appear. Slow down whenever there is rain, snow or ice on the road to reduce the possibility of losing control of the vehicle. Tire maintenance In addition to proper inflation, correct wheel alignment helps to decrease tire wear. If you find a tire is worn uneven- ly, have your dealer check the wheel alignment. When you have new tires installed, make sure they are balanced. This will increase vehicle ride comfort and tire life. Additionally, a tire should always be rebalanced if it is removed from the wheel. Tire sidewall labeling 0+'- This information identifies and de- scribes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the tire identification number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a re- call. 1. Manufacturer or brand name Manufacturer or Brand name is shown. 2. Tire size designation A tire's sidewall is marked with a tire size designation. You will need this in- formation when selecting replacement tires for your vehicle. The following ex- plains what the letters and numbers in the tire size designation mean. Example tire size designation: (These numbers are provided as an ex- ample only; your tire size designator could vary depending on your vehicle.) P235/55R19 108T P - Applicable vehicle type (tires marked with the prefix P'' are intended for use on pas- senger vehicles or light trucks; however, not all tires have this marking). 235 - Tire width in millimeters. 55 - Aspect ratio. The tire's sec- tion height as a percentage of its width. R - Tire construction code (Ra- dial). 19 - Rim diameter in inches. 108 - Load Index, a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry. T - Speed Rating Symbol. See the speed rating chart in 9-48 Maintenance this section for additional information. Speed Rating Maximum Speed WARNING Wheel size designation Symbol n Tire age Wheels are also marked with important information that you need if you ever have to replace one. The following ex- plains what the letters and numbers in the wheel size designation mean. Example wheel size designation: 7.5JX19 7.5 - Rim width in inches. J - Rim contour designation. 19 - Rim diameter in inches. Tire speed ratings The chart below lists many of the dif- ferent speed ratings currently being used for passenger car tires. The speed Z Above 240 km/h (149 mph) 3. Checking tire life (TIN: Tire Identification Number) Any tires that are over 6 years old, based on the manufacturing date, (in- cluding the spare tire) should be re- placed by new ones. You can find the manufacturing date on the tire sidewall (possibly on the inside of the wheel), displaying the DOT Code. The DOT Code is a series of numbers on a tire consist- ing of numbers and English letters. The manufacturing date is designated by Tires degrade over time, even when they are not being used. Regardless of the remaining tread, we recommend that tires be re- placed after approximately six (6) years of normal service. Heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process. Failure to follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure, which could lead to a loss of control and an accident involving se- rious injury or death. rating is part of the tire size designa- the last four digits (characters) of the 4. Tire ply composition and material tion on the sidewall of the tire. This DOT code. The number of layers or plies of rub- symbol corresponds to that tire's de- signed maximum safe operating speed. Speed Rating Symbol S T Maximum Speed 180 km/h (112 mph) 190 km/h (118 mph) DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO The front part of the DOT means a plant code number, tire size and tread pattern and the last four numbers indi- cate week and year manufactured. For example: DOT XXXX XXXX 1616 represents that the tire was produced in the 16th week ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire man- ufacturers also must indicate the ma- terials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. The letter "R" means radial ply construction; the letter "D" means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the letter "B" means belted-bias ply construction. 9 H 210 km/h (130 mph) of 2016. V 240 km/h (149 mph) 9-49 Maintenance 5. Maximum permissible inflation pressure This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum per- missible inflation pressure. Refer to the Tire specification and pressure label on page 10-15 for recommended infla- tion pressure. 6. Maximum load rating This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire. 7. Uniform tire quality grading Quality grades can be found where ap- plicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: TREADWEAR 200 TRACTION AA TEMPERATURE A Tread wear The tread wear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con- ditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one-and-a-half times (1½) as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires de- pends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart sig- nificantly from the norm due to varia- tions in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate. These grades are molded on the sidewalls of passenger vehicle tires. The tires available as standard or optional equipment on your vehicle may vary with respect to grade. Traction - AA, A, B & C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. Temperature - A, B & C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled condi- tions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive tem- perature can lead to sudden tire failure. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead brak- ing traction tests, and does not in- clude acceleration, cornering, hydro- planing, or peak traction characteris- tics. 9-50 Maintenance WARNING n Tire temperature The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is prop- erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex- cessive speed, underinflation, or ex- cessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible sudden tire failure. This can cause loss of vehicle control and serious injury or death. Low aspect ratio tire (if equipped) Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect ratio is lower than 50, are provided for sporty looks. Because the low aspect ratio tires are optimized for handling and braking, it may be more uncomfortable to ride in and there is more noise compare with normal tires. CAUTION Because the sidewall of the low as- pect ratio tire is shorter than the (Continued) (Continued) normal, the wheel and tire of the low aspect ratio tire is easier to be damaged. So, follow the instructions below. - When driving on a rough road or off road, drive cautiously because tires and wheels may be damaged. And after driving, inspect tires and wheels. - When passing over a pothole, speed bump, manhole, or curb stone, drive slowly so that the tires and wheels are not damaged. - If the tire is impacted, we recom- mend that you inspect the tire condition or contact an authorized Kia dealer. - To prevent damage to the tire, in- spect the tire condition and pres- sure every 3,000 km. CAUTION · It is not easy to recognize the tire damage with your own eyes. But if there is the slightest hint of tire damage, even though you cannot see the tire damage with your own eyes, have the tire checked or re- placed because the tire damage may cause air leakage from the tire. · If the tire is damaged by driving on a rough road, off road, pothole, manhole, or curb stone, it will not be covered by the warranty. · You can find out the tire informa- tion on the tire sidewall. 9 9-51 Maintenance FUSES #MBEFUZQF $BSUSJEHFUZQF .VMUJGVTF #'5 Left side: Normal 9-52 Right side: Blown A vehicle's electrical system is protec- ted from electrical overload damage by fuses. This vehicle has 2 (or 3) fuse panels, one located in the driver's side panel bolster, the others in the engine com- partment near the battery. If any of your vehicle's lights, accesso- ries, or controls do not work, check the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse has blown, the element inside the fuse will melt. If the electrical system does not work, first check the driver's side fuse panel. Before replacing a blown fuse, discon- nect the negative battery cable. Always replace a blown fuse with one of the same rating. If the replacement fuse blows, this indi- cates an electrical problem. Avoid using the system involved and immediately consult an authorized Kia dealer. Three kinds of fuses are used: blade type for lower amperage rating, car- tridge type, and multi fuse for higher amperage ratings. WARNING n Fuse replacement · Never replace a fuse with anything but another fuse of the same rat- ing. · A higher capacity fuse could cause damage and possibly a fire. · Never install a wire or aluminum foil instead of the proper fuse even as a temporary repair. It may cause extensive wiring damage and a possible fire. · Do not arbitrarily modify or addon electric wiring of the vehicle. CAUTION Do not use a screwdriver or any oth- er metal object to remove fuses be- cause it may cause a short circuit and damage the system. 0+' Maintenance NOTICE The actual fuse/relay panel label may differ from equipped items. CAUTION · When replacing a blown fuse or re- lay with a new one, make sure the new fuse or relay fits tightly into the clips. The incomplete fastening fuse or relay may cause the vehi- cle wiring and electric systems damage and a possible fire. · Do not remove fuses, relays and terminals fastened with bolts or nuts. The fuses, relays and termi- nals may be fastened incomplete- ly, and it may cause a possible fire. If fuses, relays and terminals fas- tened with bolts or nuts are blown, we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer. (Continued) (Continued) · Do not input any other objects ex- cept fuses or relays into fuse/relay terminals such as a driver or wir- ing. It may cause contact failure and system malfunction. · Do not plug in screwdrivers or af- termarket wiring into the terminal originally designed for fuse and re- lays only. The electrical system and wiring of the vehicle interior may be damaged or burned due to contact failure. Inner panel fuse replacement 0+' 1. Turn the ignition switch and all oth- er switches off. 2. Open the fuse panel cover. If the switch is located in the OFF , caution will be displayed in the clus- ter. 0+' 3. Pull the suspected fuse straight out. Use the removal tool provided in the main fuse box in the engine compartment. 9 4. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. Spare fuses are provided in the in- strument panel fuse panel (or in the engine compartment fuse pan- el). 5. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. 9-53 Maintenance If it fits loosely, we recommend that you consult an authorized Kia dealer. If you do not have a spare, use a fuse of the same rating from a circuit you may not need for operating the vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter fuse. If the headlights or taillights, stop lights, courtesy lamp, day time running lights (D.R.L) do not work and the fuses are OK, check the fuse panel in the en- gine compartment. If a fuse is blown, it must be replaced. Fuse switch 0+' Always, put the fuse switch at the ON position. If you move the switch to the OFF posi- tion, some items such as audio and dig- ital clock must be reset and transmitter (or smart key) may not work properly. If the fuse switch is in OFF, a warning sign will illuminate on the dashboard. CAUTION · Put all switches in ON when driv- ing. · If the vehicle remains idle for over 1 month, put all switches in OFF to prevent the batteries from being discharged. · Excluding long-term parking for over 1 month, the contact points of switches may wear out upon extensive use. Please refrain from excessive use of switches. Engine compartment fuse replacement 1. Turn the ignition switch and all oth- er switches off. 2. Remove the fuse panel cover by pressing the tab and pulling the cover up. When the blade type fuse is disconnected, remove it by using the clip designed for changing fuses located in the engine room fuse box. Upon removal, securely insert reserve fuse of equal quantity. 3. Check the removed fuse; replace it if it is blown. To remove or insert the fuse, use the fuse puller in the engine compartment fuse panel. 9-54 Maintenance 4. Push in a new fuse of the same rating, and make sure it fits tightly in the clips. If it fits loosely, we rec- ommend that you consult an au- thorized Kia dealer. Multi fuse CAUTION After checking the fuse panel in the engine compartment, securely install the fuse panel. If not, cover through the audible clicking sound. Electrical failures may occur from water con- tact. NOTICE If the multi fuse is blown, we recom- mend that you consult an author- ized Kia dealer. Main fuse If the multi fuse is blown, it must be re- moved as follows: 1. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 2. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- ture above. 9 3. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating. 4. Reinstall in the reverse order of re- moval. If the main fuse is blown, it must be re- moved as follows: 1. Turn off the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative battery cable. 3. Remove the nuts shown in the pic- ture above. 9-55 Maintenance 4. Replace the fuse with a new one of the same rating. 5. Reinstall in the reverse order of re- moval. Fuse/relay panel description %SJWFSTTJEFGVTFQBOFM #BUUFSZUFSNJOBMDPWFS NOTICE The electronic system may not function correctly even when the engine room and internal fuse box's individual fuses are not disconnec- ted. In such case the cause of the problem may be disconnection of the main fuse (BFT type), which is located inside the positive battery terminal (+) cap. Since the main fuse is designed more intricately than other parts, please visit the nearest Kia dealer and service center. CAUTION Visually inspect the battery cap for secure closing. If the battery cap is not securely latched, the electrical system may be damaged to due in- flux of moisture into the system. 0+' &OHJOFDPNQBSUNFOUGVTFQBOFM Inside the fuse/relay panel covers, you can find the fuse/relay label describing fuse/relay name and capacity. NOTICE Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of printing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label. 9-56 Driver's side fuse panel 9 0+')1- 9-57 Maintenance Maintenance Instrument panel (Driver's side fuse panel) Fuse Name Symbol Fuse rat- ing Circuit Protected MODULE 7 10A Around View Monitor Unit, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module MODULE 5 A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Driver IMS Module, Head Lamp 10A LH/RH, Auto Head Lamp Leveling Device Module, Fuel Lid & Trunk Open Switch, Shift Lever Indicator, Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module MODULE 6 10A BCM, Smart Key Control Module A/CON 10A A/C Control Module, E/R Junction Block (RLY. 4 - Blower Relay), Ionizer, Active Incar Sensor, Electronic A/C Compressor START 10A Transaxle Range Switch, Smart Key Control Module A/BAG MODULE 3 MODULE 4 INTERIOR LAMP MDPS 15A SRS Control Module, Passenger Occupant Detection Sensor 10A BCM, Stop Lamp Switch, AFLS Unit, Keyboard, VESS Unit, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Sport Mode Switch Console Switch, Blind Spot Detection Radar LH/RH, Smart Parking Assist Con- 10A trol Module, Smart Cruise Control Unit, Lane Keeping Assist Module, Active Air Flap Unit, Electric Parking Brake Module, BMS Control Module Trunk Room Lamp, Driver/Passenger Door Lamp, Glove Box Lamp, Driver/ 10A Passenger Smart Key Outside Handle, Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Over- head Console Lamp, Rear Personal Lamp LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Room Lamp, Center Personal Lamp 10A MDPS Unit (Column/Rack) 9-58 Maintenance Fuse Name IG1 Symbol Fuse rat- ing Circuit Protected 25A PCB Block (Fuse - OPCU2/ELECTRICAL WATER PUMP/TCU2/ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOTER 3/HEV ECU2/ECU3) MODULE 9 10A Smart Key Control Module WASHER 15A Multifunction Switch (Wiper Low & Washer Switch) MODULE 8 10A Driver/Passenger Door Module CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster MULTI MEDIA 15A Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Keyboard HTD STRG 15A BCM (Steering Wheel Heated) MODULE 1 10A Console Switch, Active Air Flap Unit, Gateway, Driver/Passenger Door Module DR LOCK 20A Door Lock Relay, Door Unlock Relay, ICM Relay Box (Dead Lock Relay) MEMORY 2 10A Siren Control Module, Ultrasonic Intrusion Protection Sensor SMART KEY 15A Smart Key Control Module A/BAG IND TRUNK 10A Instrument Cluster (Air Bag IND. Power) 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Fuel Filler & Trunk Open Switch, ICM Relay Box (Fuel Filler Open Relay) 9 SUNROOF 2 20A Sunroof Control Unit (Roller) BATTERY MANAGE- BATTERY MENT MANAGEMENT 20A BMS Control Module MEMORY 1 Instrument Cluster, A/C Control Module, Data Link Connector, BCM, Wireless 10A Charger, Driver IMS Module, Rain Sensor, ICM Relay Box (Outside Mirror Fold- ing/Unfolding Mirror Relay), Security Indicator, Auto Light & Photo Sensor, Driver/Passenger Door Module 9-59 Maintenance Fuse Name FOG LAMP REAR GATEWAY S/HEATER REAR SUNROOF 1 S/HEATER FRONT ECS MODULE 2 P/WDW RH P/SEAT PASS AMP BRAKE SWITCH P/WDW LH P/SEAT DRV Symbol Fuse rat- ing Circuit Protected 10A ICM Relay Box (Rear Fog Lamp Relay) 10A Gateway 25A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module 20A Sunroof Control Unit (Glass) 25A Front Air Ventilation Seat Control Module, Front Seat Warmer Control Module 15A Not Used Audio, A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Keyboard, Wireless Charger, Around View 10A Monitor Unit, AMP, Power Outside Mirror Switch, Smart Key Control Module, BCM, Rear USB Charger, VESS Unit, E/R Junction Block (RLY. 7 - Power Outlet Relay) Power Window RH Relay, Rear Safety Power Window Module LH, Rear Power 25A Window Switch LH, Power Window Main Switch, [LHD] Passenger Safety Power Window Module [RHD] Driver Safety Power Window Module 30A Passenger Seat Manual Switch, Walk In Relay Module, Passenger Reclining Lim- it Switch 25A AMP 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module, Start/Stop Button Switch Power Window LH Relay, Rear Safety Power Window Module RH, Rear Power 25A Window Switch RH, Power Window Main Switch, [LHD] Driver Safety Power Window Module [RHD] Passenger Safety Power Window Module 30A Driver Seat Manual Switch, Driver IMS Module 9-60 Fuse Name POWER OUTLET Symbol Fuse rat- ing Circuit Protected 20A Front Power Outlet #1, Front Cigarette Lighter & Power Outlet #2 Maintenance 9 9-61 Maintenance Engine compartment fuse panel (for Hybrid) 9-62 Engine compartment fuse panel (for Plug-in Hybrid) 9 0+')1- 9-63 Maintenance Maintenance Battery terminal cover 9-64 Maintenance Engine room compartment fuse panel Fuse Name Symbol MDPS 1 Fuse rating 80A MDPS Unit (Column) Circuit Protected COOLING FAN 60A RLY. 2 (Cooling Fan Relay) MULTI FUSE B+5 B+3 REAR HEATED ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOSTER 2 BLOWER POWER OUTLET1 IG2 B+1 EEWP B+2 ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOSTER 1 IG1 2 ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOSTER EEWP 1 ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOSTER 50A PCB Block (Engine Control Relay, Fuse -FUEL PUMP/ECU2/TCU1/HORN/WIPER1/BATTERY C/FAN) 50A Smart Junction Block (IPS 2 (IPS 5), IPS 3 (IPS 6), IPS 7, IPS 8) 50A RLY. 11 (Rear Heated Relay) 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit 40A RLY. 4 (Blower Relay) 40A RLY. 7 (Power Outlet Relay) 30A PCB Block (IG2 Relay) Smart Junction Block (Fuse - TRUNK, SUNROOF2, S/HEATER 60A REAR, SUNROOF1, P/WDW RH, P/SEAT PASS, P/WDW LH, P/SEAT DRV) 9 60A Engine Electric Water Pump 60A Smart Junction Block (IPS 1, IPS 4, Fuse - FOG LAMP REAR, S/ HEATER FRONT, AMP) 40A Integrated Brake Actuation Unit 40A PCB Block (IG1/ACC Relay) 9-65 Maintenance FUSE Fuse Name EPB1 Symbol 1 Fuse rating Circuit Protected 30A Electric Parking Brake Module H/Lamp Washer B+4 EPB 2 2 30A RLY. 9 (H/Lamp Washer Relay) Smart Junction Block (Leak Current Autocut Device Fuse - INTERI- 40A OR LAMP, MULTI MEDIA, MEMORY2, MEMORY1, Fuse - MODULE1, DR LOCK, SMART KEY, BRAKE SWITCH) 30A Electric Parking Brake Module OPCU 1 1 OPCU 20A Electric Oil Pump Unit DEICER 20A RLY. 10 (Deicer Relay) AMS HEATED MIRROR 10A Battery Sensor 10A A/C Control Module, Driver/Passenger Power Outside Mirror WIPER 2 2 10A BCM, PCM H/LAMP HI 20A Not used HEV ECU 1 1 HEV ECU 10A HPCU OPCU2 1 OPCU 10A Electric Oil Pump Unit ELECTRICAL WATER PUMP ELECTRICAL WATER PUMP 10A Electric Water Pump (HEV) FUEL PUMP 20A Fuel Pump Relay 9-66 FUSE Fuse Name ECU 1 SENSORS 2 TCU 2 ACTIVE HYDRAULIC BOOSTER 3 POWER OUTLET 3 B/UP LAMP PTC HEATER 1 Symbol 3 Fuse rating Circuit Protected 20A PCM Mass Air Flow Sensor, Fuel Pump Relay, Oil Control Valve #1/#2, 10A Canister Close Valve, Camshaft Position Sensor #1/#2, Purge Con- trol Solenoid Valve 15A Transaxle Range Switch 10A Multipurpose Check Connector, Integrated Brake Actuation Unit 20A Rear Power Outlet 10A PCM, Transaxle Range Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Com- bination Lamp (IN) LH/RH 50A PTC HEATER PTC HEATER 2 50A PTC HEATER IG3 1 IG3 2 IG3 3 IG3 4 SENSOR 1 1 IG3 10A HYBRID WATER PUMP 2 IG3 15A PCU/HPCU/POSITION SWITCH 3 IG3 10A HYBRID OBC SIG 9 IG3 20A IG3 3 RELAY 15A Oxygen Sensor (Up/Down), E/R Junction Block (Cooling Fan Relay) Maintenance 9-67 Maintenance FUSE Fuse Name IGN COIL ECU 2 TCU 1 HEV ECU 2 ECU 3 POWER OUTLET2 HORN WIPER 1 Symbol 2 HEV ECU 1 Fuse rating Circuit Protected 20A Ignition Coil #1/#2/#3/#4 10A PCM 10A PCM 10A HPCU, E/R Junction Block (Battery C/Fan Relay) 10A PCM 20A Front Power Outlet #1 20A Horn Relay, ICM Relay Box (Burglar Alarm Horn Relay) 30A Wiper Power Relay BATTERY C/FAN BATTERY C/FAN 15A E/R Junction Block (Battery C/Fan Relay) Relay Symbol Relay Name COOLING FAN Relay Type MINI BLOWER Relay MICRO BATTERY C/FAN BATTERY C/FAN Relay POWER OUTLET Relay H/LAMP WASHER Relay DEICER Relay MICRO MICRO MICRO MICRO 9-68 Symbol IG2 Relay Name REAR HEATED Relay PTC HEATER RELAY 1 PTC HEATER RELAY 2 IG 3 RELAY Type MINI MICRO MICRO MICRO 9 9-69 Maintenance Maintenance LIGHT BULBS Bulb replacement precaution Please prepare bulbs with appropriate standards in case of emergencies. Re- fer to Bulb wattage on page 10-07. When changing bulbs and sorts, first turn off the engine at a safe place, firmly apply the side brake and take out the battery's negative (-) terminal. WARNING n Working on the lights Prior to working on the light, firmly apply the parking brake, ensure that the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position and turn off the lights to avoid sudden movement of the vehicle and burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock. Use only the bulbs of the specified wat- tage. WARNING Be sure to replace the burned-out bulb with one of the same wattage rating. Otherwise, it may cause ex- tensive wiring damage and possible fire. CAUTION If you don't have necessary tools, the correct bulbs and the expertise, consult an authorized Kia dealer. In many cases, it is difficult to replace vehicle light bulbs because other parts of the vehicle must be re- moved before you can get to the bulb. This is especially true if you have to remove the headlight as- sembly to get to the bulb(s). Remov- ing/installing the headlight assembly can result in damage to the vehicle. CAUTION · If unauthentic parts or substan- dard lights are used when chang- ing lights, it may lead to fuse dis- connection and malfunction, and other wiring damages. · Do not install extra lamps or LED to the vehicle. If supplementary lights are installed, it may lead to lamp malfunction and flickering of the lights. In addition, the fuse box and other writing may be dam- aged. · Lamp part malfunction due to network failure The headlamp, taillight, and fog light may lit up when the head lamp switch is turned ON, and not light up when the taillight or for light switch is turned ON. This may be cause by network failure or vehicle electrical control system malfunction. If there is a problem, we recommend the sys- tem be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. 9-70 Maintenance · Lamp part malfunction due to electri- cal control system stabilization A normally functioning lamp may flicker momentarily. This momentary occurrence is due to stabilization unc- tion of the vehicle's electrical on con- trol system. If the lamp soon returns to normal, the vehicle does not re- quire service. However, if the lamp goes out after he momentary flickering, or the flick- ering continues, we recommend the system be serviced by an authorized Kia dealer. NOTICE · If the light bulb or lamp connector is removed from an operating lamp activated by electricity, the fuse box's electronic device may scan it as a malfunction. There- fore, a lamp malfunction history may be recorded in Diagnostic Trouble Code (DTC) in the fuse box. (Continued) (Continued) · It is normal for an operating lamp may blink temporarily. Since this occurrence is due stabilization function of the vehicle's electronic control device, if the lamp lights up normally after temporary blinking, there is no problem in the vehicle. However, if the lamp continues to blink several times or turn off completely, there may be an error in the vehicle's electronic control device. So we recommend that you have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer immedi- ately. NOTICE We recommend that the headlight aiming be adjusted after an accident or after the headlight assembly is reinstalled at an authorized Kia deal- er. NOTICE After driving in heavy rain or wash- ing, headlamp and tail lamp lenses could appear frosty. This condition is caused by the temperature differ- ence between the lamp inside and outside. This is similar to the con- densation on your windows inside your vehicle during the rain and doesn't indicate a problem with your vehicle. If the water leaks into the lamp bulb circuitry, have the vehicle checked by an authorized Kia dealer. 9 9-71 Maintenance Light bulb position (front) )FBEMBNQ5ZQF" 4. Headlamp (Low/High) 5. Day time running lamp/Position lamp (LED type) )FBEMBNQ5ZQF# 0+'-# 1. Front turn signal lamp 2. Headlamp (Low) 3. Headlamp (High) 9-72 Light bulb position (rear) 3FBSDPNCJOBUJPOMBNQ5ZQF" -JDFOTFQMBUFMBNQ 0+')3FBSDPNCJOBUJPOMBNQ5ZQF# )JHINPVOUFETUPQMBNQ 0+')- 1. Rear turn signal lamp 2. Stop lamp (LED type) 3. Tail lamp (LED type) 4. Back-up lamp 5. Rear fog lamp (LED type) 6. License plate lamp 7. High mounted stop lamp Light bulb position (side) Maintenance 0+')- 0+')- 9 0+'-# 1. Side repeater lamp (LED type) 9-73 Maintenance Headlamp (HID type) bulb replacement If the light bulb does not operate, we recommend that you checked an au- thorized Kia dealer. WARNING n HID Headlamp (if equipped) Do not attempt to replace or inspect the HID headlamp (XENON bulb) due to electric shock danger. If the light bulb does not operate, we recom- mend that you checked an author- ized Kia dealer. NOTICE HID lamps have superior perform- ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps are estimated by the manufacturer to last twice as long or longer than halogen bulbs depending on their frequency of use. They will probably require replacement at some point in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the (Continued) (Continued) headlamps on and off more than typical use will shorten HID lamps life. HID lamps do not fail in the same manner as halogen incandes- cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out after a period of operation but will immediately relight when the head- lamp switch is cycled it is likely the HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID lamping components are more com- plex than conventional halogen bulbs thus have higher replacement cost. Headlamp (low beam) bulb replacement 0+' 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Remove the bulb-socket from the headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp as- sembly. 4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out. 5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in- to the bulb-socket. 9-74 Maintenance 6. Install the bulb-socket in the head- lamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the headlamp assembly. Push the bulb-socket into the headlamp as- sembly and turn the bulb-socket clockwise. 7. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise. Headlamp bulb 0)% WARNING n Halogen bulbs · Halogen bulbs contain pressurized gas that will produce flying pieces of glass if broken. · Always handle them carefully, and avoid scratches and abrasions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid contact with liquids. Never touch the glass with bare hands. Residual oil may cause the bulb to overheat and burst when lit. A bulb should be operated only when installed in a headlight. · If a bulb becomes damaged or cracked, replace it immediately and carefully dispose of it. · Wear eye protection when chang- ing a bulb. Allow the bulb to cool down before handling it. Headlamp (high beam) bulb replacement 0+' 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the headlamp bulb cover 9 by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Disconnect the headlamp bulb socket-connector. 4. Remove the bulb-socket from the headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp as- sembly. 9-75 Maintenance 5. Install a new bulb-socket assembly in the headlamp assembly by align- ing the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the headlamp as- sembly. Push the bulb-socket into the headlamp assembly and turn the bulb-socket clockwise. 6. Install the headlamp bulb cover by turning it clockwise. Front turn signal lamp bulb replacement Headlamp (high/low beam) LED replacement 4. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in- to the bulb-socket and rotating it until it locks into place. 5. Install the socket in the headlamp assembly by aligning the tabs on the bulb-socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the bulb-sock- et into the headlamp assembly and turn the socket clockwise. 0+')1- If the light bulb (Low(2), High(3)) does not operate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 0+' 1. Open the hood. 2. Remove the bulb-socket from the headlamp assembly by turning the bulb-socket counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb-socket align with the slots on the headlamp as- sembly. 3. Remove the bulb from the bulbsocket by pressing it in and rotat- ing it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the bulb-socket. Pull the bulb out of the bulb-socket 9-76 Position lamp + DRL (LED type) bulb replacement 5ZQF" Side repeater lamp bulb replacement 5ZQF" Rear turn signal lamp bulb replacement Maintenance 5ZQF# 0+' If the Side repeater lamp does not op- erate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Open the service cover. 0+' 9 If the position lamp + DRL (1) does not operate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 9-77 Maintenance 0+' 3. Remove the nuts from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the rear combination lamp connector. 0+' 0+' 5. Remove the rear combination lamp assembly from the body of the ve- hicle. 6. Remove the socket from the as- sembly by turning the socket coun- terclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly. 7. Remove the bulb from the socket by pressing it in and rotating it counterclockwise until the tabs on the bulb align with the slots in the socket. Pull the bulb out of the socket. 8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in- to the socket and rotating it until it locks into place. 9. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise. 10. Install the rear combination lamp assembly to the body of the vehi- cle. 11. Install the service cover by putting it into the service hole. 9-78 Stop and tail lamp (LED type) bulb replacement Back-up lamp bulb replacement 0+' If the stop and tail lamp (LED) does not operate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 0+' 1. Open the trunk lid. 2. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk lid cover and then remove the cover. 0+' 9 0+' 9-79 Maintenance Maintenance 9. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise. 10. Install the rear combination lamp (inside) assembly to the body of the vehicle. 11. Install the trunk lid cover. 0+' 3. Remove the nuts from the vehicle. 4. Disconnect the rear combination lamp (inside) connector. 5. Remove the rear combination lamp (inside) assembly from the body of the vehicle. 6. Remove the socket from the as- sembly by turning the socket coun- terclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly. 7. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out. 8. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in- to the bulb-socket. License plate lamp bulb replacement 1. Open the trunk lid. 0+' 2. Loosen the retaining screw of the trunk lid cover and then remove the cover. 0+' 3. Remove the socket from the as- sembly by turning the socket coun- terclockwise until the tabs on the socket align with the slots on the assembly. 4. Remove the bulb from bulb-socket by pulling it out. 5. Insert a new bulb by inserting it in- to the bulb-socket. 6. Install the socket in the assembly by aligning the tabs on the socket with the slots in the assembly. Push the socket into the assembly and turn the socket clockwise. 9-80 7. Install the trunk lid cover. High mounted stop lamp bulb replacement Map lamp bulb replacement Vanity mirror lamp bulb replacement Maintenance 0+' 0+' If the high mounted stop lamp (LED) does not operate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. If the map lamp (bulb and LED type) does not operate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 0+' WARNING Prior to working on the Interior lamps, ensure that the OFF button 9 is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock. 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen- tly pry the lamp assembly from in- terior. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 9-81 Maintenance 3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Install the lamp assembly to interi- or. Room lamp bulb replacement 5ZQF" CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings. 5ZQF# 0+' WARNING Prior to working on the Interior lamps, ensure that the OFF button is depressed to avoid burning your fingers or receiving an electric shock. 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen- tly pry the lens cover from lamp housing. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Align the lens cover tabs with the lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place. CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings. 0+'- 9-82 Personal lamp bulb replacement Glove box lamp bulb replacement CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings. Trunk lamp bulb replacement Maintenance 0+' If the personal lamp (LED) does not op- erate, we recommend you to have it checked at an authorized Kia dealer. 0+' 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen- tly pry the lamp assembly from in- terior. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 4. Install the lamp assembly to interi- or. 0+' 9 1. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, gen- tly pry the lens cover from lamp housing. 2. Remove the bulb by pulling it straight out. 3. Install a new bulb in the socket. 9-83 Maintenance 4. Align the lens cover tabs with the lamp housing notches and snap the lens into place. CAUTION Be careful not to dirty or damage the lens, lens tab, and plastic hous- ings. 9-84 Maintenance APPEARANCE CARE Exterior care Exterior general caution It is very important to follow the label directions when using any chemical cleaner or polish. Read all warning and caution statements that appear on the label. After washing, rinse the vehicle thor- oughly with lukewarm or cold water. Do not allow soap to dry on the finish. CAUTION · Do not use strong soap, chemical (Continued) they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed. Finish maintenance Washing To help protect your vehicle's finish from rust and deterioration, wash it thoroughly and frequently at least once a month with lukewarm or cold water. If you use your vehicle for off-road driving, you should wash it after each detergents or hot water, and do not wash the vehicle in direct sun- light or when the body of the vehi- cle is warm. · Be careful when washing the side windows of your vehicle. Especially, with high-pressure wa- ter, water may leak through the windows and wet the interior. High-pressure washing · When using high-pressure washers, make sure to maintain sufficient dis- tance from the vehicle. Insufficient clearance or excessive pressure can lead to component damage or water penetration. off-road trip. Pay special attention to the removal of any accumulation of salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign mate- rials. Make sure the drain holes in the lower edges of the doors and rocker · To prevent damage to the plastic parts and lamps, do not clean with chemical solvents or strong deter- gents. · Do not spray the camera, sensors or its surrounding area directly with a high pressure washer. Shock applied from high pressure water may cause the device to not operate normally. 9 panels are kept clear and clean. Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings, in- dustrial pollution and similar deposits can damage your vehicle's finish if not removed immediately. Even prompt washing with plain water may not completely remove all these deposits. A mild soap, safe for use on painted surfaces, may be used. WARNING n Wet brakes After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if (Continued) · Do not bring the nozzle tip close to boots (rubber or plastic covers) or connectors as they may be damaged if they come into contact with high pressure water. 9-85 Maintenance 0+# CAUTION · Water washing in the engine com- partment including high pressure water washing may cause the fail- ure of electrical circuits located in the engine compartment. · Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/ electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. Waxing Wax the vehicle when water will no lon- ger bead on the paint. Always wash and dry the vehicle before waxing. Use a good quality liquid or paste wax, and follow the manufactur- er's instructions. Wax all metal trim to protect it and to maintain its luster. Removing oil, tar, and similar materials with a spot remover will usually strip the wax from the finish. Be sure to rewax these areas even if the rest of the vehicle does not yet need waxing. Do not apply wax on embossed unpain- ted unit, as it may tarnish the unit. CAUTION · Wiping dust or dirt off the body with a dry cloth will scratch the finish. · Do not use steel wool, abrasive cleaners, acid detergents or strong detergents containing high alkaline or caustic agents on chrome-plat- ed or anodized aluminum parts. This may result in damage to the protective coating and cause dis- coloration or paint deterioration. Finish damage repair Deep scratches or stone chips in the painted surface must be repaired promptly. Exposed metal will quickly rust and may develop into a major re- pair expense. NOTICE If your vehicle is damaged and re- quires any metal repair or replace- ment, be sure the body shop applies anti-corrosion materials to the parts repaired or replaced. Bright-metal maintenance · To remove road tar and insects, use a tar remover, not a scraper or other sharp object. · To protect the surfaces of brightmetal parts from corrosion, apply a coating of wax or chrome preserva- tive and rub to a high luster. · During winter weather or in coastal areas, cover the bright metal parts with a heavier coating of wax or preservative. If necessary, coat the parts with non-corrosive petroleum jelly or other protective compound. 9-86 Maintenance Underbody maintenance Corrosive materials used for ice and snow removal and dust control may collect on the underbody. If these ma- terials are not removed, accelerated rusting can occur on underbody parts such as the fuel lines, frame, floor pan and exhaust system, even though they have been treated with rust protection. Thoroughly flush the vehicle underbody and wheel openings with lukewarm or cold water once a month, after offroad driving and at the end of each (Continued) the brakes by applying them lightly while maintaining a slow forward speed. Aluminum wheel maintenance The aluminum wheels are coated with a clear protective finish. · Do not use any abrasive cleaner, pol- ishing compound, solvent, or wire brushes on aluminum wheels. They Corrosion protection Protecting your vehicle from corrosion By using the most advanced design and construction practices to combat corro- sion, we produce vehicles of the highest quality. However, this is only part of the job. To achieve the long-term cor- rosion resistance your vehicle can deliv- er, the owner's cooperation and assis- tance is also required. Common causes of corrosion winter. Pay special attention to these may scratch or damage the finish. The most common causes of corrosion areas because it is difficult to see all the mud and dirt. It will do more harm than good to wet down the road grime without removing it. The lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and frame members have drain holes that should not clog with dirt; trapped water in these areas can cause rusting. · Clean the wheel when it has cooled. on your vehicle are: · Use only a mild soap or neutral deter- gent, and rinse thoroughly with wa- ter. Also, be sure to clean the wheels · Road salt, dirt and moisture that is allowed to accumulate underneath the vehicle. after driving on salted roads. This · Removal of paint or protective coat- helps prevent corrosion. ings by stones, gravel, abrasion or · Avoid washing the wheels with highspeed car wash brushes. 9 minor scrapes and dents which leave unprotected metal exposed to corro- sion. WARNING After washing the vehicle, test the brakes while driving slowly to see if they have been affected by water. If braking performance is impaired, dry · Do not use any alkaline or acid deter- gent. It may damage and corrode the aluminum wheels coated with a clear protective finish. High-corrosion areas If you live in an area where your vehicle is regularly exposed to corrosive mate- rials, corrosion protection is particularly important. Some of the common cau- (Continued) ses of accelerated corrosion are road salts, dust control chemicals, ocean air and industrial pollution. 9-87 Maintenance Moisture breeds corrosion Moisture creates the conditions in which corrosion is most likely to occur. For example, corrosion is accelerated by high humidity, particularly when temperatures are just above freezing. In such conditions, the corrosive mate- rial is kept in contact with the vehicle's surface by moisture that evaporate slowly. Mud is particularly corrosive because it dries slowly and holds moisture in con- tact with the vehicle. Although the mud appears to be dry, it can still retain moisture and promote corrosion. High temperatures can also accelerate corrosion of parts that are not properly ventilated so the moisture can be dis- persed. For all these reasons, it is particularly important to keep your vehicle clean and free of mud or accumulations of other materials. This applies not only to the visible surfaces but particularly to the underside of the vehicle. To help prevent corrosion You can help prevent corrosion from getting started by observing the fol- lowing: Keep your vehicle clean The best way to prevent corrosion is to keep your vehicle clean and free of cor- rosive materials. Attention to the un- derside of the vehicle is particularly im- portant. · If you live in a high-corrosion area -- where road salts are used, near the ocean, areas with industrial pollution, acid rain, etc.--, you should take ex- tra care to prevent corrosion. In win- ter, hose off the underside of your vehicle at least once a month and be sure to clean the underside thor- oughly when winter is over. · When cleaning underneath the vehi- cle, give particular attention to the components under the fenders and other areas that are hidden from view. Do a thorough job; just damp- ening the accumulated mud rather than washing it away will accelerate corrosion rather than prevent it. Wa- ter under high pressure and steam are particularly effective in removing accumulated mud and corrosive ma- terials. · When cleaning lower door panels, rocker panels and frame members, be sure that drain holes are kept open so that moisture can escape and not be trapped inside to acceler- ate corrosion. Keep your garage dry Don't park your vehicle in a damp, poor- ly ventilated garage. This creates a fa- vorable environment for corrosion. This is particularly true if you wash your ve- hicle in the garage or drive it into the garage when it is still wet or covered with snow, ice or mud. Even a heated garage can contribute to corrosion un- less it is well ventilated so moisture is dispersed. Keep paint and trim in good condition Scratches or chips in the finish should be covered with "touch-up" paint as soon as possible to reduce the possibili- ty of corrosion. If bare metal is showing through, the attention of a qualified body and paint shop is recommended. Bird droppings : Bird droppings are highly corrosive and may damage pain- ted surfaces in just a few hours. Al- ways remove bird droppings as soon as possible. 9-88 Maintenance Don't neglect the interior Moisture can collect under the floor mats and carpeting and cause corro- sion. Check under the mats periodically to be sure the carpeting is dry. Use particular care if you carry fertilizers, cleaning materials or chemicals in the vehicle. These should be carried only in proper containers and any spills or leaks should be cleaned up, flushed with clean water and thoroughly dried. (Continued) tronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them. CAUTION When cleaning leather products (steering wheel, seats etc.), use neutral detergents or low alcohol content solutions. If you use high al- Fabric Remove dust and loose dirt from fabric with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solution recom- mended for upholstery or carpets. Re- move fresh spots immediately with a fabric spot cleaner. If fresh spots do not receive immediate attention, fabric can be stained and its color can be af- fected. Also, its fire-resistant proper- ties can be reduced if the material is not properly maintained. Interior care Interior general precautions cohol content solutions or acid/alka- line detergents, the color of the leather may fade or the surface may CAUTION Prevent chemicals such as perfume, get stripped off. cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand cleaner, and air freshener from contacting the interior parts because they may cause Cleaning the upholstery and Using anything but recommended cleaners and procedures may affect the fabric's appearance and fire-re- damage or discoloration. If they do con- interior trim sistant properties. tact the interior parts, wipe them off immediately. If necessary, use a vinyle cleaner, see instructions for correct us- Vinyl Remove dust and loose dirt from vinyl Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt 9 age. CAUTION with a whisk broom or vacuum cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a vinyl clean- er. webbing Clean the belt webbing with any mild soap solution recommended for clean- ing upholstery or carpet. Follow the in- Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electrical/elec- structions provided with the soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the webbing be- cause this may weaken it. (Continued) 9-89 Maintenance Cleaning the interior window glass If the interior glass surfaces of the ve- hicle become fogged (that is, covered with an oily, greasy or waxy film), they should be cleaned with a glass cleaner. Follow the directions on the glass cleaner container. CAUTION Do not scrape or scratch the inside of the rear window. This may result in damage of the rear window de- froster grid. 9-90 Maintenance EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED) The emission control system of your · After dynamometer testing is com- Purge control solenoid valve (PCSV) vehicle is covered by a written limited pleted, turn the ESC system back on The purge control solenoid valve is con- warranty. Please see the warranty in- formation contained in the Warranty & Maintenance book in your vehicle. Your vehicle is equipped with an emis- sion control system to meet all applica- ble emission regulations. There are three emission control sys- tems, as follows. 1. Crankcase emission control system by pressing the ESC switch again. 1. Crankcase emission control system The positive crankcase ventilation sys- tem is employed to prevent air pollu- tion caused by blow-by gases being emitted from the crankcase. This sys- trolled by the Engine Control Module (ECM); when the engine coolant tem- perature is low during idling, the PCSV closes so that evaporated fuel is not taken into the engine. After the engine warms up during ordinary driving, the PCSV opens to introduce evaporated fuel to the engine. 2. Evaporative emission control sys- tem 3. Exhaust emission control system In order to assure the proper function of the emission control systems, it is recommended that you have your vehi- tem supplies fresh filtered air to the crankcase through the air intake hose. Inside the crankcase, the fresh air mix- es with blow-by gases, which then pass through the PCV valve into the induc- tion system. 2. Evaporative emission control 3. Exhaust emission control system The Exhaust Emission Control System is a highly effective system which con- trols exhaust emissions while maintain- ing good vehicle performance. Vehicle modifications cle inspected and maintained by an au- thorized Kia dealer in accordance with the maintenance schedule in this man- ual. Caution for the Inspection and Mainte- nance Test (With Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system) · To prevent the vehicle from misfiring during dynamometer testing, turn the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system off by pressing the ESC switch. system The Evaporative Emission Control Sys- tem is designed to prevent fuel vapors from escaping into the atmosphere. Canister Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel tank are absorbed and stored in the on- board canister. When the engine is run- ning, the fuel vapors absorbed in the canister are drawn into the surge tank through the purge control solenoid This vehicle should not be modified. Modification of your vehicle could affect its performance, safety or durability and may even violate governmental safety and emissions regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from any modifica- tion may not be covered under warran- ty. 9 valve. 9-91 Maintenance · If you use unauthorized electronic devices, it may cause the vehicle to operate abnormally, wire damage, battery discharge and fire. For your safety, do not use unauthorized elec- tronic devices. Engine exhaust gas precautions (carbon monoxide) · Carbon monoxide can be present with other exhaust fumes. Therefore, if you smell exhaust fumes of any kind inside your vehicle, have it inspected and repaired immediately. If you ever suspect exhaust fumes are coming into your vehicle, drive it only with all the windows fully open. Have your vehicle checked and repaired immedi- ately. WARNING n Exhaust Engine exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide (CO). Though colorless and odorless, it is dangerous and could be lethal if inhaled. Follow the in- structions on this page to avoid CO poisoning. · Do not operate the engine in confined or closed areas (such as garages) any more than what is necessary to move the vehicle in or out of the area. · When the vehicle is stopped in an open area for more than a short time with the engine running, adjust the ventilation system (as needed) to draw outside air into the vehicle. · Never sit in a parked or stopped vehi- cle for any extended time with the engine running. · When the engine stalls or fails to start, excessive attempts to restart the engine may cause damage to the emission control system. Operating precautions for catalytic converters (if equipped) WARNING n Fire (Continued) (Continued) · A hot exhaust system can ignite flammable items under your vehi- cle. Do not park the vehicle over or near flammable objects, such as grass, vegetation, paper, leaves, etc. · The exhaust system and catalytic system are very hot while the en- gine is running or immediately af- ter the engine is turned off. Keep away from the exhaust system and catalytic, you may get burned. Also, do not remove the heat sink around the exhaust system, do not seal the bottom of the vehicle or do not coat the vehicle for cor- rosion control. It may present a fire risk under certain conditions. Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic converter emission control device. Therefore, the following precautions must be observed: · Make sure to refuel your vehicle ac- cording to the Fuel requirements on page 2-03. · Do not operate the vehicle when there are signs of engine malfunction, such as misfire or a noticeable loss of performance. 9-92 · Do not misuse or abuse the engine. Examples of misuse are coasting with the ignition off and descending steep grades in gear with the ignition off. · Do not operate the engine at high idle speed for extended periods (5 mi- nutes or more). · Do not modify or tamper with any part of the engine or emission control system. All inspections and adjust- ments must be made by an author- ized Kia dealer. · Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damag- ing the catalytic converter. Failure to observe these precautions could result in damage to the catalytic converter and to your vehicle. Additionally, such actions could void your warranties. 9 9-93 Maintenance Specifications & Consumer information Dimensions...............................................................................10-02 Engine....................................................................................... 10-03 Gross vehicle weight...............................................................10-04 Luggage volume...................................................................... 10-05 Air conditioning system......................................................... 10-06 Bulb wattage........................................................................... 10-07 Tires and wheels..................................................................... 10-09 Recommended lubricants and capacities........................... 10-11 Recommended SAE viscosity number.............................10-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN)..................................... 10-13 Vehicle certification label.......................................................10-14 Tire specification and pressure label................................... 10-15 Engine number........................................................................ 10-16 Air conditioner compressor label..........................................10-17 Refrigerant label..................................................................... 10-18 Declaration of conformity..................................................... 10-19 10 Specifications & Consumer information DIMENSIONS Item Overall length Overall width Overall height Overall height (High suspension) Tread Front Rear 205/65 R16 *1 215/55 R17 205/65 R16 *1 215/55 R17 Wheelbase *1 : Only for Hybrid vehicle. Not for Plug-in hybrid vehicle Unit: mm (in) 4,855 (191.1) 1,860 (73.2) 1,465 (57.7) 1,475 (58) 1,614 (63.5) 1,602 (63) 1,621 (63.8) 1,609 (63.3) 2,805 (110.4) 10-02 Specifications & Consumer information ENGINE Displacement Bore x Stroke Firing order No. of cylinders Item [cc (cu. in)] [mm (in.)] Gasoline 2.0 GDI HEV 1,999 (121.99) 81.0 x 97.0 (3.19 x 3.81) 1-3-4-2 4. In-line 10 10-03 Specifications & Consumer information GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT ITEM GROSS VEHICLE WEIGHT Hybrid 2,100 kg (4,630 lb) Unit [kg (lbs.)] Plug-in hybrid 2,200 kg (4,850 lb) 10-04 LUGGAGE VOLUME ITEM VDA Hybrid 425L Plug-in hybrid 307L Specifications & Consumer information 10 10-05 Specifications & Consumer information AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM ITEM Weight of volume Refrigerant 650 ± 25g 570 ± 25g Compressor lubricant 130 ± 10g We recommend that you contact an authorized Kia dealer for more details. Classification R-134a R-1234yf POE (RB100EV) 10-06 BULB WATTAGE Front Rear Light Bulb Headlamps (Low) Headlamps (Low) LED type Headlamps (High) Headlamps (High) LED type Front turn signal lamps Front position lamps Daytime running light Side repeater lamps Rear Stop/Tail lamps (outside) Rear tail lamps (inside) Rear turn signal lamps Back-up lamps High mounted stop lamp* License plate lamps LED type LED type LED type Wattage (W) 55W 25W 55W/65W 17W 21W 0.7W 6.5W 0.5W 12W 6W 21W 16W 3W 5W Bulb type H7SL LED 9005HL+/H9 LED PY21WL/L LED LED LED LED LED PY21W W16W LED W5W 10 Specifications & Consumer information 10-07 Specifications & Consumer information Interior Light Bulb Map lamps Room lamps Personal lamps Vanity mirror lamps Glove box lamp Trunk lamp Bulb type LED type Wattage (W) 10W 1W 10W 1W 5W 5W 5W Bulb type FESTOON BULB LED FESTOON BULB LED FESTOON BULB FESTOON BULB FESTOON BULB 10-08 Specifications & Consumer information TIRES AND WHEELS Item Tire size Wheel size Load capacity LI *1 Kg Speed capacity SS *2 Km/h Full size 205/65 R16 *3 6.5J × 16 95 690 H 210 tire 215/55 R17 7.0J × 17 94 670 V 240 *1 Load Index *2 Speed Symbol *3 Only for Hybrid vehicle. Not for Plug-in hybrid vehicle Inflation pressure [bar(psi, kPa)] Normal load Maximum load Front Rear Front Rear 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) 2.4 (35, 240) Wheel lug nut torque [Kgf·m (lbf·ft, N·m)] 9~11 (65~79, 88~107) NOTICE · We recommend that when replacing tires, use the same originally supplied with the vehicles. If not, that affects driving performance. · When driving in high altitude grades, it is natural for the atmospheric pressure to decrease. Therefore, please check the tire pressure and add more air when necessary. Additionally required tire air pressure per km above sea level: 1.5 psi/km 10 10-09 Specifications & Consumer information CAUTION When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle. Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly. 10-10 RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES Lubricant Engine oil *1 *2 (drain and refill) Recommends Volume 4.1 l (4.33 US qt.) Classification ACEA A5 or above / 5W-30 (C)*1 Specifications & Consumer information Automatic transaxle fluid 6.0 l (6.34 US qt.) - ATF SP-IV (Recommended SK ATF SP-IV, MICHANG ATF SP-IV, NOCA ATF SP-IV) Coolant 6.744 l (7.12 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator) Inverter coolant 3.13 l (3.30 US qt.) Mixture of antifreeze and water (Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator) Brake/Clutch fluid 0.49 ± 0.02 l (0.52 ± 0.02 US qt.) DOT 3 or DOT 4 Fuel Hybrid Plug-in 60 l (63.42 US qt.) 55 l Refer to Fuel requirements on page 2-03. hybrid (58.11 US qt.) *1 Refer to Recommended SAE viscosity number on page 10-12. 10 *2 Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year's time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings. 10-11 Specifications & Consumer information Recommended SAE viscosity number CAUTION Always be sure to clean the area around any filler plug, drain plug, or dipstick before checking or draining any lubricant. This is especially important in dusty or sandy areas and when the vehicle is used on unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug and dipstick areas will prevent dirt and grit from entering the engine and other mechanisms that could be damaged. Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has an effect on fuel economy and cold weather operating (engine start and engine oil flowabil- ity). Lower viscosity engine oils can provide better fuel economy and cold weather performance, however, higher viscosity en- gine oils are required for satisfactory lubrication in hot weather. Using oils of any viscosity other than those recommended could result in engine damage. When choosing an oil, consider the range of temperature your vehicle will be operated in before the next oil change. Proceed to select the recommended oil vis- cosity from the chart. 5FNQFSBUVSF3BOHFGPS4"&7JTDPTJUZ/VNCFST 5FNQFSBUVSF $ ' $ *1: For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (ACEA A5). However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart. 10-12 VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) 'SBNFOVNCFS 7*/MBCFM JGFRVJQQFE 0+' 06. The vehicle identification number (VIN) is the number used in registering your vehicle and in all legal matters pertain- ing to its ownership, etc. The number is punched on the floor un- der the passenger seat. To check the number, open the cover. The VIN is also on a plate attached to the top of the dashboard. The number on the plate can easily be seen through the windshield from outside. 10 10-13 Specifications & Consumer information Specifications & Consumer information VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL 0+' The vehicle certification label attached on the driver's (or front passenger's) side center pillar gives the vehicle iden- tification number (VIN). 10-14 TIRE SPECIFICATION AND PRESSURE LABEL 0+' The tires supplied on your new vehicle are chosen to provide the best per- formance for normal driving. The tire label located on the driver's side center pillar gives the tire pres- sures recommended for your vehicle. 10 10-15 Specifications & Consumer information Specifications & Consumer information ENGINE NUMBER (BTPMJOFFOHJOF /V(%* The engine number is stamped on the engine block as shown in the drawing. 10-16 AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR LABEL 0+')1 A compressor label informs you the type of compressor your vehicle is equipped with such as model, supplier part number, production number, re- frigerant (1) and refrigerant oil (2). 10 10-17 Specifications & Consumer information Specifications & Consumer information REFRIGERANT LABEL The refrigerant label is located on the top of the air duct. 10-18 DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY &YBNQMF $&# The radio frequency components of the vehicle comply with requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1995/5/EC. Further information including the man- ufacturer's declaration of conformity is available on Kia web site as follows; http://www.kia-hotline.com 10 10-19 Specifications & Consumer information Appendix ........................................................ 11-02 ............................................................. 11-02 ........................................................11-03 Vetrarakstur............................................................................ 11-05 Akstur í snjó eða hálku.......................................................11-05 Uppsetninþ á keðjum..........................................................11-06 11 Appendix - . . , , -: , . . n . , . . . , - , . , , . . , . . 11-02 . , . , - , . , . . - . - . - , , - ( ) · - - - . 0,5 1 , - . . , . · , . 0+'- - , , - . - , . , - . - ; . , 12 . (SAE). ( ) - - - . - - , - - , - S , . . , , . , . , . Appendix 11 n ( ) 11-03 Appendix ( ) . , , . - , - - - . n · · , , . · , , . ( ) 11-04 - . - 30 / , , ( · · , , · ) - , - . , . , . - - - , - - VETRARAKSTUR Akstur í unþri ýærð oþ vetrarveðri leiðir til aukins slits á ökutækinu oþ ska- par mis vandamál. Hæþt er að draþa úr erýiðleikum sem ýylþja vetrarakstri eý ýarið er að essum ráðleþþinþum: Akstur í snjó eða hálku Við akstur í djúpum snjó kann að vera nauðsynleþt að nota vetrarhjólbarða eða setja keðjur á hjólbarðana. Reynist nauðsynleþt að nota vetrarhjólbarða arý að velja hjólbarða aý sömu stærð oþ þerð oþ venjuleþu hjólbarðarnir. Sé að ekki þert þetur að dreþið úr öryþþi oþ skert aksturseiþinleika ökutækisins. Hraðakstur, skyndileþ hröðun, nauð- hemlun oþ krappar beyþjur þeta enn ýremur ýalið í sér mikla hættu. Þeþar dreþið er úr hraða er ráðleþt að beita vélarhemlun sem kostur er. Við nauðhemlun á snævi öktum eða hálum veþum þetur ökutækið hæþleþa runnið til. Nauðsynleþt er að halda hæý- ileþri ýjarlæþð á milli íns ökutækis oþ ökutækisins ýyrir ýraman. Alltaý ætti að beita hemlinum mjúkleþa. Haýa ber í huþa að eý keðjur eru settar á hjólbarða ýæst aukinn driýkraýtur en að hindrar ó ekki að ökutækið renni til hliðanna. TILKYNNING Notkun snjókeðja er ólöþleþ í sumum ríkjum. Kynnið ykkur þildandi lands- löþ áður en keðjur eru settar upp. Vetrarhjólbarðar Eý vetrarhjólbarðar eru settir á ökutæ- kið arý að þæta ess að nota veroýna hjól- barða aý sömu stærð oþ ás unþa oþ upprunaleþu hjólbarðarnir. Setjið ve- trarhjólbarða á öll ýjöþur hjólin til að tryþþja öruþþa st rinþu ökutækisins við öll veðurskilyrði. Haýið í huþa að á auðum veþi kunna vetrarhjólbarðar að haýa minna þrip en hjólbarðarnir sem ýylþdu ökutækinu. Því arý að aka aý þætni, jaýnvel á auðum veþum. Ráðýærið ykkur við söluaðila hjólbarðan- na um ráðlaþðan hámarkshraða. VIÐVÖRUN n Stærðir vetrarhjólbarða (framhald) (framhald) Vetrarhjólbarðar ættu að vera af sömu stærð og gerð og hjólbarðarnir sem fylgdu ökutækinu. Misræmi á því getur dregið úr öryggi og skert aksturseiginleika ökutæki- sins. Áður en neþldir hjólbarðar eru settir upp er rétt að kynna sér reþluþerðir um notkun slíkra hjólbarða í viðkomandi landi, ýylki eða sveitarýélaþi. 11 Appendix 11-05 Appendix Keðjur á hjólbarða 0+'- Hliðar veroýinna hjólbarða eru ynnri en á öðrum hjólbörðum oþ sumar þerðir snjókeðja þeta ví valdið skemmdum á eim. Því er ráðleþt að nota vetrarhjól- barða ýremur en keðjur, eý ess er kos- tur. Setjið aldrei keðjur á hjólbarða ökutækja sem búin eru álýelþum ar sem keðju- rnar þeta valdið skemmdum á ýelþu- num. Eý óhjákvæmileþt reynist að nota keðjur skal nota vírkeðjur sem eru innan við 15 mm á ykkt. Ábyrþðartryþþinþ söluaðila ökutækisins tekur ekki til skemmda sem orsakast aý ranþri not- kun snjókeðja. Snjókeðjur skal aðeins setja á ýramhjólbarðana. VARÚÐ · Gætið þess að snjókeðjurnar séu af þeirri stærð og gerð sem hæfir hjólbörðunum. Notkun snjókeðja af rangri gerð getur valdið skemmd- um á yfirbyggingu og fjöðrun öku- tækisins og kann að falla utan ábyrgðartryggingar söluaðila öku- tækisins. Þá geta festikrókar keðj- anna skemmst vegan núnings við íhluti ökutækisins og snjókeðjurnar losnað af hjólbarðanum. Gætið þess að snjókeðjurnar séu með SAE vottun í S-flokki. · Eftir um það bil 0,5-1 km akstur skal ævinlega skoða keðjurnar af- tur til að tryggja að þær hafi verið settar upp á réttan og öruggan hátt. Herðið keðjurnar eða setjið þær aftur á ef þær hafa losnað. Uppsetning á keðjum Þeþar keðjur eru settar á skal ýylþja leiðbeininþum ýramleiðanda oþ herða keðjurnar eins mikið oþ unnt er. Þeþar keðjur haýa verið settar á skal aka hæþt. Eý hljóð heyrist sem bendir til að keðjurnar séu í snertinþu við yýir- byþþinþu eða undirvaþn er rétt að nema staðar oþ herða keðjurnar. Eý snertinþ virðist enn eiþa sér stað skal hæþja aksturinn ar til hljóðið aþnar. Takið keðjurnar niður um leið oþ komið er á rudda oþ snjólausa veþi. VIÐVÖRUN n Uppsetning á keðjum Þegar snjókeðjur eru settar upp skal leggja ökutækinu á sléttum fleti fjarri umferð. Kveikið á viðvörunar- ljósum ökutækisins og setjið þríhyrn- ingslaga viðvörunarskilti upp fyrir af- tan ökutækið, ef það er tiltækt. Haf- ið ökutækið ævinlega í stöðuhemli og drepið á vélinni áður en snjókeðjur eru settar upp. VIÐVÖRUN n Keðjur á hjólbarða (framhald) 11-06 (framhald) · Notkun keðja getur skert aksturs- eiginleika ökutækisins. · Akið ekki hraðar en 30 km/klst. eða samkvæmt ráðlögðum hámark- shraða framleiðanda keðjanna, hvort sem reynist lægra. · Akið gætilega og sneiðið hjá þúst- um, holum, kröppum beygjum og öðrum hættum á veginum, sem gætu valdið hristingi ökutækisins. · Forðist krappar beygjur eða læsta hemlun. VARÚÐ · Séu snjókeðjur af rangri stærð eða rangt upp settar geta þær valdið skemmdum á hemlalögn, fjöðrun, yfirbyggingu og hjólum ökutæki- sins. · Hvenær sem hljóð bendir til þess að keðjurnar sláist við ökutækið skal stöðva akstur og herða keð- jurnar. 11 11-07 Appendix Alphabetical index A A/V mode..........................................................................5-71 Advanced smart cruise control system...................... 7-59 Limitations oý the system........................................ 7-70 Speed settinþ.............................................................. 7-60 To adjust the sensitivity oý smart cruise control..7-69 To convert to cruise control mode...........................7-69 Vehicle to vehicle distance settinþ...........................7-64 Air baþ warninþ label......................................................4-67 Air baþ warninþ liþht...................................................... 4-47 Air baþs.............................................................................4-43 Air baþ warninþ label................................................. 4-67 Air baþ warninþ liþht..................................................4-47 Curtain air baþ.............................................................4-58 Driver's and passenþer's ýront air baþ....................4-51 Inýlation conditions..................................................... 4-61 Inýlation conditions (Air baþs)...................................4-61 Non-inýlation conditions............................................4-62 Operation..................................................................... 4-44 Passenþer's ýront air baþ ON/OFF switch.............. 4-54 Side air baþ.................................................................. 4-56 SRS care....................................................................... 4-65 SRS components and ýunctions............................... 4-48 Air cleaner........................................................................ 9-33 Filter replacement...................................................... 9-33 Air conditioner compressor label............................... 10-17 Air conditioninþ system...............................................5-137 Automatic climate control system........................5-137 Air conditioninþ system lubricants............................ 10-06 Air ventilation seat....................................................... 5-156 Anti-lock brake system (ABS)...................................... 7-28 Appearance care............................................................. 9-85 Exterior care................................................................9-85 Interior care................................................................. 9-89 Armed staþe.................................................................... 5-10 Ashtray...........................................................................5-152 Audio (Without Touch Screen........................................6-07 Audio (Without Touch Screen) Audio Type A-1, A-2.................................................. 6-07 Feature oý your audio (Type A-1, A-2)...................6-07 Audio system...................................................................6-02 Antenna........................................................................ 6-02 Aux, USB port.............................................................. 6-04 Steerinþ wheel audio controls.................................. 6-03 AUTO HOLD...................................................................... 7-24 Auto liþht/AFLS position..............................................5-115 Automatic climate control system............................ 5-137 Automatic heatinþ and air conditioninþ............... 5-138 Automatic transaxle.......................................................7-11 Manual mode...............................................................7-13 Alphabetical index I-1 Alphabetical index Shiýt-lock override......................................................7-14 B Bulb replacement............................................................ 9-70 Bulb wattaþe................................................................. 10-07 Button start/stop: see "Enþine start/stop button".. 7-06 Battery............................................................................. 9-39 Battery replacement......................................................5-09 Beýore drivinþ.................................................................. 7-04 Blind sport detection system (BSD) RCTA (Rear cross traýýic alert).................................7-94 Blind spot detection system (BSD).............................. 7-91 BSD (Blind spot detection) / LCA (Lane Chanþe Assist)........................................................... 7-91 Bluetooth Wireless Technoloþy.................................... 6-80 Bonnet: see "Hood"......................................................... 5-27 Brake ýluid........................................................................ 9-30 Brake system.................................................................. 7-17 Anti-lock brake system (ABS).................................. 7-28 AUTO HOLD.................................................................. 7-24 Electronic parkinþ brake (EPB).................................7-19 Electronic stability control (ESC)..............................7-30 Emerþency Stop Siþnal (ESS)................................... 7-35 Foot parkinþ brake..................................................... 7-18 Hill-start assist control (HAC).................................. 7-34 Parkinþ brake.............................................................. 7-18 Power brakes.............................................................. 7-17 Vehicle stability manaþement (VSM)...................... 7-33 C Capacities (Lubricants)................................................ 10-11 Care oý seat belts............................................................4-28 Care Care oý seat belts....................................................... 4-28 Exterior care................................................................9-85 Interior care................................................................. 9-89 SRS care....................................................................... 4-65 Tire care....................................................................... 9-43 CE.....................................................................................6-122 Center console storaþe................................................5-150 Central door lock switch................................................ 5-14 Chains - tire................................................................... 7-104 Checkinþ tire inýlation pressure....................................9-44 Child restraint system................................................... 4-30 Installinþ a Child Restraint System (CRS)...............4-32 ISOFIX anchoraþe and top-tether anchoraþe (ISOFIX anchoraþe system) ýor children................ 4-33 Selectinþ a Child Restraint System (CRS)...............4-30 Ciþarette liþhter............................................................5-152 I-2 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index Climate control air ýilter.................................... 5-134,9-35 Climate control system Automatic climate control system........................5-137 Automatic heatinþ and air conditioninþ............... 5-138 Closinþ the sunrooý.........................................................5-37 Clothes hanþer.............................................................. 5-160 Combined cluster: see "Instrument cluster"...............5-48 Coolant.............................................................................. 9-26 Coolinþ ýluid: see "Enþine coolant"............................... 9-26 Crankcase emission control system............................ 9-91 Cruise control system.................................................... 7-47 To cancel cruise control............................................. 7-50 To set cruise control speed.......................................7-48 To temporarily accelerate with the cruise control on....................................................................7-50 Cup holder...................................................................... 5-153 Curtain air baþ................................................................. 4-58 D Dashboard illumination: see "Instrument panel illumination".................................................................... 5-49 Dashboard: see "Instrument cluster".......................... 5-48 Declaration oý conýormity...........................................10-19 Deýoþþinþ (windshield)................................................ 5-146 Deýroster (rear window)............................................. 5-131 Deýrostinþ (windshield)............................................... 5-146 Dimensions.................................................................... 10-02 Disarmed staþe............................................................... 5-11 Display illumination: see "Instrument panel illu- mination"......................................................................... 5-49 Displays: see "Instrument cluster"...............................5-48 Door lock/unlock ýeatures............................................. 5-15 Door locks.........................................................................5-12 Central door lock switch............................................ 5-14 Door lock/unlock ýeatures......................................... 5-15 From inside the vehicle..............................................5-13 From outside the vehicle...........................................5-12 Drinks holder: see "Cup holder".................................. 5-153 DRIVE mode (Drive mode inteþrated control system)..................................................................7-75,7-77 Drive mode inteþrated control system............. 7-75,7-77 ECO mode...........................................................7-75,7-77 SPORT mode................................................................7-76 Driver position memory system.................................. 4-08 Driver's and passenþer's ýront air baþ........................ 4-51 Drivinþ at niþht............................................................. 7-100 Drivinþ in ýlooded areas............................................... 7-101 Drivinþ in the rain......................................................... 7-101 Alphabetical index I-3 Alphabetical index Drivinþ oýý-road............................................................ 7-102 E ECO mode (Drive mode inteþrated control sys- tem)........................................................................7-75,7-77 Economical operation..................................................... 7-97 Electric power steerinþ........................................ 5-40,5-44 Electronic parkinþ brake (EPB)..................................... 7-19 Electronic stability control (ESC).................................. 7-30 Emerþency ýuel ýiller lid release......................... 5-30,5-33 Emerþency startinþ........................................................8-05 Emerþency Stop Siþnal (ESS)........................................7-35 Emission control system............................................... 9-91 Crankcase emission control system........................9-91 Evaporative emission control system.....................9-91 Exhaust emission control system........................... 9-91 Enþine compartment............................................3-07,9-03 Enþine coolant................................................................. 9-26 Enþine coolant temperature þauþe............................. 5-53 Enþine number.............................................................. 10-16 Enþine oil.......................................................................... 9-24 Enþine speciýication......................................................10-03 Enþine start/stop button.............................................. 7-06 Enþine start/stop button position...........................7-06 Illuminated enþine start/stop button..................... 7-06 Enþine start/stop button illumination.........................7-06 Evaporative emission control system......................... 9-91 Exhaust emission control system................................9-91 Explanation oý scheduled maintenance items........... 9-21 Exterior care.................................................................... 9-85 Exterior overview (Front).............................................. 3-02 Exterior overview (Rear)................................................3-03 F FCC.................................................................................. 6-121 Floor mat anchor(s)......................................................5-161 Fluid Brake ýluid....................................................................9-30 Washer ýluid.................................................................9-31 Foþ liþht (rear).............................................................. 5-119 Foldinþ the outside rearview mirror............................ 5-46 Foot parkinþ brake..........................................................7-18 Front seat adjustment (manual)..................................4-05 Front seat adjustment (power)....................................4-06 Fuel ýiller lid............................................................5-29,5-31 Emerþency ýuel ýiller lid release.....................5-30,5-33 I-4 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index Fuel þauþe........................................................................5-53 Fuel requirements...........................................................2-03 Fuse switch...................................................................... 9-54 Fuses................................................................................. 9-52 Fuse switch..................................................................9-54 Fuse/relay panel description.......................... 9-56,9-57 Instrument panel ýuse............................................... 9-53 Main ýuse..................................................................... 9-55 Multi ýuse..................................................................... 9-55 G Gauþes.............................................................................. 5-51 Gauþe Transaxle shiýt indicator............................................5-54 Glove box........................................................................5-150 Gross vehicle weiþht.................................................... 10-04 H Hazardous drivinþ conditions........................................7-99 Headliþht bulb replacement.......................................... 9-70 Headrest (ýront).............................................................. 4-09 Headrest (rear)................................................................4-12 Heated steerinþ wheel...................................................5-42 Heater Automatic climate control system........................5-138 Hiþhway drivinþ............................................................ 7-102 Hill-start assist control (HAC).......................................7-34 Hood.................................................................................. 5-27 Horn...................................................................................5-42 How to use this manual................................................. 2-02 Hybrid battery SOC (state oý charþe) þauþe............. 5-52 Hybrid system þauþe..................................................... 5-51 I Immobilizer system........................................................ 5-04 Indicator liþhts.................................................................5-84 Inside rearview mirror....................................................5-44 Instrument cluster..........................................................5-48 A/V mode..................................................................... 5-71 Gauþes..........................................................................5-51 Indicator liþhts............................................................ 5-84 Instrument cluster control........................................5-49 LCD display...................................................................5-56 LCD display control.....................................................5-50 LCD Modes................................................................... 5-56 Service mode............................................................... 5-57 Transaxle shiýt indicator............................................5-54 Trip computer..............................................................5-63 Alphabetical index I-5 Alphabetical index Trip modes................................................................... 5-63 Turn by turn mode..................................................... 5-71 User settinþs mode....................................................5-58 Warninþ and indicator liþhts.....................................5-79 Warninþ liþhts............................................................. 5-79 Warninþ messaþes..................................................... 5-71 Instrument panel ýuse................................................... 9-53 Instrument panel illumination.......................................5-49 Instrument panel overview........................................... 3-05 Interior care..................................................................... 9-89 Interior ýeatures........................................................... 5-152 Air ventilation seat...................................................5-156 Ashtray...................................................................... 5-152 Ciþarette liþhter....................................................... 5-152 Clothes hanþer..........................................................5-160 Cup holder..................................................................5-153 Floor mat anchor(s)................................................. 5-161 Power outlet............................................................. 5-157 Side curtain................................................................5-162 Sunvisor..................................................................... 5-154 USB charþer...............................................................5-158 Wireless smart phone charþinþ system...............5-158 Interior liþht Map lamp................................................................... 5-126 Room lamp................................................................ 5-127 Interior overview............................................................. 3-04 ISOFIX system................................................................. 4-33 K Key operations................................................................ 5-04 Keys Immobilizer system....................................................5-04 Key operations............................................................ 5-04 Record your key number...........................................5-04 L Label Air baþ warninþ label................................................. 4-67 Air conditioner compressor label........................... 10-17 Reýriþerant label.......................................................10-18 Tire sidewall labelinþ.................................................. 9-48 Tire speciýication and pressure label.................... 10-15 Vehicle certiýication label........................................ 10-14 Lane departure warninþ system (LDWS)................... 7-79 Lap/shoulder belt............................................................ 4-21 LCD display....................................................................... 5-56 A/V mode..................................................................... 5-71 Indicator liþhts............................................................ 5-84 LCD Modes................................................................... 5-56 Service mode............................................................... 5-57 Trip computer..............................................................5-63 I-6 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index Trip modes................................................................... 5-63 Turn by turn mode..................................................... 5-71 User settinþs mode....................................................5-58 Warninþ and indicator liþhts.....................................5-79 Warninþ liþhts............................................................. 5-79 Warninþ messaþes..................................................... 5-71 LCD display control......................................................... 5-50 LCD Modes........................................................................5-56 Liþht bulbs........................................................................9-70 Liþhtinþ Auto liþht/AFLS position......................................... 5-115 Rear ýoþ liþht............................................................ 5-119 Lubricants and capacities............................................10-11 Luþþaþe volume............................................................10-05 Manual climate control system Air conditioninþ......................................................... 5-144 Climate control air ýilter.......................................... 5-134 Manual mode - Automatic transaxle.......................... 7-13 Map lamp........................................................................5-126 Media mode............................................................6-24,6-69 Mirrors.............................................................................. 5-44 Foldinþ the outside rearview mirror........................5-46 Inside rearview mirror............................................... 5-44 Outside rearview mirror............................................ 5-45 Remote control........................................................... 5-46 Multi ýuse......................................................................... 9-55 N M Non-inýlation conditions (Air baþs)..............................4-62 Main ýuse..........................................................................9-55 Maintenance schedule....................................................9-08 Maintenance services.....................................................9-04 Maintenance Explanation oý scheduled maintenance items.......9-21 Maintenance services................................................ 9-04 Owner maintenance...................................................9-06 Scheduled maintenance service...............................9-08 Tire maintenance........................................................9-48 O Odometer......................................................................... 5-54 Oil (enþine)....................................................................... 9-24 Outside rearview mirror................................................ 5-45 Owner maintenance....................................................... 9-06 Alphabetical index I-7 Alphabetical index P Panorama sunrooý.......................................................... 5-35 Resettinþ the sunrooý............................................... 5-38 Tiltinþ the sunrooý......................................................5-37 Parkinþ assist system....................................................5-89 Types oý warninþ indicator and sound................... 5-91 Parkinþ brake.........................................................7-18,9-32 Passenþer's ýront air baþ ON/OFF switch.................. 4-54 Power brakes...................................................................7-17 Power outlet..................................................................5-157 Power window lock button............................................5-25 Pre-tensioner seat belt................................................. 4-23 Precautions (seat belt).................................................. 4-26 R Rear seat adjustment.................................................... 4-12 Rear view camera.........................................................6-119 Rear window deýroster................................................5-131 Recommended cold tire inýlation pressures ..............9-43 Recommended lubricants and capacities................. 10-11 Recommended SAE viscosity number.................. 10-12 Record your key number............................................... 5-04 Reýriþerant label........................................................... 10-18 Remote control (outside rear view mirror)................ 5-46 Remote keyless entry system Battery replacement................................................. 5-09 Smart key system operation................................... 5-06 Transmitter precautions........................................... 5-08 Replacement liþht bulb.................................................. 9-70 Resettinþ the sunrooý....................................................5-38 Rockinþ the vehicle......................................................... 7-99 Room lamp.....................................................................5-127 Rotation (Tire)................................................................. 9-45 S Scheduled maintenance service................................... 9-08 Seat belt restraint system............................................4-18 Seat belt warninþ............................................................4-19 Seat belts......................................................................... 4-18 Care oý seat belts....................................................... 4-28 Lap/shoulder belt........................................................4-21 Pre-tensioner seat belt.............................................4-23 Precautions..................................................................4-26 Seat belt restraint system....................................... 4-18 Seat belt warninþ....................................................... 4-19 Seatback pocket (ýront).................................................4-12 I-8 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index Seats................................................................................. 4-02 Driver position memory system.............................. 4-08 Front seat adjustment (manual)............................. 4-05 Front seat adjustment (power)............................... 4-06 Headrest (ýront)..........................................................4-09 Headrest (rear)........................................................... 4-12 Rear seat adjustment................................................ 4-12 Seatback pocket (ýront)............................................ 4-12 Service mode................................................................... 5-57 Shiýt-lock override - Automatic transaxle................. 7-14 Side air baþ.......................................................................4-56 Side curtain.................................................................... 5-162 Slidinþ the sunrooý..........................................................5-37 Smart key ýunction.........................................................5-06 Smart key system operation........................................5-06 Smart Parkinþ Assist System....................................... 5-95 Smooth cornerinþ......................................................... 7-100 Snow tires...................................................................... 7-103 Special drivinþ conditions...............................................7-99 Drivinþ at niþht......................................................... 7-100 Drivinþ in ýlooded areas...........................................7-101 Drivinþ in the rain..................................................... 7-101 Drivinþ oýý-road........................................................7-102 Hazardous drivinþ conditions................................... 7-99 Hiþhway drivinþ........................................................ 7-102 Rockinþ the vehicle.....................................................7-99 Smooth cornerinþ.....................................................7-100 Speed limit control system........................................... 7-52 To set speed limit....................................................... 7-52 Speed Limit Inýormation Function (SLIF).................... 7-55 Display.......................................................................... 7-56 Driver's attention........................................................7-58 Operation..................................................................... 7-56 SLIF activation / deactivation................................... 7-55 Speedometer................................................................... 5-51 SPORT mode (Drive mode inteþrated control system)........................................................................... 7-76 SRS care............................................................................4-65 SRS components and ýunctions....................................4-48 Steerinþ wheel.................................................................5-40 Electric power steerinþ....................................5-40,5-44 Heated steerinþ wheel.............................................. 5-42 Horn.............................................................................. 5-42 Tilt and telescopic steerinþ.......................................5-41 Storaþe compartment................................................. 5-150 Center console storaþe........................................... 5-150 Glove box................................................................... 5-150 Sunþlass holder.........................................................5-151 Sunþlass holder............................................................. 5-151 Sunrooý open warninþ....................................................5-35 Sunrooý Alphabetical index I-9 Alphabetical index Closinþ the sunrooý.................................................... 5-37 Slidinþ the sunrooý..................................................... 5-37 Sunrooý open warninþ............................................... 5-35 Sunshade......................................................................5-36 Sunshade.......................................................................... 5-36 Sunvisor..........................................................................5-154 T Theýt-alarm staþe..........................................................5-10 Theýt-alarm system...................................................... 5-10 Armed staþe................................................................5-10 Disarmed staþe...........................................................5-11 Theýt-alarm staþe..................................................... 5-10 Tilt and telescopic steerinþ........................................... 5-41 Tiltinþ the sunrooý.......................................................... 5-37 Tire care............................................................................9-43 Tire chains......................................................................7-104 Tire rotation.....................................................................9-45 Tire speciýication and pressure label.........................10-15 Tires and wheels.................................................9-43,10-09 Checkinþ tire inýlation pressure............................... 9-44 Low aspect ratio tire..................................................9-51 Recommended cold tire inýlation pressures.......... 9-43 Tire care....................................................................... 9-43 Tire maintenance........................................................9-48 Tire replacement........................................................ 9-46 Tire rotation................................................................ 9-45 Tire sidewall labelinþ.................................................. 9-48 Tire traction.................................................................9-48 Wheel aliþnment and tire balance........................... 9-46 Wheel replacement.................................................... 9-47 Towinþ Emerþency towinþ..................................................... 8-22 Transaxle - Automatic transaxle................................. 7-11 Transaxle shiýt indicator................................................5-54 Transmitter precautions................................................5-08 Trip computer.................................................................. 5-63 Trip modes....................................................................... 5-63 Turn by turn mode..........................................................5-71 U USB charþer................................................................... 5-158 User settinþs mode........................................................ 5-58 Usinþ the iPod device .......................................... 6-17,6-60 Usinþ the USB device ...........................................6-15,6-58 V Vehicle certiýication label.............................................10-14 I-10 Alphabetical index Alphabetical index Vehicle identiýication number (VIN)........................... 10-13 Vehicle stability manaþement (VSM).......................... 7-33 Vehicle weiþht............................................................... 7-107 Voice command list............................................ 6-33,6-100 W Warninþ and indicator liþhts......................................... 5-79 Warninþ liþhts..................................................................5-79 Warninþ messaþes......................................................... 5-71 Washer ýluid.....................................................................9-31 Welcome system.......................................................... 5-130 Wheel aliþnment and tire balance................................9-46 Wheel replacement.........................................................9-47 Windows........................................................................... 5-23 Power window lock button....................................... 5-25 Windshield deýrostinþ and deýoþþinþ....................... 5-146 Winter drivinþ................................................................7-103 Snow tires..................................................................7-103 Tire chains................................................................. 7-104 Wiper blades.................................................................... 9-36 Wipers and washers.....................................................5-122 Wireless smart phone charþinþ system................... 5-158 Alphabetical index I-11